Profimess Catalogue 2008

PROFI
MESS
Instrumentation and Control
GMBH
C O M P L E T E C ATA L O G U E
Level
Pressure
Via these buttons you

will be forwarded directly
to the demanded issue.
Flow
Temperature
Accessories
PROFIMESS GmbH
Twischlehe 5
D-27580 Bremerhaven
Germany
Tel.: +49 (0471) 98 24 -151
Fax: +49 (0471) 98 24 -152
E-Mail: info@profimess.de
www.profimess.de
Terms & Conditions
of Delivery & Payment
PROFI
MESS
Contents
GMBH
Level Measuring and Monitoring
Startpage
FR-02
Pulse Radar Level Meter

in 2-wire Technology
FER
Electrode Relays for

Conductive Level Switch
LS-10
Float Switch for

Vertical Mounting
NIVOSTAR
Ultrasonic
Level Measurement
ER-01
Conductive Electrode Relay
LS-11
Angular Float Switch

for Side Mounting
SE-01
Ultrasonic Sensors
KS-01
LS-14
Miniature Plastic Float Switch

for Side Mounting
ECHO
The Level Sensor
KS-02
LS-15
FU-01
Ultrasonic Level Limit Switch
KS-03
Conductive
Compact Level Switch
LS-15 P
Miniature Float Switch

for Side Mounting made
of Stainless Steel
for Side Mounting, Plug Version
FU-02
Ultrasonic Level Switch

through the Container Wall
KS-04

with Integrated Relay
LS-20
Bypass Float Switch
FM-01
Magnetostrictive Level Sensor
FC-01
FV-02
Miniature Tuning Fork

Limit Switch
FM-02
Level Measuring Transmitter

for Continual Level Recording
FS-01
Limit Level Switch for Bulk

Goods, Fluids, Slurries,
Interface and Foam Detection
Cable Float Switch
FD-02
Pressure Bell Switch
MA-98
Magnetic Level Gauge
FS-01EX
Cable Float Switch with

ATEX-Approval
DF-02
Rotating Vane Level Switch

for Industrial Applications
FD-01
Top Mounted Hydrostatic

Level Measurement
FS-02
Float Switch for Raw

Industrial Applications
MS-04
Membrane Level Switch

for Bulk Goods
FD-03
Side Mounted Hydrostatic

Level Measurement
FS-03
Low-Cost Float Switch
FO-01
Optoelectronic Level Switch
FS-04
Float Switch for Horizontal

or Vertical Mounting
FO-02
Optoelectronic Compact
Level Switch
FS-05
Float Switch for Mounting

through 1" Bushings
FS-10
Float Switch for Bulk Goods
PROFI
MESS
Contents
GMBH
Pressure Measurement and Monitoring
Startpage
HP-30
Pneumatic Manual Testing Pump

for Pressure Device Calibration
PS-00
Low-Cost Pressure Switch
PS-04
Electronic Dualpressure Switch
PM-63
Bourdon Pressure Gauge 2.5
PS-01
Diaphragm Piston
Pressure Switch
PAMU
Chemical Pressure Gauge

with Integrated Pressure
Measuring Transmitter
PM-100
Bourdon Pressure Gauge 4
PS-02N
Compact Pressure Switch
PU-01
Pressure Transmitter
for OEM Applications
KM-100
Contact-Type
Bourdon Pressure Gauge
PS-03

with Preset Setpoint
PU-02
Pressure Measuring
Transmitter for General
PMKF
Capsule Element Pressure Gauge
PDC-1
Pressure Switch for

Non-Hostile Fluid and
Gaseous Media
PU-03
High-Precision Pressure
Measuring Transmitter in
Stainless Steel
PMPF
Diaphragm Pressure Gauge
PDC-2
Vacuum Switch
PD-02
Differential Pressure Transmitter

for Fluids and Gases
PM-2000
Magnehelic Differential
Pressure Indicator for Gases
PDC-3
Differential Pressure Switch
AZ-01N
Attachable Display for Pressure

and Temperature Transmitters
DM-400
Digital Manometer with

integrated Bargraph Display
PDC-4
Pressure Switch with Stainless

Steel Sensor System
PU-10
Process Pressure
with Display
PROFI
MESS
Contents
GMBH
Flow Measurement and Monitoring

Flow Indicator with and
without Rotor, with Wipers
for Self-Cleaning
Sight Flow Indicators
SM-05
Miniature Plastic
Variable Area Flowmeter
SM-16
SM-10
SI-01
SM-12
SI-02
Electromagnetic Flowmeter
for General Applications
SM-15
Plastic Flowmeters as per

the Variable Area Principle
MU-5000
SP-01
Sight Flow Indicator with

Female Thread in Gray Cast Iron,
Steel Casting or Stainless Steel
Sight Flow Indicator with Flange
Connection in Gray Cast Iron,
Vane-operated Flow Switch
with and without T-piece

with Sight Glass for Small Flow
Volumes
Conical Glass Flowmeter as
per the Variable Area Principle
Turbine Flowmeter for Fluid

Media without Auxiliary Power
Supply
for Water Applications
SM-20
VM-01
SP-04
Digital Flowmeter with

Way-Deflection-System
SM-25
SD-01
DP-10
Vane-oparated Flow Switch

with Micro-Switch
DT-01

for Small Flow Volumes in
Compact Design
Variable Area Flowmeter with
Flange Connection, Irrespective
of Viscosity
Calorimetric Flow Sensor
Measuring Transmitter for

Electromagnetic Flowmeters
SI-01 and SI-02
Gear-Wheel Volume Sensor
for Viscous Fluids, for
OEM Applications
Plug-In Display for
Gear-Wheel Sensors
VM-04
High-Precision Gear-Wheel
Volume Sensor for Viscous Fluids
DP-20 /-30
Vane-oparated Flow Switches

for Liquids and Gases
DT-02

as Separate Unit
VS-01
Aluminium Screw-Spindle
Volume Meter for Viscous Media
SW-01
Miniature Variable
Area Flowmeter
DT-03
VZ-01
Oil Counter
SW-02
Miniature Variable
Area Flowswitch
DT-03N
GM-01
Thermal Mass Flowmeter

for Gases
SW-03

and Switch
SM-00

in Compact Design with
Optional Analogue Output
Calorimetric Flowmeter and
Flowswitch for very small
Flow Volumes
Impeller Flowmeter for
Small Volumes of Fluid
GM-10
Thermal Mass Flowmeter for

Gases without Auxiliary Power
SW-04

and Switch
SM-04
Impeller Flowmeter, Switch and

Indicator in Modular Design
GR-01

and Controller for Gases
SW-05

and Switch, for any Mounting
Position
and Switch, for any Mounting
Position
and Switch for Viscous Media
SD-04
Impeller Flowmeter with

Dosing or Switching Electronics
GR-02
Digital Thermal Mass Flowmeter

SU-01
Ultrasonic Flowmeter
and Switch
GS-01
Compressed Air Counter with

Switching and Analogue Output
SM-08
Miniature Turbine Flowmeter

for Fluid Media
GM-50
Air Velocity Transmitter
Viscosity-Compensated Variable
Area Flowmeter, independent
of Mounting Position,
High-Pressure Version
SM-11N
Stainless Steel
Turbine Flowmeter
SA-01
DA-01/-02
Startpage
SA-05
SA-06
SW-06
SW-07
SW-08
PROFI
MESS
Contents
GMBH
Temperature Measurement and Monitoring
Startpage
PT-00
Surface
Resistance Thermometer
TD-01
Digitemp Temperature
with Display
TS-01
Temperature Switch
PT-01
Compact
GT-04
Gas Expansion Thermometer

with Nitrogen Filling
TS-02
Stem Thermostat
PT-02
Insertion
BT-01
Bimetallic Thermometer
TS-03
Surface-Mounting
Thermostat with Rigid
or Flexible Connection
PT-03
with Cable Connection
MT-01
Industrial Thermometer
IR-01
Infrared Handheld
Thermometer
PT-05
in wall-mounted Housing
TE-01
Insertion Thermocouple
IR-02
Compact Infrared
Thermometer with
Power Output
PROFI
MESS
Contents
GMBH
Accessories
Startpage
BG-01
Flow Limiter
MV-01
2/2-way Solenoid Valve

for Fluids
TM-01
Digital Display Device

for Impulse Inputs
BG-03
Flow Limiter for Large

Quantities of Flow
KG-01
Ball Valve in Brass

or Stainless Steel
MSRx
Multifunctional Relay
FT-01
Strainer with and without

Magnetic Separator
UM-01
Universal Transmitter for

RTD, TE, Ohm, Potentiometer,
mA and V
NV-01
Needle Valve in Brass,

Steel or Stainless Steel
AZ-02
4-digit Digital Display

96 x 48 mm
FR-02
Pulse Radar
Level Meter in
2-wire Technology
Contents
Startpage
Description: The FR-02 is a level measuring device which

operates according to the principle of Pulse-Radar measuring
circuit. A polypropylene rod antenna screw fixed inside the
process vessel emits cyclically a radar impulse in the direction
of the media surface; subsequently, the electronics measure
the time that is lapsed until the impulse is reflected by the
surface and again received by the antenna. Here since the
radar is concerned with a electromagnetic wave, it propagates, irrespective of the properties of the gaseous phase, over
the fluid always at the same speed, with the result the
distance between the antenna and the fluid can be directly
derived from the measured time span. At the output of the
FR-02 a 4...20mA output in 2-wire circuit is present which
reflects linearly the filling level in the form of distance, emptyor level. If merely a measurement of volume is desired, the
electronics can calculate the volume based on the vessel
form stored in the memory and the measured fill height and
allocate it to the power output. If the available vessels do not
correspond to the standard geometry, the operator can
ascertain the volume by means of base programming.
Operating range up to 20m
Range of application: The FR-02 is used as a radar-based

level meter wherever the ultrasonic method of measuring has
its limitations. In this, since electromagnetic and not sound
waves are transmitted, temperature, pressure and material
properties of the gaseous phase above the fluids being measured are hardly significant in regard to the quality of measurement. Besides, the signal quality is completely unaffected
by dust and any foam layer on the surface can be easily circumvented without significantly attenuating the radar signal.
In the case of fluids with a dielectric constant greater than
r = 3, operating ranges up to 20 meters can be tapped
where the vessel in its standard version may indicate up to 3
bar pressure and up to 80C temperature. For applications
with higher requirements of pressure and temperature, optionally, versions with flange connection and resistant sealing
material are available. Often, also measuring operations need
to be executed in narrow flushing tubes or reference vessels;
for this the FR-02 can be supplied as a customized version
with a 80 mm strong horned antenna and DN80 stainless
steel flange. If the vessels are small, or contain outgasing
fluids or slurries or surfaces with dust or foam layers, the
FR-02 pulse radar level meter presents the ideal solution.
Programmable with hand-held

programmer
Simple installation and commissioning
For vaporizing and outgasing fluids
2008
Automatic fade-out for agitator or clutter
www.profimess.de
Twischlehe 5 D-27580 Bremerhaven Tel.: +49 (0471) 98 24 -151 Fax: +49 (0471) 98 24 -152 E-Mail: info@profimess.de
F1
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
Technical specifications:
Process connection: For the connection to the vessel a

G11/2"-male or a 11/2"-NPT-male can be selected. Also flange connections or sanitary couplings are available on
request..
Measuring principle:
Housing material: The standard version of FR-02 has a plastic housing of PBT with a PEI lid. Optionally, a larger housing
made of aluminium pressure casting is available. The ATEX
approval "compression-proof capsule" is required for this type
of metal housing.
Cable insertion: As a standard the housing is provided with

insertion openings for cable glands in M 20 x 1.5 or 1/2"NPT. Normally, two such thread holes are available.
Explosion protection: The FR-02 can be provided with two
different approvals for deployment in hazardous areas. In the
intrinsically safe variant EEx ia IIC T4 the FR-02 is fully permitted to be installed in Zone 0, however, for the power supply a
current repeater will be necessary.
In the compression-proof capsule version the inside of a vessel can be constructed as Zone 0 and the outside where the
housing of FR-02 is located should be declared as Zone 1 or
Zone 2
0.3...20 m
Accuracy:
+/- higher of 0.1 % of

operating range or 10 mm
Temperature effect:
0.006% / K
Repeatability:
+/- 5 mm
Ordering codes:
Startpage
-40C...+80C
Temperature
in the vessel:
-40C...+80C
Pressure in the
vessel:
3 bar max.
Installation category:
Degree of pollution:
Dielectric
constant r:
r > 3
(or horned antenna on request)

polypropylene hermetically sealed
(PTFE on request)
Housing:
PBT with PEI lid or aluminium,

polyester powder-coated
(mandatory for protection type
"compression-proof capsule")
Process connection:
G 11/2"-male or 11/2"-NPT-male
Weight:
< 2 kg
Electrical specifications:
Process connection:
1 = G1 1/2"-male with PP rod antenna
2 = 1 1/2"NPT-male with PP rod antenna
Housing:
1 = plastic
2 = aluminium pressure casting
Antenna shielding:
1 = 100 mm (standard)
2 = 250 mm
Supply voltage:
24 VDC (max. 30 VDC)
Load:
550 W max. for normal or intrinsically safe version, 250 W max. for
compression-proof version
Cable insertion:
2 x M 20 x 1.5 or 2 x 1/2"-NPT
Output:
4...20 mA, 2-wire
Measuring span:
proportional or
inversely proportional
Communication:
HART (HART is a trademark of

HART Communications Foundation)
Failsafe:
programmable on MAX, MIN or

HALT (echo loss)
multi-segment, alphanumeric LC
display, with bar graph for level
Display:
Cable insertion:
1 = 2 x 1/2"-NPT
2 = 2 x M20 x 1.5
Protection class:
Explosion protection:
0 = none
1 = with EX approval ATEX II 1G EEx ia IIC T4, intrinsically safe
2 = with EX approval ATEX II 1/2 G EEx dm ia IIC T4, compression-proof,
with Al housing only
Protection class
for Ex version:
Power circuit in
intrinsically safe
version:
Hand-held programming device:

0 = none
1 = with hand-held programming device (intrinsically safe for Ex versions)
IP67 (IP68 on request)
ATEX II 1 G EEx ia IIC T4 or

ATEX II 1/2 G EEx dm ia IIC T4
Ui = 30 VDC, Ii = 120 mA,

Pi = 0.8 W, Ci = 3.6 nF, Li = 0.1 nH
www.profimess.de
F2
2008
FR-02. 1. 1. 1. 2. 0. 1
Pulse Radar Level Meter

in 2-wire Technology
GMBH
Contents
0.3 m (from reference point

plus length of shield)
Ambient
temperature:
Material
wet side:
Hand-held programming device: The FR-02 is completely

programmable by means of a hand-held programming device. If the FR-02 is delivered as an EX device, the hand-held
programming device can be used even in EX area Zone 0.
PROFI
MESS
Operating range:
Fade-out
distance:
Antenna shielding: As the screw in bushing may, under circumstances, negatively affect the emitted radio signal, the
upper part of the rod antenna is shielded. The standard
length of this shielding is 100 mm, for longer muffs also 250
mm can be selected.
Ordering number:
Puls-Radar
Measuring frequency: 5.8 GHz
Hand-held programming device:
Contents
Options:
Approval for
Ex version:
ATEX II 1G EEx ia IIC T4
Ambient
temperature:
-20C ... +40C
Weight:
150 g
Supply:
3 Volt lithium battery
Profibus PA Communication, flange

connection, high pressure and
temperature ranges
Startpage
Dimensions
1/2" NPT cable insertion

(or optionally M20x1.5 supplied with 1 plastic strain relief)
cap
cap screws
139 mm
(5.5)
129 mm
(5.1)
housing/
electronics
134 mm
(5.3)
stan.: 273 mm (10.8) min.

op.: 423 mm (16.7) max.
103.5 mm
(4)
hexagonal ring
threads for assembling
11/4 NPT, BSP,
G BS EN ISO 228-1
23 mm (0.9)
length of shield (inside)

standard: 100 mm (4)
optional: 250 mm (10)
standard: 552 mm (21.7) min.

option: 702 mm (27.6) max.
polypropylene
rod antenna
Electrical connection
Wire connection as
shown in the diagram:
The polarity is indicated
on the terminals.
Tips
- As per IEC -1010-1 Appendix H DC terminals must receive supply
from a protected low voltage source (SELV).
- All field connections must be insulated according to the connected
input voltage.
- Use shielded cable with drilled pair of wires
(wire gauge 0.34 to 2.08 mm2 / 14-22 AWG).
- A separate cable layout may be necessary to meet the standard
requirements for the connection or the electrical directives.
strain relief
(or NPT cable insertion)
2008
standard 115 mm (4.5)

[optional 268 mm (10.5)]
www.profimess.de
F3
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Assembly
Assembly on bypass tube

at least 300 mm (1 ft) every
3 m (10 ft) vessel height
front or rear side of

device at 90 angle
for ventilation
Assembly on measuring tube
optimum
diameter
80 mm (3")
Contents
align front or back
side of the device
at 90 to the slits of
flush tube.
Startpage
Radar beam 20
Assembly on vessel
Assembly on manhole
Assembly on supports
flat
conical
parabolic
min. 10 mm (0.4)
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F4
2008
min.
100 mm (4)
NIVOSTAR
Ultrasonic
Level Measurement
Contents
Startpage
Description:
The SE-01.x sensor necessary for operating Nivostar transmits ultrasonic impulses from its front surface which are
reflected on the media surface and again received by it. As
the signals continue to run, a 32 bit microprocessor computes in combination with a high-performance, self-learning
Echo-Analysis software program the proportional level, the
distance, the volume or, if 2 sensors are used, the difference.
If Nivostar is used for measuring flow in an open gutter, the
electronics output the parameters of flow and quantity.
Basically, Nivostar can be operated extremely easily from a
menu-driven illuminated display where the inputs required to
be entered by the user are kept to a minimum. Optionally,
the device can be supplied in a field housing or in a 19"
slide-in version. Alternatively or in addition to the ultrasonic
sensor, a hydrostatic level meter, such as the FD-01 or the
FD-03, can be connected through a 2-wire input so as to
monitor crucial measurements with it at a degree of certainty
that has not been achieved so far.
Fluids and bulk goods

Up to 60 m
Up to 5 relay outputs
Pump management
Menu-driven operation
2008
Range of application:
Wherever levels for bulk goods and fluids need to be measured without contact, Nivostar is the ideal universal device for
the task. You can not only measure and control with it but
also control pumps or tap flow in open gutters. The constructional designs of commonly used vessels and standard
gutters are stored in the device's memory which can be utilized by entering the vessel type for the purpose of converting
the measured level directly into volume or volume current.
Linearization characteristics not stored can be freely programmed for that purpose. Where till now you had to use
different devices for different tasks of measuring, Nivostar
completely takes on these tasks. Thus, cost of storage and
commissioning can be perceptibly brought down and you
can save time and money and on personnel.
www.profimess.de
F5
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Nivostar.H:
Versions:
Nivostar.A:
3 relay outputs, 1 0/4-20 mA

output, for 1 sensor
output, for 2 sensors
5 relay outputs, 1 4-20 mA
input, 1 0/4-20 mA output,
for 1 sensor
for 2 sensors
Nivostar.B:
Nivostar.C:
Nivostar.D:
Nivostar.E:
Nivostar.F:
Nivostar.G:
Nivostar.I:
Nivostar.J:
Housing
Nivostar.A-H:
Housing
Nivostar.I-J:
Language:
First Sensor:
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
NIVOSTAR. B. 1. 1. 2. 3.
NIVOSTAR Ultrasonic
Level Measurement

for 1 sensor
Are available in IP65, in 19" slider, in
front board- including 19" or built in
front board with keyboard and large
display.
Contents
Startpage
Are available in IP65, in 19" slider or

built in front board including 19" slider
housing.
For menu navigation German, English
or French can be selected.
Nivostar.A-C, Nivostar.E and
Nivostar.H-I require a sensor of SE-01
series. Normally, this is provided with a
5 meter cable and 1"- or 11/2" thread.
Flange connection and other cable
lengths are available on request.
Second Sensor: Nivostar.D, G and J require a second

sensor of SE-01 series.
Type:
A = 3 relays, no power input, 1 power output, for 1 sensor
Operating mode: Level, Tendency, Flow, Pump control
B = 3 relays, no power input, 1 power output, for 1 sensor
Operating mode: Level, Volume computing for vessels
C = 5 relays, no power input, 1 power output, for 1 sensor
D = 5 relays, no power input, 1 power output, for 2 sensors
Operating mode: Level, Tendency, extended pump function,
Difference, Mean value
E = 5 relays, no power input, 1 power output, for 1 sensor
Operating mode: Level, Tendency, Volume computing for vessels
F = 5 relays, 1 power input, 1 power output, for 1 sensor
G = 5 relays, 1 power input, 1 power output, for 2 sensors
Operating mode: Level, Tendency, extended pump function,
Difference, Mean value
H = 5 relays, 1 power input, 1 power output, for 1 sensor
Operating mode: Level, Tendency, Volume computing for vessels
I = 5 relays, no power input, 2 power outputs, for 1 sensor
Operating mode: Level, Tendency, Flow in weirs/gutters
J = 5 relays, no power input, 2 power outputs, for 2 sensors
Operating mode: Level, Tendency, Difference
Supply voltage: 115/230 V AC + 5% - 10% and 18V
DC to 36 VDC
Power:
10 VA max.
mA-Output:
galvanic separation, 0/4 to 20 mA
Load:
500 Ohm
Relay:
3 or 5 potential-free contacts,
5 A for 230 V AC, ohmic
mA-Input:
galvanic separation,
4 for 20 mA with sensor feeding
Protection
class:
field housing IP 65, 19" version IP00
Language / Menu navigation:

1 = German
2 = English
3 = French
First sensor:
1 = SE-01.1.1
2 = SE-01.2.1
3 = SE-01.3.1
4 = SE-01.4.1
for
for
for
for
Programming:
max. operating
temperature:
Housing:
Sensor:
Weight:
Accuracy:
0.125 m to 3 m
0.3 m to 6 m
0.3 m to 10 m
0.5 m to 15 m
Second sensor for Nivostar.D, G or J:

1 = SE-01.1.1 for 0.125 m to 3 m
2 = SE-01.2.1 for 0.3 m to 6 m
3 = SE-01.3.1 for 0.3 m to 10 m
4 = SE-01.4.1 for 0.5 m to 15 m
PROFI
MESS
Resolution:
0.125 m to 15 m, depending on sensor

Level, Tendency, Flow, Volume,
Difference, Pump controlling
through keyboard, PC (RS232C) or
hand-held programming device
-20C to 60C
polycarbonate
all sensors of Profimess SE-01 Series
1 kg
0.25 % of set operating range,
min. +/- 2 mm
0.1% of set measuring span or
max. 2 mm
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F6
2008
Operating
range:
Operating
modes:
Housing:
1 = IP65 housing with keyboard (Type A-J)
2 = 19" slider housing no keyboard (Type A-J)
3 = front board housing including 19" slider (Type A-J)
4 = built-in front board with keyboard and large display (Type A-H)
SE-01
Ultrasonic Sensors
Contents
Startpage
Powerful performance
Description:
In a fade-out of only 0.125 m the SE-01 series of sensors
combines the latest technology with the optimum of measuring characteristics. Piezo-crystals in the sensor are electrically incited to transmit ultrasonic impulses. Reflected by the
object being measured, these impulses again reach the sensor within a short time and are subsequently processed by
the evaluating unit Nivostar for their runtime. The SE-01 sensors are well-suited for a number of applications and operating ranges due to their heavily bundled sound beam. Even
narrow vessels no longer pose a problem. Clutter from inbuilt
components play only a subordinate role and does not need
to be faded out. The sensors are available with a 1", a 11/2"
thread or with a flange connection as per DIN, thus allowing
convenient assembly
Narrow sound beam

IP68
Clutter resistant
2008
Wherever measuring without contact is required, the
Profimess' ultrasonic sensors of the SE-01 series can be
used without a problem. Irrespective of whether it is measurement of level, distance, free space, volume, difference or
quantity or, optimum pump controlling for up to 5 units is
required, Nivostar is unbeatable in executing these tasks.
Due to its high standard of protection of IP68 innumerable
applications can be envisaged, especially in the rough area
of effluents.
www.profimess.de
F7
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
SE-01.1 - operating range 0.125 m to 3 m
Operating
range:
0.125 m to 15 m, higher operating ranges

on request

Frequency:

higher operating ranges on request
Cable length:
Transmitting
surface:
21 - 50 kHz
Sound exiting
cone:
Normally, 5 m, 10 m or 30 m cable length

to be provided. For other lengths, see
pricelist.
Contents
SE-01.1, SE-01.2 and SE-01.3 = 10

SE-01.4 = 5
Startpage
max. operating
pressure:
8 bar
For heavily dusty bulk goods, the sensor

can be provided with foam-rubber padding.
max. operating
temperature:
-40C to +100C
Teflon transmitting surface +70C
Material:
Valox 357
Connection:
SE-01.1, SE-01.2 and SE-01.3 = G1A

SE-01.4 = G11/2A
Cable length:
5 m, 10 m or 30 m
Protection
class:
IP68
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
SE-01. 3. 3. 2.
SE-01 Ultrasonic Sensor
Operating range:
1 = 0.125 m to 3 m
2 = 0.3 m to 6 m
3 = 0.3 m to 10 m
4 = 0.5 m to 15 m
Options:
flanged sensors as per DIN DN80,

DN100, DN150
sensors with flooding detection
Cable length:
1 = with 5 m cable
2 = with 10 m cable
3 = with 30 m cable
Transmitting surface:
1 = standard
2 = with foam-rubber transmitting surface
PROFI
MESS
D
86
86
86
86
H
107
107
107
122
h
31.5
31.5
31.5
31.5
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F8
2008
Type
SE-01.1
SE-01.2
SE-01.3
SE-01.4
ECHO
The Level Sensor
Contents
Startpage
Description
ECHO type ultrasonic level sensors are used when fluids and
bulk goods need to be measured continually.
The sensor works according to the principle of runtime
method. It emits ultrasonic signals and subsequently measures the time elapsed until it receives again the echo reflected
by the media surface. The echo runtime is proportional to the
distance between the sensor and the medium and, therefore,
up to the level. Temperature influences are automatically
compensated and clutter signals caused by agitators in the
tank can be filtered out up to a certain degree. The device is
supplied as a compact unit in a water-proof plastic housing.
A display unit, the connecting terminal and 2 programming
keys are located below a cover flap.
Contactless measurement
No mechanical parts
Maintenance and wear-free
Simple installation
Easy calibration
Range of application
Ultrasonic level sensors are used wherever soiling and conditions of coldness, heat and humidity pose a problem to conventional measuring systems. By deploying ECHO, already
occupied and soiled probes, hardened membranes, clogged
floaters, leaking bubbling-through measuring systems and
continual readjustments are a thing of the past.
2008
Temperature-compensated
www.profimess.de
F9
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
ECHO The Level Sensor
max. pressure:
1 bar
Material: As process connection material Tefzel or KynarFlex are available.
max. temperature:
-20C to +60C,
max. 110C for 30 min.
Process connection: The connecting thread can be provided with 2"-BSP or -NPT. Optionally, a sanitary flange in
Tefzel is available.
Operating range:
0.25 m to 5 m
Operating span:
10 mm to 4750 mm;
10 mm to 7750 mm
Operating range: With regard to operating ranges 2 devices with different sonic efficiencies can be selected. The
device with a lower performance covers a range up to 5 m
and the other a range up to 8 m. (Range 8 m only on
request.)
Display:
3-digit LCD display
Memory:
failsafe EEPROM
Weight:
1.5 kg
Accuracy:
+/- 0.25% of operating range in

air
Supply: Besides the standard version as 4... 20mA, 3-wire

an intrinsically safe 2-wire variant is available for Ex applications. Also for non-Ex applications the 2-wire connection can
be supplied.
Contents
Startpage
76
Location for
installation
The Echo must be installed in such a way to allow
the sound without
obstructions to reach at
right angle to the surface
of the medium. In any
case, there must be a
clearance of 250mm between the lower edge of
the sensor and maximum
expected level.
286
Distance must be maintained from obstructing

structures like wires,
tubes, strutting and strong
welding seams.
10
74
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
ECHO. 1. 1. 1. 1.
Supply voltage:
18 - 30 VDC, optimal to 24 VDC
Consumption:
max. 5 W, 200 mA to 24 VDC
ECHO The Level Sensor
Output signal:
4-20 mA
Material:
1 = Tefzel (ETFE)
2 = Kynar-Flex (PVDF)
Function of contacts:
NC-contact for loss of echo,

outage and errors (only for 3-wire)
Load:
750 Ohm for 24 VDC
Process connection:
1 = 2" NPT
2 = 2" BSP
3 = Tri-clamp, sanitary version (for Tefzel only)
Electrical connection:
teminal block
Protection class:
IP 65
Operating range:
1 = 0.25 m to 5 m
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 10
2008
Supply:
1 = 18 to 30 V DC, 3-wire
3 = 18 to 28 V DC, 2-wire
4 = 18 to 28 V DC, 2-wire intrinsically safe
FU-01
Ultrasonic
Level Limit Switch
Contents
Startpage
Description:
The FU-01 is a level switch that works without contact. The
sensor and evaluating electronic components are located in
a housing. Continually emitted ultrasonic signals strike the
surface of the measuring medium, are reflected by it and
again received as echo. The signal runtime is measured and
interpreted as the distance. The device has two setpoints
which can be programmed as alarm functions (e.g.
Max/Max, Max/Min or Min/Min). As a standard, these outputs are designed as potential-free relay contacts. However,
optionally, they can be supplied in transistor version.
Complete parameterizing for the FU-01 is operator-friendly as
only two keys need to be operated. Current measurement
and operating status are displayed on an LCD display unit.
Contactless
Bulk goods and fluids
Simple commissioning
2 relay contacts
2008
The FU-01 series of ultrasonic level switches is used wherever contactless measuring is advantageous. Typical applications are, for example, in water and effluent management, for
bulk goods or in sewage treatment plants. As far as level
monitoring is concerned, problems caused by soiling, blockages or corrosion are now a thing of the past.
www.profimess.de
F 11
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
FU-01 Ultrasonic Level Limit Switch
Display:
Operation:
Protection
class:
Material: As process connection material Tefzel or KynarFlex are available.

Process connection: The connecting thread can be supplied as 2"-BSP or -NPT. Optionally, also a 4"-Tri-clamp
connection in Tefzel is available. For flange assembly , the
flange must be precisely defined. The minimum size is DN80.
3-digit LCD
2 keys
Contents
IP67
max. pressure: 0.5 bar
max. operating
temperature:
-40C to +60C
Operating
range:
0.25 m to 3 m for buld goods,
0.25 m to 5 m for fluids
and slurries
Operating
modes:
Max, Min, Max/Max, Max/Min and Min/Min
Housing:
polycarbonate or Al pressure housing
Sensor:
Kynar (PVDF)
Weight:
1.6 kg (polycarbonate),
2.3 kg (Al pressure casting)
Accuracy:
0.25% of the operating range
Resolution:
3 mm
Housing: As a standard a polycarbonate housing is available. Also an aluminium housing in compression-proof encapsulation is available.
Supply: As supply voltage one of the two versions can be
selected. Version 1 is operated with 24V DC and can be supplied either with two potential-free relay- or two transistor
outputs. The operating voltage of version 2 is 100...230V AC
where the device always has two potential-free relay outputs.
Startpage
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
FU-01. 1. 1. 1. 1.
cap
FU01 Ultrasonic Level Limit Switch
Material:
1 = Tefzel (ETFE)
2 = Kynar-Flex (PVDF)
cable insertion
2 x PG 13.5
(Option: 1/2 NPT)
180
Process connection:
1 = 2" NPT
2 = 2" BSP
3 = 4" Tri-clamp, sanitary version (for Tefzel only)
4 = flange assembly (specify flange in detailed text)
standard thread
2BSP
(Option: 2 NPT
or PF 2)
Housing:
1 = polycarbonate
2 = Al pressure casting
Supply:
1 = 24V DC, with 2 potential-free relay outputs
2 = 24V DC, with 2 transistor outputs
3 = 100 to 230V AC, with 2 potential-free relay outputs
74
74
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 12
2008
57
FU-02
Ultrasonic
Level Switch
Contents
Startpage
Through the vessel wall
Description:
The FU-02 level switch is installed externally on the vessel
that needs to be monitored. The device transmits ultrasonic
waves through the vessel's wall which, in turn, are reflected if
the fluid level is lower than the point of location of the switch
since the transition in the air is a considerable obstruction for
the sound. However, if the level is higher than the FU-02 the
sound waves can pass through the fluid or slurry medium.
Due to the fact that at that point no reflected signal returns,
the switch detects the presence of a medium and connects
a relay output or changes a power signal available at the output.
No media contact
High repeatability
Simple installation
Automatic calibration
The FU-02 series of level switches achieves a repeatability of

+/- 1 mm of the setpoints point in the vessel's wall-thickness
range between 1.5 mm and 40 mm. A prerequisite for faultless operation are metallic or glass vessels that have no inner
corrosion and a diameter larger than 400 mm. In smaller vessels the ultrasonic signal would be reflected by the facing
wall. It must be ensured that between the sensor and the
medium there are no air locks like in the case of varnish to
prevent the ultrasonic signal being deflected by them.
2008
If highly hostile, viscous or sticky media need to be monitored, the FU-02 offers the ideal solution. Due to the fact that it
is mounted externally on the vessel wall, there is no contact
with the media and there is no need of modifications to the
tank. The device is calibrated by means of a press button by
means of which the status of two LEDs is displayed. A unique automatic calibration system monitors the system status
and the reliability of the installation if necessary. The durable
stainless steel body in IP68 is conceived for harsh industrial
conditions and offers maximum protection against blows,
shocks and vibrations.
www.profimess.de
F 13
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
FU-02 Ultrasonic Level Switch
max. operating temp.:
-40C to +100C
Output:
The FU-02.1 provides a relay output 1 A potential-free,
max. 30 V DC.
Housing:
stainless steel SS 316
Repeatability:
+/- 1 mm
Reaction time:
min. 1 s
Delay time:
1 s to 255 s, adjustable
Weight:
1 kg
Dimensions:
118 mm x 70 mm x 65 mm
(L x H x B)
Media viscosity:
max. 100 cP
Vessel
wall-thickness:
1.5 mm to 40 mm
Vessel material:
metal or glass
Vessel size:
min. 400 mm
The FU-02.2 provides a 2-wire-4..20 mA output whose

value falls in setpoint.
Fixture:
The device is installed by means of a plastic tape around
the vessel (standard) or by means of an aluminium plate
with fixing screws. For connecting the switch acoustically
to the vessel silicon gel must be placed between the sensor
and the tank. For this purpose, we recommend the brand
Dow Corning DC-4 or similar.
Supply voltage:
18 VDC to 36 VDC
cable insertion M 20x1.5
Protection class:
IP68
Contents
Startpage
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
FU-02. 1. 1.
FU-02 Ultrasonic Level Switch

Output:
1 = relay output
2 = power output
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 14
2008
Fixture:
1 = plastic tape (standard)
2 = aluminium fixing plate
FM-01
Magnetostrictive
Level Sensor
Contents
Startpage
Description:
A floater carrying a permanent magnet moves along a slider
tube carried by the fluid level up and down. A magnetorestrictive wire is built into this tube through which the electronic components transmit short current impulses that are surrounded by a ring-shaped magnetic field. When this field strikes the static magnetic field of the floater magnet, it results
into a torsion impulse that travels in the direction of the sensor head at ultrasonic speed and gets recognized. The time
between transmission of current and arrival of the impulse is
directly proportional to the distance of the floater which is,
therefore, the level. This is measured and converted into a 420 mA power signal and is available at the output of the
device.
Highly accurate measuring

High resolution < 0.1 mm
Wear-resistant
Maintenance-free
The sensor is used where small to medium levels of even
hostile media are measured. The magnetostrictive principle of
measurement guarantees maximum accuracy and excellent
strength due to its hermetically sealed stainless steel construction.
The user can obtain output signal either proportionally to the
level or to empty level. These properties qualify the FM-01
especially for use in the chemical and pharmaceutical industries, in biotechnical installations and in cellulose, paper and
food-processing industries since the sensor can be supplied
with approval for Ex-Zone 0.
Linear
2008
Insensitive to vibrations
www.profimess.de
F 15
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
57
FM-01 Magnetostrictive Level Sensor
M16 x 1,5
Type: Optionally, the device can be supplied with the

ZELM03 ATEX0132 approval for Ex zone 0 with intrinsically
safe signal circuit EEx ia IIC T5/T4.
Contents
Sphere
Dimensions
Cylinder
>= 0.75
PN 16
stainless steel 1.4571 43 x 43 x 15.5
Sphere
>= 0.65
PN 25
stainless steel 1.4571 52 x 52 x 15.5
Cylinder
>= 0.5
PN 64
3.7025/35
Startpage
stainless steel 1.4571 52 x 52 x 15
HEX27
SW27
MAX
156 x 56 x 16
G1/2A
Probe length: The measuring length ML can be freely selected up to between 200 mm and 6000 mm. If only one section
of the measuring length is intended to be placed on the 4-20
mA output, zero and end point of this range must be specified measured as length in mm from the lower end of the
probe (see drawing).
float
Schwimmer
Output signal: The 4-20 mA output is proportional to level

or to empty level, as the case may be.
Sensorlnge
sensor
lengthSL
SL
max.
max.5900
5900
Material
>= 0.8
Nominal
pressure
PN 40
measuring
length
ML ML
Melnge
=200...6000
=200...6000
Density
18
18
Form
200
Floater: Depending on media density and floater shape

as per the following table:
MIN
MIN
Anschlag
stopper
40
Supply voltage: 11.5 to 30 VDC
2-wire:
4 to 20 mA
Load:
R = (Us 11.5 V) / 0.02 A
12 dimensions in mm
Mae in mm
+
Cable gland M 16x1.5, for Ex in blue
Connection
cross-section:
max. 1.5 mm2
Cable length:
max. 2000 m for 0.5 mm2
Connection
diagram
Protection class
as per
EN 60529:
IP 65
Approvals:
U i, I i, P i, L i, C i:
+24 V
4 ... 20 mA
Ex conformity certification
ATEX II 1/2G T4
30 V, 100 mA, 1 W, < 0.3 mH, < 10 nF
0V
max. pressure: see floater table
max. media
temp.:
Ordering codes:
max. ambient
temp.:
Ordering number: FM-01. 1. 1. 0400. 0070 - 0470. 2.

FM-01 Magnetostrictive
Level Sensor
-60C to +180C
-45C to +85C, standard
-25C to +45/60/85C, EEx ia IIC T6/T5/T4
max. storage
temp.:
-45C to +85C
Housing:
stainless steel 1.4571
Sensor tube:
Weight:
1.5 kg + 5 g / cm
Accuracy:
<= 0.05% of ML or +1.5 mm
Resolution:
< 0.1 mm
Measuring length:
[ ][ ][ ][ ] in mm
Linearity
deviation:
<= 0.08% of ML or +1 mm
Range:
[zero point] - [end point] from end of probe
[ ][ ][ ][ ] - [ ][ ][ ][ ]
Hysteresis:
< 1 mm
Temperature
coefficient:
0.015% of ML/K
Connection
thread:
G1/2A as per DIN 910
Type:
1 = standard
2 = Exia Zone 0
Floater:
1 = floater
2 = floater
3 = floater
4 = floater
for
for
for
for
density
density
density
density
>
>
>
>
0.80
0.75
0.65
0.50
g/cm3
g/cm3
g/cm3
g/cm3
Output signal:
1 = proportional to level
2 = proportional to empty level
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 16
2008
Electrical
connection:
FM-02
Level Measuring Transmitter for
Continual Level Recording
Contents
Startpage
Level measurement irrespective

of foam formation, conductivity,
pressure and temperature
Remote display over extremely
large distances
Simple assembly, only one-time
balancing on commissioning
Separation layer measurement of
fluids of different densities possible
Level recording even in narrow
spaces through semi-flexible measuring
transmitter
Measuring transmitter for foodstuff
applications in 3-A version
Description
The FM-02 series of level measuring transmitters operates
according to the principle of float with magnetic transmission.
The float is raised by increasing fluid level in the vessel; subsequently due to the magnetic field of a permanent magnet located within the float it actuates the contacts of a reed
contact/resistance chain in the sliding tube. The output signal
is a voltage that is proportional to the level.
2008
The FM-02 level measuring transmitters are suited for measuring and monitoring the level of nearly all types of fluid media
that are not hostile to the materials being used in vessels up to
a height of 6 m.
www.profimess.de
F 17
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Function
number of materials, diameters and grid dimensions.

Material and diameters:
Brass ( 12 mm)
Stainless steel ( 12 mm, 14 mm, 18 mm)
PVC ( 16 mm, 20 mm)
PP ( 16 mm, 20 mm)
PVDF ( 16 mm, 20 mm)
Besides, sliding tubes made of PP with 16 mm can be supplied in semi-flexible versions for mounting in narrow spaces.
schwarz
black
braun
brown
blau
blue
A ring magnet mounted inside the float actuates with its

magnetic field passing through the sliding tube's wall tiny reed
contacts which continually
tap the measuring voltage
on a resistance measuring
chain (voltage dividers). This
is proportional to the height
of the level. The resistance
measuring chain is very closely stepped and consists
of small chips that are soldered on a PCB. Due to this
type of construction the
resulting measuring voltage
Chipchip
is almost continual.
housing
gehuse
Depending on the design of
the measuring transmitter
grids (distance from chip to
chip) of 5 to 15 mm are
available.
Grid dimensions:
Depending on the sliding tube diameter, measuring length and
design the following grid dimensions are available:
5 mm, 6.35 mm (1/4"), 10 mm, 12.7 mm (1/2"), 15 mm
Contents
Startpage
Float
Selection of the floats depends on the medium (hostile characteristics and density), the process parameters (pressure and
temperature) and the sliding tube material being used including
the diameters.
The following float types can be used:
Measuring accuracy
Type
Material
Buna
Shape
PVC
e.g.
Cylinder
80
500
55
900
80
750
44
800
16
52
700
40
82
450
11
80
600
12
80
800
10
Versions
700
80
PVDF
2000 mm
stainless steel
1.4571
Every level measuring transmitter consists of following 3 main

component groups which are available in different versions
depending on the technical requirements:
Sphere
100
250
25
Sliding tube
Float
Process connection
A
Secondary instrumentation such as measuring transmitter, limit

value emitter, displays and isolated transmitters (Zener barrier)
complete the entire measuring system.
Sliding tube
The sliding tube is the core of the level measuring transmitter
as it holds the measuring chain and it can be supplied in a
PROFI
MESS
80
3
60
55
PP
x 100 = 0.635%
x 100
Measuring length in mm
max.
temp.
(C)
80
4
5
max.
pressure
(bar)
800
55
12.7 mm
min.
density
(kg/m3)
30
Grid
(mm)
Type
A
(mm)
B
(mm)
C
(mm)
Type
A
(mm)
B
(mm)
C
(mm)
30
45
13
52
52
15
55
54
22
10
82
81
15
80
79
25
11
80
75
23
55
54
22
12
80
73
23
80
79
25
55
69
22
80
79
25
44
52
15
Special type float (Titanium,

ECTFE coated) on request
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 18
2008
internal
circuit diagram
Innenschaltbild
Due to the functioning prinlevel
measurement emitter
Niveau-Mewertgeber
ciple of the level measuring
transmitter the measuring
accuracy cannot be specified as a constant. It rather depends
on the measuring length and the grid measuring chain being
used.
The maximum measuring error can by calculated on the basis
of the following equation
Process connection
20
52
Anschlussplug
dose
socket
SW 27 size 27
wrench
40
40 mm
1"
G 1
M 20PG
x1.5
11
plug
Anschlussgehuse
housing
wrench
SW
30 size 30
55 mm
G 11 1/2"
1/2
16
Startpage
As a standard, level measuring transmitters are mounted using

the male thread (G 3/8, G1/2, G1) on the inside of the vessel
lid. In this case, the devices are supplied with a 3-core connecting cable (PVC or silicon) up to max. 2000 m of length.
If the measuring transmitter needs to be mounted from outside
through the vessel lid, the device must be equipped with a
tank joint (G1, G 1 1/2, G2 male) or with flanges. The tank joint
or flange diameter must allow the float to be inserted through
the opening of the vessel lid. In addition, the material of the
process connection must be compatible with the float or sliding tube material.
77
Contents
11
MPG
20 x1.5
min. size of
tank joint
min. nominal diameter

of flange connection
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
G1
G2
G2
G2
G 1 1/2
G2
-
DN 32
DN 65
DN 80
DN 65
DN 80
DN 65
DN 80
DN 50
DN 65
DN 100
DN 80
DN 80
PGx1.5
11
M 20
Anschlussplug
gehuse
housing
79
float
type
20
wrench
SW
36 size 35
68 mm
G 2"
2
PG
11
M 20
x1.5
77
plug
Anschlussdose
socket
20
wrench
SW
36 size 35
68 mm
G
G 2"
2
11
M 20PG
x1.5
100
Anschlussplug
gehuse
housing
Dimensions of tank joints and

flange connections
plug
Anschlussconnector
stecker
wrench
SW 27 size 27
40 mm
40 mm
G
1
G1"
16
64
Anschlussplug
stecker
connector
wrench
SW 30 size 30
55
55 mm
G 1 1/2
1/2"
67
plug
Anschlussconnector
stecker
2008
20
SW
36 size 35
wrench
66
68 mm
G
G 2"
2
Joint G1,
stainless steel.
with ABS plug
connector as
per DIN 43650
11
M 20PG
x1.5
82
16
I 1...
Montageflansch
assembly
flange
DN50 - DN150
DN
50 - DN 150
plug
Anschlussgehuse
housing
Montageflansch
assembly flange
DN80 od. DN100
Joint G1 1/2,
PP, brass, St.37,
stainless steel
with ABS plug
connector as
per DIN 43650
DN 80 or DN 100
Joint G1,
stainless steel,
with aluminium
junction box
64 x 58 x 34 mm
Joint G1 1/2,
brass, St.37,
stainless steel
with aluminium
junction box
80 x 75 x 57 mm
Joint G2,
brass, St.37,
stainless steel
with aluminium
junction box
80 x 75 x 57 mm
Joint G2,
PVC, PP, PVDF
with polyester
junction box
80 x 75 x 55 mm
Flange connection
DN50-DN 150,
PN6 - PN 64, St.37,
stainless steel,
with aluminium
junction box
80 x 75 x 57 mm
Flange connection
DN80-DN100,
PN10, PVC, PP,
stainless steel
with PTFE sealing
plate, with polyester
junction box
80 x 75 x 55 mm
Connection parameters for measuring transmitter in 3-A version

DIN:
ANSI:
DN 25, DN40, DN50

1, 1 1/2. 2
Joint G2,
PP, brass, St.37,
stainless steel
with ABS plug
connector as
per DIN 43650
www.profimess.de
F 19
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Ordering codes (general)
Ordering codes (Process connections)
Ordering number
Ordering number
FM-02. 1. 1. 1. 01. 1001. 1. 0
Level Measuring Transmitter
Process connection
Sliding tube material:
1 = male thread
1 = brass
2 = tank joint
2 = stainless steel 1.4571
3 = flange connection
Contents
3 = PVC
x = 1: male thread
4 = PP
5 = PP, semi-flexible
001 = G 3/8-male, brass
6 = PVDF
002 = G 3/8-male, stainless steel 1.4571
9 = others
003 = G 1/2-male, stainless steel 1.4571
Startpage
004 = G 1-male, PVC
Sliding tube diameter:
005 = G 1-male, PP
1 = 12 mm
006 = G 1-male, PVDF
2 = 14 mm
999 = others
3 = 16 mm
4 = 18 mm
x = 2: Tank joint
5 = 20 mm
002 = G 1, stainless steel 1.4571
9 = others
003 = G 1 1/2, brass

Grid dimension of resistance measuring chain:
004 = G 1 1/2, steel St.37
1 = 5 mm
005 = G 1 1/2, stainless steel 1.4571
2 = 6.35 mm (1/4") from 14 sliding tube only
007 = G 1 1/2, PP
3 = 10 mm
009 = G 2, brass
4 = 12.7 mm (1/2")
010 = G 2, steel St.37
5 = 15 mm
011 =G 2, stainless steel 1.4571
9 = others
012 = G 2, PVC
013 = G 2, PP
Float type:
014 = G 2, PVDF
01...12 = as per table

"Float designs"
999 = others
x = 3: Flange connection
Process connection:
1001...9999 = as per table
"Process connections"
on this page
Material:
1 = steel St.37
3 = PVC
1 = 1 m PVC cable
4 = PP
2 = 1 m silicon cable
5 = stainless steel with PTFE-sealing plate
3 = plug connector as per DIN 43650
9 = others
5 = polyester junction box, 80 x 75 x 55 mm
Nominal diameter:
6 = aluminium junction box, 64 x 58 x 34 mm
1 = DN50
7 = aluminium junction box, 80 x 75 x 57 mm
2 = DN65
9 = others
3 = DN80
Options:
4 = DN100
Design of resistance measuring chain:
5 = DN125
0 = standard
6 = DN150
1 = high temperature version up to 200 C
9 = others
2 = PT100-2-, -3- or-4-wire
Pressure level:
3 = thermal contact... C NC-contact or NO-contact
1 = PN6
4 = head measuring transmitter 4...20mA, 2-wire
2 = PN10
3 = PN16
5 = PN40
6 = PN64
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 20
2008
9 = others
Standard transmitter in brass or stainless steel
Versions and Technical specifications

Sliding tube material
Brass
Stainless steel 1.4571
Sliding tube diameter
12 mm
12 mm, 14 mm, 18 mm
Sliding tube length
max. 3 m
12, 14 mm: max. 3 m

18 mm: max. 6 m
Anschlusskabel
connecting cable
max. pressure
as per float used

(see table "Float designs")
G
G 3/8"
3/6
max. temperature
Float and process connection

made of metal:
120 C (90C with PVC cable),
high temperature version 250C
(with grid 5, 10, 15 mm only)
Float and/or Process connection
made of plastic:
as per specification float or process
connection
Grid dimensions
5 mm
10 mm
12.7 mm
15 mm
5 mm
6.35 mm
(only 14 and 18 mm)
10 mm
12.7 mm
15 mm
Float:
No. 1, 8, 9,
1, 8, 9, 10, 11
Total resistance
of measuring chain
Standard:
lengths and grid-dependent
for connecting to safety barrier:
approx. 40 kOhm
12
Contents
Startpage
wrench
SW
22 size 22
Gertelnge L
device length
100% display
100%-Anzeige
Gleitrohr
sliding tube
Schwimmer
float
12 or
1414
oder
float
Schwimmer-
Cable length (for mea- PVC or silicon cable,

suring transmitter with max. 2000 m.,
male thread only):
3-core
connecting cable
Anschlusskabel
14
G 1/2"
1/2
Process connections: Male thread

wrench
SW
27 size 22
L1
G 3/8-male
G 3/8-male, G 1/2-male
Tank joints and connector housing
Gertelnge L
device length
100%100% display
Anzeige
polypropylene, G 1 1/2, G2,

with ABS plug connector or
polyester connector housing
Gleitrohr
sliding tube
stainless steel, G1,

with ABS plug connector or
aluminiumconnector housing
Schwimmer
float
brass,
G 1 1/2, G2,
with Al
connector
housing
18
Schwimmer-
float
steel or stainless steel

G 1 1/2, G2,
with Al connector housing
Flange connection as per DIN

(other flange designs on request)
steel St 37
2008
DN 50DN 150,
PN 6-PN 64
with Al
connector
housing
steel St 37 or
stainless steel
DN 50-DN 150,
PN 6-PN 64
with Al connector housing
Model name:
as per Ordering codes (see p. 3)
Other details::
total length L
Medium, density, max. pressure
max. temperature, other issues
www.profimess.de
F 21
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Standard measuring transmitter made of PVC,

PP or PVDF
connecting cable
Anschlusskabel
PVDF
Contents
80 C
100C
Startpage
16: No. 4
18: No. 5
16: No. 6
18: No. 7
PVC
PP
16 mm or 20 mm
Sliding tube length
max. 4 m
max. pressure
3 bar
max. temperature
60 C
Grid dimensions
5 mm
6.35 mm
10 mm
12.7 mm
15 mm
Float:
16: No. 2
18: No. 3
Total resistance
of measuring chain
Cable length (for

measuring transmitter
with male thread):
PVC or silicon cable,

max. 2000 m.,
3-core
Process connections:
Male thread
24
G 1"
1
G
Gertelnge L
device length
L1
wrench
SW
32 size 32
100% display
100%-Anzeige
sliding tube
Gleitrohr
20
float
Schwimmer
G1-male
80

G2, PVC
G2, PP
with polyester connector
L1
20
77
PG 11
Anschlussconnecting
gehuse
housing

(other flange desings on request)
SW 36 size 32
wrench
68
68
G 2
2"
PVC
100%-display
100%
Anzeige
Gertelnge L
device length
G2, PVDF
PP
stainless
steel with
PTFE- sea
ling plate
DN 80 or DN 100, PN10
with polyester connector housing
Gleitrohr
sliding
tube
16
16
Model name:
Other details:
total length L medium, sealing,

max. pressure max. temperature,
other issues
Schwimmer
float
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 22
2008
65
Semi-flexible measuring transmitter made of PP
immersion
depth for
Eintauchtiefe
density
bei
Dichte11
24
Gertelnge L
Gertelnge L
device
length
operating range
0 -100%
sliding
Gleitrohr
tube
16 16
device length
100%
100%display
Anzeige
Messbereich 0-100%
Startpage
PP
16 mm
Sliding tube length
max. 4 m
GG1"2
max. pressure
3 bar
wrench
SW
32
max. temperature
80 C
Grid dimensions
12.7 mm
Float:
with tank joint G2: No. 4

with G1-male flange: No. 5
Total resistance
of measuring chain
Cable length (for

transmitter with
male thread only):
PVC or silicon cable,

max. 2000 m.,
3-core
male thread
connecting
Anschlusscable
kabel
size 32
L1
L1
20
77
connecting
Anschlusshousing
gehuse
wrench
size3636
SW
68
68
G
G 2"2
100%
100%display
Anzeige
operating range
0 -100%
PG 11
Messbereich 0-100%
Contents
sliding
tube 16
immersion
Eintauchtiefe
depth for
bei
Dichte11
density
Schwimmer
float
Gleitrohr 16
118
118
Schwimmer
float
stretching
stretching
Spanngewicht
weight
50 mm
50
mm
Spanngewicht
weight
50
50mm
mm
G1-male, PP
55
80
G2, PP, with polyester connector housing
Semi-flexible measuring transmitters are used when the circumstances relating to space are insufficient for mounting a
rigid system, for example, in enclosed spaces rooms where the
upper edge of the vessel is too closely below the lid. The devices have a minimum bending radius of 1000 mm and, therefore, can be inserted even in narrow spaces into the vessel.

(other flange versions on request)
PVC or PP DN80 or DN 100, PN10
with polyester connector housing
Span weight:
50 x 80
Model name:
Other details:
total length L medium,density

other issues
Measuring transmitter in 3-A version for

foodstuff applications
connecting cable
Anschlusskabel
Kabelverschraubung
cable gland
SW
15 size 15
wrench
26
Gewinde
G 3/8 G 3/8"
Gertelnge L
device length
Gleitrohr
16mm
sliding tube
16
float
Schwimmer
The measuring transmitters in 3-A version fully

comply with the requirements of 3-A Sanitary
Standards for Liquid
Pressure and Level
Sensing Devices, published by the International
Association of Milk,
Food and Environmental
Sanitarians, US Public
Health Service and by
The Dairy Industry
Committee. The measuring transmitters can be
sterilized with saturated
steam or water.
16 mm
Sliding tube length
max. 4 m
max. pressure
16 bar
max. temperature
90 C with standard measuring chain ,

180 C with high temperature measuring
chain
Grid dimensions
6.35 mm or 12.7 mm (up to 90C) 5,

10, 15 mm (up to 180C, HT measuring
chain)
Float:
No. 12
Total resistance
of measuring chain
grid and length-dependent
Cable length (for

transmitter with
male thread only):
silicon cable,
max. 2000 m.,
3-core
male thread
ISO 228/1-G 3/8 A
55
2008
80
Model name:
Other details:
total length L medium, sealing,

other issues
www.profimess.de
F 23
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Measuring transmitter for resistance

measuring chains
Technical specifications
Description
The measuring transmitter of MULD series can be connected to resistance measuring chains of the level measuring
transmitter FM-02 or the bypass level measuring transmitter
MA-98.
They convert the resistance transmitter signal into a
standard output signal (0 or 4 to 20 mA).
Besides, the MULD measuring transmitters have
2 programmable alarm contacts and a 4-digit, freely
programmable LED display for numeric display of the level.
Supply:
optionally 24/ 115/230 V AC,

48...62 Hz, or 24 V DC with galvanic separation between auxiliary power, measuring and output
circuit
Power Consumption:
Measuring
resistance:
To effectively
monitor faults,
the feeler and
signal wire
shield must be
PE.
Startpage
resistance emitter in 3-wire
potentiometer connection
1...100 kOhm
Output:
0/4...20 mA
Contact output::
2 limit value relay, NO-contact or

NC-contact programmable,
hysteresis programmable,
switching load 500 VA, 230 V AC
Display:
4-digit LED display, red, programmable from -999...+9999,

decimal point programmable
Housing:
Macrolon, rail mounting as per

DIN EN 50022
Protection class:
IP40, clamps IP20
Operating temperature:
0...50C
The measuring
circuit must be
shielded.
measurement emitter
4 VA
Input:
Measuring
power circuit:
Contents
cable channel
for voltage
supply, load
and control
wiring
Power signal
Ordering codes
Voltage signal
Dimensions
Ordering number
MULD.
1.
4.
Supply voltage:
1 = 24 VDC, galvanic separation
2 = 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz
3 = 115 VAC, 50/60 Hz
4 = 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Output signal:
0 = 0-20 mA
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 24
2008
4 = 4-20 mA
MA-98
Contents
Startpage
Description: A stainless steel measuring tube has two

connecting sleeves on the side which are joined with the vessel to be monitored. Since in this reference vessel the same
fluid level is found as that in the tank, a cylindrical stainless
steel or titanium float is located always at the level with the
vessel level. The float is counterbalanced exactly to the density of the medium and it carries a specially designed discshaped magnetic system that acts through the stainless steel
wall of the measuring tube on an indicator bar which is sensitive to magnetic forces. Due to the magnetic force of the
float, its pre-magnetized tiny aluminium plates are flipped by
180C in such a way that all plates below the float train their
red side and the remaining plates above the float their silver
side to the front. Thus, the observer obtains a precise visual
statement on the level in the container. Optionally, the reference tube can be equipped with bistable, magnetic sensitive
limit contacts which emit a binary signal when the float has
passed the level where the sliding contacts are mounted.
Another alternative to the remote transmission of value is
adding a reed contact chain externally on the measuring tube
that would convert the float movement into a stepped resistance or current signal. Instead of the reed contact chain,
also a magnetostrictive sensor can be used which breaks up
the level at a higher accuracy and provides a 4...20 mA
power signal in 2-wire circuit.
Up to 5 meter measuring length

Range of application: The MA-98 series of magnetic level
gauges has been long in use in large numbers in the entire
industry. Wherever a level needs to be durably transmitted in
visualized or electrical form under harsh conditions or at high
pressure or extreme temperatures, the principle of magnetic
float transmission in bypass, that has a proven record of over
30 years, is worth its while to deploy it. Meanwhile, the technology of remote transmission, for example, by using magnetostrictive sensor has been perfected to such extent that it is
no way inferior to other methods of level measurement and
monitoring. Moreover, the advantage here is that the level can
be identified at one glance directly at the measuring point.
The electrical signals in the control room can be verified
visually without much assembling work. Besides pressure
levels up to PN250, also all conceivable variants of draining
and ventilation such as valves, ball-cocks or compression
and cutting ring fittings are available with us. Just contact us
for more details.
Flange, thread and welded connections

Fully stainless steel measuring tube
Switching contacts and optional measuring
transmitter
2008
Customized designs
www.profimess.de
F 25
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
Measuring range (ME): The distance between the upper
and the lower lateral connection is specified in millimeters.
The maximum length of a measuring tube is 5000 mm; for
greater lengths, however, several reference tubes must be
used. For a length of 3000 mm and above, we recommend
equipping the magnetic level gauge with a welded bracket for
additional securing (Option /7). If the free space (dugout) between the lower connecting piece and the base or the space
(projection) between the upper connecting piece and the ceiling are in one way or the other restricted, the relevant maximum parameter must be specified in detailed text at the time
of placing an order. In an empty vessel, the float for the MA98 is located in the so-called float-sack below the connection
and in a full tank in the projection above the connection. This
means that these dimensions must correspond with at least
the float length. However, since the float's mounting length
also depends on the media density, special materials like titanium must be used in case of space constraints, if necessary,
in order to reduce the float length.
level value a reed contact measuring transmitter (Option /2

and /3) or a magnetostrictive sensor (Option /4) can be
mounted externally on the MA-98 which provides a 4...20 mA
signal at the output (see also FM-01 and FM-02 for details).
Mounting brackets stabilize the magnetic level gauge for
lengths above 3 meters (Option /7), and a low temperature
version (Option /8) has a special type level gauge bar which
will not become "blind" due to condensate.
If the connecting flange is required in C-steel instead of the
standard stainless steel, also the connecting pieces are provided with the same material (Option /6). The MA-98 is available also for pressure level PN25 (Option /5).
Material for vessel,

connecting piece,
flange, brackets:
Float:
Pressure:
PN16 (optional PN25)
Temperature:
196C...+400C up
Measuring range:
to 5000 mm
Weight:
basic version 7 kg + 0.33 kg/

100 mm ME
Nominal diameter and pressure level for flange: The

precise name of the connecting flange on the vessel must be
specified in a detailed text. Some examples are DIN DN25
PN16 DL-C or ANSI 1" 300 lbs RF. Standard flanges are DIN
DN15 PN16 with sealing bar Form-C.
Ventilation/drain:
cap/plug 1/2"-NPT, optional

valves, other thread types, flange
connecting piece etc
Lateral connections:
welded end (standard), flange

DIN and ANSI, thread
Male thread for screw neck or bushing: If a screw neck

or a bushing is selected as a variant for the connection, the
thread size must be specified in detailed text. Here the standard is G3/4". All normally used inch or metric thread
systems are available on request.
Density:
from 0.7 g/cm3
Separating layer:
from density difference 0.1 g/cm3

with special type float
Viscosity:
max. 1000 mPas
Measuring error:
+/- 10 mm
Process connection: Flanges as per DIN or ANSI, femaleand male threads or welded ends are the most commonly
used features for connecting the MA-98 on the side of the
vessel. Customized solutions like aligning the connecting
piece on top/ below or on top/laterally or at the bottom/laterally are available on request.
Drain: For changing the float the MA-98 is always provided

with a flange connection on the lower side of the tube which
is closed with a blind flange. As a standard, the blind flange
is provided with a thread hole and a 1/2"-NPT plug so that
the vessel can be emptied through this hole during operation.
Optionally, a valve can be mounted into the flange, which
normally points to the bottom and can be aligned also laterally in case of space constraints. Customized versions like
drain ball-cocks, compression and cutting ring fittings for
connecting a tube directly are available on request.
Options: With regard to options, specify in detail if the MA98 should be provided with electrical limit contacts and as to
how many (Option /1). Optionally, for remote transmission of
Limit contact
MAZ 66 (standard)
Function:
magnetic change-over, bistable
Voltage:
230 V max.
Current:
max. 1 A for AC or 0.5 A for DC
Switching load:
30 VA or 30 W
Protection class:
IP67
Connecting cable:
1.5 m silicon cable, 4 x 0.75 mm2
Hysteresis:
approx. 6 mm
Assembling position:
cable pointing downwards
Fixture:
integrated clamping tape
Connection housing:
stainless steel
Operations:
>106
Shock:
15 g
Vibration:
10 g
Contact weight:
0.31 kg
www.profimess.de
F 26
2008
Ventilation: Normally, the MA-98 has a completely closed

cap as the top closure for the reference vessel. In this solution, in applications at high pressure there is a risk of formation
of a locked-in pressure pocket above the float which may
affect the measuring accuracy. To circumvent this, the cap
can be provided with a threaded hole. As a standard, we
supply a 1/2"-NPT connection with sealing plugs. Other
thread variants or also hose nipples can be provided on
request.
GMBH
Startpage
stainless steel (standard), titanium,
Hastelloy etc.
stainless steel 1.4571 or titanium
PROFI
MESS
Contents
Ordering codes
Ordering
number:
Dimensions
vent
MA-98. [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] . 1. DN15 - PN16. 0000. 0. 0. 0
float vessel
Contents
Center distance of lateral
connections in mm:
[ ][ ][ ][ ] mm (5000 mm max.)
Startpage
Process connection:
1 = DIN flange in stainless steel
1a = DIN flange in steel
2 = ANSI flange in stainless steel
2a = ANSI-flange in steel
3 = thread connecting piece
4 = thread bushing
5 = welded connecting piece
float
socket
C
depending on
media density and
float materia
Nominal diameter and pressure level flange:

[ ][ ][ ][ ] e.g. DN15 PN25 o.1" 300
lbs RF 0000 for thread or welded end)
Connecting thread for thread connecting piece or bushing:
[ ][ ][ ][ ] e.g. G3/4" o. M18x1.5
(0000 for flange or welded end)
depends on
outlet design
Drain:
0 = plug 1/2-NPT
1 = valve DN6 in stainless steel
2 = valve DN6 in steel
99 = customized special version, please specify in detailed text
display bar
outlet
Ventilation:
0 = cap
1 = cap with ventilation screw 1/2"-NPT
99 = customized special version, please specify in detailed text
Options (multiple names like /1/7/8 possible):
0 = none
1 = limit contacts (details of number and function)
2 = remote transmitter REED contact chain with resistance output
3 = remote transmitter REED contact chain with power output 4...20 mA
4 = remote transmitter magnetostrictive with linear power output 4...20 mA
5 = pressure level PN25 instead of PN16
6 = connecting piece and flange in C-steel instead of stainless steel
7 = mounting bracket for lengths from 3000 mm
8 = low temperature version below -10C,
Please specify operating temperature in detailed text.
Ventilation variants
cap
Please specify media density in detailed text.
Float
screw plug
1/2 NPT
flange
socket
valve
magnetic
system
screw-in
depth
Lateral connections
weld-on
socket
P-T-Diagram
thread
socket
flange
operating pressure [MPa]
Derating-Diagram
Drain variants
fully
made of
1.4571
screw plug
medium temperature [C]
flange
socket
valve
valve sideways
2008
flange
www.profimess.de
F 27
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
FD-01
Hydrostatic
Level Measurement
Contents
Startpage
Capacitive sensor element with high

overpressure resistance
Description
Hydrostatic level sensors measure the height of a fluid level
through the hydrostatic pressure of the fluid column present
above the sensor. A ceramic sensor element at the sensor
underside picks up this pressure so that the electronic components inside can generate a 4-20 mA signal that is proportional to the level. The suspension on the self-supporting 20
m cable and the design in proven 2-wire technology help
perceptibly minimize the cost of installation.
2-wire technology
Large surface, nearly front-flush
diaphragm
2008
Integrated surge protection
The FD-01 series of level meter is used at measuring points
that require an accurate and stables output signal in regard
to the level even under extreme conditions. The high degree
of protection IP 68 and corrosion resistance enable the use
of the probe universally in vessels, basins, ducts and tanks.
The large surface of the membrane that has a 25 mm diameter is particularly advantageous in effluents management.
www.profimess.de
F 29
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Dimensions
Supply voltage:
12 VDC to 36 VDC
Output signal:
4-20 mA, 2-wire-circuit
Load:
max. 600 Ohm for 24 VDC

max. 1000 Ohm for 32 VDC
free cable end
Protection class:
IP 68
Type of electrical
protection:
+ red
blue
PVC hose with
PE filter
for pressure balancing shield PA/earth
PUR-cable
9 mm
Contents
Startpage
exceed voltage protection

-120 to + 150 V
DC, 1 sec at 25C
150
max. media temp.:
-10C to +70C
max. storage temp.:
-25C to +70C
Housing:
Sensor:
capacitive with ceramic

membrane (Al2O3)
Sealing:
Viton
Cable material:
polyurethan, 9 mm diameter
Cable length:
standard 10 m
Special diameter:
39.5 mm
Accuracy:
0.25% FSO
Zero point:
0.1% FSO / 10 K
Long-time stability:
+/- 0.1% FSO / year
Approval:
ATEX ll 1G EEx ia llC T4
capacitive
ceramic
gauge gate
protective cap
39.5
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
FD-01.
5. 1
FD-01 Hydrostatic Level Meter

Operating range:
1 = up to 1 m water column
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 30
2008
EX approval:
0 = none
1 = ATEX ll 1G EEx ia llC T4
FD-03
Hydrostatic Level
Measurement
Contents
Startpage
4-20 mA output
Description:
The FD-03 series of hydrostatic level sensors processes the
static pressure of a fluid by means of a capacitive ceramic
sensor element. It is designed with front-alignment and
hence avoids nearly all faults due to sediments which is particularly important in the effluents management. The measuring transmitter is integrated into the probe and emits, at
factory-set operating range, a 4-20 mA output signal based
on the 2-wire system.
2-wire technology
Ceramic gauge gate
High accuracy
2008
Wide range of connections
The pressure probes FD-03 have been developed for deployment in harsh industrial conditions. The have been extremely
efficient especially in the management of effluents for obtaining levels in tanks and vessels. Even when used in hostile
media such as acids and alkalis, they were able to yield
excellent results due to the consistency of the capacitive
ceramic sensor element made of 96% AL2O3.
The devices can be supplied ex factory in Germany for the
operating ranges 1m, 2m, 4m, 6m and 10m. Special operating ranges are available on request. The process connection
is constructed intentionally in the large surface 11/2"-male
version. Optionally, other connection types can also be
supplied.
www.profimess.de
F 31
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
FD-03 Hydrostatic Level Measurement

Supply voltage: 12 VDC to 36 VDC
Contents
Operating
range:
Sealing:
0 1 m water column,
0 2 m water column,
0 4 m water column,
0 6 m water column,
0 10 m water column
ex-factory in Germany
Output signal:
4 20 mA, 2-wire
Load:
[UB -12 V] : 0.02 A
Protection
class:
IP 65
0 20 m water column, all intermediate

ranges and ranges up to max. 160 m water
column on request
Electrical
connection:
PG 13.5
Approval:
ATEX ll 1G EEx ia llC T4
Safety-related
maximum
values:
Ui = 28 V, Ii = 93 mA, Pi = 660 mW
depending on media a Viton as well as

a PTFE sealing can be supplied
Process
connection:
a G11/2"male connection is available as a

standard. Other connections on request.
Startpage
Operating
ranges:
Accuracy
as per
IEC 60770:
Ordering codes:
FD-03. 5. 5. 4. 1. 1
Ordering number:
2 m to 160 m water column
+/-0.35% of full scale value

(0.25% optional)
max. media
temp.:
-25C to +125C
max. ambient
temp.:
-25C to +85C
FD-03 Hydrostatic Level Measurement
Temperature
error:
Housing:
Sealing:
1 = Viton
2 = PTFE
Media
contacted
components:
Process connection:
4= G 11 /2"A thread DIN ISO 228
5= special type connections
EX-approval:
0 = none
1 = ATEX ll 1G EEx ia llC T4
Housing:
1= stainless steel not turnable
2= stainless steel turnable with onsite display
3= stainless steel turnable with Ex onsite display
PROFI
MESS
+/-0.02% of full scale value/K in

compensated range:
-20C to +80C
stainless steel 1.4571 and

ceramic 96% Al2O3
Sealing:
Viton or PTFE
Vibration:
10 g (20...2000 Hz)
Shock:
100 g / 11 ms
Overload:
see Ordering codes
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 32
2008
Operating range:
0 = 1 m water column, overload 2 bar
6 = special operating ranges
FO-01
Optoelectronic
Level Switch
Contents
Startpage
Small and compact
Description:
An optical sensor is mounted in a robust stainless steel housing. It consists of a quartz glass tip which contains an infrared diode, as a transmitter, and a light-sensitive semi-conductor as the receiver. If no fluid moisture touches the sensor tip,
the infrared light will be fully reflected by the inside of the
quartz glass. However, as soon as it dips into the medium a
large portion of the transmitted light can pass into the fluid.
Registering this, the receiver initiates a switching operation at
the device's PNP transistor output which is then directly displayed by a green LED.
Easy to mount
No mechanical components
Easy to maintain
2008
The applications for the optoelectronic level switch include
tapping limit values in a number of fluids. The main advantage
is that the method of measurement is to a large extent independent of physical parameters like refractive index, colour,
density, dielectric constant or conductivity. The extremely
compact design guarantees minimum space; consequently,
measurements in very small volumes becomes convenient. It
can be mounted anywhere and the range of high pressure
and temperature assure a broad spectrum of applications
www.profimess.de
F 33
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
FO-01 Optoelectronic Level Switch
max. pressure:
0 to 50 bar
(25 bar for sterile connection)
Process connection: The standard is an M16 x 1.5 thread

connection; optionally, also G1/2"A and 1/2" NPT can be
supplied. Other versions are equipped with conical sealing
joint as per DIN 11887 or sterile connections as per Ordering
codes.
max. media temp.:
-30C to+140C
max. ambient temp.:
-25C to +70C
Cleaning temperature:
max. 150C, 15 min.
Electronic housing:
Electrical connection: The standard is a 3 m PVC cable;

optionally, a plug connection BINDER 713 is available.
Sensor housing: stainless steel 1.4301,

1.4541 or 1.4571
Output: Ex-factory the switch is preset to switching when

immersing or to switching when surfacing.
Sensor housing material: The electronic housing is always
stainless steel 1.4301 and the sensor housing can be supplied optionally in different types of stainless steel.
Contents
Startpage
Lighting circuit:
quartz glass
Sealing:
Graphit / PTFE
Weight:
Accuracy:
0.10 kg to 0.15 kg +
if necessary weight of the sterile
connection
+/- 0.5 mm
Light source:
IR-Light 930 nm
Ambient light:
max. 10.000 Lux
Min. clearance to
opposite-side
surface:
>10 mm
(25 mm for polished surface)
any
Drawing of conical sealing joint

20
20
ML
ML
10
10
Drawing for thread connection
40
21
77
LED
LED
Kabelcable
length
lnge
3000
3000
B6
cable
length
Ma
in m
Ordering codes:
Anschlu bild
Steckerbelegung
braun
Ordering number:
FO-01. 7. 2. 1. 3.
O.C. pnp
FO-01 Optoelectronic Level Switch

Process connection:
1 = M16x 1.5-male
2 = 1/2" NPT-male
3 = G 1/2" A-male
4 = conical sealing joint NW 15
7 = sterile version Tri-clamp DN10/25
8 = sterile version Varivent B DN 10/15
9 = sterile version Varivent F DN25, inclined
10 = sterile version Ingold DN20
0V
+24 V
Ausgang
Ausgang
Last
0V
wei
Supply voltage: 24 VDC -25% /+30%
1 = 3m PVC cable
2 =plug connection BINDER 713
Output:
1 = switching when immersing
2 = switching when surfacing
Consumption:
max. 40 mA
Output:
PNP open collector, short-circuit protected,

current, voltage and performance limiting
Switching current (Tu = 70C):

Electrical
connection:
Sensor housing material:

1 = stainless steel 1.4571 (not for sterile version)
PROFI
MESS
grn
+24 V
Protection class:
0.5 A
PVC cable 3 x 0.14 mm2 or

plug 4-pole Series 713, M12
IP 66 with cable
IP 65 with plug
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 34
2008
28
FO-02
Optoelectronic Compact
Level Switch
Contents
Startpage
Adjustable setpoint
Description:
An optical sensor is mounted in a robust stainless steel housing. It consists of a quartz glass tip which contains an infrared diode, as a transmitter, and a light-sensitive semi-conductor as the receiver. If no fluid moisture touches the sensor
tip, the infrared light will be fully reflected by the inside of the
quartz glass. However, as soon as it dips into the medium a
large portion of the transmitted light can pass into the fluid.
Registering this, the receiver initiates a switching operation at
the device's relay output which is then directly displayed by a
green LED.
Compact design
Integrated electronics
High switching load
Maintenance-free
2008
The applications for the optoelectronic level switch include
tapping limit values in a number of fluids. The main advantage
is that the method of measurement is to a large extent independent of physical parameters like refractive index, colour,
density, dielectric constant or conductivity. The extremely
compact design guarantees minimum space. As against the
FO-01, the FO-02 can be supplied with variable measuring
length of up to 2000 mm. The user can select the setpoint
freely by means of an optionally available cutting ring joint.
The direction of switching for the high-performance relay output on the device is reversible.
www.profimess.de
F 35
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
FO-02 Optoelectronic Compact Level Switch
Supply voltage:
24 VDC -25% /+30%
Consumption:
max. 40 mA
Output:
relay output change-over

250 VAC, 3 A
Load cycle No.:
> 107
El. connection output:
plug 3-pole series 723
El. connection supply:
plug 4-pole series 723
Protection class:
IP 65 as per EN 60529,
counter plug screwed on
Contents
Supply: The supply voltage of FO-02 is always 24 V DC.

Sensor length: The sensor is available in 5 standard lengths
for which the measuring length can be adjusted within the following bandwidth:
Sensor length
100 mm
250 mm
550 mm
1050 mm
2050 mm
Operating range
18 49 mm
18 200 mm
18 500 mm
18 1000 mm
18 2000 mm
Startpage
*Intermediate lengths can be manufactured on request.
70
50
36
70
65
10
10
12
12
or
10
1
2
relay
Relais
+24 V
0V
a
u
r
Steckerbelegung
Pin layout
1
1
+24 V
1
2
24 V
4
0V
relay
Relais
ML
SL
sensitivity
Empfindadjustment
lichkeitseinstellung
2
24 V 3
Connection
Anschlu bild
diagram
display
Anzeige
switching
status
Schaltzustand
direction
of
Schaltrichtung
connection
electrical
Elektrischer
connection
Anschlu
depending
on type
je nach Typ
19
19
16
16
cutting
ring joint
SchneidringG1/2A
as per
Verschraubung
DIN
2353
G1/2A
nach
(Accessories)
DIN 2353
(Zubeh r)
7
7
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
FO-02. 1. 5. 1
FO-02 Optoelectronic Compact Level Switch
Supply:
1 = 24 VDC
Sensor length:
1 = 100 mm
2 = 250 mm
3 = 550 mm
4 = 1050 mm
5 = 2050 mm
0 to 50 bar
max. media temp.:
-30C to +95C
max. ambient
temperature:
-25C to +60C
Electronic housing:
Macrolon
Lighting circuit:
quartz glass
Sealing:
PTFE
Weight:
0.12 kg + 5 g / cm
Accuracy:
+/- 0.5 mm
Light source:
IR-Light 930 nm
Ambient light:
max. 10.000 Lux
Min. clearance to
opposite-side surface:
>10 mm
any
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 36
2008
Sensor housing: stainless steel 1.4571
Shaft diameter:
1 = 12 mm
2 = 10 mm
PROFI
MESS
max. pressure:
KS-01/ FER
Conductive
Level Switch and
Electrode Relays
Contents
Startpage
Low-cost electrodes for sideways mounting
Description
The KS-01 series of conductive level switches is intended, in
combination with the electrode relay FER, for obtaining the
level of conductive fluids. An AC voltage is connected to an
electrode insulated from the vessel. When the moisture of the
medium contacts this electrode, a small current flows from the
electrode through the medium to the vessel wall (in the case of
plastic vessels to a separate ground electrode). This flow of
current is picked up by the electrode relay and transmitted as a
switching signal.
Easy to assemble
Stainless steel and Teflon media-contacted
components
2008
Electrode relay for limit values, pump control

or pump control with overflow and dry-run
protection
for determining limit level in vessels with conductive fluids
full or empty reporting
level controlling between two levels
overload security
dry-run protection
www.profimess.de
F 37
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions
FER.NS6K: Pump control relay
KS-01:
Low-cost screw-mount electrode
For connecting maximum 3 electrodes: The device is intended
FER.NS1F:
Electrode relay for 1 limit value
for regulating fluid level between a Maximum (E3) and a
FER.NS6K:
Electrode relay for pump control
Minimum value (E2). The common grounding (E1) is connected
FER.NS43:
Electrode relay for pump control with
to the vessel wall (in metal vessels) or to a third electrode. As
additional setpoint for overflow
long as the electrode E3 does not become wet, the output
and dry-run protection
relay is drawn to it. When the fluid reaches the level of E3, the
Contents
output relay is released. Only when the fluid level falls below
the level of E2, the output relay is drawn to it again and the
Dimensions KS-01
Startpage
cycle starts all over again.

vessel walling
disc M 4
screw M 4
V 2A
M4
covering
vessel walling
fill level
max
FER.NS1F: Electrode relay for 1 limit value
inlet
For connecting maximum 2 electrodes: The device is intended
FER.NS43: Electrode relay for pump control with

2 limit values
for monitoring a limit value, for example, as an overflow or dryrun protection.
This device combines the functions of two electrode relays, i.e.

FER.1 and the pump control relay FER.2.
In this way, additionally monitoring full and empty statuses can
be implemented besides level control between two levels.
Maximum 5 electrodes can be connected (2 x for level control,
1 x for full or empty reporting, 1 x common grounding).
Three output relays are meant for controlling pumps or valves
besides transmitting the full and empty signals.
fault alerting
Switching function: E1 and E2 are wet: Relay OFF
Ordering codes
Ordering number
Screw-fit electrode:
KS-01. 1.
stainless steel with Teflon socket
Electrode relay:
Screw-Fit Electrode
Design:
Material:
1 = stainless steel / Teflon
snap-fit rail housing as per

DIN 50022
Ordering number
Supply:
220-240 VAC,
50/60 Hz -15% /+10%
Output relay:
change-over, max 440 VAC,

max. 6A, max. 2000VA
FER. NS1F. 1.
Electrode Relay
Connection:
Response
NS6K = pump control relay
sensitivity:
NS43 = pump control relay, 2 additional limit values
Protection
Supply voltage:
1 = 230 VAC
class:
IP30, terminals IP20
Ambient temp.:
-20...+55 C
PROFI
MESS
adjustable, 25...250 kOhm
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 38
2008
NS1F = 1 limit value
ER-01
Conductive
Electrode Relay
Contents
Startpage
Description:
The ER-01 electrode relay outputs a measuring voltage to
a ground electrode and to one or more additional electrodes.
While immersing the ground electrode and another electrode
into the fluid that needs to be monitored, a low AC measuring
current flows signaling the presence of a medium. Flow of
this AC is intercepted by ER-01 and evaluated. Possible
electrolytic disintegration of the medium and hazardous
contact voltages are safely avoided, since the measuring
current is very low and not capable of generating any galvanic
elements.
The ER-01 series of electrode relays can also be used as
simple contact network relay in which, for example, potentialfree REED contacts replace the electrodes. This is an important aspect if the maximum power rating of the REED emitter
is insufficient for connecting the required heavy loads.
Single or dual channels

24 V DC or 230 V AC
Secured galvanic isolation
MlN-MAX control
Limit value identification
in conductive fluids
2008
Reversible active and

standby currents
Electrode relays are used in combination with conductive
rod screw type or suspended electrodes (see also Profimess'
KS-02), if the level of conductive fluids needs to be registered,
controlled or regulated. In this, limit level switching (overflow
and dry run) as well as MIN-Max controls can be implemented. In this case, the relay at the output is changed over
when one of the two limit levels is activated, with the result
that the filling level reciprocates between these two predefined
levels.
www.profimess.de
F 39
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Operating
temperature:
-20C...+60C
Protection class:
terminals IP20, housing IP40
CE marking:
as per low voltage directive

73/23/EWG
as per EMV directive 89/336/EWG
Options:
EX approval
Storage temperature: -20C...+80C

Weight:
approx. 150 g
Dimensions:
112 x 22.5 x 114.5 mm (L x W x D)
Connectors:
plug-in terminals (spring action)
interface detection for media

of different conductivities
Contents
Startpage
approval for overfill protection as

per German WhG
Supply voltage:
ER-01.X.24:
20...35 V DC
ER-01.X.230: 230 V AC, 48...62 Hz
Dimensions:
24 V AC, 48 V AC, 48 V DC,

115 V AC on request
ER-01.1
Power consumption: max. 1 W / VA

Input:
Idling voltage:
< 10 VAC
Short-circuit current: 5mA

Switching delay:
approx. 0.5 s
Sensitivity range:
2...300 kOhm
Output:
Contacts:
one potential-free change-overcontact per channel (optionally

additional change-over-contact for
single channel version)
Switching voltage:
max. 250 V AC, max. 150 V DC
Switching current:
Single channel version:

max. 5 A at cos = 1,0,
max. 3 A at cos = 0,7
ER-01.2
Two channel version:

max. 3 A at cos = 1,
max. 1 A at cos = 0,7
Switching load:
single channel version: max. 1250 VA

two channel version: max. 750 VA
Ordering codes:
ER-01. 1. 24. 0
Ordering number:
Conductive Electrode Relay
No. of channels:
1 = 1 channel with one change-over-contact
2 = 2 channels with one change-over-contact per channel
Supply voltage:
[][][] = specify other voltage in detailed text
24 = 24 V DC
230 = 230 V AC
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 40
2008
Options:
0 = no special features
1 = specify special features in detailed text
Connection examples 1 channel relay
Contents
Connection example for filling

Limit level detection in active current operation
(min/max operation)
Connection example for overflow

Limit level detection in standby current operation
Connection example for dry run

Connection example for filling

with float switches
2008
Startpage
www.profimess.de
F 41
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Connection examples 2 channel relay
Channel 1: high alarm,

Channel 2: dry run standby current, high alarm, dry run

Channel 2: dry run active current, high alarm, dry run
Contents
Channel 1: dry run,

Channel 2: min/max standby current, empty container
Channel 1: dry run,

Channel 2: min/max active current, empty container

Channel 2: min/max standby current, fill container

Channel 2: min/max active current, fill container
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 42
2008
Startpage
KS-02
Contents
Startpage
Description
The KS-02 series of conductive level switches is intended, in
combination with the electrode relay FER, for obtaining the
level of conductive fluids. An AC voltage is connected to an
electrode insulated from the vessel. When the moisture of the
medium contacts this electrode, a small current flows from the
electrode through the medium to the vessel wall (in the case
of plastic vessels to a separate ground electrode). This flow of
current is picked up by the electrode relay and transmitted as
a connecting signal.
Single or multiple electrodes

(up to 5 setpoints)
Easy to assemble
Electrode rods made of stainless steel,
titanium or Hastelloy B or C with
Teflon coating
for determining limit level in
vessels with conductive fluids
full or empty reporting
level control between two levels
overfill protection
dry-run protections
Tri-clamp connection for deployment in

food-processing industry
Electrode relay for limit values, pump control
or pump control with overfill and dry-run
protection (see Data sheet KS-01/FER)
By using the optionally available tri-clamp

connection, the level electrodes of KS-02 are
particularly suited for use in food-processing industry.
2008
Benefits
no mechanical moving components
independent of specific weight of medium
compact design
possible to mount vertically or horizontally
www.profimess.de
F 43
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions
Dimensions
KS-02.01...15:
KS-25...41:
KS-02.01...
Single electrode with fixed

screw on thread or with cutting ring
joint for adjusting the electrode length
Electrical connection: PVC or
silicon cable or aluminium terminal housing
KS-02.02...
KS-02.03V...
Contents
Multiple electrodes
max. number of electrodes depends
on size of joint
aluminium terminal housing
adjustable
by releasing
the swivel
nut
Startpage
Ordering codes
Ordering number
KS-02. 01. 2. 2. 1. 1P
KS-02.03.x.1.x.A
KS-02.28.x.4.x.A
Process connection:
Single electrode
01 =G1/4-male
01V= G 1/4-male adjustable
02 = G 3/8-male
02V= G 3/8-male adjustable
spacer PP
03 =G1/2-male
03V=G 1/2-male adjustable
05
= G 1-male
15
=1" Tri-clamp
shrikdown
tubing
Multiple electrodes
25 = G 1-male (max. 2 Electrodes)
26 = G 1 1/4-male (max. 3 Electrodes)
27 = G 1 1/2-male (max. 3 Electrodes)
28 = G 2-male (max. 5 Electrodes)
KS-02.38.x.1.x.A
35 = 1" Tri-Clamp (max. 2 Electrodes)
KS-02.38.x.3.x.A

99 = special type connection
Tri-Clamp
flange 2 - 5
Material for process connection:

1 = Brass
Tri-Clamp
flange 2 - 5
ceramic
2 = Stainless steel
3 = PP
9 = special type material
Number of electrodes:
1...5
Electrode material::
1 = Stainless steel
2 = Titanium
3 = Hastelloy B
4 = Hastelloy C
max. pressure:
For single electrode only
xP = PVC cable, x = length in m (standard = 3 m)
xS = silicon-cable, x = length in m (standard = 3 m)
max. temperature: 100 C (single electrode)

80 C (single electrode, adjustable and
multiple electrodes)
150 C with Tri-clamp connection
A = aluminium terminal connection housing

9 = special type connection
Other details:
L1, L2, L3... = length of individual electrodes from
sealing edge of screw joint
Coating:
Teflon
for Tri-clamp connection without coating
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 44
2008
Single or multiple electrodes
PROFI
MESS
2 bar (single electrode), up to 100 bar

on request
pressureless (multiple electrodes)
4 bar with Tri-clamp connection
KS-03
Conductive
Contents
Startpage
Description:
The conductive compact switch of KS-03 has in its connector
head an electronic unit that is supplied with 24 V DC to provide
a weak AC voltage to the switch's electrode rods. When
a conductive fluid establishes a connection between the two
electrodes, it results in an AC current which is recognized by
the electronic components; subsequently they activate at the
output an NO contact either as a limit switch or as MIN-MAX
control. In this way, any excess or shortfall of allowed fill level
can be monitored, or a particular level between two predefined
levels (emptying or filling) can be maintained.
With integrated electronics

24 V DC supply
One switchpoint or MlN/MAX control
Adjustable sensitivity
The conductive compact switch KS-03 is unbeatable in its
versatility. The connector head and the screw joints can be
made of plastic or stainless steel; the electrode rods can
be made of Hastelloy, Titanium, Tantalum or stainless steel
where the rods can be insulated partially or fully using different materials. The electronic component in the connector
head of KS-03 offers the option of four different settings of
sensitivity which enable under circumstances also capturing
interfaces between two fluids with KS-03 if the fluids are
adequately different in their conductivity. The attractive pricing
and compact design of KS-03 make the device an ideal
choice for a number of applications in practically every type
of automation in the industry.
Electrode material VA, Titanium,

Hastelloy or Tantalum
2008
Plastic or stainless steel head
www.profimess.de
F 45
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Operating temp.:
see Pressure-Temperature curves
Supply voltage:
Connection thread:
G 1"-male, G 11/4'-male.
G 11/2"-male or G 2 3/4" swivel nut
Power consumption: max. 2 W
Screw material:
PPH, PTFE or stainless steel 1.4571
Electrode material:
stainless steel 1.4571, Titanium,

Hastelloy B, Hastelloy C or Tantalum
Coating material:
Polyamide or PTFE
Coating length:
full (entire rod, 10 mm at the end

blank) or partial (up to approx.
250 mm from top)
Rod diameter:
4 mm or 6 mm
Rod length:
max. 6 m
Spacer:
one spacer every 1000 mm required
20...30 VDC
Switching voltage:
max. 230 V AC / DC,

min. 5 VDC (CMOS-Relais)
Switching current:
max. 0,1 A AC / DC, min. < 1 mA
Switching load:
max. 25 VA / W
Sensitivity:
3 k...100 kOhm in four levels

(3, 10, 30, 100 selectable)
Operating
temperature
electronics:
Startpage
-20...+85C
Storage temperature
electronics:
-30...+85C
Protection class:
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
Contents
IP65
Pressure-Temperature curves:
KS-03. PP. 3. 1. 2. VA. 6. TI. 1. 2
Conductive
Pressure (bar)
Connector head:
PP = Polypropylene
VA = stainless steel
No. of electrodes:
2 = 2 electroden
3 = 3 electrodes
Screw fitting:
1 = standard (PPH for polypropylene head,
VA for stainless steel head)
2 = PTFE
Connecting thread:
1 = G 1"-male (only for 2 electrodes)
2 = G 1 1/4"-male
3 = G 1 1/2"-male
4 = G 2 3/4"-swivel nut
Temperature (C)
Curve 1: stainless steel screw fitting
with PTFE-coated electrodes
Rod material:
VA = stainless steel 1.4571
HB = Hastelloy B
HC = Hastelloy C
Tl = Titanium
TA = Tantalum
HBTA = Tantalum tip 100 mm, basic rod Hastelloy B
Curve 2: stainless steel screw fitting

with PA-coated electrodes
Curve 3: PPH-screw fitting
Rod diameter:
4 = 4 mm
6 = 6 mm
Curve 4: PTFE-screw fitting

Coating:
PA = polyamide
Tl = partially insulated PTFE
VI = fully insulated PTFE
Curve 5: PA or PVDF-screw fitting (special design)

Curve 6: stainless steel screw fitting (special design)
Sealing:
1 = Viton (standard)
2 = Kalrez
Curve 7: stainless steel screw fitting (special design)

with PA-coated electrodes
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 46
2008
Electronic components:
0 = none
1 = 1 limit value (NO contact)
2 = MIN-MAX control
Dimensions KS-03.PP.2.x.1
Dimensions KS-03.VA.3.x.2
Contents
Startpage
* Larger lengths on request
2008
www.profimess.de
F 47
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
KS-04
Conductive
Level Switch with
Integrated Relay
Contents
Startpage
Compact design
Description:
A probe consisting of 4 electrodes coated with plastic material (PFA) and a blank ground electrode projects from the top
into a fluid vessel. The compact electronic unit supplies a
small AC voltage to the electrodes, thus allowing a small current to flow between them when an electrical contact is established by the conductive fluid. On the output side, there are
two potential-free change-over relays which can operate, selectively, two independent pump controls, a pump control and
an alarm or two alarms. The fail-safe function of the KS-04
can be set to MIN- or MAX-Fail-Safe. Since the switch is
used for different media, it is possible to adjust the response
sensitivity by means of a potentiometer.
2 independent setpoints
MIN/MAX monitoring and
pump control
Universal supply voltage
2008
The KS-04 conductive compact electrode switch offers a universal solution for level monitoring of conductive fluids. PFA
coated electrodes and process connections out of stainless
steel with an electronic housing made of aluminium are resistant to a number of media, thus the KS-04 is predestined for
use in the toughest conditions. Both the output relays can be
loaded with 250 V AC and 8 A, with the result that even
pumps without a protective circuit can be connected directly
through it. The electrodes are screwed on with an M6 thread
into the electronics housing and, in the event of damage, can
be easily replaced by the user. The fact that pump control
and MIN/MAX alarms can be implemented with only a single
compact device renders the KS-04 into a cost-effective solution for level monitoring in conductive fluids of any type.
www.profimess.de
F 49
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
KS-04 Conductive level switch

with integrated relay
Process connection:
G11/2"-male
Connection material:
stainless steel (SS316Ti)
Housing:
aluminium
Media temperature:
-15 to +120C
Ambient temperature:
-15 to +80C
Pressure:
maximum 16 bar
Electrode material:
stainless steel (SS316Ti)
Electrode insulation:
PFA
Electrode length:
The length for each electrode can

be selected in the range of 10 to
300 cm.
Number of electrodes:
4 insulated and one reference

electrode
Switching contacts :
change-over 250 VAC, 8 A
Weight:
0.6 kg no electrodes
Sensitivity:
adjustable, 35 to 50 kOhm
Option:
Electrode voltage:
24 VAC
for electrode length above

50cm an electrode stabilizer can
be used available separately
Electrode current:
maximum 0.08 mA
Supply voltage:
24 / 110 / 230 VAC, +10% -15%,

50/60 Hz, select while ordering
< 5 VA
Consumption:
Protection class:
Contents
Startpage
2xPG16 for cable diameter of 8 to

15mm, 0.75 to 2.5 mm2 cable
cross section
IP 65
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
KS-04.
L1 = 1.
Conductive Level Switch with

Integrated Relay
Electrode lengths:
L1 =, L2 =, L3 =, L4 = in [cm]
please specify in detailed text
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 50
2008
Supply voltage:
1 = 24 VAC
2 = 110 VAC
3 = 230 VAC
FC-01
Limit Level Switch
for Bulk Goods, Fluids,
Slurries, Interface and
Foam Detection
Contents
Startpage
Description:
The FC-01 series of capacitive limit level switches utilizes the
different dielectric constant between air and the medium
being monitored in order to detect its presence. A plate
capacitor, whose electrical properties depend on the dielectric number of the medium surrounding it, is situated within a
protective tube made of plastic. The capacity C of this capacitor is captured by measuring the impedance of a circuit loaded with high-frequency current and evaluated. The response
sensitivity of the FC-01 can be adjusted externally on the
device by means of a simple potentiometer. In the event of a
switching operation, the current in the supplying 2-wire loop
drops from 20 mA to 4 mA (or increases inversely depending
on the polarity) and a potential-free transistor output gets
connected.
Easy to mount
The FC-01 is suited for monitoring solid and fluid media including slurries and foam. Selectively, the sensor material is
made out of Kynar or abrasion-resistant Ryton so that even
hostile and abrasive materials can be detected without problem. The range for temperature is kept at a generous range
of -40C to + 100C in order to allow a maximum of 10 bar
for pressure in the entire range.
Also with regard to the downstream evaluating electronics the
user has no limits. The "Current Sink" output operates along
with 2-wire feeder devices and the potential-free transistor
output can connect to DC and AC voltages up to 40 V DC or
28 V AC. The FC-01 can be provided with terminal housing
for harsh atmospheric conditions or with fixed cable cord
where the cable version can be supplied also as intrinsically
safe EEx ia IIC T4 for Zone 0 or Zone 20. The chemical resistance of the FC-01, its insensitivity to high vibrations, its
accuracy and, not the least, its affordable price render the
FC-01 into a universal device that is capable of replacing an
tuning fork-switch, a rotating vane sensor or a float switch in
many places.
Maintenance-free
No moving components
2008
www.profimess.de
F 51
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
FC-01 Capacitive Limit Level Switch
Measuring length:
100 mm
Process connection: The FC-01 is available with 3/4"-NPT

or with 1"-BSPT thread in stainless steel 1.4401.
- 40 to + 85C
Media temperature:
- 40 to +100C
Pressure:
-1 to 10 bar
Media:
fluids, bulk goods,

slurries,interfaces
Process connection:
3/4"-NPT-male or G1"-male
Connection material:
1.4401
Device version: The FC-01 is supplied as a standard device

made of stainless steel 1.4401 with 1 meter long 4-core
(0.5mm2 per core) cable cord. Selectively, the FC-01 can also
be manufactured as housing version where the housing is
made of shock-proof ABS. Inside the housing is a terminal
block integrated with 5 screw terminals. The cable is inserted
through a 1/2"-NPT or PG13.5 thread.
Contents
Startpage
Sensor material:PVDF or Ryton
Sensor material: The sensor material can be selected

between PPS-Ryton or KYNAR (PDF). An additional
abrasion-proof PPS sleeve is available that has a G1" male
thread that allows only the FC-01 with 3/4"-NPT-male to be
mounted into it.
Cable:
1 m, 4x0.5 mm2 shielded,

polyester hood
Cable insertion:
Sealing:
1/2"-NPT (M 20 x1.5 on request)

FPM
Overfill protection: The FC-01 complies with the German

overfill protection (WHG); however, normally the relevant
approval certification will not be provided.
Approvals: The cable cord of the FC-01 is available as
a intrinsically safe version as per ATEX, II 1/2 GD T6-T4
Zone 0 & 20. The supply voltage then 10...30 V DC.
Standard version
earth
green LED /
voltage
Supply voltage:
standard 10 to 33 VDC,
intrinsically safe 10 to 30 VDC
Output signal:
falling or rising current 20 on 4 mA

or 4 on 20 mA, depending on
connection
Transistor output:
potentiometer /
sensitivity
cable 5mm (0.2)
recess for the

cable
red LED /
output status
yellow LED /
sensor status
protective cap
potentiometer
potential-free, standard 40V DC,

28V AC max. 100mA, max. 2 VA,
intrinsically safe 30V DC
45 mm
(1.8)
process
connection
Measuring accuracy:
2 mm
Dielectric constant:
min. 1.5
Protection class:
IP 65 with cable cord

IP 68 with housing
Housing version
green LED /
voltage
120 mm
(4.7)
Ordering codes:
potentiometer /
sensitivity
80 mm
(3.2)
cable
insertion
1/2 NPT
(optional
M20x1.5)
65 mm
(2.6)
yellow LED /
sensor status
FC-01. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1.
Ordering number:
36 mm (1.4)
red LED /
output status
terminal block
Limit Level Switch for Bulk Goods, Fluids,

Slurries, Interfacial and Foam Detection
72.5 mm
(2.85)
Process connection
1 = 3/4"-NPT thread
2 = 1"-BSPT thread
Device version
1 = standard with cable cord (1 meter)
2 = housing with clamp block
process connection
204 mm
8.0)
Sensor material
1 = PPS-Ryton
2 = PVDF
Overfill protection
0 = none
1= with (as per German WHG)
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 52
2008
Approvals
0 = none
1= with [for cable version only (intrinsically safe version,
dust-impact-proof ATEX, II 1/2 GD T107C Zone 0 & 20)]
FS-01
Float Switch
Contents
Startpage
Easy to assemble
Description
The FS-01 series of float switch operates according to the
principle of buoyancy. A hollow float is lifted by the raising
level of fluid as long as a switching operation is triggered at
an angle of 25 to the horizontal line. The switch can be
suspended by means of a screw joint directly in the vessel
or, in the case of open vessels, from above.
The setpoint is determined by the weight that is always
included in the delivery package. The FS-01 consists of a
polypropylene float with a total of five hollow spaces sealed
against each other. The switch is, therefore, unsinkable even
due to mechanical damages.
Cost-effective
Mount in any position
No response lag
Maintenance-free
Reliable
The FS-01 level switch is suited for level monitoring in fluids
as in all types of industrial applications of direct pump controlling thanks to its high power rating of 16 A at 250 V AC.
It can be used especially as control for MIN, MAX, FULL,
EMPTY, OVERFILL and DRY-RUN.
2008
High switching load
www.profimess.de
F 53
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
FS-01 Float switch
Contents
FS-01.1 - Float switch on 5 m cable with weight

FS-01.2 - Float switch on 10 m cable with weight
Startpage
Contact:
electro-mechanical change-over
16 A ohmic for 250 V AC or
48 V DC, 6 A inductive
Cable:
3 x 1 mm2, Neopren
Protection class:
IP 68
170
80
Pressure:
max. 3.5 bar
Media temperature:
max. 85C
Float:
PP
Media density:
0.7 - 1.15 g/cm3
Switching angle:
+/-25 to the horizontal line
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
brown
FS-01. 2.
FS-01 Float Switch

Operating range:
1 = 5 m cable
2 = 10 m cable
blue
Specific cable length on request
brown
black
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 54
2008
blue
PROFI
MESS
black
FS-01 EX
Float Switch
Contents
Startpage
Description:
In the same way as the simple FS-01, the FS-01 EX operates
according to the principle of buoyancy. A hollow float is lifted
by the raising level of fluid as long as a switching operation is
triggered at an angle of 25 to the horizontal line. The float
switch can be inserted from the side by means of a screw
joint directly in the vessel or, suspended from above with a
weight as the pivot into the vessel or duct. The float of the
FS-01 EX is made of polypropylene as the basic material
which is fully coated with Hypalon. This material, also used
for the FS-01 EX cable, has excellent resistance to chemically hostile media. In the Ex version, the FS-01 EX has goldplated contacts instead of a standard micro-switch that
needs to be evaluated over a intrinsically safe power circuit.
ATEX approval for Zone 0

gases and vapours
Hypalon-coated float
for hostile media
Hypalon cable
Non-Ex-version with high
switching load
The FS-o1-EX level switch is suited for level monitoring in
chemically hostile fluids as they frequently occur, for example, in sewage works or pump wells in contaminated floors.
The switch is supplied always in the Hypalon-coated version
and the standard version can be loaded with 16 A at 250 V
AC. In the ATEX approved variant, the mechanical design
remains unchanged; however, the micro-switch is designed
for a intrinsically safe power circuit.
2008
Ex-version with gold contacts

for intrinsically safe operation
www.profimess.de
F 55
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
FS-01 EX Float switch with Hypalon coating
Contents
FS-01 EX 1.x - Float switch on 5 m cable with weight

FS-01 EX 2.x - Float switch on 10 m cable with weight
Startpage
Switching load: 16 A ohmic for 250 V AC or
48 V DC, 6 A inductive
24 V AC /V DC- 10mA
12 V AC/V DC-100mA
for Ex-version, connected to
intrinsically safe power circuit
V <= 30 VDC; I <= 100 mA; P <= 0,75 W
Cable:
3 x 1 mm2, Hypalon
Protection class:
IP 68 or IP6X for EX
200
92
Pressure:
max. 4 bar
Media temperature.:
max. 95C
(-20C to +70C for EXT6)
Float:
PP, fully Hypalon coated
Media density:
0.8 - 1.10 g/cm3
Switching angle::
+/-25 to the horizontal line
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
FS-01 EX. 1. 2.
brown
FS-01 EX Float switch

Operating range:
1 = 5 m cable
2 = 10 m cable
Approval:
1 = none
2 = ATEX Zone 0
blue
black
brown
PROFI
MESS
black
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 56
2008
blue
FS-02
Float Switch
Contents
Startpage
Reliable
Description:
A permanent magnet forms part of a group of floats which
raise or drop as the fluid level changes. The field force emanating from it moves a second magnet which is situated in a
connector housing depending on the direction of the movement and causes a switching operation. Depending on the
application, different switching elements can be supplied,
such as reed contact, SPDT or proximity switch as per DIN
19234 (Namur) and in Fail-Safe version on request.
Robust
Proven technology
High range of temperature
and pressure
2008
The FS-02 float switch is intended for obtaining level limit
values. It has been designed for lateral mounting on the vessel. Its proven technology has met the requirements of several areas in the industry due to its wide range of applications
in regard to pressure, temperature, media density and resistance.
Equipped with a reed contact switching element or a proximity switch, it can be deployed in the EX Zone 1 over a intrinsically safe power circuit. If the space inside the vessel is
restricted or, for example, agitators or high temperatures render a direct deployment of the switch impossible, the FS-02
can be supplied with a separate vessel in stainless steel
1.4571 and connecting flanges DN25.
www.profimess.de
F 57
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
flange as
per customer
specification
Flange:
standard flange is DN50, PN40; all

pressure levels up to PN250 can be
supplied.
Float:
response
point
float 45
225
Media
temperature
SPDT
-165+400C
125C
IP67
yes *
Reed
-165+400C
125C
IP67
yes *
Initiator
-165+400C
90C
IP67
yes
Switching
element
Protection Ex
class
Switching
voltage [V]
[AC/DC]
Switching
current [A]
[AC/DC]
Switching
power
[VA/W]
Changeover time
[ms]
SPDT
250 / 200
Reed
230 / 200
2.0 / 2.0
40 / 100
50
0.5 / 0.5
10 / -
Initiator*
- / 8.2
10
-/0.4 - 2.5 mA
-/-
<1
* Namur power circuit as per DIN 50227
*as passive element operate intrinsically safe mode
Separate vessel:
Startpage
Dimensions may change depending on pressure and temperature range.
Switching element: as per following table and connection

diagrams
Switching
element
140
dimensions in mm
depending on whether the switch is

used for monitoring MIN or MAX levels,
specify here "switching when surfacing"
or "switching when immersing".
Ambient
temperature
Contents
Hub
float must be compatible with media

density and it must cover the pressure
range of flange. Special type floats in PVC,
PVDF... are available on request.
Output:
switching
element
Top
45
FS-02 Float switch
El. connection: terminal connector housing
Pressure level of separate vessel must

be higher or equal to that of float
switch. The vessel is connected to the
vessel by a DN25 flange with
connecting tubes of 20 mm diameter.
The FS-02 is mounted above its own
DN65 flange.
Protection
class: see table below switching elements
Connection diagram
Ordering codes:
black
schwarz
Ordering number:
FS-02. 5. 4. 1. 3. 3.
Rp
Rp
FS-02 Float switch
blue
blau
Rs brown
braun
LL
black
schwarz
H
=
DIN
19234
19234
weiss
white
RSis
R1
Rp
Rs
N
Rp
DC
DC
DC
gelb/gr n
yellow/green
Float
1 = Density
2 = Density
3 = Density
4 = Density
5 = Density
6 = Density
SPDT
PN 40 (standard)
PN 16
PN 25
PN 40
PN 64
PN100
PN 160
PN 250
0.40
0.59
0.95
0.60
0.84
1.30
0.58
0.94
1.60
0.83
1.29
2.20
Reed
max. pressure:
g/cm3,
g/cm3,
g/cm3,
g/cm3,
g/cm3,
g/cm3,
max. media
temperature:
PN 64
PN 64
PN 64
PN 250
PN 250
PN 250
max. ambient
temperature:
Output:
1 = switching when immersing
2 = switching when surfacing
Switching element:
2= SPDT
3= reed contact
4= proximity switch as per NAMUR, Fail Safe
Separate vessel:
1= no separate vessel
2= separate vessel PN 16
3= separate vessel PN 100
4= separate vessel PN250
PROFI
MESS
Initiator
250 bar
(-165) -60C+180C (+400),
values in brackets with temperature
protective plate between flange
and electronic components
see under Table Switching
elements
Float:
Separate vessel:

Tmax.: -75C to +350C
Pmax.: 250 bar
Weight:
2.5 kg + flange
Accuracy:
+/- 5 mm
Hysteresis:
+/- 14 mm
Float's lift:
80 - 85 mm
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 58
2008
Flange
0 = DN 50,
1 = DN 65,
2 = DN 65,
3 = DN 65,
4 = DN 65,
5 = DN 65,
6 = DN 65,
7 = DN 65,
FS-03
Float Switch
Contents
Startpage
Low-cost design
Description:
The FS-03 float switch operates according to the principle of
buoyancy. A hollow float is lifted by the raising level of fluid as
long as a switching operation is triggered at an angle of 45
to the horizontal line. The switch can be suspended by
means of a screw joint directly in the vessel or, in the case of
open vessels, from above.
The setpoint is determined by the weight that must be ordered separately. The FS-03 consists of a polypropylene float
with a total of two hollow spaces sealed against each other.
The switch is, therefore, unsinkable even due to mechanical
damages. As regards the cable material, the user has a choice between PVC or Neopren
2 chamber system
Compatible with
drinking water
No mercury
2008
The FS-03 level switch is suited for level monitoring in fluids
as in all types of industrial applications of direct pump controlling thanks to its high power rating of 15 A at 250 V AC.
The switch is small in size and its switching behavior is individually adjustable through a variable weight. It can be used
especially as control for MIN, MAX alarm, DRY-RUN and as
pump control.
The affordable price of FS-03 makes the switch highly recommendable for series deployment in large numbers.
www.profimess.de
F 59
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
Pump control
FS-03 Float switch
MAX-Niveau
Cable material: The FS-03 is selectively provided with a

PVC or Neopren cable
Hysteresis
Cable length: The cable length can be selected from among

5, 10 and 20 meters.
mi
Contents
n1
50
MIN-Niveau
Startpage
Contact:
change-over, 15 A ohmic
(8 A inductive) for 250 VAC
Switching speed:
max. 600/min
Protection class:
IP 68
cable diameter 9 mm,

3-core for a cross-section
of 1.5 mm2
Dry-run protection
Float material:
polypropylene
Media density:
at least. 0.8 g/cm3
Media temperature:
-20 to +80C
Pressure:
max. 5 bar
Angle of switching:
+/- 45C to the horizontal line
Life span:
min. 10 million switching

operations
Braun
Schwarz
Blau
MIN-Alarm
Braun
Schwarz
Blau
Braun
Schwarz
Blau
Overfill protection
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
FS-03. P.
05
Float switch
Cable material:
P = PVC
N = Neopren
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 60
2008
Cable length [in meters]:

05 = 5 m
10 = 10 m
20 = 20 m
FS-05
Float Switch
for Mounting through
1" Bushings
Contents
Startpage
Description: The FS-05 plastic float switch is a level switch

in which a ball actuates a micro-switch depending on its inclination angle of the float cylinder. The single pole change-over
contact changes its switching status depending on if the axis
of the FS-05 is inclined by more than 20 positively or negatively to the horizontal line (fluid surface). On the basis of this
action, the FS-05 is ideal suited for automating emptying and
filling fluid vessels. The special feature of the cylindrical
design of this series of float switch is that the maximum
external diameter of the floating body does not exceed 29
mm, thereby allowing to insert the switch through an inchsystem bushing into the vessel. The switching load rated for
maximum 10 A at 250 V AC allows the user to switch pumps
or large magnetic valves directly using the FS-05. In this, for
safety-technical reasons a contact protective relay such as
the PROFIMESS MSR-10 should be deployed whenever
there is a possibility of humans coming into contact with the
measuring medium.
High pressure resistance
Range of application: The FS-05 series of float switches is

used in large numbers across several industries. Their excellent price to performance ratio often allows the user to decide
in favor of such a plastic switch as against, for example,
tuning fork switches or capacitive limit switches. Moreover,
expensive downstream electronic units can be avoided since
the FS-05 is capable of processing relatively high performance directly. Particularly, if ferrite particles in the measuring
medium cause adhesions or float jamming with conventional
float magnetic switches, the FS-05 with its non-magnetic
switching element can be a dependable alternative.
Cost-effective
High switching load through
micro-switch
Neopren cable
Optionally with suspension weight
2006
The FS-05 can be mounted in two different ways. The float

switch can be attached either sideways by means of a conventional cable joint so that the cable length projecting into
the vessel determines the angle of switching and, therefore,
the setpoints or, the FS-05 can be suspended vertically from
above. The response points are determined by the position
of the relocatable suspension weight which is optionally
available.
www.profimess.de
F 61
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Function:
omni-directional float switch
Measuring medium:
fluid media
Density range:
0.751.5 kg/cm3
Pressure:
max. 5.5 bar
Media temperature:
max. 85C
Float material:
Copolymer polypropylene
Cable material
Neopren
Weight without cable:
61g
Cable weight:
Suspension weight
adjustable on the
cable (option):
48g per meter
Contents
Startpage
175g
Standard cable lengths: 5m and 10m

(other lengths on request)
Switching angle::
+/- 20
Switching element:
micro-switch as change-over
contact
cable 3 x 0.75 mm2
Switching load:
10 (2) A ohmic (inductive)

for max. 250 V AC, 50/60 Hz
emptying
Contacts:
silver / nickel
Protection class:
IP 68
blue
brown
black
blue
brown
black
filling
Switching angle
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
FS-05. 10. 1
Float Switch for Mounting through 1" Bushings

Cable length:
05 = 5 m Neopren cable
10 = 10 m Neopren cable
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 62
2006
Suspension weight:
0 = no suspension weight
1 = with suspension weight
FS-10
Float Switch for Bulk Goods
Contents
Startpage
Description:
The FS-10 plastic float switch is a level switch in which,
depending on the angle of inclination of the floating cylinder,
a ball activates a microswitch. The switch is closed if the
vertical axis of the FS-10 is tilted by more than 10 towards
right or left. Due to this action, the FS-10 is ideally suited
for shutting down a filling operation for grain, flour, granulate
material or powders in silos or other containers. There are
three basic models of FS-10 available which are different
with regard to their applicability in explosion-prone areas.
The simplest design does not have the EX approval and is
made of a polypropylene hollow body and a Neopren cable.
This easily affordable device is capable of covering 80% of
all applications. Both the ATEX approved models are allowed
either only for dust materials or for gasses and dust materials
highly prone to explosions. In these devices the basic body
is surrounded additionally by a shell made of Hypalon, an
excellent resistant material, where also the cable is made
of this material. In the case of the purely EX variant for dust
material, up to 240 V AC / 1A can be connected directly
through FS-10 regardless of the EX-approval; the supply
system for the gas and dust EX model of FS-10 is handled
through an intrinsically safe isolated switching amplifier.
ATEX approval for dust and

gases in zones 0 and 20
Double-shell housing with
Hypalon coating
The FS-10 series of flow switches offers the ideal solution
wherever a bulk material filling operation needs to be shut
down in a container. These devices are cost-effective, extremely robust and water-proofed and can be installed easily.
The three models of FS-10 cover nearly every type of applications as they comply with the highest requirements for
protection against explosion and media resistance.
The FS-10 is fixed directly to the cable and suspended into
the silo, where optionally a load weight on the cable acts as
the pivot; alternatively FS-10 can be inserted by means of a
cable gland.
At the output point of FS-10 a potential-free NO-contact
is available which is capable of connecting up to 20A at
250 V AC depending on the design of the device.
High switching capacity

due to microswitches
Neopren or Hypalon cables
2008
Optionally with load weights
www.profimess.de
F 63
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Function:
Switching element:
microswitch as NO contact
Electrical conn.:
cable 3 x 1 mm2
Switching power:
non-Ex version FS-10.xx.O:

20 (8) A ohmic (inductive) at
max. 250 V AC, 50/60 Hz
omni-directional float switch
Measuring medium: bulk materials such as powders,

granulates or grains
Media temperature: non-EX version FS-10.xx.O:
max. 85C
Contents
EX versions FS-10.xx.(1 or 2):

T6 at ambient temperature
from -20C...+70C
dust EX version FS-10.xx.1:

1 A at max. 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz,
must be operated with 1A/240 V fuse
Float material:
Copolymer Polypropylene,
in EX versions with Hypalon coating
Cable material:

Neopren
gas- & dust EX version FS-10.xx.2:

max. 24 V AC/DC with max. 10 mA
or 12 V AC/DC with max. 100 mA,
must be operated with intrinsically
safe isolated switching amplifier,
Uo <= 30 V, lo <= 100 mA,
Po <= 0.75 W, Li = <= 2 micro Henry,
Ci <= 203 picoF at 2 m cable
(additionally 0.36 mH per kilometer
cable)
EX versions FS-10.xx.(1 or 2):

Hypalon
Weight without
cable:
non-Ex version FS-10.xx.O: 462 g

EX versions FS-10.xx.(1 or 2): 495 g
Cable weight:
Contacts:

Ag/ Cd oxide

115 g per meter
dust EX version FS-10.xx.1:

Ag/ Ni
EX- versions FS-10.xx.(1 or 2):

110 g per meter
Standard
cable lengths:
Protection class:
250 g
non-Ex version FS-10.xx.O: IP68

EX versions FS-10.xx.(1 or 2): IP6X
5 m and 10 m
(other lengths on request)
Dimensions:
+/- 10 from the vertical line
FS-10.xx.0
FS-10.xx.(1 u. 2)
152 mm
Switching angle:
Gas- & dust EX version FS-10.xx.2:

Au
200 mm
Adjustable load
weight on cable
(option):
Startpage
Ordering codes
Ordering number:
FS-10. 10. 1. 1
95 mm
75 mm
Suspended Float Switch

for bulk materials
Switching angle:
Cable length:
05 = 5 m cable
10 = 10 m cable
[][] = other lengths
blue
yellow /green
brown
Ignition protection class:

0 = none
1 = dust EX Zone 20, 21 or 22
2 = dust EX and gas EX Zone 20, 21, 22 and Zone 0, 1, 2
blue-brown
closed on
deflection
Load weight:
0 = none
1 = with load weight
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 64
2008
+/-10
FS-04
Float Switch
for Horizontal or
Vertical Mounting
Contents
Startpage
Description:
A float spatially completely separated from the outer side of
the vessel moves up and down along with the fluid being
monitored. This movement is transmitted by means of a permanent magnet at the end of the float to a change-over
contact mounted in an aluminium switch housing which triggers a switching operation when the float reaches the center
position. The float can be provided with a rod extension so as
to generate different switching hystereses and switching
points. The switch housing can be supplied with protection
type IP68 so that also applications under water (up to 20m
water column) can be included. Optionally, PROFIMESS
GMBH supplies a prefabricated proven counter-flange that is
compatible with the standard connection of the FS-04 with
square flange and test actuators for a "dry" simulation of the
switching operation.
Suitable in ship-building
Cost-effective
Robust
Square flange or thread
connection
2008
The FS-04 series of magnetic float switches is used for limit
value switching in fluids. The switches are passive components and operate without any auxiliary power source.
Thanks to the wide range of operating temperatures and
pressure, including various mounting positions on top, on the
side, under water or in potentially explosive areas as well as
media-contacted components in stainless steel, the switches
can be deployed in many ways.
In ship-building, particularly, the FS-04 has gained a significant position since it has an extremely robust design and
can be used for operation under the harsh conditions on
board without a problem in contrast to many other types of
switches.
www.profimess.de
F 65
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
If the hinge of the switch should never touch the medium, a Z
(horizontal mounting) or L shaped (vertical mounting) extension rod can be used which spatially keeps the switching point
from the hinge.
FS-04 Float switch for horizontal

or vertical mounting
Mounting position: The FS-04 can be mounted horizontally
or vertically to the medium.
Versions: As against the basic version, the FS-04 can be
supplied with a protective rubber bag or, for higher media
temperatures, a protective silicon rubber bag so as to protect
the hinge from soiling. In the case of versions for operation
under water the switch housing is designed for IP68 up to
20m of water column.
Switching element:
Switching load:
1 micro-switch with two switching

contacts (NO and NC)
250V AC12 10A,
220V DC13 0.6A (IEC 947-5-1)
Hysteresis: If the FS-04 should facilitate adjustable hysteresis a switching segment is situated at the end of float
magnet in which the hysteresis can be modified by inserting
the stopper pin and by selecting the rod extension accordingly
Process connection: As a standard connection, the FS-04

has a square flange with 92 mm diameter. Irrespective of this,
also DIN flanges DN80 or DN100 of different materials can be
supplied or a 2" thread connection; however, in this case only
a float with 52 mm diameter can be used.
1xPG16, cable cross-section

5x2.5 mm2, in under water version
molded cable with a cross-section
of 5x1.5 mm2 (please specify
cable length while ordering)
Protection class:
IP 65 except for the under water

version IP 68 to 20 meter water
column
Rod length: As against the basic version, the FS-04 can be

provided with a rod extension up to 300 mm so as to increase the switching stroke.
Weight:
1.8...3.5 kg
Wet components:
stainless steel
Housing material:
Al casting
-20 to +80C
Media temperature:
standard version -20 to +250C,

protective rubber bag 0 to +100C,
protective silicon rubber bag
0 to +200C
Mounting position:
1 = horizontal
2 = vertical
Media density:
Version:
A = standard
G = standard with protective rubber bag
S = standard with protective silicon rubber bag
U = under water
V = under water with protective rubber bag
Z = under water with protective silicon rubber bag
0.7 g/ccm without extension,

0.8 g/ccm to 300 mm extension
in float diameter 64 mm,
0.85 g/ccm to 300 mm extension
in float diameter 52 mm
Certificates:
Cenelec, Germanic Lloyd
Option:
Test actuator: with the test

actuator the functioning of FS-04
can be checked without dismantling the switch and without changing the level. The test actuator is
available as simple steel or stain
less steel version.
Counter-flange:
92 mm square counter-flange can

be supplied in steel or stainless
steel versions which are prepared
for direct welding on to the vessel.
They can be provided with extended
spacer bolts for using a test actuator.
The switch housing is available in

pressure-compression encapsulation, in which case the protection
against ignition is EEx dme IIC T4.
Ordering codes:
FS-04. 1. A. 1. 1. 1.
Float Switch for Horizontal or

Vertical Mounting
Hysteresis:
1= fixed hysteresis
2= adjustable hysteresis (horizontal mounting position)
Process connection:
1 = 92 square flange PN 25
2 = DN 80 PN 40 steel
3 = DN 100 PN 40 steel
3a = DN 125 PN 40 steel
3b = DN 150 PN 40 steel
4 = DN 80 PN 40 stainless steel 1.4571
5 = DN 100 PN 40 stainless steel 1.4571
5a = DN 125 PN 40 stainless steel 1.4571
5b = DN 150 PN 40 stainless steel 1.4571
B = 2" BSP thread (horizontal mounting position only)
N = 2" NPT thread (horizontal mounting position only)
Rod length in [mm]:
1 = 0 mm
2 = 100 mm
3 = 200 mm
4 = 300 mm
5= Z-shaped (not for adjustable hysteresis)
6= L-shaped (not for adjustable hysteresis)
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 66
2008
PN25
PROFI
MESS
Startpage
Pressure:
Ordering number:
Contents
Versions:
Counter-flange with test actuator:
76
65
Contents
black
Counter-flange without test actuator:
76
65
blue
black
brown
37
Startpage
37
FS-04.1.U
FS-04.2.A.1.1.6
FS-04.1.A.1.B
2008
Only one value can be specified while

ordering:
L sh = upper switching point
L sl = lower switching point
www.profimess.de
F 67
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
FS-04.1.A.1.2
Contents
Startpage
FS-04.1.A.1.1.5
Only one value can be specified while

ordering:
L sh = upper switching point
L sl = lower switching point
FS-04.1.G.1.1.1
FS-04.1.A.2.1.x
FS-04.x.x.2.x.
Lk = rod length [mm]
100
200
254
373
473
573
25
52
73
94
= mounting length [mm]
x1 = min. upper switching distance [mm]
300
x2 = min. lower switching distance [mm]
25
48
61
68
x3 = max. upper switching distance [mm]
110
190
250
310
x4 = max. lower switching distance [mm]
90
170
250
305
L = depending on rod length 254 - 563
Data refers to water at 20C.
FS-04.1.A.1.1.x
FS-04.x.x.1.x.x
Lk = rod length [mm]
100
200
202
321
421
521
118
180
234
286
= mounting length [mm]
Lm = total deflection [mm]

x1= switching point top [mm]
300
27
45
81
x2 = switching point bottom [mm] 16
30
47
43
Data refers to water at 20C.
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 68
2008
L = depending on rod length 202 - 521
LS-10
Float Switch for
Vertical Mounting
Contents
Startpage
Reliable and robust technology
Description
The LS-10 series of level switches operates according to the
principle of a float with magnetic transmission. The switch consists of a sliding tube with embedded reed contacts, one or
more floats in which ring magnets are mounted, and a connecting module. The float is lifted inside the vessel due to the rising
fluid level; subsequently, it actuates a reed contact as a result
of the magnetic field of the permanent magnet situated in the
float through the sliding tube wall. The reed contact can be
designed to function as a NC-contact, NO-contact or changeover contact.
Mounting from top or into vessel bottom

Plastic, brass or stainless steel versions
Contacts available as NC-contact, NO-contact
or change-over contact
2008
The LS-10 level switches are suited for monitoring the level of
nearly all types of fluid media as an alarm for full or empty
levels, for controlling valves and pumps or for alert signals. By
deploying potential-free reed contacts, the level switches provide an ideal switching element in combination with PLC controls..
www.profimess.de
F 69
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions
miniature float switch made of plastic, brass or

stainless steel
float switch for general applications made of brass or
stainless steel
Float types:
Float
No.
Form
1
2
3
4
4a
cylinder
cylinder
cylinder
sphere
cylinder
Material
buna
stainless steel
buna
stainless steel
stainless steel
(mm)
min.
Density
25
27
40
52
44
0.9 kg/l
0.78 kg/l
0.7 kg/l
0.7 kg/l
0.81 kg/l
max.
max.
Pressure Temp.
3 bar
16 bar
3 bar
40 bar
16 bar
80C
100C
80C
180C
300C
Contents
Startpage
Connections:
No. 2
64x58
82x80
Drawing
No.
Can be used
for type:
polyester housing, locking

plug G 2 made of PP
LS-10.06-09
polyester housing, locking plug

G 2 made of PVC
LS-10.06-09
aluminium housing,
locking plug G 2 made of brass
LS-10.06/08
aluminium housing,
locking plug G 2 made of
stainless steel
LS-10.06-09
4a
aluminium housing,
locking plug G 1 1/2 made of
stainless steel
LS-10.06-09
aluminium housing,
brass
LS-10.01/
02/04
aluminium housing,
stainless steel
LS-10.01/
03/05
Durethan coupling pin,

locking plug G 1 made of PP
LS-10.01-05
LS-10.01-05
Durethan coupling pin,

locking plug G 1 made of brass
LS-10.01/
02/04
Durethan coupling pin, locking

plug G 1"made of stainless steel
LS-10.01/
03/05
Aluminium
Pg
11 x 1,5
M 20
~ 56
ABS
~ 75
Connection Description
No.
M 20
Pg
11x 1,5
30 oder
or SW
3636
SW 30
SW
SW
30oder
or SW
36
SW 30
SW 36
L = ...
R 1"
2"
R
1 oder
or RR2
Polypropylen
polypropylene
oder
PVC
or
PVC
L = ...
1 or
R 2
R 1"
oder
R 2"
stainless steel
Edelstahl
12
12
No. 3
polyamide
polypropylene
SW 27
R 1
PP, MS or VA
Ordering codes
Ordering number:
Other specifications:
Sliding tube length:
L = xxxx mm
Position of 1st switching point: L1 = xxxx mm
Position of n switching point:
Ln = xxxx mm
LS-10. 08. 3. 33. 0
Float Switch for Vertical Mounting

Version (combination of sliding tube / float No.):
01=
02=
03=
04=
05=
06=
07=
08=
09=
(all length specifications are measured from the sealing edge

of relevant connection joint)
mini float switch, PVC/Buna (No. 1)

mini float switch, brass/Buna (No. 1)
mini float switch, stainless steel/Buna (No. 1)
mini float switch, brass/stainless steel (No. 2)
mini float switch, stainless steel/stainless steel (No. 2)
standard float switch, brass/Buna (No. 3)
standard float switch, stainless steel/Buna (No. 3)
standard float switch, brass/stainless steel (No. 4)
standard float switch, stainless steel/stainless steel (No. 4)
Example:
LS-10. 08. 3. 33. 0
L = 1000, L1 = 150, L2 = 950,
water, density 1 kg/l, 0 bar, 40C
standard level switch
with brass sliding tube and VA float No. 4,
connection No. 3, housing Al, locking plug R2", brass,
2 change-over contacts
total length 1 m,
1. switching point 150 mm from top,
2.switching point 950 mm from top
No special issues
Connection:
0
= standard (as per description on following pages)
1...9 = as per table "Connection"
x
= special type connection (please specify in detailed text)
Contacts:
(from top for each contact, specify the function of contact)
1 = NO-contact
2 = NC-contact
3 = change-over contact
Special versions:
0 = none
1 = please specify in detailed text
PROFI
MESS
medium
medium density
max. pressure
max. temperature
special issues
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 70
2008
No. 1
LS-10.01
Startpage
2 m PVC
PVC
8 mm
40 mm
40 mm
R 1/8-male
No. 1, Buna
approx. 24 mm
1
2
3 (1, 2 on request)
10 VA / 250 V/ 0.5 A
80C
no pressure
IP 54
R 1/8"
L = 40
~ 28
L1 = ...
Contents
Connecting cable:
min. sliding tube length:
max. sliding tube length:
Screw in thread:
Float type:
Immersion depth:
Number of contacts (normal):
Number of contacts (max.):
Switching load:
max. temperature:
max. pressure:
Protection class:
8
25
Can be supplied only in the configuration shown, other

versions above 20 pieces on request.
2 m PVC
stainless steel
8 mm
50 mm
1000 mm
R 1/8-male
No. 1, Buna
approx.10 mm
1
2
3 (1,2 on request))
10 VA
250 V/ 0.5 A
80C
3 bar
IP 54
R 1/8"
wrench
SW 14 size 14
immersion
Eintauchtiefe
depth for
bei Dichte 1
density 1
2 m PVC
brass
8 mm
50 mm
1000 mm
R 1/8-male
No. 1, Buna
approx.10 mm
1
2
3 (1,2 on request))
10 VA
250 V/ 0.5 A
80C
3 bar
IP 54
~ 23
max. temperature:
max. pressure:
Protection class
LS-10.03
L = 50
L1 = ...(min. 15)
Connecting cable:
min. sliding tube:
max. sliding tube:
screw in thread:
Float type:
Immersion depth:
Number of contacts (max.)
Switching load:
LS-10.02
wrench
SW 14 size 14
immersion
Eintauchtiefe
depth
for 1
bei
Dichte
density 1
8
25
Connecting cable:
min. sliding tube:
max. sliding tube:
screw in thread:
Float type:
Immersion depth:
Switching load:
2008
max. temperature:
max. pressure:
Protection class:
LS-10.04
2 m PVC
brass
8 mm
50 mm
1000 mm
R 1/8-male
No.2,
stainless steel
ca. 18 mm
1
2
3 (1,2 on request)
10 VA
250 V/ 0.5 A
80C
16 bar
IP 54
LS-10.05
2 m PVC
stainless steel
8 mm
50 mm
1000 mm
R 1/8-male
No.2,
stainless steel
ca. 18 mm
1
2
3 (1,2 on request)
10 VA
250 V/ 0.5 A
80C
16 bar
IP 54
wrench size 14
immersion
depth for
density 1
www.profimess.de
F 71
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Connecting cable:
min. sliding tube:
max. sliding tube:
Screw in thread:
Float type:
Immersion depth:
Switching load:
Function 1, 2:
R 3/8"
L = 100
L1 = ...(min. 30)
wrench
SW
22 size 22
~ 45
15
immersion
Eintauchtiefe
depth for bei
Dichte
1 1
density
Function 3:
max. temperature:
max. pressure:
Protection class:
12
40
LS-10.07
2 m PVC
brass
12 mm
100 mm
4000 mm
R 3/8-male
No. 3, Buna
approx.15 mm
1
5
1, 2, 3
2 m PVC
stainless steel
12 mm
100 mm
4000 mm
R 3/8-male
No. 3, Buna
approx.15 mm
1
5
1, 2, 3
100 VA
250 V/2A
40 VA
250 V/1A
80C
3 bar
IP 65
100 VA
250 V/2A
40 VA
250 V/1A
80C
3 bar
IP 65
LS-10.08
LS-10.09
Connecting cable:
min. sliding tube:
max. sliding tube:
Screw in thread:
Float type:
2 m PVC
brass
12 mm
100 mm
4000 mm
R 3/8-male
No.4, No.5
stainless steel
Immersion depth:
approx. 32 mm
Number of contacts (normal): 1
Number of contacts (max.): 5
1, 2, 3
Switching load:
Function 1, 2:
100 VA
250 V/2A
Function 3:
40 VA
250 V/1A
max. temperature:
80C
max. pressure:
16 bar
Protection class:
IP 65
R 3/8"
wrench
SW
22 size 22
L = 100
L1 = ...(min. 45)
LS-10.06
~ 45
immersion bei
Eintauchtiefe
depth for
Dichte 1
density 1
12
52
Contents
Startpage
2 m PVC
stainless steel
12 mm
100 mm
4000 mm
R 3/8-male
No.4, No.5
stainless steel
approx. 32 mm
1
5
1, 2, 3
100 VA
250 V/2A
40 VA
250 V/1A
80C
40 bar
IP65
Pin layout and connector colours

Cable colours and numbering for connections 1-6
GREEN
GRN / /11
SCHWARZ
BLACK / 1 / 1
BLACK / 2 / 2
SCHWARZ
BROWN/ /3 3
BRAUN
BLUE //44
BLAU
OBEN
TOP
L L1 1
BROWN
BRAUN/ /22
GELB / /3 3
YELLOW
BOTTOM
UNTEN
L L2 2
GREY
/ 4/ 4
GRAU
PINK
/ 5/5
ROSA
BLUE
BLAU/ 6/ 6
1 SETPOINT
1 SCHALTPUNKT
2 SETPOINTS
2 SCHALTPUNKTE
GREEN
GRN // 22
WEISS
BLUE / /11
ROT // 2
RED
OBEN
TOP
L 1L 1
BROWN
BRAUN/ /33
BRAUN
BROWN/ /22
GRN / /5 5
GREEN
BLAU
BLAU/ 4/ 4
GRN
GREEN/ 3/ 3
PINK
/ 5/ 5
ROSA
WEISS // 33
WHITE
YELLOW
GELB / 4 / 4
BOTTOM
UNTEN
L 2L 2
GREY
/ 6/ 6
GRAU
BRAUN //66
BROWN
BLUE
BLAU // 77
PINK
ROSA/ /88
L1
L1
L2
MITTE
CENTER
LL22
3
1
UNTEN
BOTTOM
LL33
CENTER
MITTE
L 2L 2
BOTTOM
UNTEN
L 3L 3
3
2
3
2
HTS plug
(for max. 3 NO-contacts/NC-contacts or 2 change-over)
TOP
OBEN
L 1L 1
GRAU / /99
GREEN
PROFI
MESS
L1
OBEN
TOP
LL11
3 SETPOINTS
3 SCHALTPUNKTE
BLUE/RED
SCHWARZ // 11
YELLOW
GELB / /1 1
plug type Hirschmann

(for 1-2 NO-contact/NC-contact or 1 change-over)
3 SETPOINTS
3 SCHALTPUNKTE
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
TO
L1
L2
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 72
2008
2 SCHALTPUNKTE
2 SETPOINTS
Connections 7, 8, 9
LS-11
for Side Mounting
Contents
Startpage
Small dimensions for mounting
Description
principle of a float with magnetic transmission. The switch consists of a sliding tube with embedded reed contacts, a float in
which ring magnets are mounted, and a connecting module. The
float is lifted inside the vessel due to the rising fluid level; subsequently, it actuates a reed contact as a result of the magnetic
field of the permanent magnet situated in the float through the sliding tube wall. The reed contact can be designed to function as
a NO-contact, NC-contact or change-over contact.
Reliable and robust technology

Sideways mounting into vessel wall
Brass or stainless steel versions
2008
Contacts available as NO-contact,

NC-contact or change-over contact
The LS-11 level switches are suited for monitoring the level of
nearly all types of fluid media as an alarm for full or empty
levels, for controlling valves and pumps or for alert signals. By
deploying potential-free reed contacts, the floating magnetic
switches provide an ideal switching element in combination with
PLC controls.
www.profimess.de
F 73
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Float switch for general applications made of brass of

stainless steel
R 3/8"
SW 22
L1 = ...(min. 50)
L = ...
min. 70
Versions
38
immersion depth
Eintauchtiefe bei
for density 1
Float types:
Form
Material
min.
(mm) density
3
4
5
cylinder
sphere
cylinder
buna
stainless steel
stainless steel
40
52
44
0.7 kg/l
0.7 kg/l
0.81 kg/l
max.
pressure
max.
temp.
1 bar
40 bar
16 bar
80C
180C
300C
~ 45
Float
No.
15
Dichte 1
Contents
Startpage
12
40
min. 70
Description
Drawing
No.
Can be used
for type:
polyester housing, locking

plug G 2" made of PP
LS-11.06 -09
polyester housing, locking plug

G 2" made of plastic
LS-11.06 -09
aluminium housing,
locking plug G 2" made
of brass
LS-11.06 /08
aluminium housing,
locking plug G 2" made
of stainless steell
aluminium housing,
locking plug G 1 1/2" made
of stainless steell
R 3/8"
SW 22
38
immersion depth
Eintauchtiefe bei
for density 1
Dichte 1
4a
No. 1
12
52
LS-11.07 /09
Other specifications:
Medium, medium density, max. pressure, max. temperature
Special issues
LS-11.07 /09
Example: LS-11. 08. 3. 3. 0

water, density 1 kg/l, 0 bar, 40C
standard level switch for side mounting,
with brass sliding tube and stainless steel float No. 4,
connection No. 3, Al housing,
locking plug R2", brass, 1 change-over contact, no special
issues
No. 2
64x58
82x80
aluminium
Aluminium
M 20
Pg
11x1.5
~ 56
~ 75
ABS
M 20
Pg
11x1.5
SW 30
30 oder
or SW
3636
SW
SW
SW
SW 36
36
SW 30
30oder
or SW
Polypropylen
polypropylene
oder
PVC
or PVC
1 or
R 2
RR 1"
oder
R 2"
L = ...
L = ...
1 oder
or RR22"
R 1"
12
12
Electrical connections, see Data sheet LS-10
Ordering codes
Ordering number:
LS-11. 08. 3. 3.

for Side Mounting
Version (Combination Sliding tube/Float No.):
06 = standard float switch, brass/Buna (No. 3)
07 = standard float switch, stainless steel/Buna (No. 3)
08 = standard float switch, brass/stainless steel (No. 4)
09 = standard float switch, stainless steel/stainless steel (No. 4)
Connection:
0
= standard (as per Description)
1...4 = as per table Connections
x
= Special type connection (please specify in detailed text)
1 = NO-contact
2 = NC-contact
LS-11.07
1 m PVC
brass
12 mm
100 -1000 mm
R 3/8-male
No. 3, Buna
1 (max. 3)
1, 2, 3
1 m PVC
stainless steel
12 mm
100 -1000 mm
R 3/8-male
No. 3, Buna
1 (max. 3)
1, 2, 3
100 VA, 250 V/2A

40 VA, 250V/1A
100 VA, 250 V/2A

40 VA, 250 V/1A
80C
5 bar
IP 65
80C
5 bar
IP65
LS-11.08
LS-11.09
Connecting cable:
Screw in thread:
Float type:
1 m PVC
brass
12 mm
120 - 1000 mm
R 3/8-male
No. 4,
stainless steel
1 (max. 3)
1, 2, 3
1 m PVC
stainless steel
12 mm
120 - 1000 mm
R 3/8-male
No. 4,
stainless steel
1 (max. 3)
1, 2, 3
100 VA, 250 V/2A

40 VA, 250 V/1A
80C
16 bar
IP 65
100 VA, 250 V/2A

40 VA, 250 V/1A
80C
25 bar
IP 65
Number of contacts:
Switching load:
Function 1, 2:
Function 3:
max. temperature:
max. pressure:
Protection class:
Special versions:
0 = none
PROFI
MESS
LS-11.06
Connecting cable:
Screw in thread:
Float type:
Number of contacts:
Switching load:
Function 1, 2:
Function 3:
40 VA, 250 V/1A
max. temperature:
max. pressure:
Protection class:
Edelstahl
stainless steel
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 74
2008
~ 45
Connection
No.
L1 = ...(min. 76)
L = ...
Connections:
LS-14
Miniature Plastic
Float Switch for
Side Mounting
Contents
Startpage
Compact design
Description
principle of a float with magnetic transmission. The float is lifted
inside the vessel due to the rising fluid level; subsequently, it
actuates a reed contact as a result of the magnetic field of the
permanent magnet situated in the float. Depending on the
mounting position of the float switch, the reed contact acts
normally opened or normally closed.
Only a single mechanically moving part

PP or Nylon versions
2008
The LS-14 float switches are suited for monitoring the level of
nearly all types of fluid media that are non-hostile to the material used as an alarm for full or empty levels, for controlling valves and pumps or for alert signals.
www.profimess.de
F 75
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions
Dimensions:
LS-14.1
Low-cost float switch made of PP or Nylon

Screw thread types R 1/4" or 1/2" NPT
Contents
Startpage
Connecting cable:
0.3 m PE cord
Screw thread types:

LS-14.1:
LS-14.2:
R 1/4"-male with counter nut

1/2" NPT-male
Material:
LS-14.x.1:
LS-14.x.2:
PP
Nylon
NO-contact or NC-contact at
rising level, depending on type of
mounting
max. pressure:
atmospheric
max. temperature:
LS-14.x.1:
LS-14.x.2:
-10 +80C
-10 +110C
min. media density:
0.7 kg/l
LS-14.2
Ordering codes
Mounting variants and functions of contact
Ordering number:
LS-14. 1. 1. 2
Miniature Plastic Float Switch
NC-contact
at rising level
Connection:
NO-contact
at rising level
1 = R 1/4-male
2 = 1/2 NPT-male
Material:
1 = Polypropylene
2 = Nylon
Contact:
PROFI
MESS
NO-contact
at falling level
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 76
2008
NC-contact
at falling level
2 = 300 V DC/AC, 0.5 A, 50 VA
LS-15
for Side Mounting
Contents
Startpage
Description
principle of a float with magnetic transmission. The float is lifted inside the vessel due to the rising fluid level; subsequently,
it actuates a reed contact as a result of the magnetic field of
the permanent magnet situated in the float. Depending on the
mounting position, the reed contact acts normally opened or
normally closed.
Compact design
Only a single mechanically moving part
Fully stainless steel version
2008
The LS-15 float switches are suited for monitoring the level
of nearly all types of fluid media as an alarm for full or empty
levels, for controlling valves and pumps or for alert signals.
By deploying potential-free reed contacts, the float switches
provide an ideal switching element in combination with PLC
controls.
www.profimess.de
F 77
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions
Dimensions:
LS-15.1
Float switch for general applications, made of stainless

steel
Screw thread types G 1/8 or 1/2" NPT
Contents
Startpage
Connecting cable:
0.5 m FEP cord
Screw thread type:
G 1/8-male or
1/2 NPT-male
Material:
float and float bracket are

made of stainless steel
1.4301
NO-contact or NC-contact,
depending on mounting
variant
Switching load:
50 VA, 250 V
max. pressure:
5 bar
max. temperature:
100C
min. media density:
0.7 kg/l
LS-15.2
Mounting variants and functions of contact:

NO-contact
at rising level
NC-contact
at rising level
NO-contact
at falling level
NC-contact
at falling level
Ordering codes
Ordering number:
LS-15. 1.

for Side Mounting
Connection:
1 = G 1/8 -male
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 78
2008
2 = 1/2 NPT-male
LS-15 P
for Side Mounting,
Plug Version
Contents
Startpage
Description
The LS-15P series of level switches operates according to the
principle of a float with magnetic transmission. The float is lifted inside the vessel due to the rising fluid level; subsequently,
it actuates a reed contact as a result of the magnetic field of
the permanent magnet situated in the float through the sliding
tube wall. Depending on the mounting position, the reed
contact acts normally opened or normally closed.
Compact design
Only a single mechanically
moving part
Sideways mounting into
vessel wall
The LS-15P float switches are suited for monitoring the level of
nearly all types of fluid media as an alarm for full or empty levels,
for controlling valves and pumps or for alert signals. By deploying
potential-free reed contacts, the float switches provide an ideal
switching element in combination with PLC controls.
Fully stainless steel version
2008
Electrical connection with

DIN plug
www.profimess.de
F 79
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions
Dimensions:
LS-15.P.1
Float switch for general applications, made of stainless

steel
Screw thread type 1/2" NPT
24
32.5
17 8.5 19.5 2
Contents
47
17
(40)
plug DIN 43650 C
Screw thread type:
1/2 NPT-male
Material:
float and float bracket are

Contact resistance:
150 m
NO-contact or NC-contact,
depending on mounting
variant
Switching load:
50 VA, 300 V AC/DC
Switching current:
0.5 A max.
max. pressure:
5 bar
max. temperature:
-40C+120C
min. media density:
0.7 +/- 0.05 kg/l
Shock:
10 g
NPT 1/2
X
ON
Startpage
Mounting variants and functions of contact:

NO-contact
at rising level
NC-contact
at rising level
NO-contact
at falling level
NC-contact
at falling level
Ordering codes
Ordering number:
LS-15 P. 1.
Miniature Float Switch for Side Mounting,

Plug Version
Connection:
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 80
2008
1 = 1/2 NPT-male
LS-20
Bypass Float Switch
Contents
Startpage
Description
The LS-20 series of bypass level switches consists of a standard float level switch that is mounted in an aluminium or
stainless steel housing. The device is mounted sideways on
the tank at a height as desired by the user and connected to
the tank over tubes or pipe hoses. The fluid level in the tank
and in the component, consisting of the level switch and the
associated connecting pipes, is always at the same height
according to the principle of communicating tubes. When the
fluid level reaches the float situated in the level switch, it gets
lifted up. A magnet mounted inside the float actuates a reed
contact in the sliding tube. The signal originating from the reed
contact is used for monitoring the level.
Mounting outside the tank

Freely selectable switching point by
fixing the switch at the required height
Aluminium or stainless steel versions
Freely selectable contact function by
a standard change-over contact
The LS-20 series of bypass level switches is used for monitoring level in tanks in which the space is insufficient for mounting an internal level switch or when a 100% monitoring of full
or empty levels is required.
2008
Enables monitoring 100% full or empty

levels
www.profimess.de
F 81
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions
Dimensions:
Materials:
LS-20.1: aluminium housing
LS-20.2: stainless steel housing
LS-20.1
Pg 11
~ 66
Connection box:
aluminium
Contents
64x58
Startpage
64 x 58 x 34 mm
12 mm, stainless steel
Float:
44 mm, stainless steel
Side connections:
LS-20.1:
LS-20.2:
10
Sliding tube:
immersion depth
Eintauchtiefe
bei
for density
1
Dichte
1
125
M = 55
aluminium AlMg5
stainless steel
37.5
100 mm
Housing material:
LS-20.1:
LS-20.2/3:
Ermeto GE10-LR, brass

Ermeto GE10-LR, stainless
steel
welding studs
12 x 2mm, stainless steel
LS-20.3:
drain
srew
Ablaschraube
R "
~ 68
Distance from center:
M = 55 mm
1 x change-over contact
Switching load:
40 VA, 250 V, 1A
max. pressure:
LS-20.1:
LS-20.2/3:
1 bar (6 bar on request)

16 bar
max. temperature:
150C
Protection class:
IP 65
~ 62
LS-20.2
64x58
Pg 11
55
100 mm
blue
brown
welding studs
Schweistutzen
S ...
12x2 mm
10
M = ... (min. 55*)
immersion depth
Eintauchtiefe
bei
for density
1
Dichte
1
30
black
Ordering codes
B = ...
Ordering number:
drain
srew
Ablaschraube
R "
LS-20. 3.
Bypass Float Switch
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 82
2008
Material and connection:

1 = aluminium housing, Ermeto joints, brass
2 = stainless steel housing, Ermeto joints, stainless steel
3 = stainless steel housing, welding studs stainless steel,
12x2 mm
FV-02
Miniature Tuning Fork
Limit Switch
Contents
Startpage
Description:
The FV-02 vibrates in the air according to the principle of a
tuning fork at the frequency of resonance. When the switch
is dipped into a fluid the frequency changes due to the higher inertia of the medium. The integrated electronic components capture this change and link to a load connected in
series. For the first time, we succeeded in shortening the
sensor element that is contacted by the media to 50 mm
length and in keeping its size so narrow that a 3/4" thread is
absolutely adequate. The same device can be operated with
supply voltages of 24 to 240 V AC or DC, thereby reducing
the storage of spare parts to a minimum. The device is provided with a microprocessor that is capable of self-monitoring
and fail-safe functions. It triggers a user-defined alarm that
indicates a dry-run or wet status through an LED which
changes from continuous light to blinking and, in the event of
malfunctioning, changes again its frequency.
3/4" or 1" thread

High operating frequency
24 to 240V DC or AC voltage
The FV-02 series of limit switches is intended for recording
limit levels in most of the fluids and slurries. The device can
process also media with high viscosities or sticky properties
without any problem since it is capable of "shaking away"
adhesions by virtue of its function. Irrespective of whether for
overfill protection, pump protection, leakage monitoring or
pump control, the FV-02 is universally applicable and, due to
its small dimensions, it can be mounted even in narrow spaces. The switch has a fully stainless steel facing to the media
and can be connected with an R3/4" or R1" thread to the
process. Optionally, a fitting is available for applications in
food-processing industry which enables, together with the 1"
variant and an O ring, a smooth joint to the fluid.
Least depth for mounting
2008
Diagnostic LED
www.profimess.de
F 83
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
FV-02 Miniature Tuning Fork
Supply voltage:
Electrical Function:
The 2-wire system is put on load in series and connected to
full load current. The PNP 3-wire variant has been developed
for PLC operation and it takes care of straight connectivity
between 0 and 1 in the low voltage range.
Process connection:
R3/4"-, R1" thread types, 3/4"NPT and G1"A connections
are available. The G1 "A variant can be used for applications
in food-processing, beverage and pharmaceutical industries
to achieve a smooth joint by means of a welding stud.
Leakage current
(without load):
<3.0 mA continuous
max. load:
500 mA
max. peak load:
5 A electronically protected
min. switching load:
20 mA continuous
Voltage drop:
6.5 V at 24 VDC,
5.0 V at 240 VAC
Type of
electrical protection:
cable gland
2-wire: 24 to 240 V
(+/-10%) DC o. AC
3-wire: 18...60 VDC
Contents
Startpage
protection against polarity reversal

and short-circuiting, protection
when load is absent
square plug as per DIN 43650
Cable diameter:
6 mm to 8 mm (PG9)
Protection class:
IP 66 / IP 67 EN 60529
38
for G 1
201 mm
others:
188 mm
Pressure range:
-0.25 bar to 100 bar at 50C
Temperature range.:
-40C to +150C
-40C to 80C (50C to 150C

on the wet side)
CIP cleaning:
10000 cycles on 130C

for 30 min
wrench size 41
external earth
connection
for G 1
78 mm
others:
69 mm
thread 1" or 3/4"
Medium:
Specific weight:
0.6 to 2 g/cm3
Viscosity:
0.2 to 10000 cP
Switching point (water): ca. 13 mm immersion depth

Hysteresis (water):
13 - nominal
switching point
+/- 1mm
Switching delay:1 sec.
(vertical mounting)
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
FV-02. 1. 1. 0
FV-02 Miniature Tuning Fork
Housing:
stainless steel 304
Fork:
stainless steel 316
LED window:
anti-flammable polycarbonate
Plug:
polyamide, fiberglass reinforced
Plug sealing:
nitrile butadien rubber
Function test:
through magnetic test point during

operation
Electrical function:
1 = 2-wires on load in series
2 = PNP 3-wire for PLC operation
Process connection:
1 = R3/4" DIN2999
2 = 3/4" NPT
3 = R1" DIN2999
4 = G1"A
5 = G1"A with hygiene fitting
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 84
2008
Overfill protection:
0 = none
1 = with (as per German WHG)
FD-02
Pressure Bell Switch
Contents
Startpage
Description
In pressure bell switches, the static pressure of the fluid is
converted into air pressure in suitable pressure transmitters
(tube or hose). The rising level of fluid produces a locked up
air space in the pressure transmitter as soon as the level reaches the locking edge. If the level continues to rise an overpressure builds up in the tube which on reaching a value of
approx. 100 mm of water column actuates a pressure
switch.
The tube or the hose must be perfectly pressure-tight as,
otherwise, the switching point may change due to air losses
in the pressure transmitter tube. The FD-02 is factory-adjusted to a switching point of 100 mm of water column so that
it is defined as the tube length minus 100 mm. Normally, the
FD-02 is supplied without a pressure transmitter tube to
allow the user to select the tube material as per his preference and thereby to customize it to the media to be monitored.
In the case of warm, viscous or sticky materials, we suggest
maintaining a constantly less air bubble formation over a
T-piece connected to a pressurized air supply.
Level monitoring for fluids

Filter and air-duct monitoring
Dry-run protection for pumps
2008
Pressure bell switches are simple and cost-effective devices
for monitoring the level especially in open vessels, sumps
and ducts.
Since these switches do not have any mechanically moving
parts, they are insensitive to soil. By correctly selecting the
pressure transmitter material even hostile media can be
monitored economically.
www.profimess.de
F 85
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
FD-02 Pressure Bell Switch
Switching load:
Type:
FD-02.1
FD-02.2
FD-02.3
FD-02.4
no housing
with housing, R 1/2-female
with housing, R 11/4-male
with housing, hose joint 40 mm
change-over 6 A, 250 V, 50 Hz,

ohmic; tested as per VDE 0630
Contents
flat plug, 6,3 DIN 46248
Startpage
Switch dimensions
Housing dimensions
45
max. 1.5
15
23
13
35
6
7
PG 16
d1
d2
Type:
FD-02.1
d1
FD-02.2
R1/2 -female 78
FD-02.3
R1/2 -female
FD-02.4
hose
d2
-
85
108
Pressure range:
0.05 to 1 m water column
Least switching
pressure:
50 mm water column
Least switch back

pressure:
20 mm water column
max. temperature:
-10C to +85C
Materials:
Membrane:
nitrile rubber
Pressure chamber:
polyamide, fiberglass reinforced
Hysteresis:
15%, min. 30 mm water column
Indexing tolerance:
+/- 10%
R 11/4 -male
40
Ordering number:
FD-02. 2.
FD-02 Pressure Bell Switch

Type:
1 = no housing
2 = with housing, R 1/2-female
3 = with housing, R 11/4-male
4 = with housing, hose joint 40 mm
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 86
2008
Ordering codes:
DF-02
Rotating Vane
Level Switch for
Contents
Startpage
Description
A gear motor situated at a certain rotatable angle in the extension of a shaft is held by means of a spring on a stopper. Over
the shaft, the motor drives the vane projecting into a vessel. As
soon as the filling material reaches the vane, it is prevented
from its further rotation. The reverse torque twists the motor
from its end position and actuates a switch. Subsequently, a
second switch turns off the motor.
If the level goes down, the vane is released and the motor is
drawn back by the spring into its end position. In this, the
motor is switched on again and the output signal is switched
back.
The gear motor and both the switches are mounted in an
aluminium pressure housing. Precise running of the vane shaft
is ensured by 2 encapsulated ball-bearings. In the event of a
blockage, a retention coupling prevents damage to the motor.
A special type sealing on the shaft prevents dust and humidity
from infiltrating into the housing and the ball-bearing.
Robust aluminium pressure cast housing

Easy to assemble
Can be used as full and empty alerter
Available optionally with shaft extension
2008
Output signal: change-over relay with

high switching load (15 A/250V)
The device is suitable for all freely trickling or hardly flowing
bulk goods and for goods that tend to bridge, felting or
crusting.
www.profimess.de
F 87
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
standard version, for use preferably as switch for full level

with shaft extension, for use as switch for full or empty levels
Measuring
vane
Process
connections
Standard
S2
Process connection
G 1 1/4
G 1 1/2
F70
F100
DN100
0.2...2.5 t/m3
grain size up
to 50 mm full
alerter
male thread G1", G11/4" or G11/2" for

screw fitting into bushing
flange, d = 70, 100, DN32 PN10 or DN100 PN6
T50
G 1 1/4
G 1 1/2
F70
F100
DN100
T100
GAL
NBR (optionally Viton or PTFE)
steel, Zn plated
G 1 1/2
F70
F100
DN100
X50
F100
DN100
0.2...1.5 t/m3
grain size up
to 15 mm
full alerter
-20...+80C
(up to 1000 C with
high temperature option)
X100
F100
DN100
0.2...1.5 t/m3
grain size up
to 15 mm
full alerter
X200
DN100
< 0.1 t/m3

grain size up
to 15 mm
full alerter
TO
F70
F100
DN100
Materials:
Housing:
Sealing ring:
Shaft and vane:
Nuts:
Temperature range:
Pressure range:
-0.9...+10 bar,
Consumption:
3 VA or 3.5 W
Switching load:
potential-free change-over
1 mA/4 VDC to 2 A/250 VAC
Cable insertion:
1 x M20x1.5
RPM:
1 rpm
5 or 8 rpm on request
Protection class:
IP 66, IP65 with control lamp
PROFI
MESS
SG
G 1 1/4
G 1 1/2
F70
F100
TG
F70
F100
0.3...1.5 t/m3
grain size up
to 15 mm
full alerter
Reinforced
shaft
Mounting position / Shaft

extension
full or empty
alerter level up
to
30m at 0.5
t/m3 up to 15
m at 2.5 t/m3
horizontal or
vertical mounting
full or empty
alerter
level up to 1.5
m for 0.6 t/m3,
above 1 t/m3
as full alerter
only
with rope up to
10 m
extension max.
1.5 m
vertical moungrain size up to ting

extension max.
15 mm
1.5 m
full or empty
with rope up to
alerter
10 m
0.75...5 t/m3
grain size up
to 100 mm
full alerter
0.75...5 t/m3
grain size up to
100 mm
full or empty
alerter
F 88
Startpage
0.2...2.5 t/m3
www.profimess.de
GMBH
Contents
2008
Versions
Ordering codes
Ordering number:
Contents
DF-02. 1. 0. 1. 0. 1. 1. 1. 3. 1. 1. 0. 0
Rotating Vane Level Switch

Housing:
1 = aluminium compact housing
2 = stainless steel round housing
Startpage
Ex approval:
0 = none
1 = dust Ex ATEX II 1D T70C IP66 (always with function or voltage monitoring)
Operating voltage:
1 = 220...240 VAC, 50...60 Hz
2 = 110...120 VAC, 50...60 Hz
3 = 48 VAC, 50...60 Hz
4 = 24 VAC, 50...60 Hz
5 = 24 VDC
Self-monitoring:
0 = none
1 = function monitoring
2 = voltage monitoring
Signal lamps:
1 = standard with function LEDs on board
2 = calotte for function LEDs
3 = signal lamps LED green
4 = large signal lamps LED, green
Bulk material temperature (max. 75C for dust Ex version):
1 = standard -25C...+80C
2 = -25C...+150C
3 = -25C...+200C
4 = -25C...+260C
5 = -25C...+500C
6 = up to 1000C on request
Vessel pressure:
1 = standard -0.5...+5 bar (-80mbar to +80mbar for dust Ex version)
2 = -0.5...+10 bar
3 = -0.9...+10 bar
Process connection:
1 = 1"-male
2 = 11/4"-male
3 = 11/2"-male
4 = M 30 x 1.5-male
5 = M 32 x 1.5-male
6 = flange F70, diameter 110 mm, 4 holes with diameter of 9 mm, hole circle 90 mm
7 = flange F100, 150x150 mm, 4 holes with diameter of 18 mm, hole circle 170 mm
8 = flange DN32 PN10
9 = flange DN100 PN6 (stainless steel only)
Material for process connection:
1 = aluminium
2 = stainless steel
Measuring vane:
0 = no measuring vane
1 = S2 bushing vane 130x30 mm inclined, fits through G11/4" and G11/2" and all flange variants
2 = M1 bushing vane 90x28 mm, fits through G1", G11/4" and G11/2" and all flange variants
3 = M2 bushing vane 90x40 mm, fits through G11/2" and all flange variants
4 = T50 vane 98x50 mm, fits through flanges DN100
5 = T100 vane 98x100 mm, fits through flanges DN100
6 = X50 vane 98x50 mm, fits through flanges DN100
7 = X100 vane 98x100 mm, fits through flanges DN100
8 = X200 vane 180x100 mm, must be fitted from inside after mounting the housing
9 = TO flat paddle 68x220 mm, fits through flanges F70, F100 and DN100
10 = SG L rod vane for very rough bulk material mm, fits through G11/4" and G11/2" and all flange variants
11 = TG T rod vane for very rough bulk material mm, fits through flanges F70, F100 and DN100
12 = T230 flap vane 200x30 mm, fits through G11/4" and all flange variants
Measuring vane reinforcement (for bushings and T vanes only):
0 = no reinforcement
1 = with reinforcement
2008
Options:
0 = no options
1 = sideways mounting with reinforced bearing
2 = with flexible wire rope extension (specify length in detailed text)
3 = with rigid shaft extension (specify length in detailed text)
www.profimess.de
F 89
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Housing designs
92 x 88
Contents
115
Al compact housing
Startpage
process connection
25
126
30
124
vane shaft
measuring vane M2V
40
115
100
Stainless steel
round housing
90
70C
M 20 x 1.5
> LT <
200
> LW <
shaft extension
> LF <
vane length
temperature
decoupling
lamp
(for protection
against overheating
of control head)
up to 260C
up to 500C
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 90
2008
PROFI
MESS
L = 30 + LW +LF
extension shaft length
>L<
30
thermal shield
Flame protection for all measuring vanes shown above: W II 1GD c IIB TX
S2 bushing vane
S1 bushing vane
118
> LF <
117
> LF <
65
52
Contents
130
1
100
30
30
Startpage
2 mm for S2V bushing vane, reinforced
40
28
90
2
90
> LF <
T - vane, reinforced
> LF <
T - vane
T1
T2
T3
T5
T 8*
70
> LF <
M2V bushing vane, reinforced
72
> LF <
M1V bushing vane, reinforced
B
98
98
200
250
250
H
50
100
100
100
100
LF
52
102
102
102
102
T1V
T2V
B
98
98
H
50
100
LF
52
102
* vanes 10 mm thick
2008
made of rubber NBR, black
www.profimess.de
F 91
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Flame protection for all measuring vanes shown above: W II 1GD c IIB TX
TO vane
SG bushing vane, reinforced
Startpage
> LF <
126
220
272
110
> LF <
52
Contents
68
> LF <
52
TG vane, reinforced
X vane
> LF <
98
> LF <
30
52
K1 flap vane
PROFI
MESS
LF
52
102
102
52
H
50
100
100
50
200
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 92
2008
X1
X2
X3
XM
B
98
98
180
44
MS-04
Membrane Level Switch
for Bulk Goods
Contents
Startpage
Can be used as full and empty alerter
Description
The MS-04 series of membrane level switches consists of a
plastic or aluminium housing with a membrane held in place
by a fastening ring. They are mounted aligned into the vessel
wall and, therefore, do not project into the vessel.
The bulk material applies pressure against the membrane
which is prestressed by a spring and thereby actuates a
micro-switch. Depending on the type of bulk material and its
weight, the devices can be supplied with different membrane
diameters and membrane material.
Easy to assemble
Does not require space in the vessel
Neopren, Viton or stainless steel
membranes
The device is suitable for all freely trickling or hardly flowing
bulk goods in non-pressurized vessels.
High temperature version up to 200C
2008
Output signal: change-over relay with

high switching load (15 A / 250 V)
www.profimess.de
F 93
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions
Dimensions
standard version, protection class IP 53
membrane diameter 128 mm
standard version, protection class IP 65
for larger vessel wall thicknesses,
protection class IP53
aluminium housing,
high temperature version,
D:
F:
B:
MS-04.E / MS-04.D
Contents
Startpage
MS-04.F
Typ
Membrane
Operating temperature
MS-04.E
Neopren / Viton
-20...+80 C
MS-04.D
Neopren / Viton
-20...+80 C
MS-04.F
Neopren / Viton
-20...+80 C
MS-04.B
Neopren
-20...+80 C
Viton
-20...+150 C
Stainless steel
-30...+200 C
MS-04.B
Ordering codes
Ordering number
Material:
MS-04. E. N. N.
Membrane Level Switch for Bulk Goods
Housing:
Housing design:
E = plastic housing, IP53
Membrane:
Bracket:
D = plastic housing, IP65

F = for larger wall thicknesses, plastic housing, IP53
B = aluminium housing, IP53
Membrane material:
N = Neopren
V = Viton
plastic, fiberglass reinforced

(MS-04.B: aluminium)
Neopren, Viton or stainless steel
aluminium, steel, Zn plated or
stainless steel
Mounting position:
any
Temperature range:
see table "Range of application"
Pressure range:
for non-pressurized vessels
Overpressure security: 5 bar
E = stainless steel (for MS-04.B only)
Switching load:
potential-free change-over
6 A / 250 VAC
N = steel, Zn plated (MS-04.E or F only)
Cable insertion:
PG11
E = stainless steel
Protection class:
IP 53 (cable insertion from below)

otherwise IP40
MS-04.D: IP65
Bracket:
A = aluminium (MS-04.B only)
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
F 94
2008
E:
HP-30
Pneumatic Manual Testing
Pump for Pressure Device
Calibration
Contents
Startpage
Complete with box and accessories
Description:
Calibration manual testing pump is intended for generating
pressure for the purpose of inspection, adjustments and calibration of mechanical and electronic pressure gauges by
using reference measurements. At the top end of the pump,
an analogous or digital reference pressure gauge is screw
mounted and, at the same time, the test piece is connected
on the side by means of a hose included in the delivery. On
activating the pump, equal pressure is exerted on both the
devices. Subsequently, the test piece can be compared with
the reference device and, if necessary, settings or calibration
adjustments can be made. First, considerable amount of
pressure is built up by a pincer mechanism; the testing pressure is then set accurately by means of an easily adjustable
precision regulating valve.
Can be combined with different testing

devices
Wide range of pressure
Smooth-running precision adjustment
2008
Despite its compact size, the calibration manual testing pump
HP-30 facilitates testing pressure generation easily and accurately. It features also a reversing switch for generating vacuum. Therefore, pressure switches, pressure gauges (manometers) and pressure sensors can be tested or set within the
range of -0.95.to.+35 bar where air is used as the testing
medium. As against hydraulic testing pumps, this offers a
simple and neat solution.
www.profimess.de
P1
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Pressure generation:
0.to.35 bar
Vacuum generation:
0.to.-0.95
Contents
Delivery connections:
G1/2-female
(free-wheel swivel nut with sealing)
for reference device.
G1/4-female at the end of the
testing hose for the test piece
Startpage
Material:
Anodized aluminium, brass, highly

tensile synthetic material
Testing pressure
setting:
Fine regulating valve

(large volume variator)
Dimensions:
approx. 220 x 105 x 63 mm
Weight:
approx. 510 g
Series range of supply: Calibration manual pump HP-30

with selected reference device,
test piece connecting hose, user
manual, robust plastic material
box with contoured foam-rubber
padding
Optional accessories:
Higher range of
pressure:
Adapter and sealing sets for test

piece NO-contact, maintenance
set for HP-30 (O rings, sealings
etc.)
Hydraulic testing pumps on

request
(1)
Free-wheel reference device NO-contact G1/2female along with sealing
(2)
Fine regulating valve
(3)
Release valve
(4)
Reversing switch for pressure/vacuum generation
(5)
Pump handles
(6)
Adjustable knurled nut for setting

pump output
(7)
Test piece NO-contact G1/4-female
(8)
Test piece connecting hose
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
HP-30. 1. 1
Manual Testing Pump for Calibration of Pressure Devices

Reference pressure device:
0 = none
1 = pressure gauge 2,5 (63 mm) Cl. 1.0 with fine gradation
from 0.to.2 bar/ 0.to.30 PSI
from 0.to.11 bar/0.to.160 PSI
from 0.to.25 bar/0.to 365 PSI
from 0.to.40 bar/0.to.600 PSI
from -1.to.0 bar/ -30.to.0 in HG
6 = digital precision measurement pressure gauge accuracy +/- 0.2%
from operating range of 0.to.50 bar
from operating range of -1 to +2.5 bar
from operating range of -1 to.+24 bar
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
P2
2008
Accessories:
0 = none
1 = pipe thread adapter set for connecting the test piece
2 = NPT thread adapter set for connecting the test piece
3 = metric adapter and MINIMESS for connecting the test piece
PM-63
Contents
Startpage
Description:
Bourdon pressure gauges in the PM-63 series can be supplied in brass or stainless steel designs in filled or unfilled
conditions. A drawn brass or stainless steel pipe shaped into
a spiral is filled with the medium which deforms irrespective
of the pressure. This movement is indicated by a measuring
instrument which can be attenuated by the glycerin filling
available optionally so that vibrations are heavily mellowed
down. The natural lubricating action of glycerin reduces the
wear and tear of moving parts and penetration of corrosive
gases and prevents formation of water condensation. The
stainless steel version allows measurement of pressure even
in the most hostile fluids and gases. The pressure gauges
are selectively equipped with a G1/4A threaded connection
at the bottom or centrally at the back.
Quality class 1.6

Stainless steel housing
Brass or VA movement
Filled or unfilled
Bourdon pressure gauges are used across all types of industrial applications. They are particularly suited for measuring
points where no power supply is available. The PM-63.1
series of pressure gauges is widely used in machine and
equipment manufacturing, in pumps, compressors or blocktype thermal power plants, since often the requirements on
the consistency of media must necessarily be moderate.
On the other hand, the PM-63.2 series of chemical pressure
gauges is capable of resisting more hostile media and, therefore, are used frequently in chemical and petrochemical industries, in the food-processing segment, in pharmaceutical
production or in power stations where they a proven record
of unfailing service for decades.
2008
Protection class IP65
www.profimess.de
P3
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
PM-63.1 Bourdon pressure gauges with brass measuring

indicator.
PM-63.2 Fully stainless steel Bourdon pressure gauges.
max. pressure: PM-63.1.1 full scale value

PM-63.1.2 1.25 x full scale value
up to 100 bar, 1.15 x full scale value
above 100 bar.
above 100 bar.
above 100 bar.
Operating
pressure:
max. 75% of full scale value
max. media
temperature:
PM-63.1.1 - 60C
PM-63.1.2 - 65C
PM-63.2.1 - 100C
PM-63.2.2 - 65C
max. ambient
temperature:
PM-63.1.1 - -25C to 60C
PM-63.1.2 - +15C to 65C
PM-63.2.1 - -25C to 65C
PM-63.2.2 - +15C to 65C
Housing:
PM-63.1.1 - sheet metal
PM-63.1.2 - stainless steel AISI304
Indicator:
PM-63.1.1 - copper alloy
PM-63.1.2 - brass
PM-63.2.1 - stainless steel
PM-63.2.2 - stainless steel
Indicator:
aluminium in black
Dial:
PM-63.1.1 - aluminium in white,
black graduated
PM-63.1.2 - ABS white, black graduated
Inspection
glass:
PM-63.1.1 - Clipped-in plastic
PM-63.1.2 - Plexiglass
Operating
element:
PM-63.1.1 copper alloy
PM-63.1.2 phosphorous bronze or
stainless steel AISI316L
PM-63.2.1 - stainless steel AISI316L
Connection:
PM-63.1.1 - brass
PM-63.1.2 - brass
Accuracy:
Quality class 1,6
Protection
class:
PM-63.1.2 - IP65
PM-63.2.1 - IP55
PM-63.2.2 - IP65
Front ring:
PM-63.1.2 crimped ring made of
stainless steel AISI304, polished
PM-63.2.1 bayonet ring made of
stainless steel AISI 304
Excess pressure
releasing plug: EPDM
Attenuation
fluid:
Glycerin
Options:
other attenuation fluids, special type scales
with customer's logo, other process
connections
Attenuation: As per choice, the devices can be supplied in

unfilled condition or with glycerin filling for attenuating vibrations. Alternatively, silicon oil or fluoridated liquids (for applications where oxygen, chlorine or nitric acid are used) are also
available as filling.
Pressure gauges can also be supplied, on request, in unfilled
condition for independent filling by the user.
Process connection:
Pressure gauges are selectively provided with a G1/4-male
connection facility at the bottom or centrally at the back.
Other thread types (metric, NPT, G1/8) are available on
request.
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
PM-63. 2. 2. 1. 0. Q
Bourdon Pressure Gauge 2,5 (63 mm)

Version:
1 = brass measuring instrument
2 = fully stainless steel for chemical applications
Attenuation:
1 = no glycerin filling
2 = with glycerin filling
Process connection:
1 = G1/4A at the bottom
2 = G1/4A centrally at the back
Fastening rim:
0 = none
1 = 3 hole front ring, connection at the back
2 = rear edge for wall-mounting
3 = 3 rimmed front ring with clamp (only in PM-63.2)
Operating range:
A = 0 to 0.6 bar (only in PM-63.1.1)
B = 0 to 1 bar
C = 0 to 1.6 bar
D = 0 to 2.5 bar
E = 0 to 4 bar
F = 0 to 6 bar
G = 0 to 10 bar
H = 0 to 16 bar
I = 0 to 25 bar
J = 0 to 40 bar
K = 0 to 60 bar
L = 0 to 100 bar
M= 0 to 160 bar
N = 0 to 250 bar
O = 0 to 400 bar
P = 0 to 600 bar (not in PM-63.1.1)
Q = 0 to 1000 bar (not in PM-63.1.1)
S = -1 to 0 bar
T = -1 to +0.6 bar (not in PM-63.x.2)
U = -1 to +1.5 bar
V = -1 to +3 bar
W= -1 to +5 bar
X = -1 to +9 bar
Y = -1 to +15 bar
Z = -1 to +24 bar (only in PM-63.1.1)
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
P4
Contents
Startpage
2008
Versions:
PM-100
Contents
Startpage
Description:
Bourdon pressure gauges in the PM-100 series can be supplied in brass or stainless steel versions in filled or unfilled
condition. A drawn brass or stainless steel pipe shaped into
a spiral is filled with the medium which deforms irrespective
of the pressure. This movement is indicated by a measuring
instrument which can be attenuated by the glycerin filling
available optionally so that vibrations are heavily mellowed
down. The natural lubricating action of glycerin reduces the
wear and tear of moving parts and penetration of corrosive
gases and prevents formation of water condensation. The
stainless steel design allows measurement of pressure even
in the most hostile fluids and gases. The pressure gauges
are selectively equipped with a G1/2A threaded connection
at the bottom or eccentrically at the back. On request, they
can be fitted with up to two magnetic spring or inductive
contacts.
We supply also pressure gauges in larger nominal sized such
as 6 (160 mm) or 10 (250 mm), or special designs of 4
(100 mm) and 2,5 (63 mm) devices. Please contact us in
this regard.
Quality class 1,0

Brass or VA movement
Bourdon pressure gauges are used across all types of industrial applications. They are particularly suited for measuring
points where no electrical power supply is available. The PM100.1 series of pressure gauges is widely used in machine
and equipment manufacturing, in pumps, compressors or
block-type thermal power plants, since often the requirements on the consistency of media must necessarily be
moderate. On the other hand, the PM-100.2 series of chemical pressure gauges is capable of resisting more hostile
media and, therefore, are used frequently in chemical and
petrochemical industries, in the food-processing segment, in
pharmaceutical production or in power stations where they a
proven record of unfailing service for decades. The PM-100
pressure gauges optionally equipped with switching contacts
can also be used for electronic pressure monitoring.
Filled or unfilled
2008
www.profimess.de
P5
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
PM-100.1 Bourdon pressure gauges with brass measuring

instrument
max. pressure: PM-100.1.1 - 1,25 x full scale value

above 100 bar.
above 100 bar.
to 100 bar, 1.15 x full scale value
above 100 bar.
above 60 bar.
Operating
pressure:
max. 75% of full scale value
max. media
temperature.: PM-100.1.1 - 65C to 40 bar,
120C above 40 bar
PM-100.1.2 - 65C
PM-100.2.1 - 100C
PM-100.2.2 - 65C
max. ambient
temperature:
PM-100.1.1 - -25C to 65C
PM-100.1.2 - +15C to 65C
PM-100.2.1 - -25C to 65C
PM-100.2.2 - +15C to 65C
Housing:
Indicator:
PM-100.1.1 - brass
PM-100.1.2 - brass
PM-100.2.1 - stainless steel with reinforced
wide tooth segment
PM-100.2.2 - stainless steel with reinforced
wide tooth segment
Indicator:
aluminium in black
Dial:
aluminium in white, black graduated
Inspection
glass:
PM-100.2.1 - glass 4 mm thick
Operating
element:
PM-100.1.1 - phosphorous bronze or
PM-100.1.2 - phosphorous bronze or
Connection:
PM-100.1.1 - brass
PM-100.1.2 - brass with restrictor 0.7 mm
Accuracy:
Quality class 1,0
Protection
class:
PM-100.1.1 - IP65
PM-100.1.2 - IP65
PM-100.2.1 - IP55
PM-100.2.2 - IP65
Frontring:
PM-100.1.1 crimped ring made of
stainless steel AISI304, polished
Sealing and
plug:
EPDM
Attenuation
fluid:
Glycerin
Options:
other attenuation fluids, special scales with
customer logo, other process connections
PM-100.2 Fully stainless steel Burdon pressure gauges

Attenuation: As per choice, the devices can be supplied in
unfilled condition or with glycerin filling for attenuating vibrations. Alternatively, silicon oil or fluoridated liquids (for applications where oxygen, chlorine or nitric acid are used) are also
available as filling.
On request, pressure gauges can also be supplied in unfilled
condition for independent filling by the user.
Process connection: Pressure gauges are selectively provided with a G1/2-male connection facility at the bottom or
eccentrically at the back. Other thread types (metric, NPT,
G1/4, G3/8) are available on request.
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
PM-100. 2. 2. 1. 0. G
Bourdon Pressure Gauge 4 (100 mm)

Version:
1 = brass measuring instrument
2 = fully stainless steel for chemical applications
Attenuation:
1 = no glycerin filling
2 = with glycerin filling
Process connection:
1 = G1/2A at the bottom
2 = G1/2A excentrically at the back
Fastening rim:
0 = none
1 = 3 hole front ring, connection at the back
2 = rear edge for wall-mounting
3 = 3 rimmed front ring with clamp
Operating range:
A = 0 to 0,6 bar (only in PM-100.1.1 and PM-100.2.1)
B = 0 to 1 bar
C = 0 to 1,6 bar
D = 0 to 2,5 bar
E = 0 to 4 bar
F = 0 to 6 bar
G = 0 to 10 bar
H = 0 to 16 bar
I = 0 to 25 bar
J = 0 to 40 bar
K = 0 to 60 bar
L = 0 bis100 bar
M= 0 to 160 bar
N = 0 to 250 bar
O = 0 to 400 bar
P = 0 to 600 bar
Q = 0 to 1000 bar
R = 0 to 1600 bar (only in PM-100.2)
S = -1 to 0 bar
T = -1 to +0,6 bar
U = -1 to +1,5 bar
V = -1 to +3 bar
W= -1 to +5 bar
X = -1 to +9 bar
Y = -1 to +15 bar
Z = -1 to +24 bar (only in PM-100.1.2)
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
P6
Contents
Startpage
2008
Versions:
KM-100
Contact-Type
Contents
Startpage
Description:
Contac pressure gauges are suited for controlling and regulating processes by means of excrescent processing pressure. In this, the switching contacts open or close depending
on the indicator position in the pressure gauge. If the medium to be monitored does not tend to crystallize or harden
pressures from 1 bar up to 1000 bar in the over and under
pressure ranges can be displayed and monitored easily. In
critical situations, optionally the pressure gauge is equipped
with a diaphragm seal for the pressure. In KM-100 with oil filling, possible excrescent pressure pulsations or mechanical
vibrations are subdued. This extends the life span and the
quality of legibility in the devices significantly. Snap action
contacts are used under rough industrial conditions while
switching high currents. In case of excess or below par electrical switching load in the contacts, we recommend using
a protective relay for the contacts such as Profimess MSRx.
On the other hand, touch less engaging of inductive contacts
facilitates precise setting for the switching point and has no
effect on the pressure measurement system. By using these
contacts even applications in the hazardous areas can be
covered. For controlling the inductive switching contacts,
always a separate control device is necessary which normally
has a control power circuit as per NAMUR.
Brass and chemical versions

Nominal size 4 (100 mm)
Accuracy class 1.0
The KM-100 series contact Bourdon pressure gauges is
used in the whole industry. As against a simple pressure
switch, they possess the major advantage of enabling visual
inspection of the excrescent process pressure even if the
power supply is interrupted due to power outage or cable
failure. Snap action contacts are engaged without potential,
thus allowing the user maximum freedom to select the evaluator unit. The KM-100 is supplied with a standard G1/2male, however, optionally many other special type connections are feasible, assuring compatibility to a variety of processes.
Optional vibration attenuation

Up to 4 inductive or snap action contact
All levels of pressure 1 to 1000 bar as
per DIN
2008
Negative pressure range
www.profimess.de
P7
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
The process connection, the pressure gauge's tubular spring and the indicator element
are available as brass or also fully stainless
steel versions where the latter is recommended for applications with hostile media.
Oil filling:
Process connection: The KM-100 has a standard

G1/2-male connection.
Optionally, many other thread
types can be manufactured as
special versions. Position of the
connection is either in the vertical
to bottom direction or eccentricaly
towards back.
In case of pulsations or vibrations in the

plants the KM-100 with polybutene oil
filling can be ordered by which indicator
trembling can be attenuated and thus extend
the life span of the movement.
Ordering codes:
Fastening rim:
For fastening the Bourdon pressure

gauge on the wall or on a switching
panel, it is possible to provide a
3 hole fastening rim on the housing
which is welded on at the back
(for wall mounting) or in front (for
switching panel) of the housing.
Contact type:
Depending on the measuring range

of the pressure gauge, the KM-100
can be provided with up to 4
switching contacts. The choice can
be snap action contact or inductive
contacts. In case of snap action
contacts the contacting pins are
connected by magnetic and spring
action depending on the indicator
position. The indicator is easily
decelerated by the connecting
operation which influences the
accuracy of the measurement.
However, the connecting efficiency is
high as against inductive contacts.
They recognize the indicator movement without touch due to a slot
initiator that forms a u-shaped slit
and recognizes the presence of a
metallic indicator in the slit.
Inductive contacts connect very
accurately, however, they require
controlling from an external evaluation device. The power circuit is
designed as per NAMUR stanard.
Also applications in hazardous
areas are covered by the inductive
contacts.
No. of contacts:
The maximum possible number of

contacts depends on the measuring
range and on the contact type.
Information on this is given below
under the heading Electrical
specifications.
Contact function:
It must be specified if the power

circuit is expected to be contacted at
increasing pressure (1 = NO-contact)
or broken at increasing pressure
(2 = NC-contact). In the case of
snap action contact the power circuit
is broken or contacted mechanically,
where as in inductive contacts the
electrical resistance in the coils
changes. Thereby, in the case of a
NO-contact the current in the control
circuit is set on HIGH state while it
shifts to LOW as a NC-contact.
Operating range:
Various DIN operating ranges from

-1 to +1000 bar are available.
Please contact us for special
operating ranges.
Ordering number:KM-100. 2. 1. 1. 1. 1. 2. [0][0][2][1] D

Contact Bourdon Pressure Gauge
Version:
1 = brass movement
2 = fully stainless steel chemical version
Oil filling:
1 = no oil filling
2 = with polybutene filling for cutailing
vibrations
Process connection:
1 = G1/2-male at the bottom
2 = G1/2-male excentrically at the back
Fastening rim:
0 = none
1 = 3 hole rim in front
2 = 3 hole rim at the back
Contact type:
1 = snap action contact
2 = inductive contact
No. of contacts:
1 = one contact
2 = two contacts
3 = three contacts
4 = four contasts
Contact function (1 = NO-contact, 2 = NC-contact,
3 = change-over-contact on request):
[ ][ ][ ][ ] = contact sequence for incrementing pressure, e.g. [0][1][1][2]
Operating range:
B = 0 to 1 bar
C = 0 to 1,6 bar
D = 0 to 2,5 bar
E = 0 to 4 bar
F = 0 to 6 bar
G = 0 to 10 bar
H = 0 to 16 bar
I = 0 to 25 bar
J = 0 to 40 bar
K = 0 to 60 bar
L = 0 to 100 bar
M = 0 to 160 bar
N = 0 to 250 bar
O = 0 to 400 bar
P = 0 to 600 bar
Q = 0 to 1000 bar
S = -1 to 0 bar
T = -1 to +0,6 bar
U = -1 to +1,5 bar
V = -1 to +3 bar
W = -1 to +5 bar
X = -1 to +9 bar
Y = -1 to +15 bar
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
P8
Contents
Startpage
2008
Movement:
Contents
Startpage
Nominal size: 4 (100 mm)
Loads for snap action contacts:
Housing and ring:

KM-100.1:
steel, black coated, opening for releasing
pressure
KM-100.2:
stainless steel 1.4301, opening for releasing
pressure
DC or AC
voltage
Snap action contact

unfilled devices
Ohmic load
inductiv
AC
DIN IEC 38 DC
load
cos phi >
0.7
mA
V
mA
mA
120
230
100
65
240
110
200
130
450
48
300
200
600
24
400
250
Inspection glass:
KM-100.1.1: plastic hood
KM-100.1.2: Safety glass
KM-100.2:
Multiple layer safety glass
Dial:
aluminium in white,
scale and lettering in black
Indicator:
aluminium in black
Segment element:
KM-100.1:
Cu alloy
KM-100.2:
stainless steel
for nominal size

Proximity switch type
Operating voltage
Air gap width
Switching frequency
Self-capacity
Self-inductivity
Rated voltage
Protection class
Housing
Connection type
Pressure connection:
KM-100.1:
G1/2B as per ISO 228 of Cu alloy
KM-100.2:
G1/2B as per ISO 228 of stainless steel
1.4571
Class 1.6 as per EN 837-1 for ranges
<= 1.6 bar,
Class 1.0 as per EN 837-1 for ranges
> 1.6 bar
Class 1.0 as per EN 837-1 for all ranges
Temperature range
Dead load up to full scale value

Fluctuating load up to 0.9-times the full
scale value
Short loads up to 1.3f-times the full scale
value Optionally 2.5-times on request
no oil filling 0.9 kg, with oil filling 1.2 kg
Protection class:
KM-100.1.1.1:
KM-100.1.2.1:
KM-100.1.1.2:
KM-100.1.2.2:
KM-100.2.1:
KM-100.2.2:
Cable box, on the right side provided with 6 screw clamps +

Ground, optionally at the back
Cable cross-section max.2.5 mm2
Cable gland M20x1.5 going
downwards.
Optionally, the cable box can be
supplied with rear mounting
instead of on the side.
Contact type: Magnetic spring (MS) or inductive contacts
(IN)
No. of
contacts:
Operating range up to 1 bar:
KM-100.1 max. 2 MS, max. 2 IN
Operating range up to 1.6 bar:
Operating range from 4 bar:
2008
Safe connection as per

DIN 19234 (NAMUR)
100 mm
SJ 2-SN
5...25V DC
2 mm
5 kHz
20 nF
29 H
8V DC
IP65 as per EN 60529 / IEC 529
lastic
Flex LIYV 0.5 m lg .: 2 x 0.14
mm2
-25C to+70C
Wiring for contacts:

In snap action contacts, a single wire is used for all contacts
as the common return line. In case of 3 contacts, consequently 4 pins and shielding are connected. Optionally,
contact sets can be supplied with circuits separate according
to contacts.
In inductive contacts, each setpoint is led out with two wires.
Media
temperature: -20C...+80C
Weight:
Normal version as per

DIN 19234 (NAMUR)
100 mm
SJ2-N
5...25V DC
2 mm
5 kHz
20 nF
29 H
8V DC
IP65 as per EN 60529 / IEC 529
Plastic
Mini flat cable 0.5 m
lg .: 2x0.06 mm2
-25C to+70C
Optionally, for the inductive contacts an integrated amplifier is

available that is mounted directly into the housing of slit initiators. This has a PNP- transistor output and can connect
directly to small outputs, for example, in SP controls. In this
the maximum switching current is 100 mA at operating voltage of 10.to 30 V DC.
Temperature errors:
KM-100.1:
0.3% / 10 K at deviation of
20C normal temperature
KM-100.2:
0.4% / 10 K at deviation of
20C normal temperature
Ambient
temperature: -25C...+60C
Overload:
mA
90
180
330
450
inductive
load
cos phi >
0.7
mA
25
45
70
100
Loads for inductive contacts:
Operating element:
KM-100.1:
tubular spring made of Cu alloy up to 40 bar,
stainless steel from 60 to 1000 bar
KM-100.2:
stainless steel 1.4571, <100 bar tubular
spring, >=100 bar screw spring
KM-100.2:
mA
65
130
190
250
Creep contact
unfilled devices
Ohmic load
inductive DC
AC
load
cos phi >
0.7
mA
mA
mA
40
45
40
85
90
80
130
170
120
150
350
200
In case of currents less than 20 mA inductive contacts with

integrated amplifier should be used and, in very high loads a
protective contact relay is recommended. Creep contacts are
snap action contacts without springs which are used if less
connecting hysteresis is important.
Fluid for filling

(option):
polybutene
Accuracy:
KM-100.1:
filled devices
Ohmic load
AC
DC
www.profimess.de
P9
IP43
IP65
IP54
IP65
IP54
IP65
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Dimensions:
(The dimensions refer to devices with 1 or 2 contacts. For
devices with 3 or 4 contacts the height is higher by 7.5 mm).
Contents
Connection radially at the bottom
Connection eccentrically at the back
Startpage
HEX 22
HEX 22
Dimension A- 108 mm
Connection eccentrically at the back

Fastening rim in front or at the back
Connection radially at the bottom

Fastening rim in front or at the back
4,8 (pitch circle 116)
HEX 22
HEX 22
Dimension A- 108 mm
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
P 10
2008
Cable box at the back
PMKF
Capsule Element Pressure
Gauge
Contents
Startpage
Description:
The PMKF capsule element pressure gauges are intended for
measuring small, negative and positive overpressures in
gaseous media. The measuring element in such a device
comprises two diaphragm halves that are joined by welding.
These actuate an indicator when pressure is exerted on them
inside which is then display the system pressure on a scale
made of aluminium.
The standard versions of the devices supplied are made of
brass; however, optionally they can be fitted with a stainless
steel movement. Also another version with 10x overpressure
safety can be delivered.
The available housing sizes are 2,5 (63 mm), 4 (100 mm) or
6 (160 mm) with stainless steel housing provided with
connections radially at the bottom or centrally at the back.
On request, other versions can be supplied.
Quality class 1.6

Millibar range
Anti-corrosive
Zero point correction
2008
Capsule element pressure gauges are optimally suited for
measuring very small pressures in gaseous media. All DIN
levels between 0/25 mbar and 0/1000 mbar in positive as
well as -25/0 mbar and -1000/0 mbar in negative overpressure can be supplied.
Typical applications are found in medical engineering, airconditioning, in production of gas or in laboratories. For
example, the applications are for leak detection, filter status
measuring, emission measuring or, using the stainless steel
version, for monitoring hostile and corrosive media.
www.profimess.de
P 11
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
Temperature
behaviour:
Reference temperature 20C

+0.3%/10 K at temperature increase
from 20C
-0.3%/10 K at temperature decrease
from 20C
NBR (Perbunan)
brass in PMKF.1, 1.4571 and 1.4301
in PMKF.2
aluminium in black
PMKF Capsule Element Pressure Gauge for Gas

Applications
Nominal size: The 2,5 (63 mm) housing can be supplied
with G1/4-male situated radially at the bottom or centrally at
the back. The 4 (100 mm) and 6 (160 mm) housings are
provided with a G1/2-male connection radially at the bottom
or centrally at the back.
Housing:
Sealing:
Indicator:
Indicator:
Dial:
Inspection
glass:
Operating
element:
Connection:
Operating range: The capsule element pressure gauges are

available for positive or negative overpressure and for the
range between 0/25 mbar and 0/600 mbar crossing the zero
point.
max. ambient
temperature:
Copper alloy in PMKF.1, 1.4571 in PMKF.2

2,5 (63 mm): G1/4A,
4 (100 mm) and 6 (160 mm): G1/2A
Quality class 1.6 (1.0 optional)
Accuracy:
Zero point
correction:
Protection
class:
Options:
-25C to 60C
Startpage
instrument glass
max. pressure: 110 x full scale value up to 400 mbar
5 x full scale value from 600 mbar
max. media
temperature.: 60C for PMKF.1, 100C for PMKF.2
Contents
on the front side

IP45
10x overpressure-safe,Choke screw,
special scales, stainless steel measuring
system
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
PMKF. 1. 3. W
PMKF. Capsule Element Pressure Gauge

Version:
1 = brass
2 = stainless steel
Type
PMKF.1.1
G1/4A
PMKF.1.2
G1/4A
PMKF.1.3
G1/2A
63mm 53 +/-1
63mm 100mm 87 +/-1
12
39,5
13
11,5 -
12
37
13
20
49,5
21
15,5 -
HEX
14
59
14
22
PMKF.1.4
G1/2A
100mm -
20
49
21
PMKF.1.5
G1/2A
160mm 116 +/-1
20
49,5
21
16,5 -
22
PMKF.1.6
G1/2A
160mm -
20
49
19
22
Nominal size:
1 = 2,5 (63 mm), G 1/4 radially at the bottom
2 = 2,5 (63 mm), G 1/4 centrally at the back
3 = 4 (100 mm), G 1/2 radially at the bottom
4 = 4 (100 mm), G 1/2 centrally at the back
5 = 6 (160 mm), G 1/2 radially at the bottom
6 = 6 (160 mm), G 1/2 centrally at the back
79
22
79
b
D
Operating range:
A = 0 to 25 mbar
B = 0 to 40 mbar
C = 0 to 60 mbar
D = 0 to 100 mbar
E = 0 to 160 mbar
F = 0 to 250 mbar
G = 0 to 400 mbar
H = 0 to 600 mbar
H 1 = 0 to 1000 mbar
I = -25 to 0 mbar
J = -40 to 0 mbar
K = -60 to 0 mbar
L = -100 to 0 mbar
M = -160 to 0 mbar
N = -250 to 0 mbar
O = -400 to 0 mbar
P = -1000 to 0 mbar
P 1 = -600 to 0 mbar
Q = -20 to +40 mbar
R = -40 to +20 mbar
S = -40 to +60 mbar
T = -60 to +40 mbar
U = -60 to +100 mbar
V = -100 to +60 mbar
W = -100 to +150 mbar
X = -150 to +100 mbar
Y = -150 to +250 mbar
Z = -250 to +150 mbar
AA = -200 to +400 mbar
AB = -400 to +200 mbar
a
h
zero point
correction
f
HEX
G
b
D
HEX
www.profimess.de
GMBH
P 12
2008
PROFI
MESS
PMPF
Contents
Startpage
Highly viscous media
Description:
The diaphragm springs are thin, circular and wavy membranes that are fixed between two crimped rings and impacted
by the media on one side. The membrane deflection due to
pressure exerted by the media is utilized to display the pressure by means of an indicator element. Diaphragm pressure
gauges are resistant to vibrations and, optionally, they are
available with safeguards against high overpressure. As the
diaphragms are suitably coated, the devices can be used
even under very rough conditions and hostile materials.
Crystallizing media
Resistant to shocks and vibrations
Highly safe on overpressure
2008
Thanks to their design principle and product material, diaphragm pressure gauges meet any rigorous requirements
that are encountered when deployed in industrial production
plants. Open connecting flanges allow their use for highly viscous, crystallizing and polluted media since in this version
there is no clearance volume which may cause build up of
deposits. Diaphragm pressure gauges are widely used in
food-processing and beverage industries as well as in the
manufacturing of machines, installations and plants.
www.profimess.de
P 13
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
PMPF Diaphragm Pressure Gauges
max. pressure: 1.1 x full scale value (short spell),

10 x on request
0,9 x full scale value in varying loads
max. media
temperature:
PMPF.1 and PMPF.2 - 100C
PMPF.3 and PMPF.4- 100C
max. ambient
temperature.: PMPF.1 and PMPF.2 - 65C
PMPF.3 and PMPF.4 - 60C
Temperature
behaviour:
PMPF.1 and PMPF.2
+/-0.5% each +/-10 K ambient temperature
PMPF.3 and PMPF.4
+/-0.6% each +/-10 K ambient temperature
PMPF.2 - Diaphragm pressure gauge with diaphragm spring

positioned vertically to the dial level, nominal size 160 mm,
connection G1/2A at the bottom, flange DN160 up to 400
mbar, flange DN100 from 400 mbar.
PMPF3 - Diaphragm pressure gauge with diaphragm spring
positioned vertically to dial level, nominal size 100 mm,
mbar, flange DN100 from 400 mbar, fully stainless steel.
Housing:

positioned vertically to dial level, nominal size 160 mm,
mbar, flange DN100 from 400 mbar, fully stainless steel.
Process
connection:
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
PMPF. 4.
I.
Version:
1 = 4 (100
2 = 6 (160
3 = 4 (100
4 = 6 (160
mm),
mm),
mm),
mm),
Diaphragm
Diaphragm
Diaphragm
Diaphragm
spring
spring
spring
spring
at
at
at
at
the
the
the
the
bottom
bottom
bottom stainless steel version
bottom stainless steel version
Operating range:
A = 0 to 0,6 bar
B = 0 to 1 bar
C = 0 to 1,6 bar
D = 0 to 2,5 bar
E = 0 to 4 bar
F = 0 to 6 bar
G = 0 to 10 bar
H = 0 to 16 bar
I = 0 to 25 bar
I1 = 0 to 40 bar
J = -1 to 0 bar
J1 = -1 to 0,6 bar
K = -1 to 1,5 bar
L = -1 to 3 bar
M = -1 to 5 bar
N = -1 to 9 bar
O = -1 to 15 bar
P = -1 to 25 bar
R = 0 to 16 mbar (only in PMPF.1 and PMPF.2)
S = 0 to 25 mbar
T = 0 to +40 mbar
U = 0 to +60 mbar
V = 0 to +100 mbar
W = 0 to +160 mbar
X = 0 to +250 mbar
Y = 0 to +400 mbar
AA = -25 to 0 mbar (only PMPF.3 and PMPF.4)
AB = -40 to 0 mbar (only PMPF.3 and PMPF.4)
AC = -60 to 0 mbar (only PMPF.3 and PMPF.4)
AD = -100 to 0 mbar (only PMPF.3 and PMPF.4)
AE = -160 to 0 mbar (only PMPF.3 and PMPF.4)
AF = -250 to 0 mbar (only PMPF.3 and PMPF.4)
AG = -400 to 0 mbar (only PMPF.3 and PMPF.4)
AH = -40 to +20 mbar (only PMPF.3 and PMPF.4)
AI = -60 to +40 mbar (only PMPF.3 and PMPF.4)
AJ = -100 to +60 mbar (only PMPF.3 and PMPF.4)
AK = -150 to +100 mbar (only PMPF.3 and PMPF.4)
AL = -250 to +150 mbar (only PMPF.3 and PMPF.4)
PROFI
MESS
PMPF.1 and PMPF.2 - steel

PMPF.3 and PMPF.4 - stainless steel AISI 316
Inspection
glass:
instrument glass
PMPF.1 and PMPF.2
Duratherm or Zirconium
PMPF.3 and PMPF.4 - stainless steel AISI 316.
coating and other material on request
Connection:
G1/2A at the bottom
Accuracy:
quality class 1.6
Protection
class:
Options:
PMPF.1 and PMPF.2 - IP43

PMPF.3 and PMPF.4 - IP55
10x overpressure safe,
open connection flange,
membrane coating,
glycerin filling,
other connection threads.
www.profimess.de
GMBH
P 14
Startpage
Dial:
Operating
element:
Contents
2008

positioned vertically to the dial level, nominal size 100 mm,
mbar, flange DN100 from 400 mbar.
PM-2000
Magnehelic Differential
Pressure Indicator for Gases
Contents
Startpage
Description: The PM-2000 differential pressure gauge used

in thousands operates according to the Magnehelic principle.
In this, the rear side of a membrane is loaded with the positive while the front side of the membrane is loaded with the
negative connection to a differential pressure which causes a
mechanical deflection. The membrane is equipped with a U
shaped permanent magnet where its mechanical movement
is transferred without touch to a similarly magnetic helix at
the end of which directly the indicator of PM-2000 is located.
The membrane deflection is, therefore, directly proportional
to the indicator movement and the operating range only
depends on the membrane's material properties. During
such transfer of movement there are no losses due to friction; with the result even the smallest differences in pressure
can be captured. The movement and the scale are located in
an extremely robust aluminium housing that is suitable for
mounting on a switch panel. The indicator made of aluminium has a red, clearly visible tip and is sapphire-mounted to
withstand shocks. The housings are fitted with a overpressure plug made of silicon rubber for protection against overpressure in models capable up to 100 kPa. The indicator
stoppers are made of rubber which prevent damage to the
indicator in case of wide deflections. In every PM-2000, the
user can readjust the zero point for the device by means of a
setting screw that is mounted directly in the plastic cover.
Proven and renowned technology

Resistant to shocks and vibrations
Accuracy class 2%
All common operating ranges
and units
Ideally suited for filter monitoring
Switch panel mounting
2008
Range of application: The PM-2000 differential pressure

gauges are used in large numbers for monitoring air filters
and air speeds. Their unique construction allows measurement of even the smallest variations in pressures in fans and
blowers, blood or respiratory pressures, overpressure in rows
of chimneys, pressure drop in pressure plates and in many
other situations. The extraordinarily robust construction with
high degree of accuracy and variety of operating ranges and
units are combined in an affordable product. Optionally,
customer-specific scale types, adjustable marking indicators,
limiting value display by means of LEDs and a wide choice of
accessories are available. The delivery includes tube bushings for connecting to NPT-female of the housing and a
complete set of accessories for mounting on a switch panel.
www.profimess.de
P 15
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
Operating range:
A large number of operating ranges and physical units are
available. All standard variants are listed in the table
Operating ranges. Please enquire for special type operating
ranges.
Options:
ASF Additional features for the indicator with an adjustable
marking indicator for visual control.
HP Overpressure safety up to 80 psi (5.52 bar) ensured by
a thicker housing. A 4 13/16 board cutout is necessary for
assembly as against the standard cutout (4 9/16).
LT Media temperatures up to -28C possible as against the
standard up to -6.67C.
MP - Overpressure safety up to 35 psi (2.41 bar) ensured by
a thicker housing. A 4 13/16 board cutout is necessary for
assembly as against the standard cutout (4 9/16).
SP An LED on the scale alerts if the limiting value that can
be set from the front exceeds. The unit requires a power supply of 12.to.24 V DC and an MP- or HP housing.
SSK A large number of special type scales are available on
request.
Media:
PM-2000 Operating range table
Air and non-hostile and non-inflammable

gases (optionally version for natural gases
on request)
Housing:
aluminium casting, iridite-immersed
external machining burnt-in dark gray forging
Accuracy:
+/- 2% F.S. (3% in zero center ranges,
4% in 00 ranges) in the entire range at 21C
Weight:
510 g
Pressure:
-0.677 bar to 1.034 bar maximum static
pressure (2.41 bar in the MP option, 5.52 bar
in the HP option)
Overpressure: blow out plug opens at approx. 1.72 kPa
(only in standard devices)
Temperatur: -6.67C.to +60C (-28C in the LT option)
Mounting
position:
vertical, scale towards the front
Process
connections: 2 x 1/8-NPT-female, one pair of connections
on the side, one additionally at the back
(closure plugs for one pair supplied)
Zero point:
can be set with the correction screw from
the front
Units with double scale

speeds
Range
Model
Inch
number
watercolumn
for air
Range
air
speed
F.P.M.
Model
number
0.010
0.020
0.050
0.100
0.200
0.500
1.000
0-0.25
2000-00AV
0-0.50
2000-0AV
0-1.0
2001AV
0-2.0
2002AV
0-10
2010AV
for using a pitot tube
300-2000
500-2800
500-4000
1000-5600
2000-12500
Model
Range
number
PSI
2201
0-1
2202
0-2
2203
0-3
2204
0-4
2205
0-5
2210*
0-10
2215*
0-15
2220*
0-20
2230**
0-30
* MP-Option is standard
**HP-Option is standard
Least
setting
0.020
0.050
0.100
0.100
0.100
0.200
0.500
0.500
1.000
Model
number
Range
mm
watercolumn
0-6
2000-6MM
2000-10MM 0-10
2000-25MM 0-25
2000-50MM 0-50
2000-80MM 0-80
2000-100MM 0-100
Zero center ranges
Least
setting
Range
kPa
Options:
Model
number
Range
Inch
watercolumn
Least
setting
Model
number
Zero center Least

ranges,
setting
Inch
watercolum
2000-00
2000-0
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2008
2010
2015
2020
2025
2030
2040
2050
2060
2080
2100
2150
0-0.25
0-0.5
0-1.0
0-2.0
0-3.0
0-4.0
0-5.0
0-6.0
0-8.0
0-10
0-15
0-20
0-25
0-30
0-40
0-50
0-60
0-80
0-100
0-150
0.005
0.010
0.020
0.050
0.100
0.100
0.100
0.200
0.200
0.200
0.500
0.500
0.500
1.000
1.000
1.000
2.000
2.000
2.000
5.000
2300-0
2301
2302
2304
2310
2320
2330
0.25-0-025
0.5-0-0.5
1-0-1
2-0-2
5-0-5
10-0-10
15-0-15
2300-20MM
10-0-10
0.200
0.200
0.500
1.000
2.000
2.000
Range
cm
watercolumn
Least
setting
Model
number
Range
Pascal
Least
setting
2000-15CM 0-15
2000-20CM 0-20
2000-25CM 0-25
2000-50CM 0-50
2000-80CM 0-80
2000-100CM 0-100
2000-150CM 0-150
2000-200CM 0-200
2000-250CM 0-250
2000-300CM 0-300
Zero center ranges point
0.500
0.500
0.500
1.000
2.000
2.000
5.000
5.000
5.000
10.000
2000-60PA
2000-100PA
2000-125PA
2000-250PA
2000-300PA
2000-500PA
2000-750PA
0-60
0-100
0-125
0-250
0-300
0-500
0-750
2.000
5.000
5.000
5.000
10.000
10.000
25.000
2300-4CM
2300-10CM
2300-30CM
0.100
0.200
1.000
2-0-2
5-0-5
15-0-15
0.500
Double scale
Inch waterRange
column/Pa
Range
Model
number
Inch
watercolumn
Pa
2000-0D
2001D
2002D
2003D
2004D
2006D
2008D
2010D
0-0.5
0-1.0
0-2.0
0-3.0
0-4.0
0-6.0
0-8.0
0-10
0-125 Pa
0-250 Pa
0-500 Pa
0-700 Pa
0-1.0 kPa
0-1.5 kPa
0-2.0 kPa
0-2.5 kPa
ASF adjustable marking indicator

HP highly safe on overpressure
LT for low temperatures up to -28C
MP medium safe on overpressure
SP LED for setpoint display (no output)
SSK special type scale with coloured marking (red, green, mirror)
on request
Contents
Startpage
Zero center ranges

2300-60PA
2300-120PA
2300-250PA
2300-500PA
30-0-30
60-0-60
125-0-125
250-0-250
2.000
2.000
5.000
10.000
Model
number
2000-1KPA
2000-1,5KPA
2000-2KPA
2000-3KPA
2000-4KPA
2000-5KPA
2000-8KPA
2000-10KPA
2000-15KPA
2000-20KPA
2000-25KPA
2000-30KPA
Range
Kilo-Pascal
0-1
0-1,5
0-2
0-3
0-4
0-5
0-8
0-10
0-15
0-20
0-25
0-30
Least
setting
0.020
0.050
0.050
0.100
0.100
0.100
0.200
0.200
0.500
0.500
0.500
1.000
Zero center ranges

2300-1KPA
2300-3KPA
0.5-0-0.5
1.5-0-1.5
0.020
0.100
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
PM-2000. 2300-250PA.
ASF.
Magnehelic
Differential Pressure Gauges for Gases
Operating range, refer to
model number in the table for operating ranges:
[][][][]-[][]
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
P 16
2008
Options:
ASF: marking indicator can be set
HP: highly safe on overpressure
LT: for low temperatures up to -28C
MP: medium safe on overpressure
SP: LED for setpoint display (no output)
SSK: special type scale with coloured marking (ret, green, mirror) on request
DM-400
Digital Manometer with
integrated Bargraph Display
Contents
Startpage
The high-end version of DM-400 has additionally a second

4 1/2-digit display system that is intended for displaying
MIN/MAX memory, Tara function and other parameters independent of the main display. Here, the additional features are
the adjustable Tara function, backlit display that ensures
optimum lighting for the housing even under unfavorable
conditions of light and a 300 rotatable process connection.
While the standard version of DM-400 has an ex factory
automatic power off function, the advanced version enables
the user to set this between 2 and 90 minutes. This facilitates
longer life for the 2 AA battery cells powering the DM-400
and ultimately 4000 hours of operational time.
Accuracy class 0.5%

Operating ranges from 2 to 700 bar
LCD display with 11 mm high digits
Bargraph with drag indicator function
Today, in the industry, conventional Bourdon tube pressure
gauges are increasingly replaced by digital manometers,
since these devices are more accurate, long lasting and stable
and possess additional characteristics that are impossible for
mechanical manometers due to their design. Therefore, the
user of a DM-400 has the advantage of accurate display of
the measured value, peak value memory and a bargraph display including drag display function that allows instantaneous
identification of the status at a measuring point.
Since "pressure" is the most frequently measured physical
factor, the DM-400 digital manometer has no limitations for
its application. Typical areas of application are:
Tara function
Password protection
MIN/MAX memory
Optionally with backlight
2008
Description:
Digital Manometer DM-400 from Profimess is the ideal solution for a local, power-independent display of process pressure in low as well as high pressure ranges. This new generation digital manometer features excellent basic characteristics
such as accuracy, reliability and overload resistance.
All models of DM-400 are equipped with a 11 mm high LCD
display and an additional bargraph display with drag indicator
function. The unit of measurement for the display of the measured pressure can be interchanged between "bar", "PSI"
and "MPa" and a MIN/MAX memory can retain the measured
peak values even when the battery needs to be replaced.
Machine construction
Plant manufacturing
Apparatus engineering
including
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Measuring equipment monitoring.
www.profimess.de
P 17
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Assuracy:
0.5% of full scale value 1 digit as

per IEC 31298-2 including non-linearity,
hysteresis, zero point and full scale
value deviation
Programmable
parameters:
Conversion rate: 5 per sec
Advanced version DM-400.2:

selectable units of measurement bar,
PSI, Mpa adjustable automatic cut off
time 2...90 min
TARA 20% adjustable full scale value
Operating range
as per EN:
0...2 bar to 0...700 bar,
others on request
Pressure type:
positive and negative overpressure
Overload limit:
2x, max. 1000 bar
Wetted parts:
Operating ranges 50 bar stainless steel,

AI203, NBR, ceramic sensor element
Operating ranges 100 bar only stainless
steel, sensor element thin-film technology
Pressure
connection:
in advanced version DM-400.2 only
Temperature
compensated
range:
0...60C
Startpage
-20C...+70C
Measured
material temp.:
MIN/MAX
(non-volatile even on changing battery)
Contents
0.15% per 10K on zero point

and range
Storage
temperature:
0.2% of full scale value in reference

conditions
Memory:
Backlight:
Temp. factor:
G1/4"-male or 1/4"-NPT-male,
in advanced version DM-400.2 rotatable
by 300
other thread systems on request
Stability
per year:
Standard version DM-400.1:

selectable units of measurement bar,
PSI, Mpa automatic cut off time
2...90 min can be set ex factory
-30C...+85C (-30C...+100C in
operating ranges 100 bar)
Ambient temp.:
-10C...+60C
Housing:
stainless steel, optionally protective

cap black
Weight:
approx. 0.4 kg
Display:
Standard version DM-400.1:

7-segment LCD display, 11 mm high
9999 digit bargraph display
Advanced version DM-400.2:
7/14-segment LCD display, 11 mm high
19999 digit
second display 19999 digit, 7mm high
bargraph display
Ordering codes:
DM-400. 2. 1. E
DM-400 Digital Manometer

with integrated bargraph display
Available versions:
1 = Standard version with 4-digit display,
MIN/MAX memory and bargraph
2 = Advanced version with 41/2-digit display,
additional display, backlight,
rotatable process connection, MIN/MAX memory,
bargraph and Tara function
Power supply:
2 x 1.5 V AA type batteries
Operation time:
4000 h (AA 2000 mAh)
Protection class:
IP 65 as per EN 60529 / IEC 529
Approved rel.
humidity:
< 90% non-condensing
Interference:
as per EN 61326
Anti-interference: as per EN 61326
Process connection:
1 = G1/4"-male (standard)
2 = 1/4"-NPT-male
43,1
5,6
83,5
Operating range:
sensor element ceramic/NBR
A = 0-2 bar rel.
B = 0-5 bar rel.
C = 0-10 bar rel.
D = 0-20 bar rel.
E = 0-50 bar rel.
80
sensor element thin-film stainless steel

F = 0-100 bar rel.
G = 0-160 bar rel.
H = 0-250 bar rel.
l = 0-400 bar rel.
J = 0-600 bar rel.
K = 0-700 bar rel.
66,5
15
G1/4 B
PROFI
MESS
15,8
www.profimess.de
GMBH
P 18
2008
Ordering number:
PS-00
Low-Cost Pressure Switch
Contents
Startpage
Settings can be made on location
Description:
A spring-loaded membrane or (in higher ranges of pressure)
a spring-loaded piston form the measurement technical basis
for the Profimess' Low-Cost Pressure switch PS-00. Under
the influence of pressure the operating element actuates an
electrical micro-switch that is equipped with silver contacts
and thus ensures a long life span. By means of a setting
screw the pre-tension for the spring can be smoothly adjusted, with the result that the setpoint can be varied along
entire range of setting.
Long mechanical life span

Small dimensions
Silver or gold contacts
2008
Mechanical pressure switches are used in all areas where an
electrical signal is required depending on the specified pressure parameters. These devices are predestined - thanks to
small dimensions, high reliability and long life span especially for applications in the construction of machines and
installations. Due to excellent price to performance ratio, the
PS-00 range of pressure switches are suited for OEM applications as well regardless of average to high numbers.
www.profimess.de
P 19
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
PS-00 Low-Cost Pressure Switches
Operating range:
refer to ordering codes
Operating range: Overall 4 ranges of pressure for overpressure and 1 for negative pressure can be selected. Membrane
pressure switches are meant for up to 70 bar, whereas
piston pressure switches are intended for 200 bar.
Mode of setting:
by setting screw, under pressure
Switching hysteresis:
15.to 20% of set point value

1 x end of range
Contact: As a standard the micro-switch is provided with

silver-plated contacts. For applications where less transitional
resistance is important, switches with gold-plated contacts
are available as an option.
max. operating
pressure:
Membrane material: An NBR membrane is used as a

standard for the membrane design while the piston model
has a piston made of PUR. Optionally, both versions can
be supplied in Viton.
Switching voltage:
max. 42 V
Switching current:
max. 2 A
Switching load:
max. 100 VA
Switching function:
Change-over (NO-contact or
NC-contact on request)
Flat plug 2 x 6.3 x 0.8
Protection class:
IP65 on media side

IP00 on clamp side
Contents
Startpage
1 x end of range
Bursting pressure:
at < 10 bar 2 x end of range,

up to 200 bar 1.5 x end of range
max. media temp.:
-25C to +85C
Housing:
Steel zinc-plated/ brass at PS00.5

(stainless steel on request)
Process connection:
G1/4B for overpressure ranges,

G1/8B for negative pressure ranges
Weight:
approx. 0.15 kg
h
HEX
a
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
PS-00. 2. 2. 1
PS-00 Low-Cost Pressure Switches
G
Operating range:
1 = 0,3 to 2 bar
2 = 1 to 10 bar
3 = 10 to 70 bar
4 = 50 to 200 bar
5 = -800 mbar to -20 mbar
Contact:
1 = silver
2 = gold
PS-00.(12)
PS-00.5
PS-00.(34)
PROFI
MESS
D
20.5
29
20.5
a
25.8
28
33.8
b
9
9
9
h
49
51
56
G
G1/4
G1/8
G1/4
HEX
24
27
24
www.profimess.de
GMBH
P 20
2008
Membrane material:
1 = NBR/PUR
2 = Viton
PS-01
Diaphragm Piston Pressure
Switch
Contents
Startpage
Description:
Mechanical pressure switches are intended for pressuredependent switching on or off an electrical circuit. A pressure
switch can be used as a control device as well as for visual
or acoustic control for a operating point. The setpoint for a
device is set by the user by means of a knurled screw with
the operating range. The life span and repeatability depend
on the extent and speed of the changes in pressure, the
number of load shifts and effect of temperature. The best
accuracy is obtained at operational levels above 70%, the
maximum life span at operational levels below 30% of the
operating range end value. Therefore, the ideal combination
of these parameters lies in the middle of the operating range.
Setting screw
Auxiliary scale
Highly safe on overpressure
Mechanical pressure switches are preferably used where
robust and simple devices are needed. A number of applications are possible in the construction of installations, in
vehicle and machine manufacturing, in medical engineering,
in water management, in the treatment of effluents and in
pneumatic technology. Profimess' pressure switches are
often found in fluid-technical systems for monitoring minimum pressures, for example, as a protection against dry
runs in a pump or for safeguarding oil lubrication units.
Similarly, monitoring maximum pressure is also possible such
as directly switching off a machine if the pressure reaches its
safety limits.
Long life span
2008
NPT or G thread
www.profimess.de
P 21
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
PS-01 Diaphragm Piston Pressure Switch
Housing lid material:

The lid plate of the housing is made of polycarbonate or
stainless steel.
Operating range:
Type
Operating range Operating range Max. hysteresis Max. hysteresis

in bar Increasing in bar Dropping in bar in
in bar in
pressure
pressure
micro-switch M micro-switch H
PS-01.1
0.04 to 1
0.035 to 0.9
0.16
0.06
PS-01.2
0.25 to 6
0.21 to 5.8
0.73
0.55
PS-01.3
0.8 to 17
0.7 to 16.3
1.86
1.38
PS-01.4
2 to 35
1.8 to 33
1.93
PS-01.5
-0.07 to -1
-0.02 to -0.98
0.06
Membrane material:
The membrane is made of NBR, Viton or PTFE depending
on the medium.
Process connection material:
Along with the membrane, the pressure connection forms
the part of PS-01 contacted by the media. Depending on the
medium, it is available as aluminium anodized, brass, polysulphone or aluminium nickel-plated models.
Micro-switch:
Optionally, the PS-01 is equipped with a micro-switch of type
M or that of type H. The H switch has small return switching
values, high AC voltage but low DC voltage loads. In the M
switch the return switching values are relatively higher; however, higher DC voltage loads can be connected.
Startpage
Refer also to the table micro-switch
Process connection:
PS-01.1, PS-01.2, PS-01.3 and PS-01.4 can be supplied
with 1/4NPT-female, 1/8NPT-female, 1/2 NPT-female or
G1/4-female.
For the PS-01.5 connection of 1/8 NPT-female plus 1/2
NPT-male are available.
screw clamps and cable gland

PG 13.5
Protection class:
IP65
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
Contents
PS-01. 5. 2. 5. 2. 3. 1.
PS-01 Diaphragm Piston Pressure Switch
Operating range:
-1 bar to 35 bar
max. pressure:
70 bar short spell,

-1 bar in PS-01.5
max. media
temperature:
-30C to +70C
Switching frequency:
max. 20/min
Repeatability:
+/- 2% at constant temperature
Housing:
Weight:
anodized aluminium
0.7 kg
Operating range:
1 = to 1 bar
2 = to 6 bar
3 = to 17 bar
4 = to 35 bar
5 = vacuum
cabel gland PG 13,5

diameters 712 mm
Micro-switch:
1 = switch M
2 = switch H
Process connection:
Overpressure (PS-01.(1-4)):
1 = 1/4 NPT-female (not polysulphone)
2 = 1/8 NPT-female
3 = 1/2 NPT-male
4 = G1/4-female (only Al anodized)
Vacuum (PS-01.5):
5 = 1/8 NPT-female plus
1/2 NPT-male (only Al)
Housing lid material:
1 = polycarbonat
2 = stainless steel
Microswitch

1 = aluminium anodized
2 = polysulphone
3 = aluminium nickel-plated
PROFI
MESS
Volt AC,
50 Hz
Ind. load Res. load

in A
in A
Volt DC
Ind. load
in A
Res. load
in A
125
10
10
12
250
10
10
24
480
250
0.25
0.4
0.5
0.5
125
10
10
250
10
10
to
480
28
15
www.profimess.de
GMBH
P 22
2008
Membrane material:
1 = NBR
2 = Viton
3 = Teflon
PS-02N
Contents
Startpage
Compact
Description:
Mechanical pressure switches are intended for pressuredependent switching on and off an electrical circuit.
A pressure switch can be used as a control device as well
as for visual or acoustical control for an operating point.
The PS-02N series of compact pressure switches is designed
as piston or diaphragm pressure switches depending on the
pressure range.
Both the versions are similar in construction where, in the
case of the former, a spring-loaded piston actuates the
micro-switch while, in the case of the latter, a spring-loaded
elastomer membrane assumes this function. The setpoints
can be set by means of a female hexagon SW5.
Fine adjustments are optionally possible depending on
customer requirements. The contacts for the micro-switch
can be gold-plated on request so as to minimize the electrical
transitional resistance, if necessary.
Robust
6 Pressure ranges
Up to 600 bar
Plug connection
2008
Thanks to the compact design of the PS-02N series and
the broad spectrum of pressure range of 1 bar to 600 bar
in 6 levels, these switches are well-suited for machine and
vehicle manufacturing, packaging industry, pneumatic and
hydraulic technologies and for equipment manufacturing.
www.profimess.de
P 23
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Models:
Operating range:
Type
Setting range
Setting range
Max. hysteresis
dropping pressure rising pressure
Max. operating
pressure [bar]
Diaphragm
switch
PS-02N.1
0,3...5,7 bar
0,4...6,0 bar
15%
80 (Option 200)
PS-02N.2
2,0...17 bar
3,0...20 bar
15%
80 (Option 200)
PS-02N.3
3,0...41 bar
4,0...45 bar
15%
80 (Option 200)
Piston
switch
Plug
DIN EN 175301- 803A
Plug
M 12 x 1, 4-pole
Cable gland
with 2 meter cable
COMMON
BN
Normally
closed
BK
Normally
opened
GY
PE
GN / YE
Startpage
Electrical load capacity:
PS-02N.5
3,0...160 bar
5,0...180 bar
13%, at LH 7,5%
600
PS-02N.6
30...300 bar
50...350 bar
13%, at LH 7,5%
600
Ag contacts
inductive load
ohmic load
Au contacts
PS-02N.7
55...520 bar
80...600 bar
13%, at LH 7,5%
900
30 VDC
3,0 A
4,0 A
30 VDC
0,1 A
250 VDC
0,2 A
0,2 A
125 VAC
0,1 A
250 VAC
2,0 A
3,0 A
125 VAC
3,0 A
5,0 A
Minimum load
160 mA at 5 VDC
160 mA at 5 VDC
Max. pressure:
see table
Media temp.:
-40C...+80C for piston switch

-20C...+80C for diaphragm switch
-50C on request
Switching
frequency:
Switching
element:
max. 60/min for piston switch

max. 30/min for diaphragm switch
Repeatability:
1% typical piston switch

2% typical diaphragm switch
Housing:
Aluminium die casting 230,

stainless steel 1.4301 on request
Wetted parts:
NBR, PTFE, bronze and

stainless steel 1.4301 for piston switch
NBR and stainless steel 1.4301 for
diaphragm switch (optionally NBR can
be replaced by Viton, EPDM or CR)
Setting screw:
Pressure
connection:
ohmic load
0,1 mA at 5 VDC
changeover contact (SPDT)
Electrical
connection:
Plug DIN EN 175301-803A or

Plug M 12x1, 4-pole or Plug M 12x1,
4-pole with 2 m tipped cable or
cable gland with 2 m cable
Protection class: IP65 or IP67 for plug connections IP68

for cable screw joint with 2 m cable
EX versions:
intrinsically safe design EEx ia IIB T6

on request
Options:
Approval for shipping as per GL

US-approval as per UL
Low hysteris LH
stainless steel 1.4301 (SW5)

Dimensions (mm):
G1/4"-female, 1/8"-NPT-female straight

or angular, 1/8"-NPT-female straight
(others on request)
Total weight:
Contents
Cable
68
approx. 620 gr in straight connection

approx. 675 gr in angular connection
5,5
80
44
40
30
Ordering codes:
SW 5 hexagon socket
PS-02N. 7. 1. 1. 1
Ordering number:
53
84
PS-02N Compact Pressure Switch
Operating range:
1 = 0.3...5,7 bar dropping, 0.4...6.0 bar rising
2 = 2.0...17 bar dropping, 3.0...20 bar rising
6 = 30...300 bar dropping, 50...350 bar rising
7 = 55...520 bar dropping, 80...600 bar rising
PS-02N.x.x.x.1
PS-02N.x.x.x.34
M 12 x 1
ca.
30
Process connection:
1g = G1/4"-female straight
1w = G1/4"-female angular
2g = 1/4"-NPT-female straight
2w = 1/4"-NPT-female angular
3 = 1/8"-NPT-female straight
ca.
19
ca.
22
Process connection:
40
19
PS-02N.x.1g. and 3.x.x
PS-02N.x.1w. and 2w.x.x

19
5,6
Contacts:
1 = silver
2 = gold
5,6
5,6
19
1 = Cable gland, 2 m cable, IP68
2 = Plug DIN EN175301-803A, IP65, with counterpart
3 = Plug M12, 4-pole, without counterpart, IP67
4 = Plug M12, 4-pole, with counterpart angular 90
with 2 m cable, IP67
12
30
Connector block
straight Version
40
30
Connector block 90
angular version
www.profimess.de
GMBH
P 24
2008
PROFI
MESS
11
PS-03
Contents
Startpage
Description:
Mechanical pressure switches are intended for pressuredependent switching on or off an electrical circuit. A pressure
switch can be used as a control device as well as for visual
or acoustic control for a operating point. The PS-03 series of
compact pressure switches is designed as piston or diaphragm pressure switches depending on the pressure range.
Due to their slim and compact design, they can be conveniently mounted even in the narrowest areas of a machine.
Compact
Slim design
6 pressure ranges
Both the version are similar in construction where, in the

case of the former, a spring-loaded piston actuates the
micro-switch while, in the case of the latter, a spring-loaded
elastomer membrane assumes this function. As per the
user's requirements, the setpoints are factory-set. Since the
aspect of hysteresis must be taken into regard, it needs to
be specified if the setpoint is required at increasing or
decreasing pressure. The contacts for the micro-switch can
be gold-plated on request so as to minimize the electrical
transitional resistance, if necessary.
Up to 400 bar
Cable or plug connection
IP67
2008
Thanks to the compact design of the PS-03 series, its high
protection class (IP67 for cable connection) and the factoryset highly accurate setpoint, these switches are well-suited
for machine and equipment manufacturing. Experience has
shown successful application in the packaging machine and
vehicle industry and in the effluent treatment industry.
www.profimess.de
P 25
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
PS-03 Compact Pressure Switch
Electrical
connection:
Protection
class:
Operating range:
Type
Operating range in bar max. Hysteresis max. Operating

Pressure increasing in bar
pressure
Diaphragm
PS-03.1
1 to 6
0.6
40*
PS-03.2
5 to 25
2.6
40*
PS-03.3
10 to 40
3.8
40*
Piston
PS-03.4
30 bis100
15
300
PS-03.5
60 to 300
30
300
PS-03.6
150 to 400
60
400
Operating
range:
1 bar to 400 bar
max. pressure: 80 bar short spell (diaphragm version)
450 bar short spell
(piston version PS-03.4 and PS-03.5)
600 bar short spell
(piston version PS-03.6)
max. media
temperature.: -40C to +80C (piston version)
-20C to +80C (diaphragm version)
Switching
frequency:
max. 60/min (piston switch)
max. 30/min (diaphragm switch)
Repeatability: +/- 1% typical (piston switch)
+/- 2% typical (diaphragm switch)
Housing:
stainless steel
Weight:
approx. 0.2 kg
Process
connection:
M12x1.5 or G1/4-male
Process
connectionmaterial:
stainless steel (diaphragm version)
brass (piston version)
Wetted parts: NBR, PTFE, brass and roller bearing steel
(piston version)
NBR, PTFE, stainless steel
(diaphragm version)
Setpoint
adjustment:
factory setting
Setpoint: Please specify here the setpoint in bar as [S] for

increasing or [F] for decreasing pressure as it will be pre-set
at the factory.
Electrical connection: The switch can be optionally provided with a 0.6 m silicon cable of IP67 or with a plug as per
DIN 43650 C for IP65.
Process connection: The PS-03 can be provided with M
12x1.5 or G1/4-male connection.
Contacts: The micro-switch designed as a change-over
switch can be supplied with silver-plated or gold-plated
contacts. The maximum loads are specified in the following
table:
Silver contacts
Gold contacts
30 VDC / 50 VDC
30 VDC
max. current inductive
3A/1A
max. current Ohmic
10 A / 1 A
400mA for 0.12VA
Startpage
PS-03.x.x.1
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
Contents
P65 plug connection
IP67 cable cord
*Higher operating pressures (up to 150 bar) on request
Voltage
plug connector DIN 43650 C or cable

cord with 0.6 m silicon cable
PS-03. 5. [1][5][0][S] 1. 1. 1.
PS-03 Compact Pressure Switch

Operating range:
1 = 1 bar to 6 bar
2 = 5 bar to 25 bar
3 = 10 bar to 40 bar
4 = 30 bar to 100 bar
5 = 60 bar to 300 bar
6 = 150 bar to 400 bar
PS-03.x.x.2
plug connector
DIN 43650 C
HEX 27
HEX 15
Setpoint:
[ ][ ][ ][S/F]
1 = cable cord
2 = plug DIN 43650 C
pressure
connection
Process connection:
1 = M12x1,5
2 = G1/4
HEX 27
Contacts:
1 = silver
2 = gold
www.profimess.de
GMBH
P 26
2008
PROFI
MESS
pressure
connection
PDC-1
Pressure Switch for
Non-Hostile Fluid and
Gaseous Media
Contents
Startpage
Description:
The PDC series of mechanical pressure switches is characterized by their extreme resilience. The PDC-1 has a robust
housing made of sea-water resistant aluminium pressure
casting. Depending on the pressure range, it has a connection fitting in Cu Zn or stainless steel 1.4104 with a G1/2male and a G1/4-female. Excrescent pressure changes at
the connection act on an internal measuring diaphragm the
movements of which are transferred to a high-performance
micro-switch through a connecting bridge. The setpoint is set
externally by rotating a spindle for nominal value that directly
modifies the pre-tension of a spring. In addition, the construction has counter-pressure spring that ensures a very stable connection even at low set-points.
Extremely resilient
Universal connection
Hysteresis can be set
Wide span of measuring
2008
The PDC-1 series pressure switches is used in applications
where high requirements are placed on the switch's life span
and mechanical strength. Due to the fact that the pressuresensing measuring diaphragms are only less loaded considering their permissible values the PDC-1 guarantees an
excellent long-term stability at minimal setpoint drift.
Consequent to its design, the upstroke of the pressure diaphragms is limited by means of a stopper so that high overpressure safety is ensured even in small operating ranges. A
number of operating ranges are available of which also a version with adjustable hysteresis can be supplied. This enables
the user to accurately control a span of pressures with only
a single device. Thanks to its material quality, flexibility of
connections and high switching load of the micro-switch,
the PDC-1 is predestined for use across all sections of the
industry.
www.profimess.de
Twischlehe 5 D-27580 Bremerhaven Tel.: +49 (0471) 98 24 -151 Fax: +49 (0471) 98 24 -152 E-Mail: info@profi-
P 27
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
Material of
pressure sensor:
PDC-1 Pressure Switches for Non-Hostile Fluid and

Gaseous Media
Hysteresis:
In PDC-1.1.A to PDC-1.1.M
the hysteresis cannot be set.
In PDC-1.2.D to PDC-1.2.M
The hysteresis can be set as
specified in the following table.
PDC-1.x.(A...C): diaphragm
Perbunan sensor housing 1.4301
PDC-1.x.(D...F): metal diaphragm
Cu Zn sensor housing Cu Zn
PDC-1.x.(G...M): metal diaphragm
1.4571 sensor housing 1.4104
Contents
Startpage
Operating range:
Type:
PDC-1.x.A
PDC-1.x.B
PDC-1.x.C
PDC-1.x.D
PDC-1.x.E
PDC-1.x.F
PDC-1.x.G
PDC-1.x.H
PDC-1.x.I
PDC-1.x.J
PDC-1.x.K
PDC-1.x.L
PDC-1.x.M
Hysteresis
cannot be set
2 mbar
2 mbar
12 mbar
0.03 bar
0.04 bar
0.04 bar
0.1 bar
0.15 bar
0.3 bar
0.5 bar
1.0 bar
1.3 bar
2.0 bar
Hysteresis
can be set
0.03-0.4 bar
0.04-0.5 bar
0.07-0.55 bar
0.15-1.5 bar
0.25-2.0 bar
0.5-2.8 bar
0.7-3.5 bar
1.3-6.0 bar
2.6-6.6 bar
3.0-10.0 bar
maximum Connectionpressure
drawing No.*
1 bar
11
1 bar
11
10 bar
6 bar
14
6 bar
14
6 bar
14
16 bar
15
16 bar
15
16 bar
15
25 bar
15
60 bar
15
60 bar
15
130 bar
15
Protection class:
plug connection
IP54 in vertical position
The PDC-1.1 .A should only be mounted vertically upwards,

all other versions can be positioned vertically or horizontally,
however, vertical position has advantages for the switches.
Switching load:
250 VAC, 8A (Ohmic),

5A (inductive)
250 V DC, 0.3A (Ohmic)
24 V DC, 8A (Ohmic)
Contacts:
single-pole change-over
* Connection drawings are given in the following data sheet PDC-4
G1/2-male
(diaphragm connection),
G1/4-female
Using the G1/2-male the PDC-1
can be directly screwed on to the
pressure pipe, alternatively
fastening by means of 2 screws
(4mm ) on a plane surface is
also possible.
Operating range:
refer to table
max. pressure:
max. media
temperature:
refer to table
Setpoint:
can be set externally by means of

screw-driver on the spindle
Repeatability:
< 1 % of working range

(for pressure ranges > 1 bar)
Adjustment:
The reading corresponds to lower

setpoint, the upper setpoint higher
by the hysteresis.
Sealing:
On request, ex-factory; sealing

can also be undertaken later.
Pressure Switches For Non-Hostile Fluid And Gaseous Media
Vacuum:
Hysteresis
1 = Hysteresis cannot be set (A - M)
2 = Hysteresis can be set (D - M)
All PDC-1 can be impacted by

vacuum; the device will NOT be
damaged.
Vibration:
Up to 4g no significant deviations.
The hysteresis is slightly reduced
at higher acceleration.
Exceeding 25g is not permissible.
Options:
gold contacts, 2 micro-switches,

according to version, MIN / MAX
limiter
Housing material:
Aluminium pressure casting GD Al

Si 12 (sea-water resistant)
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
PDC-1. 1. K
Operating range
A = 1 to 16 mbar
B = 4 to 25 mbar
C = 10 to 100 mbar
D = 0.04 to 0,25 bar
E = 0,1 to 0,6 bar
F = 0,2 to 1,6 bar
G = 0,2 to 2,5 bar
H = 0,5 to 6 bar
I = 1 to 10 bar
J = 3 to 16 bar
K = 4 to 25 bar
L = 8 to 40 bar
M = 16 to 63 bar
PROFI
MESS
-25C to +70C short spell up

to +85C,
www.profimess.de
GMBH
P 28
2008
Process connection:
PDC
Housings
Contents
Startpage
112
DIN 43650
48,5
45,5
37
8,2.
4,8.
60
46 0,2
2008
60
PG11
www.profimess.de
P 35
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
PDC -Connection diagrams

11
12
2.
Contents
56
26
69
82
HEX 22
20
Startpage
3,5.
HEX 22
6
G 1/4
G 1/2
30
20
132
G1/4
G 1/2
13
14
61
54
HEX 22
20
HEX 22
20
3,5
3,5.
6
G 1/4
6
G 1/4
G 1/2
G 1/2
15
16
HEX 41
50
55
20
20
3,5.
3,5.
6
G 1/4
G 1/4
G 1/2
G 1/2
17
18
11 max
G 1/4
40
74
37
90
G 1/4
HEX 41
70
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
P 36
2008
102
PDC-2
Vacuum Switch
Contents
Startpage
Description:
The PDC series of mechanical pressure switches is characterized by their extreme resilience. The PDC-2 has a robust
housing made of sea-water resistant aluminium pressure
casting. Depending on the pressure range, it has a connection fitting in Perbunan, Cu Zn or stainless steel 1.4104 with
a G1/2-male and a G1/4-female. Excrescent pressure
changes at the connection act on an internal measuring
diaphragm the movements of which are transferred to a highperformance micro-switch through a connecting bridge. The
setpoint is set externally by rotating a spindle for nominal
value that directly modifies the pre-tension of a spring. In
addition, the construction has counter-pressure spring that
ensures a very stable connection even at low set-points.
Robust design
6 operating ranges under vacuum
Zero point excess deviation
Adjustable hysteresis
2008
and mechanical strength. Due to the fact that the pressuresensing measuring diaphragms are only less loaded considering their permissible values the PDC-2 guarantees an
excellent long-term stability at minimal setpoint drift.
Consequent to its design, the upstroke of the pressure diaphragms is limited by means of a stopper so that high overpressure safety is ensured even in small operating ranges. A
number of operating ranges are available of which also a version with adjustable hysteresis can be supplied. In the selection of a range, attention has been paid to cover smaller
pressure spans close to the zero point as well as the entire
range vacuum. Thanks to its material quality, flexibility of
connections and high switching load of the micro-switch,
the PDC-2 is predestined for use across all sections of the
industry.
www.profimess.de
P 29
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
Vacuum Switch
Hysteresis:
In PDC-2.1.A to PDC-2.1.F
the hysteresis cannot be set.
In PDC-2.2.B to PDC-2.2.F
the hysteresis can be set as
specified in the following table.
Protection class:
IP54 in vertical mounting
The PDC-2 can be mounted vertically as well as horizontally;
however, vertical position has an advantage for the switch.
Switching load:
Operating range:
Type:
Hysteresis
cannot be set
PDC-2.x.A 2 mbar
PDC-2.x.B 25 mbar
PDC-2.x.C 45 mbar
PDC-2.x.D 50 mbar
PDC-2.x.E 45 mbar
PDC-2.x.F 50 mbar
Hysteresis
can be set
maximum
pressure
Connectiondrawing No.*
30-200
80-350
90-400
70-500
90-650
1 bar
1,5 bar
3 bar
3 bar
3 bar
6 bar
11
13
14
14
16
16
mbar
mbar
mbar
mbar
mbar
Contacts:
Housing material:
Startpage
Operating range:
refer to table
max. pressure:
refer to table
max. media
temperature:
G1/2-male (pressure gauge

connection), G1/4-female
Using the G1/2-male connection,
the PDC-2 can be directly screwed on to the pressure pipe;
alternatively fastening by means of
2 screws (4 mm ) on a plane
surface is also possible.
Aluminium pressure casting
GD Al Si 12 (sea-water resistant)
Material of
pressure sensor:

5A (inductive)
250 VDC, 0,3A (Ohmic)
24 VDC, 8A (Ohmic)
Contents
' Connection drawing are given in the following data sheet PDC-4
Process connection:
plug connection
PDC-2.x.A:
diaphragm Perbunan
sensor housing 1.4301
PDC-2.x.(B...D):
metal diaphragm Cu Zn
sensor housing Cu Zn
PDC-2.x.(E...F):
metal diaphragm 1.4571
sensor housing 1.4104
-25C to +70C
short spell up to +85C,
Setpoint:

Repeatability:

(at pressure ranges > 1 bar)
Adjustment:
The reading corresponds to the

lower setpoint, the upper setpoint
higher by the hysteresis.
Sealing:
Sealing can be undertaken ex-factory , however, it can also be

undertaken later.
Vibration:
Up to 4g no significant deviation.
The hysteresis is reduced slightly
Options:

limiter
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
PDC-2. 1. D.
Vacuum Switch
Hysteresis
1 = hysteresis cannot be set (A -F)
2 = hysteresis can be set (B - F)
Operating range
A = -15 to +6 mbar
B = - 250 to +100 mbar
C = -1* to +0,1 bar
D = -0.9 to +0,5 bar
E = -250 to +100 mbar (3 bar max.)
F = -1* to +0.1* bar (6 bar max.)
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
P 30
2008
* In case of high vacuum conditions, close to the theoretically possible lowpressure of -1 bar, use of the switch is subject to restrictions due to extraordinary conditions of vacuum technology. However, the vacuum switch itself will
not be damaged at maximum low-pressure.
PDC
Housings
Contents
Startpage
112
DIN 43650
48,5
45,5
37
8,2.
4,8.
60
46 0,2
2008
60
PG11
www.profimess.de
P 35
PROFI
MESS
GMBH

11
12
2.
Contents
56
26
69
82
HEX 22
20
Startpage
3,5.
HEX 22
6
G 1/4
G 1/2
30
20
132
G1/4
G 1/2
13
14
61
54
HEX 22
20
HEX 22
20
3,5
3,5.
6
G 1/4
6
G 1/4
G 1/2
G 1/2
15
16
HEX 41
50
55
20
20
3,5.
3,5.
6
G 1/4
G 1/4
G 1/2
G 1/2
17
18
11 max
G 1/4
40
74
37
90
G 1/4
HEX 41
70
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
P 36
2008
102
PDC-3
Contents
Startpage
Description:
Mechanical pressure switches of the PDC series are characterized by their male mechanical resilience. The PDC-3 has a
robust housing made of sea-water resistant aluminium pressure casting and, depending on the pressure range, it has an
aluminium or stainless steel 1.4305 connection fitting. Both
types of connections are provided with G1/4-female.
Excrescent pressure changes at the connections act on a
double chamber system with stainless steel diaphragm or
Perbunan membrane, the movements of which are transferred to a high-performance micro-switch through a connecting
bridge. The setpoint is set externally by rotating a spindle for
nominal value that directly modifies the pre-tension of a
spring. In addition, the construction has counter-pressure
spring that ensures a very stable connection even at low setpoints.
Compact
Robust design
9 different pressure ranges
Various materials
Plug connection
2008
The PDC-3 series pressure switches is suited for regulating
and monitoring hysteresis from millibar range to 2-digit bar
range. Due to the fact that the pressure-sensing measuring
diaphragms are only less loaded considering their permissible values the PDC-3 guarantees an excellent long-term
stability at minimal setpoint drift. Consequent to its design,
the upstroke of the pressure diaphragms is limited by means
of a stopper so that high overpressure safety is ensured even
in small operating ranges. The PDC-3 can be mainly used for
monitoring filters or gas and fluid flow across all sections of
the industry.
www.profimess.de
P 31
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
Operating range:
refer to table
Operating range:
refer to ordering codes
max. pressure:
refer to table
Process connection:
2xG1/4-female
Using G1/4-female connections
the PDC-3 can be directly screwed to the pressure pipe; alternatively fastening by means of 2
screws
(4 mm ) on a place surface is
also possible. In pressurized tubes
note always that
P (+) high pressure
S (-) low pressure
max. media
temperature:
Housing material:
Material of
pressure sensor:
-25C to +70C short spell

up to +85C,
Setpoint:

screwdriver on the spindle
Repeatability:

(for pressure ranges > 1 bar)
Adjustment:

lower setpoint, the upper setpoint
higher by the hysteresis.
Aluminium pressure casting

GD Al Si 12 (sea-water resistant)
Sealing:
Sealing can be undertaken ex

factory, however, it can be done
also later.
PDC-3.(A...D):
diaphragm Perbunan
Sensor housing Aluminium
PDC-3.(E...I):
Pressure diaphragm 1.4571
Sensor housing 1.4305
Scale:
The PDC-3.A...D have only a plusminus scale; setting is performed

using a pressure gauge or at factory.
Vacuum:

vacuum; the device will NOT be
damaged by it.
Vibration:
up to 4g no significant deviations
The hysteresis is reduced
slightly at higher acceleration.
Options:

limiter
plug connection
Protection class:
IP54 in vertical mounting
The PDC-3 can be mounted vertically as well as horizontally;

Switching load:
Contents

5A (inductive)
250 VDC, 0,3A (Ohmic)
24 VDC, 8A (Ohmic)
Ordering codes:
Type:
PDC-3. D.
Ordering number:
PDC-3.A
PDC-3.B
PDC-3.C
PDC-3.D
PDC-3.E
PDC-3.F
PDC-3.G
PDC-3.H
PDC-3.I
Operating range
Operating range
A* = 4 to 25 mbar
B*= 10 to 60 mbar
C* = 20 to 160 mbar
D* = 100 to 600 mbar
E*= -0,1 to +0,4 bar
F =0,2 to 1,6 bar
G * = 1 to 4 bar
H = 0,5 to 6 bar
I
= 3 to 16 bar
Hysteresis
cannot be set
2 mbar
15 mbar
20 mbar
35 mbar
0.15 bar
0.13 bar
0,2 bar
0.2 bar
0.6 bar
maximum pressure
(one or both sides)
0.5 bar
1.5 bar
3 bar
3 bar
15 bar
15 bar
25 bar
15 bar
25 bar
Startpage
Connectiondrawing No.*
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
18
*Connection drawings are given in the following data sheet PDC-4
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
P 32
2008
* no scale divisions (only +/- scale)
PDC
Housings
Contents
Startpage
112
DIN 43650
48,5
45,5
37
8,2.
4,8.
60
46 0,2
2008
60
PG11
www.profimess.de
P 35
PROFI
MESS
GMBH

11
12
2.
Contents
56
26
69
82
HEX 22
20
Startpage
3,5.
HEX 22
6
G 1/4
G 1/2
30
20
132
G1/4
G 1/2
13
14
61
54
HEX 22
20
HEX 22
20
3,5
3,5.
6
G 1/4
6
G 1/4
G 1/2
G 1/2
15
16
HEX 41
50
55
20
20
3,5.
3,5.
6
G 1/4
G 1/4
G 1/2
G 1/2
17
18
11 max
G 1/4
40
74
37
90
G 1/4
HEX 41
70
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
P 36
2008
102
PDC-4
Pressure Switch with
Stainless Steel Sensor
System
Contents
Startpage
Description:
The PDC series mechanical pressure switches is characterized by their excellent mechanical strength. The PDC-4 has a
robust housing made of sew-water resistant aluminium pressure casting. It has a stainless steel 1.4571 connection fitting
provided with a G1/2-male and a G1/4 female. Excrescent
pressure changes at the connection act on an internal measuring diaphragm the movements of which are transferred to
a high-performance micro-switch through a connecting bridge. The setpoint is set externally by rotating a spindle for
nominal value that directly modifies the pre-tension of a
spring. In addition, the construction has counter-pressure
spring that ensures a very stable connection even at low setpoints.
Fully stainless steel 1.4571

Resistant to hostile media
Plug connection
Adjustable hysteresis
2006
and mechanical strength and where the PDC-1 is ruled out
due to its limited resistance to the particular medium. Due to
the fact that the pressure-sensing measuring diaphragms are
only less loaded considering their permissible values the
PDC-4 guarantees an excellent long-term stability at minimal
setpoint drift. Consequent to its design, the upstroke of the
pressure diaphragms is limited by means of a stopper so that
high overpressure safety is ensured even in small operating
ranges. A number of operating ranges are available of which
also a version with adjustable hysteresis can be supplied.
This enables the user to accurately control a span of pressures with only a single device. Thanks to its material quality,
flexibility of connections and high switching load of the microswitch, the PDC-4 is predestined for use across all sections
of the industry.
www.profimess.de
P 33
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
Pressure Switches with Stainless Steel Sensor System
plug connection
Hysteresis:
Protection class:
IP54 in in vertical position
In PDC-4.1.A to PDC-4.1.I
the hysteresis cannot be set
In PDC-4.2.A to PDC-4.2.I
the hysteresis can be set.
refer to table
Switching load:
Operating range:
Type:
Hysteresis
cannot be set
Hysteresis
can be set
max.
pressure
Connection
drawing No.*
PDC-4.x.A
PDC-4.x.B
PDC-4.x.C
PDC-4.x.D
PDC-4.x.E
PDC-4.x.F
PDC-4.x.G
PDC-4.x.H
PDC-4.x.I
45 mbar
50 mbar
30 mbar
40 mbar
60 mbar
0,1 bar
0,15 bar
0,3 bar
0,5 bar
70-300 mbar
90-550 mbar
60-300 mbar
80-400 mbar
100-600 mbar
0,15-1,5 bar
0,25-2,0 bar
0,45-2,5 bar
0,8-3,5 bar
3 bar
6 bar
6 bar
6 bar
6 bar
16 bar
16 bar
16 bar
25 bar
16
16
16
16
16
15
15
15
15
Contacts:
Housing material:
Material of
pressure sensor:
250VAC, 8A (Ohmic),
5A (inductive)
250 VDC, 0.3A (Ohmic)
24 VDC, 8A (Ohmic)
Operating range:
refer to table
max. pressure:
refer to table
max. media temp.:
-25C to +70C
short spell up to +85C
G 1/2-male (pressure gauge

connection), G 1/4-female
Using the G1/2-male connection,
the PDC-4 can be directly
screwed on to the pressure pipe;
alternatively fastening by means of
2 screws (4 mm ) on a plane
surface is also possible.
Setpoint:

Repeatability:
< 1% of working range

(at pressure ranges > 1 bar)
Adjustment:

lower setpoint, the upper
setpoint higher by the hysteresis.
Aluminium pressure casting GD Al

Si 12 (sea-water resistant)
Sealing:
Sealing can be undertaken

ex factory, however, it can be
undertaken later.
The pressure diaphragm and all

other parts contacted by the
medium are made of X6Cr Ni
MoTi 17122 Material No. 1.4571
Coating:
The Al pressure housing made of

GD Al Si is chromated and burnis
hed with durable plastic.
Corrosion test with 3% saline solution and 30x temperature

changes from +10C to +80C showed after 20 days no surface changes.
Vacuum:

vacuum, the device will NOT be
damaged by it.
Vibration:
up to 4g no significant deviations.
The hysteresis is reduced slightly
Exceeding 25g is not permissible
Options:
Gold contacts, 2 micro-switches,

limiter
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
Startpage
* Connection drawings are given in the following data sheet PDC-4
Process connection:
Contents
The PDC-4 can be mounted vertically or horizontally,

PDC-4. 1. 1. F.
Pressure Switches with Stainless Steel Sensor System

Hysteresis
1 = hysteresis cannot be set
2 = hysteresis can be set
Housing
1 = normal housing
2 = housing with plastic coating
(chemical version) (PDC 4.1. only)
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
P 34
2008
Operating ranges
A= -250 to +100 mbar
B = -1* to +0.1 bar
C = 0.04 to 0.25 bar
D = 0.1 to 0,6 bar
E = 0.2 to 1.6 bar
F = 0.2 to 2.5 bar
G = 0.5 to 6 bar
H = 1 to 10 bar
I = 3 to 16 bar
PDC
Housings
Contents
Startpage
112
DIN 43650
48,5
45,5
37
8,2.
4,8.
60
46 0,2
2008
60
PG11
www.profimess.de
P 35
PROFI
MESS
GMBH

11
12
2.
Contents
56
26
69
82
HEX 22
20
Startpage
3,5.
HEX 22
6
G 1/4
G 1/2
30
20
132
G1/4
G 1/2
13
14
61
54
HEX 22
20
HEX 22
20
3,5
3,5.
6
G 1/4
6
G 1/4
G 1/2
G 1/2
15
16
HEX 41
50
55
20
20
3,5.
3,5.
6
G 1/4
G 1/4
G 1/2
G 1/2
17
18
11 max
G 1/4
40
74
37
90
G 1/4
HEX 41
70
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
P 36
2008
102
PS-04
Electronic Dualpressure
Switch
Contents
Startpage
Description:
The PS-04 dual pressure switch consists of a pressure sensor with downstream electronic component. Built in a compact stainless steel housing, conceived for rough industrial
conditions to make it stable against interference and shock
und vibration-proof, it offers to the user everything that
today's state-of-the-art pressure measurement and monitoring technology demands. The pressure is sensed by a
piezo-resistive sensor element which is protected by an internal or front flush stainless steel membrane. Its accuracy
rating is 0,5% of full scale value and the repeatability better
than 0,1% full scale. This meets any requirement. The PS-04
is controlled by a microprocessor and capable of self-monitoring with error output. Its maximum configuration offers 2
transistor limiting contacts with adjustable setpoint, adjustable hysteresis and adjustable time lag. The measured value is
legibly displayed on a 4-digit dot-matrix display and, additionally, put out through a 4..20 mA- or 0..10 V DC socket. All
parameters can be easily programmed by means of a diaphragm keypad.

Self-monitoring system
With its pressure range of 0 bar up to 600 bar, the PS-04
dual pressure switch covers a wide spectrum of applications
and, therefore, is used across all types of industries. Typical
applications are the accumulator charge connection, the
locking pressure monitoring and the lubricant control, to
name a few. For example, the additional analogous signal
can be used for regulating pressure or for reporting functions. Due to the optionally available front flush diaphragm
the PS-04 will not fail even if the media are heavily polluted
or sticky as it occurs, for example, in the packaging machine
industry. Using only one device, the user has simultaneously
two setpoints, an onsite display an analogous output for
remote transmission, thus replacing a pressure gauge, a
mechanical pressure switch and a pressure sensor.
Two switching contacts

Analogous output
4-digit digital display of
system pressure
2008
Adjustable keypad lock
www.profimess.de
P 37
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
PS-04 Electronic Dual Pressure Switch
Supply voltage:
Sensor element housing: By default, the electronic component housing is permanently joined with the pressure
connection. Optionally, it can be designed with a turnable
joint as against a permanent joint.
Sealing: Depending on the media, choice is possible from
among: Viton, e.g. for hydraulic oil and EPDM, e.g. for brake
fluid.
Operating range: All ranges from 0..1 bar to 0..10 bar are
available besides an overpressure also with an absolute
pressure calibration. For all ranges above this, the PS-04 can
process only the gauge pressure.
Outputs: The basic components of PS-04 provide a PNP
transistor output which, optionally, can be increased to maximum components in six levels.
Electrical connection: Optionally, the switch can be supplied with a PG9 cable gland in IP67 or with straight or angled plugs 12 x 1, 5 poles in IP65.
Process connection: The PS-04 can be provided with
G1/2-male connection and front flush diaphragm (operating
range > 0..10 bar, always stainless steel 1.4571), with G1/4male or with NPT1/4-male.
An adapter for G1/2-male is available as an accessory.
Power consumption:
Power output:
Voltage output :
Switching outputs:
Hysteresis:
Time lag:
Display:
Operational display:
Protection class:
Ordering codes:
Sealing:
1 = Viton
3 = EPDM
11
12
13
14
15
16
=
=
=
=
=
=
0
0
0
0
0
0
bar
bar
bar
bar
bar
bar
10 bar rel.
50 bar overpressure
100 bar overpressure
Outputs:
1 = 1 transistor output, PNP, from operating range 11
with aluminium electronic component housing
2 = 2 transistor outputs, PNP, from operating range 11
with aluminium electronic component housing
3 = 1 transistor output, PNP and analogous output 4..20 mA
4 = 1 transistor output, PNP and analogous output 0..10 V DC
5 = 2 transistor outputs, PNP and analogous output 4..20 mA
6 = 2 transistor outputs, PNP and analogous output 0..10 V DC
1 = PG9 including 1.5 m cable
2 = 5-pole plug including coupling box with bare tipped cable 1.5 m
3 = 5-pole plug including coupling box with screw clamps, angled
4 = 5-pole plug including coupling box with screw clamps, straight
Process connection:
1 = G1/2-male with front flush diaphragm (only > 10 bar)
2 = G1/4-male
3 = 1/4NPT-male
www.profimess.de
P 38
2008
Sensor element housing:

1 = stainless steel, turnable (only stainless steel housing)
2 = stainless steel, permanent
GMBH
Startpage
Operating range: 0 bar to 600 bar rel., 0 bar to 10 bar abs.

Pressure ranges:
0...0,2/0,4/0,6/1/2/5/10/50/100/200/400/600 bar
Overload:
2,5/2,5/2,5/3/4/7/15/75/150/300/600/800 bar
max. media temperature: -25C to +100C
max. ambient temperature: -10C to +70C
max. storage temperature: -30C to +80C
Compensated range:
-10C to +70C
Temperature factor: +/- 0,2% of full scale/ 10 K
Accuracy: +/- 0,5% of full scale
Repeatability: +/- 0,1% of full scale
Linearity error: +/- 0,5% of full scale at 25C,
special calibration +/- 0.25 % on request
Resolution: 12 Bit, 4096 steps per measuring span
Scan rate: 100/s (for peak value accumulator)
Housing: stainless steel 1.4571, aluminium at outputs
1 or 2
Weight: approx. 350 g
Process connection: G1/2-male front flush diaphragm,
G1/4-male or NPT1/4
Process connection material: stainless steel 1.4435
Wetted parts: Viton or EPDM, stainless steel
Error display: LED red and clear text in the display
Operating elements: 3 press keys with perceptible
pressure point
Accessories: adapter on G1/2-male, attenuation screw,
Interface RS232
Sensor element: piezo-resistive sensor element
PS-04 Electronic Dual Pressure Switch
PROFI
MESS
Contents
PS-04. 2. 1. 7. 6. 1. 1.
Ordering number:
Operating range:
1 = 0 bar - 1 bar abs.
4 = 0 bar - 10 bar abs.
5 = 0 bar - 200 mbar rel.
8 = 0 bar - 1 bar rel.
9 = 0 bar - 2 bar rel.
10 = 0 bar - 5 bar rel.
18 V DC to 32 V DC unregulated,
maximum residual ripple 10%,
polarity reversal protected
approx. 40 mA at Us = 24 V DC,
no load
Power output: 4..20 mA
load:
max. R = (Us-12 V DC)/20mA
load deviation: 0.3%/100 Ohm
25% -100% adjustable
0..10 VDC
Load: max. 10 mA,
short-circuit safe 25% - 100%
adjustable
Type: PNP transistor, max.
500 mA, max. 100 Hz,
short-circuit safe setting
range:
0%..125% of full scale
0%..125% of full scale
0 s..9,9 s, adjustable
LED green
Type: 4-digit dot-matrix display,
height of digits 5 mm, green
Range: -999...+9999
Rate: 5/s
Brilliance: 20%..100%, adjustable
Plug connector M 12 x 1 including
coupling box with bare tipped
cable or Plug connector M 12 x 1
straight or angled or PG9 with
1.5 m cable
IP65 - plug connection
IP67 - cable
PAMU
Chemical Pressure Gauge
with Integrated Pressure
Contents
Startpage
Description
In the PAMU type of devices two parallel systems measure
the excrescent pressure at the process connection independent of each other. The first one is a Bourdon pressure
gauge of proven stainless steel technology that is intended
for clearly legible display of the measurement onsite. In case
of high frequent pressure changes, we recommend optionally
available silicon oil filling for the device, as this would counteract the quivering of the indicator. At the same time, a
pressure measuring transmitter integrated into the housing of
the pressure gauge functions as a remote encoder with its 420 mA 2-wire output and thus enables processing of the
measurement in control or other display units.
Mechanical and electronic system

Independent
Display visible from distance
Fully stainless steel
2008
Well-tested pressure measuring technology in robust designs
is combined with modern electronics, so as to unify the
benefits of both the systems into a single device. Right under
the rough conditions of the equipment, the user obtains a
measurement directly at the measuring point despite sensitive hi-tech devices and thus will be able to read into the operations in the system even if there is an outage in the supply
voltage.
Chemical pressure gauges with an integrated pressure measuring transmitter are used often in the chemical industry as
well as in the manufacturing of machines and equipment.
www.profimess.de
P 39
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
PAMU Chemical Pressure Gauge with Integrated

Pressure Measuring Transmitter
Cable box with PG 7/13.5 for cable max. 1.5 mm
Process connection:
in series G1/2 A as per DIN 16 288 in stainless steel
AISI 316 L, optionally G1/4 A, 1/2 NPT and 1/4 NPT
connections
Supply voltage: 10 to 30 VDC
Contents
Power consumption.: 25 mA
Output: 4-20 mA, 2-wire, load max. 800 Ohm,
US -10/0,02 in Ohm
Attenuation: pressure gauges with non-conductive

insulating oil available
Startpage
Protection class:
IP 55 IEC 529 in unfilled version
IP 65 IEC 529 in filled version
Option:
in case of O2-related applications, oil and grease-free
versions can also be supplied.
Dimensions:
82
max. pressure:
1.3-times operating range end value
90
13
max. media temp.:

filled -10C to +65C, unfilled -25C to +100C
101
111
max. ambient temperature:

filled -10C to +65C, unfilled -25C to +65C
35
67
Compensated range:-10C to +80C

22
Housing and bayonet ring: stainless steel AISI 304

52
Plug: filled EPDM, unfilled Viton

Nominal size: 4 (100 mm)
Ordering codes:
Cover disc: safety laminated glass
Ordering number:
PAMU. 2. 1. 1. L
Sealing ring: Viton
Chemical Pressure Gauge with Integrated

Pressure Measuring Transmitter
Scale and indicator: aluminium

1/2
1/2
1/4
1/4
A (Standard)
NPT
NPT
A
Accuracy: Cl. 0.6 pressure gauge unfilled version Cl. 1.0

pressure gauge filled version Cl. 0.5 sensor both versions
Sensor: ceramic sensor element
Attenuation:
0 = non-attenuated
1 = silicon filling
Temperature drift: <= 0.02%/C in compensated range,

<= 0.03%/C at zero point
Option:
0 = standard
1 = oil and grease-free for O2-related applications
Long time behaviour typically: Drift <= 0.02% / year
Operating range:
A = -1 to 0 bar
B = 0 to 1 bar
C = 0 to 1,6 bar
D = 0 to 2,5 bar
E = 0 to 4 bar
F = 0 to 6 bar
G = 0 to 10 bar
H = 0 to 16 bar
I = 0 to 25 bar
J = 0 to 40 bar
K = 0 to 60 bar
L = 0 to 100 bar
M = 0 to 160 bar
N = 0 to 250 bar
O = 0 to 400 bar
PROFI
MESS
Zero point and measuring span: +/- 10% adjustable
www.profimess.de
GMBH
P 40
2008
Process connection:
1 = Pressure connection
PU-01
Pressure Transmitter for OEM
Applications
Contents
Startpage
Compact design
Description:
The PU-01 series of pressure measuring transmitters belongs
to the top-class products among pressure sensors which are
ideally suited for OEM applications considering their attractive price levels. In PU-01, the close-lying pressure is measured, depending on the pressure range, by means of a piezoresistive or a thin-film sensor element. The pressure-dependent resistance signal output by this sensor element is converted into a power or voltage signal through an amplifier.
Alternatively, a power signal of 4 to 20 mA in 2-wire method
or a voltage signal of 0 to 10 V in 3-wire method can be delivered from the transmitter. Other types of output signals are
available on request.
Integrated amplifier
Affordable price to performance ratio
Broad-based media compatibility
2008
The PU-01 series of pressure measuring transmitters is
always used for measuring pressure in fluid or gaseous
media, if the process does not demand absolute accuracy
but a fair repeatability is sufficient for it. All wetted parts are
made of stainless steel in order to cover a wide range of
media. In case of particularly difficult media, we recommend
mounting the PU-01 along side a diaphragm seal (most used
types on request).
The high overload capacity of the devices, their resistance
from corrosion, mechanical vibrations, mechanical shocks
and temperature and their durable stability are highly valued
for use in the entire industry.
www.profimess.de
P 41
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
PU-01 Pressure Measuring Transmitter
Process connection:
G1/4B-male
Output signal: possible output signals are: power signal 4

to 20 mA in 2-wire method or voltage signal 0 to 10 V in 3wire method
Material contacted
components :
stainless steel 1.4571 und 1.4542
max. pressure:
3.5-times operating range end

value at operating range <= 10
bar, 2-times operating range end
value at operating range <= 600
bar, 1.5-times operating range
end value at operating range =
1000 bar, vacuum-proof
Calibration: On request, the devices can be calibrated up

to a operating range of 0 to 10 bar at absolute pressure.
Electrical connection: In series DIN 43 650 plug with cable
box. Optionally, permanently connected cable, standard
length 1 m
max. media
temperature:
-40 to +100C
max.
ambient temperature.:
-30 to +80C
max. storage
temperature:
-30 to +100C
20 mA
Compensated range:
0 to 80C
Output:
voltage output load >= 10 kOhm

power output load <= (U-10 V) / 0,02 A
Housing:
stainless steel
Interference:
as per EN 61326
Weight:
approx. 0.15 kg
Antiinterference:
Accuracy:
Cl. 1,0
as per EN 61326
Repeatability:
< +/- 0,1% of fullscale value
Protection
class:
Set time:
IP65 EN 60 529 / IEC 529
<= 5 ms
(within 10% to 90% of fullscale
value)
Temperature factor:
+/- 0.4%/10K on zero point and span
Supply
voltage:
10 to 30 VDC at power output

14 to 30 VDC at voltage output
Power
consumption
max.:
Type of
electrical
protection:
protection against polarity reversal,

excess voltage and short-circuiting
Contents
Startpage
48
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
PU-01. 2. 1. 2. L
75
Pressure Measuring
Transmitter for OEM Applications
Output signal:
1 = 4 to 20 mA, 2-wire
2 = 0 to 10 V, 3-wire
35
Calibration
1 = gauge pressure
2 = absolute pressure (up to operating range F only)
13
42
HEX 19
2
9,5
5
1 = plug connection
2 = with permanent fixed connecting cable
G 1/4
Operating range:
A = 0 to 1 bar
B = 0 to 1,6 bar
C = 0 to 2,5 bar
D = 0 to 4 bar
E = 0 to 6 bar
F = 0 to 10 bar
G = 0 to 16 bar
H = 0 to 25 bar
I = 0 to 40 bar
J = 0 to 60 bar
K = 0 to 100 bar
L = 0 to 160 bar
M = 0 to 250 bar
N = 0 to 400 bar
O = 0 to 600 bar
P = 0 to 1000 bar
42
35
HEX 19
13
9,5
5
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
P 42
2008
G 1/4
PU-02
Pressure Measuring Transmitter for General Industrial
Applications
Contents
Startpage
Description:
The PU-02 series of pressure sensors is qualitatively highly
accurate and reliable transmitters that identify the close-lying
pressure through a piezo-resistive or a thin-film sensor element, depending on the pressure range. The pressuredependent resistance signal output by this sensor element is
converted into a power or voltage signal through a amplifier.
Alternatively, a power signal of 4 to 20 mA in 2-wire method
or a voltage signal of 0 to 10 V in 3-wire method can be delivered from the transmitter. Other types of output signals are
available on request. The PU-02 with the front flush stainless
steel diaphragm is particularly suited for sticky or tenacious
media as the media cannot creep into the device and destroy it or clog it.
Two potentiometers allow adjustment of zero point and measuring span for difficult measuring tasks such as fill level
measuring in hydrostatic columns.
Accuracy class 0.5

Pressure connection in stainless steel
Robust design
The PU-02 pressure measuring transmitters are used for
measuring pressure in fluid or gaseous materials. The wetted
parts are made of stainless steel and, therefore, compatible
with a number of media. If the measurement media require
other conditions due to hostile nature, viscosity or temperature of the media, the transmitters can be equipped with diaphragm seals to allow flange connections, milk tube joints or
tri-clamp joints (common types on request).
Due to its compact design, accuracy and material combination the PU-02 is ideal for a wide range of applications.
High precision and linearity

Excellent media compatibility
2008
Adjustable zero point and measuring

span
www.profimess.de
P 43
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
Pressure Measuring Transmitter Class 0.5
Supply voltage:
Output signal: possible output signals are: power signal of

4 to 20 mA in 2-wire method or voltage signal of 0 to 10 V in
3-wire method (other outputs on request)
Power consumption
max.:
Calibration: on request, the devices can be calibrated in the

operating range of 0 to 0.25 bar up to a operating range of 0
to 16 bar at absolute pressure.
Electrical connection: series plug DIN 43 650 with cable
length 1 m.
Voltage output
Load >= 5 kOhm
Power output
Load <= (U-10 V) / 0.02 A
Interference signal:
as per EN 61326
Interference-proof:
as per EN 61326
Protection class:
IP65 EN 60 529/IEC 529,

IP67 for cable connection
Protected against polarity reversal,
PU-02. 2. 1. 2. 2. L
Material contacted
components:
Output signal:
1 = 4 to 20 mA, 2-wire
2 = 0 to 10 V, 3-wire
Stainless steel 1.4571 and 1.4542

(for front flush diaphragm only
1.4571)
max. pressure:
3.5-times the operating range

end value for operating range up
to 16 bar,
2-times the operating range end
value for operating range up to
600 bar,
end value for operating range >
600 bar,
end value for operating range =
1600 bar,
2500 bar,
4000 bar, vacuum-proof
max. media temp.:
-30 to +100C
max. ambient temp.:
-20 to +80C
max. storage temp.:
-40 to +100C
Compensated range:
0 to 80C
Housing:
stainless steel
Weight:
approx. 0.2 kg
Accuracy:
Cl. 0,5
Repeatability:
< +/- 0,05% of full scale value
Set time:
<= 1 ms
(within 10% to 90% of full scale
value)
Adjustability:
zero point and measuring span to

10%
Temperature factor:
+/- 0.2%/10K on zero point and

span
Calibration:
1 = gauge pressure
2 = absolute pressure (for operating ranges F to O only)
1 = plug connection
Process connection:
1 = G1/2 B
2 = front flush diaphragm
(for operating ranges D to X only, negative pressure on request)
Operating range:
A = -1 to 0 bar
B = -1 to 1,5 bar
C = -1 to 5 bar
D = 0 to 0,1 bar
E = 0 to 0,16 bar
F = 0 to 0,25 bar
G = 0 to 0,40 bar
H = 0 to 0,6 bar
I = 0 to 1 bar
J = 0 to 1,6 bar
K = 0 to 2,5 bar
L = 0 to 4 bar
M = 0 to 6 bar
N = 0 to 10 bar
O = 0 to 16 bar
P = 0 to 25 bar
Q = 0 to 40 bar
R = 0 to 60 bar
S = 0 to 100 bar
T = 0 to 160 bar
U = 0 to 250 bar
V = 0 to 315 bar (not for front-alignment)
W = 0 to 400 bar
X = 0 to 600 bar
Y = 0 to 1000 bar
Z = 0 to 1600 bar
AA = 0 to 2500 bar (maximum pressure joint)
G1/2B male, for front flush diaphragm G1B up to measuring

range of 0 to 1,6 bar,for measuring ranges > 1600 bar M16x1.5female. Optionally available are
G1/4, 1/4NPT and 1/2 NPT
www.profimess.de
GMBH
P 44
2008
Ordering codes:
PROFI
MESS
Startpage
Process connection:
Ordering number:
Contents
20 mA
Output:
Type of electrical
protection:
Process connection: on request, the devices can be supplied with operating range of 0 to 0.1 bar up to a operating
range of 0 to 600 bar with a front flush stainless steel diaphragm. This is recommendable for viscous or sticky media.
10 to 30 V DC at power output
14 to 30 V DC at voltage output
PU-03
High-Precision Pressure
Measuring Transmitter in
Stainless Steel
Contents
Startpage
Accuracy class 0.25
Description:
The PU-03 series of pressure measuring transmitters has
a piezo-resistive sensor element in the pressure ranges up
to 16 bar which registers very accurately any change in the
pressure to be measured following any changes in the electrical resistance of a piezo-crystal as a result of mechanical
load. As against this, thin-film technology is used for higher
operating ranges where with high response speed resistance
changes in an extremely thin resistance strain gauge are
translated into an output signal which is proportional to the
close-lying pressure. A combination of both these technologies covers all DIN operating ranges of -1/0 bar to 0/2500
bar while the accuracy remains the same.
Gauge or absolute pressure measuring

Optional front flush stainless steel
diaphragm
Robust design
Power or voltage output
2008
The robust design of PU-03 pressure transmitter enables the
user to perform accurate measurements of pressure in gasses and fluids during processing even under harsh operating
conditions. A stainless steel diaphragm protects the measuring system against damages, thus covering a large number
of media, provided they are not highly viscous or crystallized.
If necessary, the pressure measuring transmitters are equipped with a front flush diaphragm which prevents such material from forming deposits inside the housing. The electrical
signal at the output can be utilized to remote data transfer
or for a direct display. In this regard, we recommend the
Profimess' Direct Digital Display AZ-01N, which can be
easily placed between the transmitter and the plug to display
the measured values without requiring additional power supply.
www.profimess.de
P 45
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
PU-03 Pressure Measuring Transmitter Class 0.25
Supply voltage: 10 to 30 V DC for power output

14 to 30 V DC for voltage output
Power
consump. max.: 20 mA
Output signal: Possible output signals are: power signal of

4 to 20 mA in 2-wire method or voltage signal of 0 to 10 V in
3-wire method (other outputs on request)
Output:
Calibration: On request, the devices can be calibrated up to

a operating range of 0 to 16 bar at absolute pressure.
Electrical connection: series plug DIN 43 650 with cable
length 1 m.
Process connection: On request, the devices can be supplied with operating range of 0 to 600 bar with a front flush
stainless steel diaphragm. This is recommendable for viscous
or sticky media.
voltage output Load >= 5 kOhm

power output Load <= (U-10V) / 0.02A
Interference
signal:
as per EN 61326
Interference
proof:
as per EN 61326
Protection
class:
IP65 EN 60 529/IEC 529
Type of
electrical
protection:
Contents
Startpage
Protected against polarity reversal,

Process
connection:
Ordering codes:
PU-03. 2. 1. 2. 2. L
Wetted parts:
Output signal:
1 = 4 to 20 mA, 2-wire
2 = 0 to 10 V, 3-wire
max. pressure: 3.5-times the operating range end value

for operating range up to 16 bar,
2-times the operating range end value for
operating range up to 600 bar,
1.5-time the operating range end value for
operating range > 600 bar,
1.2-times the operating range end value
for operating range = 1600 bar, 1.2-times
the operating range end value for measuring range = 2500 bar,
vacuum-proof
max.
media temp.:
-30 to +100C
Calibration
1 = gauge pressure
2 = absolute pressure (operating range D to M only)
1 = plug connection
Process connection:
1 = G1/2 B
2 = front flush diaphragm
(only up to operating ranges V, negative pressure on request)
Operating range:
A = -1 to 0 bar
B = -1 to 1,5 bar
C = -1 to 5 bar
D = 0 to 0,25 bar
E = 0 to 0,40 bar
F = 0 to 0,6 bar
G = 0 to 1 bar
H = 0 to 1,6 bar
I = 0 to 2,5 bar
J = 0 to 4 bar
K = 0 to 6 bar
L = 0 to 10 bar
M = 0 to 16 bar
N = 0 to 25 bar
O = 0 to 40 bar
P = 0 to 60 bar
Q = 0 to 100 bar
R = 0 to 160 bar
S = 0 to 250 bar
T = 0 to 315 bar (not for front-alignment)
U = 0 to 400 bar
V = 0 to 600 bar
W = 0 to 1000 bar
X = 0 to 1600 bar
Y = 0 to 2500 bar (maximum pressure joint)
PROFI
MESS
stainless steel 1.4571 and 1.4542

(for front flush diaphragm only 1.4571)
max. ambient
temp.:
-20 to +80C
max. storage
temp.:
-40 to +100C
Compensated
range:
0 to 80C
Housing:
stainless steel
Weight:
approx. 0.2 kg
Accuracy:
Cl. 0,25
Repeatability:
< +/- 0.05% of fullscale value
Set time:
<= 1 ms (within 10% to 90% of fullscale

value)
Adjustability:
zero point and measuring span up to 10%
Temperature
factor:
+/- 0.2%/10K at zero point and span
www.profimess.de
GMBH
P 46
2008
Ordering number:
G1/2B male, for frontaligned stainless

steel G1 B up to operating range 0 to 1.6
bar, for operating ranges > 1600 bar
M16x1.5-female optionally available are
G1/4, 1/4NPT and 1/2 NPT
PU-02 / PU-03
- Pressure measuring transmitters
Dimensions
Housing Version with cable box as per DIN 43650
PU-02
PU-03
Cable output
48
48
Contents
82
54
27
max.
105
27
Startpage
75
27
Pressure connections
G 1/2 B
G 1/4 B
Maximum pressure joint

M 16x1.5 female
HEX 27
HEX 27
20
19,5
9,5
5
17,5
3
HEX 27
13 2
12
G 1/4
M 16 x1,5
G 1/2
26,5
Screw hole or joint as per DIN 16288

G 1/2
G 1/2
24,5 +1
Maximum pressure joint

M 16 x1,5 female
M 16 x1,5
DIN 16288
60
min.14,5
19 -0,5
x
4,8
G 1/4
G 1/4 DIN 16288

min. 9,5
13 -0,5
16,5 +1
2008
5,5
www.profimess.de
P 47
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
PD-02
Differential Pressure
Transmitter for Fluids
and Gases
Contents
Startpage
Accuracy class 0.5%
Description:
The PD-02 differential pressure transmitter detects the
pressure levels present at its two process connections by
means of two piezo-resistive sensor elements and records
the difference between their measuring signals. The generated signal proportional to the differential pressure is internally
amplified and output to the pins of PD-02 either as a 4...20
mA 2-wire signal or as a 0...10 V DC 3-wire signal for further
processing. For the wetted parts, only stainless steels
1.4571 and 1.4435 and FKM sealing material (others on
request) are used in this design, whereby PD-02 can cater to
a wide range of fluids or gasses when selecting the media.
2 piezo-resistive stainless steel sensors

Media separation through
stainless steel 1.4435 diaphragms
Differential pressure ranges
from 20 mbar to 16 bar
High static overpressure
The compact design of the PD-02 differential pressure
transmitter allows integration of devices even in installations
or machines with restricted conditions of space.
The transmitters are stable for long periods, robust against
shocks and vibrations and are secure against static pressure
that can reach up to 30-times the differential pressure range.
There are 12 standard operating ranges from 0...20 mbar
to 0... 16 bar differential pressure available to the user.
As process connections, male as well as female thread
systems can be used. If necessary, also the UNF thread
system can be supplied which is mostly in demand in the
refrigeration technology. The PD-02 differential pressure
transmitters are used in areas such as:
Robust against shocks and vibrations
Machine contruction
Plant manufacturing
Filter monitoring
Hydraulics
2008
Flow measurement with orifices

or dynamic pressure sensors.
www.profimess.de
P 49
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Operating ranges:
Nominal pressure
[bar]
Differential pressure
range [bar]
0,2
0,4
2,5
0...0,02 0...0,04 0...0,1

up to
up to
up to
0...0,2 0...0,4 0...1
Permissible static
pressure, one-sided
[bar]
0,5
0,2 % FSO / year
Response time:
< 5 ms
Contents
16
0...0,25 0...0,6
up to
up to
0...2,5 0...6
0...1,6
up to
0...16
60
20
Long period
stability:
Temperature error:
(with reference to nominal pressure)
Tolerance band: Nominal pressure range 0.2 bar:
2.5 % FSO
Nominal pressure range 0.4 bar:
2,0 % FSO
0,5 % FSO
(Characteristic line deviation as per
IEC 60770 limiting point setting
(non-linearity, hysteresis, repeatability)
Accuracy:

1.5 % FSO
TC average:
Permissible load: Power output 2-wire:

Rmax = [(Ub-Ubmin)/ 0,02] Ohm

0.4 % FSO/10K
0.3 % FSO/10K
Voltage 3-wire: Rmin = 10 kOhm

Influencing
factors:
Startpage

0.2 % FSO/10K
Voltage supply: 0.05% FSO / 10V
In compensated
range:
0...50C
Load: 0.05% FSO / kOhm

0...50C
0...70C
Ordering codes:
PD-02. 1. 3. 1. A. 0
Ordering number:
Mechanical
stability:
Differential Pressure Transmitter

for Fluids and Gases
Output:
1 = 4...20 mA, 2-wire
2 = 0...10 V DC, 3-wire
Process connection:
1 = G1/2"-male as per EN 837
2 = 7/16-UNF as per DIN 3866
3 = G1/4"-female
Vibration 10g RMS (20...2000 Hz)

Shock 100g / 11ms
Storage
temperature:
-40...+100C
Ambient temp.:
-25...+ 85C
Media temp.:
-25...+125C
Materials:
Nominal pressure range:

1 = 0.2 bar, max. one-sided static pressure 0.5 bar,
Operating ranges A, B, C
2 = 0.4 bar, max. one-sided static pressure 1 bar,
Operating ranges B, C, D, E
3 = 1 bar, max. one-sided static pressure 3 bar,
Operating ranges C, D, E, F, G
4 = 2.5 bar, max. one-sided static pressure 6 bar,
Operating ranges D, E, F, G, H
Operating ranges F, G, H, l, J
Operating ranges H, l, J, K, L
Housing:
Aluminium, black anodized
Pressure
connection:
Sealing (wetted): FKM (Viton),

other sealing materials on request
Separation
membranes:
Wetted parts:
Operating range:
A = 0...0.02 bar Differential pressure
B = 0...0.04 bar Differential pressure
C = 0...0.1 bar Differential pressure
D = 0...0.25 bar Differential pressure
E = 0...0.40 bar Differential pressure
F = 0...0.60 bar Differential pressure
G = 0...1 bar Differential pressure
H = 0...2.5 bar Differential pressure
l = 0...4.0 bar Differential pressure
J = 0...6.0 bar Differential pressure
K = 0...10 bar Differential pressure
L = 0...16 bar Differential pressure
Pressure connection, sealing,

separation membranes
Weight:
max. 250 g
Life span:
> 100 x 10 6 load cycles
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
P 50
2008
Special design:
0 = none
1 = Please specify in detailed text
Output signal:
Mechanical connections
4...20 mA, 2-wire or 0...10 VDC, 3-wire
Contents Supply voltage:
2 x G 1/2-male
12...36 V DC at power output,

14...36 V DC at voltage output
Power
consumption:
M 4 x 10
40
31
max. 25 mA at power output,

max. 7 mA at voltage output
31
Startpage Electrical protection:

Short-circuit
stability:
Connector ISO 4400

ca. 36
permanent
Pole-reversal
protection:
no function if interchanged connections,

but no damage
Pg 9
Electromagnetic
compatibility:
error signal and stability as per EN 61326
90
SW 22
Electrical
connections:
48
cubic plug ISO 4400, others on request
G1/2
13,5
Protection class: IP 65
23
40
PIN layout:
G 1/2 EN 837 M 20 x 1,5

2-wire current output
3-wire voltage output
Supply +
Supply -
Signal +
not used
Ground
Ground contact
Ground contact
2 x 7/16-UNF-male
M 4 x 10
40
31
Wiring diagrams
31
2-wire system (power)

Supply +
34,5
Connector ISO 4400

ca. 36
+
UB
Pg 9
_
Supply -
90
SW 22
7/16 UNF
3-wire system (voltage)

Supply +
48
+
UB
_
13,5
Supply U
22
40
8,5
7/16 DIN 3866
Signal +
2 x G 1/4-female
Connector ISO 4400
ca. 36
Pg 9
G 1/4 female
90
O-ring
14 x 1,5
FKM
48
13,5
SW 22
40
10
2008
G 1/4 female
www.profimess.de
P 51
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Accessories
AZ-01N
Attachable Display for Pressure
and Temperature Transmitters
Contents
Startpage
Auxiliary power supply redundant
Description:
The AZ-01 N attachable display unit is suited for all measuring
transmitters with a 4 ... 20 mA output in 2-wire or a 0 ... 10 V
output in 3-wire technology. The display is mounted only between the plug and the cable box and is instantaneously ready
to operate.
By default, the AZ-01 N has a Plug connector as per DIN
43650. Optionally, other versions with Plug connector M12x1,
5-pole and BINDER 723, 5-pole can also be supplied. Further
versions are possible on request. The display unit is freely programmable. The parameters such as scaling, decimal point,
attenuation, setpoint adjustment etc. can be set easily over the
keypad on the front. The parameters are stored in an EEPROM
and continue to be present even when there is an outage.
Exceeding the range limits in both directions can be displayed
as error messages. The integrated diagnostic system continuously monitors all functions of the display.
Freely scalable in seconds

Optionally with switching output
For 2 or 3-wire transmitters
4-digit LED
Turnable display and housing
Deliverable also for hazardous areas
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
P 52
2008
The unit of measurement specified at the time of ordering will

be imprinted below the display film ex factory to ensure protection against deletion. As a practical alternative, the customer
can fix a label with another unit on the display film. A set of
sticker labels is included in the delivery.
Contents
Mechanical strength:
vibration 10g RMS (20...2000 Hz)

shock 100g / 11 ms
Analogous signal:
4...20 mA, 2-wire or

0...10 VDC, 3-wire
Storage temperature:
-40...+85C
Auxiliary power:
-25...+85C
Material:
Housing out of PA 6.6,

Polycarbonat
2-wire system supply from the current loop (voltage drop < 6V DC)
Ex-version max. 28 VDC, 3-wire
system 18...36 V DC (parallel to
transmitter)
Startpage Weight:
Data-security:
Protection class:
approx. 100g
Switching output:
No., Type:
non-volatile EEPROM
IP 65
Ordering codes
Ordering number
AZ-01N. 2. 1. 2. 5. 0
Attachable Display for Pressure And

Temperature Measuring Transmitter
0,1, or 2 independent PNP-outputs
Switching load:
standard max. 125 mA load, protected against short-circuiting

Optionally ATEX-approval max.
contact power at a setpoint of
70 mA, for two setpoints 70 mA as
sum of both outputs, max. permissible inductivity on each switching
output 4.7 mH
Repeatability:
< +/- 0,1% F.S.
max. 10 Hz
Switching cycles:
> 100 x 106
Time lag:
0...100 s, adjustable
Electrical protection:
Short-circuit
protection:
Analogous output of transmitter:

1 = 4...20 mA, 2-wire
2 = 0...10 VDC, 3-wire
3 = ATEX-approval zone 1 for 4...20 mA, 2-wire
4 = others
Protection against
polarity reversal:
Switching output
(not in EX-version or 3-wire with plug DIN43650):
0 = not used output
1 = 1 switching output
2 = 2 switching outputs
Electromagnetic
compatibility:
1 = plug DIN 43650
2 = plug BINDER series 723, 5-pole
3 = M12x1, 5-pole, metallic version
permanent
no function in case of interchanged
connections but no damage
Interference signal and
Interference-proof as per EN
61326
Option ATEX-approval: II (1) 2G EEx ia IIC T4 (only in combination with 4...20 mA, 2-wire)
Safety-related maximum values
Ui = 28 V DC, Ii = 93 mA,
Pi = 660mW
Unit:
1 = none
2 = bar
3 = mbar
4 = mWs
5=%
6 = mA
Display:
Type:
Special version:
0 = none
4-digit, red LED display,
Digits height:
7 mm
Digit width:
4,85 mm (angle 10)
Range:
-1999...+9999
Accuracy:
0,1% +/- 1 Digit
Refreshing:
new value every 0-10 s,

programmable
Connection layout table

Electrical connections
2-wire system
Supply+
SupplySwitching output 1
Switching output 2
Ground
2008
3-wire system
Supply+
SupplySignal+
Switching output 1
Switching output 2
Ground
M 12x1 metalic,
5-pole
1
3
4
5
plug housing
BINDER 723,
5-pole
3
4
2
1
5
Cable colours
1
2
3
not used
Ground contact
M12x1 Plastic,
5-pole
1
3
4
5
over pressure connection
1
2
3
not used
not used
Ground contact
1
3
2
4
5
over pressure connection
1
3
2
4
5
plug housing
3
4
1
2
not used
5
white
brown
green
gray
pink
Cable sheathing
DIN 43650
www.profimess.de
P 53
white
brown
gray
pink
Cable sheathing
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Dimension diagrams
Example:
AZ-01N on Profimess' pressure measuring transmitter
Standard
Contents
Startpage
Options
Electrical connections
M12 x 1, 5-pole
DIN 43650
(IP65)
BINDER 723, 5-pole
M12 x 1, 5-pole
(IP67)
BINDER 723, 5-pole

(IP67)
Connection diagrams:
2-wire system (power) (for ATEX-approval the supply is U = 20...28 V DC)
not used output
1 switching output
supply voltage +
2 switching outputs
supply voltage +
supply voltage +
supply voltage
supply voltage
switching output 1
switching output
supply voltage
switching output 2
3-wire system (voltage)

1 switching output
supply voltage +
2 switching outputs
supply voltage +
supply voltage +
supply voltage
supply voltage
supply voltage
signal +
signal +
signal +
switching output
PROFI
MESS
switching output 1
switching output 2
www.profimess.de
GMBH
P 54
2008
not used output
PU-10
Process Pressure
with Display
Contents
Startpage
Description: The PU-10 process pressure transmitter has

been developed to meet the highest demands in the processing industry. A piezo-resistive pressure sensor of high signal
stability is used as a base element. The downstream amplifier
electronic component linearizes the sensor signal and compensates the temperature errors.
As output signal a 4...20 mA signal is present in 2-wire
method that can be superimposed optionally with a HART
frequency signal to make the PU-10 into an intelligent device.
In the standard version, offset, span and attenuation are programmable over a keypad, by means of the HART component this information can be transmitted through a PC or
hand-held programming device. A prominently visible LCD
display shows the measuring value and displays it visually by
means of an additional bar graph display. The display is turnable and can be conveniently viewed.
The PU-10 has an accuracy of 0.1% of the end value of the
operating range. It can be interchanged with two different
variants of housing and is available, optionally, for use in
hazardous areas for intrinsically safe operation.
By means of a temperature decoupler mounted between the
process connection and electronic component measurements
up to 300C media temperature can be obtained.
Range of application: Today's pressure measurement technology places high demands on measurement device manufacturers with regard to the sealing materials used, material
contacting components besides temperature and overload
safety. In addition to this, accuracy and, not the least, the
price to performance ratio, too, play a decisive role in the selection of a suitable measuring device.
Accuracy 0.1% FSO IEC 60770

HART capable
Optionally with ATEX-approval
The PU-10 signifies the development of a new series of pressure measuring transmitters which meets these requirements
to justify their highest standards. Sensor elements are available in stainless steel or ceramic which are compatible with
nearly any type of medium, especially because the standard
sealing material Viton is supplemented by a number of special designs. Optionally, connections made of Hastelloy can
also be supplied. Besides the normal inch-system thread,
also flange, tri-clamp, milk-tube or Varivent connections are
used as an interface with the processing, offering thus a wide
range possibilities to meet any type of requirement. Intelligent
electronics are embedded in one of the two robust connection housings that were especially conceived for use in harsh
industrial environment.
Up to 300C media temperature

All common flange, clamp and
thread connections
Stainless steel or ceramic
sensor element
Multi-digit LCD display
2008
Adjustable offset, span 1:10,

attenuation etc.
The PU-10 is compatible with nearly any task of pressure

measurement in the industry. Ask us for special customized
versions in regard to process connections, sealing material
and so on.
www.profimess.de
P 55
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Media temperature:
Material:
Housing:
Viewing glass:
Pressure connection:
Sealings:
Separating
diaphragms:
Wetted parts:
Weight:
Mounting position:
Life span:
Operating rate:
Vibration 5g RMS (20...2000 Hz)

shock 100g / 11 ms
-30...+80C
-20...+70C
-25...+125C for
ceramic sensor element
-40...+125C for
stainless steel sensor element
Accuracy:
Permissible load:
stainless steel 1.4301 or. aluminium pressure casting, powdercoated

Laminated safety glass
stainless steel 1.4435 for ceramic steel sensor element, stain
less steel 1.4571 for stainless
steel sensor element, other
material on request
for versions with ceramic steel
sensor element FKM (Viton) for
versions with stainless steel
sensor element and inch-system
thread FKM for versions with
stainless steel sensor element
and flange, milk-tube, Varivent or
clamp connection none, other
sealing material on request
Influencing factors:
Auxiliary power:
Load:
Long-time stability:
Response time:
Temperature errors:
In compensated range:
Electrical protection:
Protection against
short-circuiting:
Protection against
polarity reversal:
for stainless steel sensor element

of 1.4435, Hastelloy and others
on request.
Standard for ceramic steel
sensor element Al2O3 96.0%
Option for ceramic steel sensor
element Al2O3 99.9% (for pressure ranges from 1 bar)
pressure connection, sealings,
separating diaphragm
min. 400g depending on process
connection
any type, calibration with
diaphragm as specified below
(in ceramic steel sensor element
zero point shift may occur in
case of varying positioning,
hence specify the intended posi
tioning)
100 x 106 load cycles
5/s
Settings:
Span:
Offset:
Attenuation:
Option HART :
PROFI
MESS
Startpage
0,05% FSO / 10 V
0,05% FSO / kOhm
<= +/- (0,1% x nominal range /
set range)
% FSO / year
200 ms
<= +/- (0,1% x nominal range /
set range)
% FSO / 10 K
--20C...+85C (-0C...+80C for
ceramic steel sensor element)
permanent
no function in case of interchanged connections but no damage
Interference signal and

Interference-proof as per EN
61326
Option ATEX-approval: II 1G EEx ia IIC T4
Saftey-related maximum values
Ui = 28 VDC, Ii = 93 mA,
Pi = 660 mW
Display:
Type:
LCD display,
visible range 32.5 x 22.5 mm
Operating display:
5-digit, 7-segment, digit height
8 mm, range +/-9999
Extra display:
8-digit, 14-segment,
symbol height 5 mm
Bar graph:
52-segments
Accuracy:
0,1% +/- 1 Digit
Refreshing:
new value every 0.3...30 s,
programmable
Electrical connections: stainless steel ball housing plug
M12x1, 4-pole, others on request
aluminium pressure cast housing
with 16x1.5 cable gland
(cable diameter 5...10 mm)
Filling fluids for
stainless steel
sensor element:
Silicon oil, optionally food material compatiblel Halocarbon,
others on request
Power consumption:
max. 25 mA
Protection class:
IP 67
4...20 mA, 2-wire

standard 10...30 VDC,
Ex-version 10...28 VDC
1:10 (span minimum 0.02 bar
for ceramic steel sensor element,
or 0.1 bar or 0.35 bar absolute
for stainless steel sensor element)
0...90%
0...99,9 s
as standard, however, with
superimposed frequency signal
for setting
www.profimess.de
GMBH
Contents
Electromagnetic
compatibility:
Output signal:
Auxiliary power:
for stainless steel sensor element

0.1% FSO for Turn Down <1:5,
above this +0.1 + 0.015(nominal
range/set range)% FSO
for ceramic sensor element
0.2% FSO for Turn Down < 1:5,
above this +0.2+ 0.015(nominal
range/set range)% FSO
Standard:
Rmax = [(Ub-Ubmin) / 0,02] Ohm,
HART : Rmin = 250 Ohm
P 56
2008
Mechanical strength:
Connection diagrams:
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
Contents
2-wire system (power)
PU-10. 2. 1. 1. 0. 2. 2. 4E. 0
Pressure Measuring Transmitters

with Display
supply voltage +
Housing:
1
= stainless steel ball housing
2
= aluminium pressure cast housing
Startpage
Communication:
1
= 4...20 mA, 2-wire
2
= 4...20 mA, 2-wire, ex-version
(Tu = -20...+60(70)C for Zone 0(1)
for patm. 0.8...1,1 bar)
3
= 4...20 mA, 2-wire with HART reporting
system
4
= 4...20 mA, 2-wire with HART reporting
system, ex-version (Tu = -20...+60(70)C
for Zone 0(1) for patm. 0.8...1.1 bar)
supply voltage
2-wire system (power) HART

supply voltage +
Sensor element:
1
= stainless steel
2
= ceramic
supply voltage
Temperature range:
0
= no temperature decoupler up to 125C
1
= with temperature decoupler up to 150C
for stainless steel sensor element only
3 = with temperature decoupler up to 300C for
stainless steel Sensor element only
Connection table:
Connection
layout
Electrical
connections
Supply+
SupplyGround
Test *
Process connection:
1
= G1/2-male stainless steel sensor element only
2
= 1/2-NPT-male stainless steel sensor element only
3E = G1 -male front flush with stainless steel sensor element
only
3K = G11/2-male front flush with ceramic sensor element only
4
= milk-tube joint DN25 stainless steel sensor element only
5
= milk-tube joint DN40
6
= milk-tube joint DN50
7
= DIN flange DN25 PN40
8
9
10 = Varivent connection DN40/50
11 = clamp connection 1 stainless steel sensor element only
12 = clamp connection 1 1/2
13 = clamp connection 2
Stainless steel ball housing

M12 x 1 (5-pole)
1
3
plug housing
Cable colours
(DIN 47100)
white
brown
cable sheathing
Aluminium
connection housing
Connection clamps
2
4
1
3
* By connecting an ampere meter, the output signal can be checked without

disconnecting the supply.
Dimension diagrams:
Calibration:
1
= absolute pressure (for stainless steel sensor element only)
2
= gauge pressure
Aluminium pressure casting housing
Operating range:
1E = -0.17...+0.17bar (overload up to 0.5 bar) with stainless steel sensor element only
2E = -0.35...+0.35 bar (overload up to 1 bar) with stainless steel sensor element only
3E = -1...+1 bar (overload up to 3 bar) with stainless steel sensor element only
4E = -1 ...+2 bar (overload up to 6 bar) with stainless steel sensor element only
5E = -1...+7 bar (overload up to 20 bar) with stainless steel sensor element only
6K = 0...0.06 bar (overload up to 2 bar, negative pressure up to -0,2 bar) with
ceramic sensor element only
7K = 0...+0.16 bar (overload up to 4 bar, negative pressure up to -0.3 bar) with
8E = 0...+0.35 bar (gauge pressure only overload up to 1 bar) with stainless steel
sensor element only
9K = 0...+0.4 bar (overload up to 6 bar, negative pressure up to -0.5 bar) with
10E = 0...+1 bar (overload up to 3 bar) with stainless steel sensor element only
11K = 0...+1 bar (overload up to 8 bar, negative pressure up to -0.5 bar) with
12E = 0...+2 bar (overload up to 6 bar) with stainless steel sensor element only
13K = 0...+2 bar (overload up to 15 bar, negative pressure up to -1 bar) with
14K = 0...5 bar (overload up to 25 bar, negative pressure up to -1 bar) with ceramic
sensor element only
15E = 0...7 bar (overload up to 20 bar) with stainless steel sensor element only
16K = 0...10 bar (overload up to 35 bar, negative pressure up to -1 bar) with
18K = 0...20 bar (overload up to 60 bar, negative pressure up to -1 bar) with
21E = 0... 170 bar (overload up to 340 bar) with stainless steel sensor element only
39,5
26,5 for stainless steel
sensor element
Stainless steel ball housing

76,4
Special design:
0
= none
1
= please specify in detailed text
Design stainless steel housing:
39,5*
40
50,5
90,5
*26,5 for stainless steel sensor element
2008
Display sideways
Display 45
Display top-view
www.profimess.de
P 57
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Mechanical connections:
Ceramic sensor element
Inch-system thread
Contents
G11/2-front flush (DIN3852)

Milk-tube
front flush diaphragm D
Varivent
Clamp
Dimensions in mm
Size
D
k
A
B
n
d
Dimensions in mm
Size DN 40
C
56
Startpage
Flange
DN 50
68,5
DN 25 / PN 40
115
85
18
28
4
14
DN 50 / PN 40
165
125
18
28
4
18

DN 80 / PN 16
200
160
20
30
8
18
Dimensions in mm
Dimensions in mm
Size
C
D
E
Size 11/2
C
50,5
DN 40 / 50
84
68
64
2
64
Stainless steel sensor element
51
47
44
Inch-system thread
G 1/2-EN 837
1/2-NPT
Milk-tube
G 1-front flush (DIN 3852)
Flange
Varivent
Dimensions in mm
Dimensions in mm
Size
A
B
C
D
DN 25
14
44
44
24
DN 40
23
23
56
32
DN 50
23,5
23,5
68,5
45
Size
D
k
A
B
n
d
DN 25 / PN 40
115
85
18
48
4
14
DN 50 / PN 16
165
125
18
48
4
18
DN 80 / PN 16
200
160
20
50
8
18
Clamp

Dimensions in mm
Dimensions in mm
Size
C
D
E
DN 40 / 50
84
68
64
Size
A
B
C
D
1
11
41
50,5
24
11/2
11
41
50,5
32
2
22
22
64
45
34
22
Temperature coupler
PROFI
MESS
to 300C
www.profimess.de
GMBH
P 52
2006
to 150C
SA-01
Flow Indicator
with or without Rotor,
with Wiper for Self-Cleaning
Contents
Startpage
Small dimensions for assembly
Description:
The SA-01 series of the flow indicators is intended for visually display of flow through a pipe. The medium passing
through it can be viewed through a sight glass. Optionally. a
rotor placed into the flow is set into motion by the medium
which serves as an optical confirmation of the flow. Wiper
blades mounted in the device get pressed inside against the
sight glass. By simply rotating the sight glass manually. the
inside can be cleaned of deposits. formation of algae or calcification without the need to interrupt the process. Thus,
elaborate maintenance and cleaning operations can be
dispensed with.
Brass and stainless steel versions

Any mounting position
Optionally, with or without rotor for
viewing the flow
2008
With internal wiper blades for internal

cleaning of the sight glass
The SA-01 series of flow indicators is deployed for monitoring fluids of low and medium viscosities (up to 150 cSt) in
pipes. Since 2005 a new version is available for air with ball
bearings.
www.profimess.de
S1
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
Nominal diameters and flow values:
SA-01.1:
SA-01.2:
without rotor
with rotor
Materials:
brass and stainless steel versions
Connection without rotor
Qmax.
(l/min)
with rotor
Qmin. (l/min)
1 cST
40 cSt
41-150 cSt
Qmax.
(l/min)
Contents
1/4
15
0.7
1.5
2.7
max. pressure:
3/8
20
0.8
1.5
2.8
1/2
30
1.4
1.8
3.2
12
3/4
60
1.4
2.7
5.9
25
90
1.7
40
16 bar
Pressure drop:
SA-01.1:
SA-01.2:
0.15 bar
0.25 bar
max. temperature:
100C
Materials:
Housing:
SA-01.x.x.1:
SA-01.x.x.2:
brass MS 58
Sight glass:
Borosilicate glass
1 1/4
150
5.9
7.9
80
1 1/2
220
7.3
7.9
100
Startpage
Dimensions:
SA-01.1
Wiper:
L
SA-01.1:
SA-01.2.x.1:
SA-01.2.x.2:
Polyolefin
NBR
Viton
Axis:
O-Ring:
Rotor (SA-01.2.x.x only):
POM red, 11/4" and

1 1/2 Nylon white
Mounting position:
any, not in down pipe
Bearing:
sleeve bearing made of PEEK for

fluids
ball bearing, greaseless,
for gases
HEX /AF
Buna
Viton
SA-01.x.x.1:
SA-01.x.x.2:
Devices for smaller flow volumes and higher operating temperatures on request.
SA-01.2
Ordering codes
SA-01. 1 (without rotor)

SA-01. 2. 3. 1. 2
Flow Indicator with

Self-Cleaning Device
Version:
1 = without rotor
2 = with rotor
Process connection:
1 = female thread G 1/4
5 = female thread G 1
6 = female thread G 1 1/4
7 = female thread R 1 1/2
Connection
G
L
(mm)
HEX
(mm)
Weight
(kg)
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
71
71
86
94
104
120
130
36
36
46
46
46
65
65
0.3
0.3
0.6
0.6
0.6
1.5
1.6
SA-01. 2 (with rotor)
Material:
1 = brass
2 = stainless steel
Media:
1 = fluids
2 = air with ball bearings
Connection
G
L
(mm)
HEX
(mm)
Weight
(kg)
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
71
71
86
94
104
120
130
36
36
46
46
46
65
65
0.35
0.35
0.65
0.65
0.65
1.6
1.7
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S2
2008
Ordering number:
PROFI
MESS
DA-01/ DA-02
Sight Flow Indicator
Contents
Startpage
Description:
The DA-01 series of flow indicators is meant for optical and
quantitative control on fluid measuring substances. The device has large surfaced sight glasses fitted on both sides and
provided with a graduated scale. A fine polished stainless
steel flap fitted within the flow area gets lifted by the flow of
media and, depending on the volume of flow, shows the current rate of flow on the scale. The flap is mounted on a stainless steel axis and operates with fine linearity purely depending on the gravitation. The DA-01 can be mounted vertically
as well as horizontally. Due to its high temperature resistance
it can be deployed in many ways.
Buckle-free glass-mounting
Large inspection window
High temperature range
The DA-02 series of flow indicators is intended for optical

monitoring of fluid and gaseous media. The measuring medium lifts a Teflon ball seated on the valve of the housing. As
the volume of flow increases the ball becomes visible in the
dome made of borsosilicate glass. From its position, it is
possible to draw a conclusion on the current volume of flow.
The device is suited for mounting it horizontally with its dome
showing upwards.
Reading possible on both sides

Excellent media compatibility
2008
Flow indicators are deployed for optical and quantitative control of fluid and gaseous media. The device has versatile
applicability, especially in the construction of equipment, in
process measurement technology or as general monitoring
of compressors, cooling subassemblies, blowers and others.
www.profimess.de
S3
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Ordering codes:
Versions:
Ordering number:
DA-01. 3.
DA-01 Flap Indicator
Contents
Process connection:
DA-01 Flap Indicator

Process connection:
1 = G 1/2"-female
2 = G 3/4"-female
3 = G 1"-female
Type
Connection Range in l/min
Qmax.in l/min
DA-01.1
G1/2-female
2.1 to 17
25
DA-01.2
G3/4-female
2.1 to 20
45
DA-01.3
G1-female
2.1 to 24
65
Startpage
The flow values are applicable for water in horizontal

mounting position.
HEX /AF
Type
DA-01.1
R
1/2"
L
85
68
14
HEX
36
1.20
Weight/kg
DA-01.2
3/4"
85
68
14
36
1.10
DA-01.3
1"
95
74
16
42
1.25
Dimensions in mm
max. pressure:
16 bar
max. temp.:
200C for oil, 100C for water
Pressure drop:
0.09 bar for Q max
Housing:
red brass
Flap:
Axis:
Window:
Soda-Lime-Glass
Seals:
C 4400 (Klingersil)
Rings:
brass
Scale plate:
Versions:
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
DA-02 Ball Indicator
DA-02. 3.
Process connection:
DA-02 Ball Indicator
Type
Process connection:
1 = G 1/4"-female
2 = G 3/8"-female
3 = G 1/2"-female
4 = G 3/4"-female
5 = G 1"-female
6 = G 11/2"-female
Connection
Range H2 O
in l/min
Range N2
in Nl/min
DA-02.1 G1/4-female
0.3 to 1.5
10 to 50
DA-02.2 G3/8-female
0.3 to 1.5
10 to 50
DA-02.3 G1/2-female
0.3 to 1.5
12 to 60
12
DA-02.4 G3/4-female
2.5 to 5.0
80 to 160
25
DA-02.5 G1-female
4.0 to 8.0 1130 - 2260 40
DA-02.6 G11/2-female 11 to 23
Qmax. H2 O
in l/min
4
1180 - 5000 60
For viscous media the flow values may change.
HEX /AF
Type
HEX
DA-02.1
1/4"
76
42
60
67
12
28
DA-02.2
3/8"
76
42
60
67
16
28
DA-02.3
1/2"
76
42
60
67
14
28
DA-02.4
3/4"
89
42
60
78
18
45
DA-02.5
1"
89
42
60
78
18
45
DA-02.6
11/2"
118
50
77
95
30
62
max. pressure:
16 bar
max. temp.:
200C
Pressure drop:
0.2 bar for Q max
Housing:
stainless steel 1.4436, 1.4410
Ball:
PTFE
Dome:
Borsosilicate glass
Seals:
Viton and Klingersil C4400
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S4
2008
Dimensions in mm
SA-05
Female Thread in Gray Cast
Iron, Steel Casting or
Stainless Steel
Contents
Startpage
Temperature up to 280C
Description:
Flow indicators are intended for visualization of flows in pipes.
In the case of SA-05, a drip tube or a rotating plastic rotor or
a movable flap are viewed through two glasses mounted in a
robust flow armature for optical control of flow. Air bubbles
and solid particles flowing along or the rotor's rotation speed
and the position of the deflected flap enable the observer to
quantitatively estimate the volume of flow.
G1/4" to G2"
PN16, PN25 or PN40
Indicator with flap, drip tube or rotor
The SA-05 series of flow indicators possesses a cylindrical
female thread connection which can also be designed as a
conical NPT thread. They can be deployed for up to 40 bar of
maximum pressure and 280C maximum temperature. The
range of materials available includes gray cast iron, steel
casting or stainless steel with Na Ca or borosilicate glass.
Due to these properties the SA-05 is mainly deployed in the
entire manufacturing and processing industry.
2008
Optionally with NPT connection
www.profimess.de
S5
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Housing materials:
gray cast iron GG25 or

steel casting GS-C25 or
Cover:
GG25 for gray cast iron version

GS-C25 for steel casting version
1.4408/1.4301 for stainless steel
version
Screws:
4.6/5.6 vz for gray cast and steel

casting
A4-70 for stainless steel version
Optical display:
smooth passage, from G3/4" with

drip tube or flap made of stainless
steel 1.4571 or
rotor made of POM or
rotor made of PTFE
Glass material:
Seals:
Dimensions
Contents
Startpage
Gray cast iron SA-05.X.1

Connection
BL
[female thread] [mm]
NaCa glass DIN 8902 up to max.

150C or borosilicate glass DIN 7080
up to max. 280C
Graphite (others on request)
Process
connections:
Pressure:
G 1/4"-female to G 2"-female
PN16, PN 25 or PN 40
Media temperature: SA-05.(1 or 2) max. 150 for

NaCa glass, 280C for borosilicate
glass
SA-05.3 max. 120
SA-05.4 max. 260
SA-05. 1. 1. 1. 16.
d2
[mm]
S [mm]
16 bar
G 1/4
100
32
45
10
G 3/8
100
32
45
10
G 1/2
100
32
45
10
G 3/4
120
48
63
10
G1
120
48
63
10
G11/4
150
65
80
12
G11/2
150
65
80
12
G2
180
80
100
15
Steel casting or stainless steel SA-05.X.2/3

Connection
BL
[female thread] [mm]
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
d1
[mm]
08
Sight Flow Indicator with Female Thread in

Gray Cast Iron, Steel Casting or Stainless Steel
d1
[mm]
d2
[mm]
S [mm]
16 bar
S [mm] S [mm]
25 bar 40 bar
G1/4
100
32
45
10
10
10
G 3/8
100
32
45
10
10
10
G1/2
100
32
45
10
10
10
G 3/4
120
48
63
10
12
15
G1
120
48
63
10
12
15
G11/4
130
65
80
12
15
20
G11/2
150
65
80
12
15
20
G2
230
80
100
15
20
25
Optical display:
1 = smooth passage (from 3/4" with drip tube)
2 = with flap
3 = with rotor made of POM
4 = with rotor made of PTFE
Housing material:
1 = gray cast iron
2 = steel casting
3 = stainless steel
Glass material:
1 = NaCa glass (up to max. 150C)
2 = Borosilicate glass (up to max. 280C)
Pressure level:
16 = PN 16 (standard)
25 = PN 25
40 = PN 40
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S6
2008
Process connection:
08 = G1/4"-female
10 = G 3/8"-female
15 = G1/2"-female
20 = G 3/4"-female
25 = G1"-female
32 = G11/4"-female
40 = G11/2"-female
50 = G 2"-female
SA-06
Flange Connection in Gray
Cast Iron, Steel Casting or
Stainless Steel
Contents
Startpage
Temperature up to 280C
Description:
Flow indicators are intended for visualization of flows in pipes.
In the case of SA-06, a drip tube or a rotating plastic rotor or
a movable flap are viewed through two glasses mounted in a
robust flow armature for optical control of flow. Air bubbles
and solid particles flowing along or the rotor's rotation speed
and the position of the deflected flap enable the observer to
quantitatively estimate the volume of flow.
Nominal diameters DN15 to DN 250

PN16, PN25 or PN40
Display with flap, drip tube or rotor
The SA-06 series of flow indicators possesses a flange
connection of DIN or ANSI standards. They can be deployed
for up to 40 bar of maximum pressure and 280C maximum
temperature. The range of materials available includes gray
cast iron, steel casting or stainless steel with Na Ca or borosilicate glass. Due to these properties the SA-06 is mainly
deployed in the entire manufacturing and processing industry.
2008
Optionally with ANSI flanges
www.profimess.de
S7
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Dimensions
Contents
Startpage
Connection
[DIN/ANSI]
D
[mm]
BL
[mm]
d1
[mm]
d2
[mm]
S [mm]
16 bar
S [mm]
25 bar
S [mm]
40 bar
15 / 1/2"
20 / 3/4"
25 / 1"
32 / 11/4"
40 / 11/2"
50 / 2"
65 / 21/2"
80 / 3"
100 / 4"
125 / 5"
150 / 6"
200 / 8"
250 / 10"
95
105
115
140
150
165
185
200
220
250
285
340
405
130
150
160
180
200
230
290
310
350
400
480
600
730
32
32
48
48
65
80
80
100
125
150
175
175
175
45
45
63
63 (80 for GG)
80
100
100
125
150
175
200
200
200
10
10
10
10
12
15
15
20
25
25
30
30
30
10
10
12
12
15
20
20
25
30
30
35
35
35
10
10
15
15
20
25
25
30
35
on
on
on
on
(235 for PN25/40)

(270 for PN25/40)
(300 for PN25/40)
(360/375 for PN25/40)
(425/450 for PN25/40)
Ordering codes:
SA-06. 1. 1. 1. 16. 15. 0
Housing materials:
gray cast iron GG 25 or

steel casting GS-C 25 or
Cover:
GG 25 for gray cast iron version

GS-C 25 for steel casting version
1.4408 / 1.4301 for stainless steel
version
Cover shape:
DN15...DN50 square
DN65...DN250 round
Screws:
4.6 / 5.6 vz for gray cast iron and

steel casting
A4-70 for stainless steel version
Optical display:
drip tube for display of least volumes

or flap made of stainless steel 1.4571
or rotor made of POM or rotor made
of PTFE
Glass material:
Na Ca glass DIN 8902 up to max.

150C or borosilicate glass DIN 7080
up to max. 280C
Seals:
Graphite (others on request)
Sight Flow Indicator with Flange

Connection in Gray Cast Iron,
Optical display:
1 = with drip tube
2 = with flap
3 = with rotor made of POM
4 = with rotor made of PTFE
Housing material:
1 = gray cast iron
2 = steel casting
3 = stainless steel
Glass material:
1 = NaCa glass (up to max. 150C)
2 = borosilicate glass (up to max. 280C)
Connecting flanges:
16 = DIN PN16 (standard)
25 = DIN PN25 (not for gray cast iron)
40 = DIN PN40 (not for gray cast iron)
150 = ANSI 150 lbs
Nominal diameter:
15 = DN15/1/2"
20 = DN20 / 3/4"
25 = DN25/ 1"
32 = DN32/11/4"
40 = DN40/11/2"
50 = DN50/2"
65 = DN65/21/2"
80 = DN80 / 3"
100 = DN100 / 4" (not with ANSI flanges in gray cast iron)
125 = DN125 / 5" (not with ANSI flanges in gray cast iron)
150 = DN150 / 6" (with borosilicate glass only)
200 = DN200 / 8" (not with ANSI flanges in gray cast iron,
with borosilicate glass only)
250 = DN250 / 10" (not with ANSI flanges in gray cast iron,
with borosilicate glass only)
Process
connections:
Pressure:
PN16, PN 25 or PN40 and 150 lbs.

for ANSI standard
Media temperature: SA-06.(1 or 2)

max. 150 for NaCa glass,
280C for borosilicate glass
SA-06.3 max.120
SA-06.4 max.260
Special design:
0 = none
1 = please specify in detailed
PROFI
MESS
DN15...DN250 flange as per DIN

or ANSI
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S8
2008
Ordering number:
request
request
request
request
SP-01
Vane operated Flowswitch
Contents
With or without T-piece, for pipe sizes

of 1/4" to 6"
Startpage
Brass, stainless steel and PVC designs

with T-piece
Detachable joint between upper part
and T-piece, enabling fast cleaning and
exchange without adjustments
Low pressure drop
Reed contact or micro-switch versions
Only flow-dependent switching
function regardless of pressure
and media temperature
Description:
The SP-01 series of flowswitches operates according to the
proven principle of a displaced vane. The flowing medium
strikes the baffle disc mounted at the end of a pendulum.
The resulting dynamic pressure deflects the pendulum.
Subsequently, a permanent magnet mounted at the other end
of the pendulum switches an adjustable reed contact. Different
setpoints can be achieved by shifting the reed contact situated
outside the medium.
2008
The SP-01 series of vane flowswitch is suited for monitoring
setpoints in low-viscosity fluids. Normally, the setpoint is adjusted during the process. However, on request fixed setpoints
can be pre-set at factory for rising or falling flows.
www.profimess.de
S9
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
swivel
nut wrench
size 32
G 3/4
swivel
nut wrench
size 32
G 3/4
swivel
nut wrench
size 32
G 3/4
knurled
swivel nut
G 3/4
swivel
nut wrench
size 32
G 3/4
Contents
male thread size 27

G 1/2A, length:14
solder nip
welding muff with

G 1/2A female thread
vane 12x20
* stainless steel version 82 1

* stainless steel version 82 1
SP-01.1
SP-01.2
SP-01.3
max. pressure:
Reed contact:
Contact function:
Switching load:
Nominal ConSwitch on
diameter nection at
(DN)
(R)
(l/min H 2O)
8
10
15
20
25
32
40
50
change-over contact
250 VA, 5 A, 1250 VA
IP65
Ordering codes
Ordering number:
SP-01. 1. 2. 25. 0. 0
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2.1...2.7
2.5...3.2
3.4...4.2
7.0...9.1
13.5...17
15.5...20.5
26.5...34.5
39.5...51
max.
flow
l1
(l/min H 2O) (mm)
SW1
brass
(mm)
SW1
SS
(mm)
=
=
=
=
with T-piece, brass or stainless steel

with PVC T-piece (connecting adhesive sleeve)
with brass T-piece and micro-switch
with 1/2" screw in thread,
brass or stainless steel, mounting length 51 mm
5 = with 1/2" screw in thread,
brass or stainless steel, mounting length 111 mm
6 = with solder props (brass) or welding props
stainless steel, mounting length 24 mm
1.8...2.4
2.2...2.9
3.0...3.8
6.4...8.2
12...15.5
14.5...19
25.5...32.5
39...50
45
60
67
180
195
240
400
400
11
11
11
15
15
15
15
15
27
19
19
27
32
46
55
70
27
27
27
32
41
46
55
70
SP-01.2: with PVC T-piece, reed contact and adhesive sleeve
l1(mm) l (mm)
h(mm)
15
20
25
32
40
50
16
19
22
26
31
38
54
66
78
98
118
144
113
118
127
155
166
180
l
(mm)
H
(mm)
DN15
DN20
DN25
DN32
DN40
DN50
5.1...6.9
9.4...12.3
10.7...15.2
17.0...22.6
21.8...30.1
29.0...40.0
Nominal ConSwitch on
diameter nection at
(DN)
(R)
Version:
1
2
3
4
Switch off
at
(l/min H 2O)
SP-01.1: with brass or stainless steel T-piece and reed contact
NC-contact / NO-contact
230 VAC / 48 VDC,
1A, 20 W / 26 VA
Micro-switch:
Contact function:
Switching load:
Protection class:
Startpage
Versions, operating ranges

and dimensions:
25 bar (brass and stainless steel)

2.5 bar (PVC at 60C)
10 bar (PVC at 20C)
110C (brass and stainless steel)
100C (SP-01.3)
60C PVC
max. temperature:
SP-01.4 / SP-01.5 / SP-01.6
4.9...6.5
9.1...11.9
10.4...14.8
16.8...22.5
21.6...40.8
28.6...49.8
Switch off
at
(l/min H 2O)
50
100
100
150
200
260
max.
flow
(m 3/h H 2O)
SP-01.3: with brass T-piece and micro-switch

10
15
15
20
25
32
40
50
Material:
1 = brass (not SP-01.2)
2 = stainless steel (not SP-01.2, SP-01.3)
3 = PVC (SP-01.2 only)
3/8-female 4.0...5.0
1/2-female 5.0...6.0
1/2-male
3/4-female 8.0...10.0
1-female
1 1/4-female
1 1/2-female
2-female
Nominal- ConSwitch on
diameter nection at
(DN)
(m 3/h H 2O)
Nominal diameter:
SP-01.1 only
08 = 1/4
SP-01.1 and SP-01.3
10 = 3/8
SP-01.3 only
14 = 1/2 male thread
SP-01.1, SP-01.2, SP-01.3
15 = 1/2
20 = 3/4
25 = 1
32 = 1 1/4
40 = 1 1/2
50 = 2
SP-01.4, SP-01.5 and SP-01.6
00 = all nominal diameters of 2" to 6" as per table
10
20
4.0...5.0
40
17.0...20.0
24.0...28.0
43.0...50.0
69.0...83.0
Switch off
at
(m 3/h H 2O)
50
50
20
50
60
100
150
250
max.
flow
(m 3/h H 2O)
85.5
85.5
60
85.5
50
50
50
50
85.5
92.5
95
97.5
108
l3
(mm)
SP-01.4: without T-piece, screw in thread 1/2, Mounting length 51 mm, Reed contact
50
80
100
150
1.9...2.7
5.0...8.0
8.3...12.5
17.5...25.0
1.8...2.6
4.9...7.9
8.2...12.4
17.4...24.9
30
80
150
200
51
51
51
51
+/
+/
+/
+/
-
1
1
1
1
SP-01.5: without T-piece, screw in thread 1/2, Mounting length 111 mm, Reed contact
100
150
200
5.7...6.3
11.0...13.0
25.0...27.0
5.6...6.2
10.9...12.9
24.9...26.9
100
150
200
111
111
111
+/ 1
+/ 1
+/ 1
-
SP-01.6: without T-piece, solder or welding nip, Mounting length 24 mm, Reed contact
50
80
100
150
Preset setpoint:
0 = none
1 = factory-set setpoint (rising)
2 = factory-set setpoint (falling)
3.8...4.9
9.0...14.3
13.0...18.8
33.0...46.0
3.7...4.8
8.9...14.2
12.7...18.4
32.9...45.9
30
100
150
200
24
24
24
24
+/
+/
+/
+/
-
1
1
1
1
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 10
2008
Options:
0 = none
SP-04
Digital Flowmeter / Switch
with Way-Deflection-System
Contents
Startpage
Description:
Profimess' measuring device SP-04 is a flow transmitter with
a digital display of the current flow, analogue output, totalizer,
voltage output and two adjustable switching relays with display of setpoints for monitoring the limit value. Optionally an
RS 232C interface is also available.
The flowing medium presses a baffle plate mounted to a
pendulum and thus generates the measured displacement.
The spring-loaded pendulum alters its position depending on
the flow. The position of a magnet fixed to the pendulum is
recorded by a Hall sensor located outside the measuring
chamber and transmitted to the microchip-controlled electronics where it is processed. This 2-chamber system ensures
that no fluid can penetrate the electronics housing even if the
device develops a defect
4...20 mA or 0...10 V DC
output signal
Optionally RS 232 interface
2 separately adjustable
switching contacts
Soil-resistant
The SP-04 series of flowmeters and switches is used for
capturing thin-bodied media in nominal diameter ranges up
to DN600. Particularly in the range of DN50 upwards the
extremely cost-effective price-performance ratio is perceptible. Measurement by means of a baffle plate is independent
of the conductivity of the medium due to which also glycol,
oils and other hydrocarbons can be captured without problems. The SP-04 can be adapted to a large number of processes thanks to different material combinations.
For pipes up to DN600

LCD display for flow and
total volume
2008
Operating range 1:10
www.profimess.de
S 11
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
Operating ranges:
The SP-04 flowswitches can be supplied in 3 versions and

material combinations.
ProcessFlow
Flow
connection (l/min)
ratio
SP-04.GW
SP-04.FL min. max.
3/8
1
25
1:10
1/2
1
55
1:10
3/4
5
100 1:10
1
6
150 1:10
1 1/4
10
250 1:10
1 1/2
20
400 1:10
2
50
600 1:10
Operating ranges are applicable for water.
20C. Within the specified limits all operating ranges can be implemented, provided
that the ratio of max. to min. setpoint is
not exceeded.
SP-04.GW
SP-04.FL
Material
combination A:
Material
combination B:
Material
combination C:
SP-04.AU
Material
combination A:
Material
combination B:
with T-piece and pipe thread connection

from G 3/8 to G 3/4-female
and G 1 to G 2-male
with T-piece and DIN flange
from DN 10 to DN 50
housing made of brass
T-piece made of brass
pendulum system made of stainless
steel 1.4310
flange made of steel, Zn plated
housing made of stainless steel 1.4301
T-piece made of stainless steel 1.4571
steel 1.4310
flange made of stainless steel 1.4571
T-piece made of PVC
steel 1.4310
flange made of PVC
with welding props
from pipe diameter DN 65 to DN 600
housing made of brass
steel 1.4310
welding props made of stainless steel
1.4301
housing made of stainless steel 1.4301
steel 1.4310
bellow made of stainless steel 1.4571
welding props made of stainless steel
1.4301
Nominal diameter
ProcessFlow
connection (m3/h)
SP-04.AU
min.
DN 65
4.8
DN 80
7.2
DN 100
12
DN 125
18
DN 150
24
DN 200
42
DN 250
72
DN 300
102
DN 350
150
DN 400
180
DN 500
300
DN 600
420
max.
temperature:
Accuracy:
Contacts:
Supply voltage:
Protection class:
Analogue output:
Contents
1:10
1:10
1:10
1:10
1:10
1:10
1:10
1:10
1:10
1:10
1:10
1:10
Startpage
3/8 / DN 10
1/2 / DN 15
3/4 / DN 20
1 / DN 25
1 1/4 / DN 32
170
190
SP-04.x.A: 167
SP-04.x.B: 178
1 1/2 / DN 40
170
190
SP-04.x.A: 171
SP-04.x.B: 178
2 / DN 50
170
190
SP-04.x.A: 179
SP-04.x.B: 188
Mounting height H
(in mm)
157
157
157
SP-04.x.A: 162
SP-04.x.B: 178
Dimensions:
60
24,5
ca. 23
94
AB
94
SP-04.GW and SP-04.AU 25 bar

SP-04.FL 16 bar
UM HEX 32
-20C +100C
+/- 1.5% of full scale value
relay, 230 V, 1 A
24 VDC +/- 10%, 200 mA max.
IP 65
4 to 20mA, Load 500 Ohm;
0 to 10 VDC
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
max.
60
90
144
255
330
600
900
1200
1800
2400
3600
4500
Mounting length Z (in mm)

SP-04.GW
SP-04.FL
50
155
50
155
50
160
135
160
max. pressure:
Flow
ratio
UM HEX 32
157
26-s
26
SP-04. GW25. 2. 2. 10-100
DN
Baffle Disc Flowmeter and Switch

Process connection:
GW... = with female thread (G 3/8 to G fl only) with male
thread (G 1 to G 2 only)
FL... = with flange (DN 10 to DN 50 only)
AU... = with welding props (from DN 65 to DN 600)
UM HEX 32
H
Material combination:
A = brass / stainless steel (steel, Zn plated)
B = fully stainless steel
C = PVC / stainless steel (not for SP-04.AU)
HEX
I
I
Z
Switching output:
2 = 2 micro-switches (230 V / 1A)
Operating range:
xxxx-xxxx = min. - max. flow (see table operating ranges)
Additional details:
media density and viscosity (if different from water)
operating pressure and temperature
mounting position and direction of flow
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 12
2008
PROFI
MESS
R
Z
DP-10
Contents
Startpage
Description:
The DP-10 series of flowswitches transmits the movement of
the vane mounted in the pipe which is proportional to the
flow over a bellow and a spring-supported rocker mechanically to a high-performance micro-switch. The setpoint can
be modified by customizing the spring tension. The 3 standard vanes can be deployed for a nominal diameter range of
1" to 3". A fourth vane can be customized for larger nominal
diameters or for reducing the switching values by shortening
it to a desired length. In addition, the DP-10 can be supplied
designed for a reduced adjustment range so that it can be
deployed also for minimum switching values.
Proven technology
Easy to install
Low pressure drop
Brass and stainless steel
The DP-10 vane switches are used wherever fluid flows need
to be reliably monitored. The switches are used for monitoring minimum as well as maximum flow. Typical areas of
application include monitoring of coolant and lubricating circulation, protection against dry-runs in pumps or safeguard
against defects.
The DP-10 is designed as robust device to allow its use
across the entire industry.
2008
www.profimess.de
S 13
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
DP-10 Vane operated Flowswitch
max. pressure:
Material combination: The standard DP-10.1 is suited for

monitoring non-hostile fluids. It has a brass housing, a bellow
made of Tombag and 4 variably deployable vanes made of
stainless steel 1.4571.
The stainless steel version of DP-10.2 is meant for monitoring
hostile fluids. The device has a housing made of stainless
steel 1.4571, a bellow made of stainless steel 1.4571 and 4
variably deployable vanes made of stainless steel 1.4571.
The DP-10.3 is suited for monitoring air. It has a brass housing, a bellow made of Tombag and a vane made of stainless
steel 1.4571 suitable for flow speeds of 1-8 m/s.
DP-10.1 .1:
DP-10.1 .2:
DP-10.2 .1:
DP-10.2 .2:
8 bar
5 bar
11 bar
5 bar
Contents
max. media temp.:
120C
max. ambient temp.:
85C
Mounting position:
any
Process connection:
DP-10.1 and DP-10.2: R1"A,

DP-10.3: fixing plate
Pressure drop:
0.06 to 0.08 bar for Q max
Hysteresis:
depends on setpoint,
minimum 0,1 l/min
Startpage
Electrial specifications:
Adjustment range: Operating ranges for the standard
version and the version with reduced operating range are
given in the table below.
Qmax.
in m3/h
Adjustment
range
in m3/h
Adjustment
range
reduced
in m3/h
Vane
DP-10.1
and DP-10.2
3.6
0.55 - 2
0.2 - 1
32
DP-10.1
and DP-10.2
0.8 - 2.8
0.25 - 1.4
40
DP-10.1
and DP-10.2
1.1 - 3.7
0.5 - 1.9
50
DP-10.1
and DP-10.2
15
2.1 - 7.3
0.9 - 3.6
1, 2
65
DP-10.1
and DP-10.2
24
2.8 - 9.8
1.2 - 4.9
1, 2
80
DP-10.1
and DP-10.2
36
4.0 - 13.8
2.1 - 7.4
1, 2, 3
100
DP-10.1
and DP-10.2
60
10.4 - 32
7.0 - 21.7
4.9 - 17.1
3.3 - 11.6
1, 2, 3
1, 2, 3, 4
125
DP-10.1
and DP-10.2
90
20.8 - 63.5
10.7 - 33.3
9.7 - 34.0
5.0 - 17.5
1, 2, 3
1, 2, 3, 4
150
DP-10.1
and DP-10.2
120
29.2 - 89.1
13.1 - 39.9
13.6 - 47.6
6.1 - 21.4
1, 2, 3
1, 2, 3, 4
25-300
DP-10.3
1 - 8 m/s air 1 bar
Cable gland:
PG 11 or M 16 x 1.5
Protection class:
IP 65
71
130
25
micro-switch, change-over
contact, 250 V AC, 15 A
(8 A inductive)
121
Pipe
Type
diameter
in mm
Electrical output:
130
71
* Values obtained with a 30 mm long sleeve.
Ordering codes:
DP-10. 1. 1.
Ordering number:
DP-10 Vane operated Flowswitch
Material combination:
1 = brass housing, stainless steel vane for water
2 = stainless steel housing, stainless steel vane for water
3 = brass housing, stainless steel vane for air
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 14
2008
Adjustment range:
1 = standard
2 = reduced
DP-20 / DP-30
Contents
Startpage
DP-20
Description:
The DP-20 model is unique due to its simple but reliable
design. An external magnet actuates a switch that is fully
protected within a leak-proof housing. The body and the
vane are manufactured of chemically resistant polyphenylene
sulphide. The vane which can be shortened has well-sculpted divisions for pipes of DN 25 to DN 150.
DP-30
The DP-30 model is smaller and more compact than the

DP-20 and it is available in brass or stainless steel versions
on account of which the switch can be deployed for pressure levels up to 140 bar. A unique switch setting enables a
quick change-over of the contact function. By releasing two
screws and subsequently shifting the shedded reed contact
either of the NC-contact or the NO-contact functions can be
selected. The vane has a shortening pattern that indicates at
which point it must be separated for the 6 pipe nominal diameters of 1/2" to 2".
Easy to assemble
Cost-effective
Reliable
The DP-20 as well as the DP-30 indicate the correct flow

direction of the medium over an indexing arrow on the body
side.
Excellent strength
For fluids and air
2008
Vane switches offer a simple and cost-effective method of
monitoring the flow of a medium. The vane moved by dynamic pressure switches an electrical contact magnetically
when the flow exceeds or falls short of a certain value. This
type of monitoring flow is successfully used in the entire
industry wherever the media being monitored do not indicate
any significant levels of pollution or too high speeds of flow.
www.profimess.de
S 15
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
Versions:
DP-20 Vane operated Flowswitch in Plastic
DP-30 Vane operated Flowswitch in Brass

or Stainless Steel
Contact:
Function:
El. connection:
max. 5 A for 250 VAC

single-pole change-over contact
3 wires 460 mm long
Contact:
Startpage
10 bar
100C
polyphenylene sulphide (PPS)
Process connection:
Weight:
Installation:
max. 1.5 A/24 V DC,

1 mA/200 V DC, 0.5 A/125 V AC
NC-contact or NO-contact
2 wires 460 mm long
Function:
El. connection:
max. pressure:
max. media temp.:
Housing:
Wetted
material:
Contents
max. pressure:
max. media temp.:
Reed switch
Housing:
Vane:
polyphenylene sulphide, ceramic

8 magnet, stainless steel 316 SS
1 NPT-male
128 g
with arrow in direction of flow
Pipe size
Flow range for cold

water in l/min on-off
Flow range for air

in Nm3/h on-off
1"
41-34
66-55
11/4"
37-31
64-55
11/2"
32-26
57-45
2"
41-34
73-62
3"
49-33
90-66
4"
80-52
149-108
6"
170-125
286-233
Brass: 69 bar,
Stainless steel: 138 bar
93C
brass or stainless steel
stainless steel 301 SS,
11 mm wide x 0.51 mm thick
Wetted
material:
stainless steel 301 SS, 302 SS

and 316 SS, ceramic 8 magnet
128 g
with arrow in direction of flow
DP-30.1 metallic vane switch
in brass
DP-30.2 metallic vane switch
in stainless steel
Weight:
Installation:
Versions:
DP-20
((3) 18AWG wires 18 (460) long

1.650 DIA (42)
1/2 NPTM
Pipe
size
Flow
range for
cold water
in l/min,
on-off,
normal
open
Flow
range for
cold water
in l/min,
on-off,
normal
closed
Flow
range for
air in Nm3/h
on-off,
normal
open
Flow
range for
air in Nm3/h
on-off,
normal
closed
1/2"
9.8-8.7
9.8-9.5
17.5-15
17.3-15.6
3/4"
11.7-10.2
11.7-10.6
22-19.7
22-19.7
1"
18.2-17
18.2-16.7
32.6-29.9
32-30
11/4"
23.5-21.2
23.1-21.2
42-38
41.6-38
11/2"
31-29
31-29
56.8-53
56-52
2"
36-34.4
36-34.1
85.3-82
85-81
switch body
1 5/16 (34) octagonal
1 NPTM
DP-30
Top view
vane that can be shortened at location
1/4 (6)
Shifting to NC
position
(2) 22 AWG wires
18(460) long
Normal open
Path
1/8 NPT-switch shown

in NO position
7/8 hexagonal
1/2 NPTM
Normal closed
Ordering number:
Ordering codes:
DP-20. 2.
Ordering number:
DP-30. 2.
DP-20 Vane operated Flowswitch in Plastic
DP-30 Vane operated Flowswitch in Brass or Stainless Steel
1 = cable
2 = IP 65 terminal housing
Material:
1 = brass
2 = stainless steel
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 16
2008
Ordering codes:
vane
SW-01
Miniature Varible Area
Flowmeter
Contents
Startpage
Description:
The SW-01 series of flowmeters and switches operates according to a modified variable area principle. Using a spring, the
float is introduced into a cylindrical sight glass. The flowing
medium moves the float in the direction of flow and the upper
edge of the float indicates the flowing volume on the scale
mounted on the sight glass. A reed contact is situated outside
the device. This reed contact is infused in a stepless adjustable
housing and thus protected from external influences. When the
float reaches along with its integrated magnet the position of the
reed contact, the contact blades get closed. If the volume of
flow is higher the float continues to move (maximum up to the
stopper that prevents overriding of the operating range). This
ensures a bistable switching action at any time.

Scales for water and air
Mounting in any position
Highly accurate switching
Very low switching hysteresis
2008
NEW
es
t on requ
u
p
t
u
o
e
A n a lo g u g s o n r e q u e s t
p lu
M12x1
The SW-01 series of variable area flowmeters and switches is
intended for measuring and monitoring low-viscosity fluid or
gaseous media, for example, in cooling systems for welding
machines, laser and pipe installations, pump monitoring, compressors and so on.
Switch hysteresis:
In actual application, a switching hysteresis of only 0.5 -1.5
mm float stroke has been achieved by careful selection of the
reed contacts being used.
www.profimess.de
S 17
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
Dimensions:
Operating ranges:
Water:
Air:
Assembly dimensions in mm
5 - 60 ml/min ... 60 -150 l/min

0.5 - 2.0 Nl/min ... 200 - 625 Nl/min
(with reference to 1.013 bar absolute, 20C)
Materials:
Protection class:
IP 65 with plug
IP 67 with cable connection
Weight
Type
HEX
(g)
SW-01.1
17
20
49
R 1/4
10
90
SW-01.2
27
32
53
R 1/2
14
114
300
SW-01.3
41
50
77
R 3/4
21
139
1000
SW-01.4
41
50
77
R 1
17
158
1000
Contents
140
Startpage
Contacts:
Contact function
SW-01.1
SW-01.2
NO-contact
200 V, 1A, 20VA
230 V, 3A, 60 VA
230 V, 1A, 50 VA
change-over contact
200 V, 1A, 20VA
250 V, 1.5A, 50 VA
250 V, 1.5 A,50 VA
Ex-change-over contact
SW-01.3 / -01.4
250 V, 1A, 30 VA
(EEx m IIC T6)
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
SW-01.
1. 1. 1. 06. 1. 1.
Miniature Variable Area Flowmeter and

Switch
HEX
HEX
Process connection:
SW-01.1
SW-01.2
Material:
1 = brass, spring stainless steel 1.4310
2 = fully stainless steel 1.4571
Electrical Connection
Scale:
1 = for water
2 = for air (at 1.013 bar abs., 20C)
Air
0.2 - 1.3 Nl/min
0.5 - 2 Nl/min
0.8
1.5
2
3
3.5
5.5
7
10
10
3 Nl/min
5 Nl/min
8 Nl/min
12 Nl/min
14 Nl/min
20 Nl/min
24 Nl/min
35 Nl/min
42 Nl/min
3
7
12
28
50
100
120
12 Nl/min
30 Nl/min
40 Nl/min
125 Nl/min
200 Nl/min
420 Nl/min
480 Nl/min
22.5
50
130
200
80 Nl/min
130 Nl/min
420 Nl/min
625 Nl/min
Change-over
contact
HEX
SW-01.3 / SW-01.4
max. pressure:
Number of contacts:
0 = none
1 = 1 contact
2 = 2 contacts
Pressure drop:
SW-01.1: 16 bar
SW-01.2 / SW-01.4: 10 bar
SW-01.1: 0.02-0.4 bar
SW-01.2: 0.02-0.3 bar
SW-01.3 / SW-01.4: 0.02-0.4 bar
max. temperature:
120C (160 optionally)
Materials:
Measuring glass: Duran 50

Protective housing: Al, anodized
Seals: Perbunan
(Viton, EPDM optional)
Electrical
connection:
device plug as per DIN 43650

(1 m infused cable optional,
then IP67)
Contact functions:
1 = NO-contact
3 = Ex-change-over contact (EEx m IIC T6), SW-01.3 and SW-01.4 only
Accuracy:
+/- 10% of full scale value
Special issues:
0 = none
Ex-change-over
contact:
always with cable connection
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 18
2008
Operating ranges:
SW-01.1 only:
Water
00 =
01 =
5 - 60 ml/min
02 =
25 - 130 ml/min
03 =
0.1 - 0.6 l/min
04 =
0.2 - 1.2 l/min
05 =
0.4 - 2.0 l/min
06 =
0.5 - 3.0 l/min
07 =
1.0 - 5.0 l/min
08 =
09 =
10 =
10a =
SW-01.2 only:
11 =
0.1 - 0.5 l/min
12 =
0.2 - 1.0 l/min
13 =
0.4 - 1.6 l/min
14 =
1 - 4 l/min
14a =
15 =
2 - 8 l/min
16 =
4 - 15 l/min
17 =
5 - 22 l/min
18 =
6 - 28 l/min
SW-01.3 or SW-01.4:
18a =
8 - 30 l/min
19 =
15 - 45 l/min
20 =
30 - 90 l/min
21 =
60 - 150 l/min
22 =
NC-Contact
SW-02
Miniature Variable Area
Flowswitch
Contents
Startpage
Description:
The SW-02 series of flowswitches operates according to a
modified variable area principle. Using a spring, the float is
introduced into a cylindrical hole. The flowing medium moves
the float in the direction of flow and the upper edge of the
float indicates the flowing volume on the scale mounted on
the sight glass. A reed contact is situated outside the device.
This reed contact is infused in a stepless adjustable housing
and thus protected from external influences. When the float
reaches along with its integrated magnet the position of the
reed contact, the contact blades get closed. If the volume of
flow is higher the float continues to move (maximum up to the
stopper that prevents overriding of the operating range). This
ensures a bistable switching action at any time.

Mounting in any position
NEW
machines, laser and pipe installations, pump monitoring, compressors, high-pressure cleaners and so on.
st
on reque
t
u
p
t
u
o
e
lu
p
M12x1
2008
Switching hysteresis:
In actual application, a switching hysteresis of only 0.5 -1.5
mm float stroke has been achieved by careful selection of the
reed contacts being used.
www.profimess.de
S 19
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
Dimensions:
Operating ranges:
Water:
5 - 60 ml/min ... 60 -150 l/min
Air:
0.6 - 2.2 Nl/min ... 200 - 650 Nl/min
(with reference to 1.013 bar absolute,20C)
Materials:
Type
Protection class: IP 65 with plug

Weight
HEX
(g)
SW-02.1
17
17
47
G 1/4
10
65
SW-02.2
27
31
52
G 1/2
14
90
350
SW-02.3
41
47
76
G 3/4
21
152
1100
SW-02.4
41
50
76
G 1
17
130
1000
Contents
140
Startpage
Contacts:
Contact function
SW-02.1
SW-02.2
SW-02.3 / -02.4
NO-contact
200 V, 1A, 20 VA
230 V, 3A, 60 VA
230 V, 1A, 50 VA
change-over contact
200 V, 1A, 20 VA
250 V, 1,5 A, 50 VA
250 V, 1,5 A,50 VA
250 V, 1A, 30 VA
(EEx m IIC T6)
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
SW-02. 1. 1. 1. 06. 1. 1.
HEX
HEX
Miniature Variable Area Flowswitch
Process connection:
SW-02.1
SW-02.2
Material:
1 = brass, spring stainless steel 1.4310
NO-contact
Scale:
1 = for water
2 = for air (at 1.013 bar absolute, 20C)
Air
0.6 - 2.2 Nl/min
1.7
2.5
3
3
7
12
16
20
6 Nl/min
8 Nl/min
12 Nl/min
22 Nl/min
24 Nl/min
34 Nl/min
56 Nl/min
80 Nl/min
2.5
5.5
8
10
24
55
65
80
140
10 Nl/min
20 Nl/min
30 Nl/min
35 Nl/min
90 Nl/min
220 Nl/min
240 Nl/min
300 Nl/min
525 Nl/min
HEX
SW-02.3 / SW-02.4
max. pressure:
1/4" and 1/2" 300 bar,

3/4" and 1" 250 bar
Stainless steel:
1/4" and 1/2" 350 bar,
3/4" and 1" 300 bar
Pressure drop:
SW-02.1: 0.02-0.2 bar
SW-02.2: 0.02-0.3 bar
SW-02.3 / SW-02.4: 0.02-0.4 bar
max. temperature: 120C (optional 160C)
Materials:
Housing:
Brass version: brass Ni plated
Stainless steel version: 1.4571
Magnets: hard ferrite
El. connection:
device plug as per DIN 43650
(1 m infused cable optional then IP67)
Accuracy:
Ex-change-over
contact:
60 - 180 Nl/min
100 - 300 Nl/min
200 - 650 Nl/min
Number of contacts:
1 = 1 contact
2 = 2 contacts
Contact function:
1 = NO-contact
3 = Ex-change-over contact (EEx m IIC T6), SW-02.2 to SW-02.4 only
Special issues:
0 = none
PROFI
MESS
Change-over
contact
Brass:
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 20
2008
Operating ranges:
SW-02.1 only:
Water
01 =
5 - 60 ml/min
02 =
40 - 130 ml/min
03 =
0.1 - 0.6 l/min
04 =
0.2 - 1.2 l/min
05 =
0.4 - 2.0 l/min
06 =
0.5 - 3.0 l/min
07 =
1.0 - 5.0 l/min
08 =
09 =
10 =
SW-02.2 only:
11 =
0.02 - 0.21 l/min
12 =
0.2 - 0.6 l/min
13 =
0.4 - 1.8 l/min
14 =
0.8 - 3.2 l/min
14a =
15 =
2 - 7 l/min
16 =
3 - 13 l/min
17 =
4 - 20 l/min
18 =
8 - 30 l/min
SW-02.3 or SW-02.4:
18a =
10 - 30 l/min
19 =
15 - 45 l/min
19a =
20 - 60 l/min
20 =
30 - 90 l/min
21 =
60 - 150 l/min
SW-03
and Switch
Contents
Startpage
Compact design
Description:
The SW-03 series of flowmeters and switches operates
according to a modified variable area principle. The float is
introduced into a cylindrical slit nozzle. The flowing medium
moves the float in the direction of flow and the upper edge of
the float indicates the flowing volume on the scale mounted
on the sight glass. A reed contact is situated outside the
device. This reed contact is infused in a stepless adjustable
housing and thus protected from external influences. When
the float reaches along with its integrated magnet the position of the reed contact, the contact blades get closed. If the
volume of flow is higher the float continues to move maximum up to the stopper that prevents overriding of the operating range. This ensures a bistable switching action at any
time.

Non-abrasive burnt-in scale on sight
glass
2008
NEW
es
t on requ
u
p
t
u
o
e
p lu
M12x1
The SW-03 series of variable area flowmeters and switches
is intended for measuring and monitoring low-viscosity fluid
or gaseous media, for example, in cooling systems for welding machines, laser and pipe installations, pump monitoring,
compressors and so on.
www.profimess.de
S 21
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
Dimensions:
Operating ranges:
Water:
Air:
Type
0.1-1.5 l/min ... 4-50 l/min

3-30 Nl/min ... 200-1600 Nl/min
(with reference to 1.013 bar
absolute, 20C
Materials:
HEX
Contacts:
NO-contact:
Change-over contact:
Ex-change-over
contact (EEx m IIC T6):
230 V, 1A, 50 VA
250 V, 1.5 A, 50 VA
Protection class:
IP 65 with plug
D
Weight
T
(g)
SW-03.1.x.x.x
32
43
73
G 1/4
14
132
625
SW-03.2.x.x.x
32
43
73
G 1/2
15
135
625
SW-03.2.x.x.05
32
43
73
G 1/2
15
163
650
SW-03.3.x.x.05
32
43
73
G 3/4
16
167
650
SW-03.3.x.x.06/07 41
50
76
G 3/4
18
164
1000
SW-03.4.x.x.06/07 41
50
76
G 1
19
184
1000
SW-03.4.x.x.08
41
50
76
G 1
20
200
1100
SW-03.5.x.x.x
46
55
75
G 1 1/4 21
222
1300
Contents
Startpage
250 V, 1A, 30 VA
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
SW-03. 3. 1. 1. 06. 1. 1. 0
Variable Area Flowmeter and Switch
Process connection:
SW-03
Material:
1 = brass
HEX
Scale:
1 = for water
2 = for air (at 1.013 bar absolute 20C)
Operating ranges:
Water
Air
0.1 - 1.5 l/min

0.2 - 3 l/min
0.3 - 8 l/min
1- 12 l/min
3- 30 Nl/min
6- 60 Nl/min
6 - 160 Nl/min
20 - 220 Nl/min
2 - 18 l/min
40 - 360 Nl/min
3- 35 l/min
4 - 50 l/min
60 - 700 Nl/min
60 - 825 Nl/min
NO-contact
max. pressure:
Pressure drop:
max. temperature:
200 - 1600 Nl/min
Number of contacts:
0= no contacts
1= 1 contact
2= 2 contacts
10 bar
0.01-0.2 bar
120C
(160C on request)
Materials:
Measuring glass:
Protective housing:
Seals:
Contact function:
0= no contacts
1= NO-contact
1= change-over contact
2= Ex-change-over contact (EEx m IIC T6) always with cable connection
Special issues:
0 = none
1= please specify in detailed text
PROFI
MESS
Change-over
contact
Accuracy:
Duran 50
Al, anodized
Perbunan
device plug as per DIN
43650 (1 m infused
cable optional, then IP 67)
+/ 5% of full scale value
-
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 22
2008
SW-03.1 and SW-03.2:

01 =
02 =
03 =
04 =
SW-03.2 and SW-03.3:
05 =
SW-03.3 and SW-03.4:
06 =
07 =
Only SW-03.4:
08 =
SW-04
and Switch
Contents
Startpage
Description:
The SW-04 series of flowmeters and switches operates according to a modified variable area principle The float is introduced into a cylindrical slit nozzle. The flowing medium moves
the float in the direction of flow. An externally mounted indicator instrument is magnetically coupled with the float and indicates the flowing volume on the scale mounted on a scale. A
reed contact is situated outside the device. This reed contact
is infused in a stepless adjustable housing and thus protected
from external influences. When the float reaches along with its
integrated magnet the position of the reed contact, the
contact blades get closed. If the volume of flow is higher the
float continues to move maximum up to the stopper that prevents overriding of the operating range. This ensures a bistable
switching action at any time.
Compact design
Robust design without glass measuring tube
Suitable for high operating pressures
2008
NEW
The SW-04 series of variable area flowmeters and switches
is intended for measuring and monitoring low-viscosity fluid or
machines, laser and pipe installations, pump monitoring, compressors, pump circulation, high pressure installations and
so on.
uest
ut on req
p
t
u
o
e
u
est
A n a lo g
s on requ
g
lu
p
1
x
M12
www.profimess.de
S 23
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
Dimensions:
Versions:
Type
As flowswitch with reed contact,optionally

with indicator for flow measurement.
Operating
ranges:
Water: 0.1-1.5 l/min ... 4-50 l/min

Air:
1-28 Nl/min ... 200-1450 Nl/min
(with reference to 1.013 bar absolute, 20C)
Materials:
Contact:
NO-contact:
230 V, 1 A, 50 VA
Change-over contact: 250 V, 1.5 A, 50 VA
(EEx m IIC T6):
250 V, 1A, 30VA
Protection
class:
SW-04.1.x.x.x
SW-04.2.x.x.x
SW-04.2.x.x.05
SW-04.3.x.x.x
SW-04.4.x.x.06/07
SW-04.4.x.x.08
SW-04.5.x.x.x
HEX D
D1
27
27
27
34
40
50
50
47
47
47
57
53
67
67
71
71
71
76
76
81
81
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
30
30
30
40
40
50
50
1/4
1/2
1/2
3/4
1
1
11/4
Weight (g)
T
without with
display
14
15
15
18
19
20
21
130
130
148
152
156
200
200
800
800
850
1350
1050
2750
2950
850
850
900
1400
1100
2800
3000
Contents
Startpage
SW-04
IP 65 with plug
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
SW-04. 3. 1. 1. 06. 1. 1. 1. 0
Variable Area Flowmeter and

Switch
HEX
Process connection:
SW-04 with
display instrument
Material:
1 = brass
Scale:
1 = for water
2 = for air (at 1.013 bar absolute, 20C)
NO-contact
Operating ranges:
Air
1 - 28
4 - 60
6 - 160
20 - 240
Nl/min
Nl/min
Nl/min
Nl/min
40 - 360 Nl/min
60 - 700 Nl/min
200 - 1450 Nl/min
Flow display:
0 = only switch, no flow display
1 = flowmeter and switch with display instrument
Number of contacts:
0 = no contacts (for devices with display only)
1 = 1 contact
2 = 2 contacts
Contact function:
1 = NO-contact
3 = Ex-change-over contact (EEx m IIC T6) always with cable connection
Special issues:
0= none
PROFI
MESS
max. pressure:
Brass version:
Stainless steel version:
200 bar
300 bar
Pressure drop:
0.02-0.4 bar
max. temperature:
120C, (160C on request)
Materials:
Wetted parts:
Brass version:
brass, Ni plated
Sealings:
Perbunan

43650 (1 m infused cable
optional, then IP 67)
Accuracy:
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 24
2008
Water
SW-04.1 and SW-04.2:
01 =
0.1 - 1.5 l/min
02 =
0.2 - 3 l/min
03 =
0.3 - 8 l/min
04 =
1 - 12 l/min
Only SW-04.3:
05 =
2 - 18 l/min
SW-04.3 and SW-04.4:
06 =
3 - 35 l/min
07 =
4 - 50 l/min
SW-04.4 only:
08 =
Change-over
contact
SW-05
and Switch
Contents
Startpage
Description:
float is introduced into a cylindrical slit nozzle. The flowing
the device. This reed contact is infused in a stepless adjustable
housing and thus protected from external influences. When the
float reaches along with its integrated magnet the position of
the reed contact, the contact blades get closed. If the volume
of flow is higher the float continues to move maximum up to
the stopper that prevents overriding of the operating range.
This ensures a bistable switching action at any time.
Any mounting position, no need of

recalibration
Compact design
Mounting position and functional safety:

The spring action and magnetic float ensure absolute functional safety. Due to the spring mounted inside that presses the
float in the opposite direction of flow into its initial position, the
device can be deployed in any mounting position. No readjustment is required as the artificially matured spring is under pretension.

Non-abrasive burnt-in scale on
sight glass
2008
NEW
uest
ut on req
p
t
u
o
e
u
est
A n a lo g
s on requ
g
lu
p
1
x
M12
www.profimess.de
S 25
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
Dimensions:
Operating ranges:
0.2 - 4 l/min ... 35 -250 l/min water
Type
Materials:
SW-05.1.x.x.x
SW-05.2.x.x.x
SW-05.2.x.x.05
SW-05.3.x.x.06
SW-05.3.x.x.07
SW-05.4.x.x.07
SW-05.4.x.x.08/09
SW-05.5.x.x.10
SW-05.5.x.x.11

Contact:
NO-contact:
230 V, 1 A, 50 VA
Change-over contact:
250 V, 1.5 A, 50 VA
(EEx m IIC T6):
250 V, 1 A, 30 VA
HEX D
32
32
32
32
41
41
41
46
46
73
73
73
73
76
76
76
81
79
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
43
43
43
43
50
50
50
60
55
1/4
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
1
1
1 1/4
1 1/4
Weight
T
14
14
15
18
18
19
19
21
21
132
135
163
167
164
184
216
210
222
(g)
625
625
650
850
1000
1000
1000
1400
1400
Contents
Startpage
Protection class:
IP 65 with plug
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
SW-05. 3. 1. 1. 06. 1. 1. 0

Process connection:
Material:
1 = brass, spring made of stainless steel 1.4310
SW-05
HEX
Scale:
1 = for water
Operating ranges:
SW-05.1 and SW-05.2:
01 = 0.2 - 4 l/min water
02 = 0.5 - 6 l/min water
03 = 0.5 - 8 l/min water
04 = 0.5 - 14 l/min water
SW-05.2 only:
05 = 1 - 28 l/min water
SW-05.3 only:
06 = 2 - 45 l/min water
SW-05.3 and SW-05.4:
07 = 2 - 80 l/min water
07A = 6 - 90 l/min water
SW-05.4 only:
08 = 6 - 110 l/min water
SW-05.5 only:
09 = 15 - 150 l/min water
10 = 30 - 220 l/min water
11 = 35 - 250 l/min water
NO-contact
max. pressure:
10 bar
Pressure drop:
0.02 - 0.8 bar
max. temperature:
120C
(160C on request)
Materials:
Measuring glass:
Protective housing:
Seals:
Contact function:
0 = no contact
1= NO-contact
2= change-over contact
3= Ex-change-over contact (EEx m IIC T6) always with
cable connection
Special issues:
0 = none
Accuracy:
Duran 50
Al, anodized
Perbunan
device plug as per
DIN 43650
(1 m infused cable optional,
then IP67 )
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 26
2008
Number of contacts:
0 = no contact
1 = 1 contact
2 = 2 contact
PROFI
MESS
Change-over
contact
SW-06
and Switch
Contents
Startpage
Description:
The SW-06 series of flowmeters and switches operates according to a modified variable area principle. The float is introduced into a cylindrical slit nozzle. The flowing medium moves
the float in the direction of flow. An externally mounted indicator instrument is magnetically coupled with the float and indicates the flowing volume on the scale mounted on a scale. A
reed contact is situated outside the device. This reed contact
is infused in a stepless adjustable housing and thus protected
from external influences. When the float reaches along with its
integrated magnet the position of the reed contact, the
contact blades get closed. If the volume of flow is higher the
float continues to move maximum up to the stopper that prevents overriding of the operating range. This ensures a bistable
switching action at any time.

recalibration
Compact design
Mounting position and functional safety:

device can be deployed in any mounting position. No readjustment is required as the artificially matured spring is under pretension.
Robust design without sight glass

2008
NEW
st
on reque
t
u
p
t
u
o
e
lu
p
M12x1
www.profimess.de
S 27
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
Dimensions:
Versions:
Type
as flowswitch with reed contact, optionally

with indicator for flow measurement
Assembly in mm
HEX D
SW-06.1.x.x.x
SW-06.2.x.x.x
SW-06.3.x.x.07/08
SW-06.3.x.x.x
SW-06.4.x.x.9-11
SW-06.5.x.x.x
SW-06.6.x.x.x
Operating ranges: 0.2 - 4 l/min ... 35 - 250 l/min water

Materials:
Contacts:
NO-contact:
230 V, 1 A, 50 VA
Change-over contact: 250 V, 1.5 A, 50 VA
EEx m IIC T6):
250 V, 1A, 30 VA
27
27
27
34
40
50
60
30
30
30
40
40
50
60
Weight (g)
D1
47
47
47
57
57
67
77
71
71
71
70
76
81
86
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
1/4
1/2
3/4
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
without with
display
14
14
16
18
19
21
24
130
130
148
152
156
200
200
800
850
900
1400
1100
3000
3800
850
900
950
1450
1150
3050
3850
Contents
Startpage
Protection class: IP 65 with plug

Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
SW-06. 3. 1. 1. 09. 1. 1. 1. 0

Process connection:
Material:
Scale:
1 = for water
HEX
Operating ranges:
SW-06.1 and SW-06.2:
01 = 0.2 - 4 l/min water
03 = 0.6 - 5 l/min water
04 = 0.5 - 8 l/min water
05 = 1 - 14 l/min water
06 = 1 - 28 l/min water
SW-06 with display

instrument
SW-06.2 and SW-06.3 only:

07 = 2 - 40 l/min water
08 = 4 - 55 l/min water
NO-contact
SW-06.3 and SW-06.4:

09 = 1 - 70 l/min water
10 = 8 - 90 l/min water
11 = 5 - 110 l/min water
Change-over
contact
SW-06.5 only:
12 = 10 - 150 l/min water
13 = 35 - 220 l/min water
SW-06.6 only:
13a = 35 - 220 l/min water
14 = 35 - 250 l/min water
Number of contacts:
0 = no contacts (for devices with indicator only)
1 = 1 contact
2 = 2 contacts
Contact function:
1 = NO-contact
3 = Ex-change-over contact (EEx m IIC T6) always with cable connection
Special issues:
0 = none
Accuracy:
Attention: Please specify mounting position and direction of flow in detailed text.
PROFI
MESS
200 bar
300 bar
0.02 - 0.8 bar
120C, (160C on request)
brass, Ni plated
Perbunan
43650 (1 m infused cable
optional, then IP67)
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 28
2008
max. pressure:
Brass version:
Pressure drop:
max. temperature:
Materials:
Wetted parts:
Brass version:
Seal:
Flow indicator:
0 = switch only, no flow indicator
1 = flowmeter and switch, with display instrument
SW-07
and Switch
Contents
Startpage
Description:
float is introduced into a cylindrical slit nozzle. The flowing
the device. This reed contact is infused in a stepless adjustable housing and thus protected from external influences. When
the float reaches along with its integrated magnet the position
of the reed contact, the contact blades get closed. If the volume of flow is higher the float continues to move maximum up
to the stopper that prevents overriding of the connecting
range. This ensures a bistable switching action at any time.
For viscous media up to 600 cSt

recalibration
Compact design
Viscosity compensation, mounting position

and functional safety:
device can be deployed in any mounting position. No readjustment is required as the artificially matured spring is under pretension. The strong pretension of the spring in combination
with an aperture in the float limit the effect of the medium's
viscosity fluctuations to a minimum in comparison with other
normal float flowmeters.

Non-abrasive burnt-in scale on sight
glass
2008
NEW
es
t on requ
u
p
t
u
o
e
p lu
M12x1
t
intended for measuring and monitoring viscous fluids, for
example, in centrally controlled lubrication systems, oil circulation lubrication systems, transformer oils and so on.
www.profimess.de
S 29
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
Operating
ranges:
Materials:
Contacts:
Dimensions:
Type

NO-contact:
Change-over
contact:
Ex-change-over
contact
(EEx m IIC T6):
Protection
class:
0.2-0.8 l/min ... 30-90 l/min fluids with

viscosities up to max. 600 cSt
230 V, 1A, 50 VA,

100 VA for operating
ranges 06-16
Weight
HEX D
(g)
SW-07.2.x.x.01-05
27
32
53
G 1/2
14
114
300
SW-07.3.x.x.x
41
50
77
G 3/4
17
139
850
SW-07.4.x.x.x
41
50
77
G 1
17
158
850
SW-07.1.x.x.x
41
50
77
G 1/4
17
145
850
SW-07.2.x.x.06 -16
41
50
77
G 1/2
17
145
850
Contents
Startpage
250 V, 1.5 A, 50 VA
250 V, 1A, 30 VA
IP65 with plug

IP67 with cable connection
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
SW-07. 3. 1. 1. 06. 1. 1. 0
Variable Area
Flowmeter and Switch
Process connection:
Material:
SW-07
HEX
Scale:
1 = for viscous media up to 600 cSt
NO-Contact
1/2)
1/2)
1/2)
1/2)
Number of contacts:
0 = no contacts
1 = 1 contact
2 = 2 contacts
max. pressure:
16 bar operating ranges 01 - 05

10 bar operating ranges 06 - 16
Pressure drop:
0.02 - 0.2 bar operating ranges 01 - 05

0.02 - 0.4 bar operating ranges 06 - 16
max. temperature:
120C (160C on request)
Materials:
Sight glass:
Protective housing:
Seals:
Contact function:
0 = no contacts
1 = NO-contact
3 = Ex-change-over contact, not for SW-07.2 (EEx m IIC T6)
Magnets
(wetted):
El. connection:
Special issues:
0 = none
PROFI
MESS
Change-over contact
Accuracy:
Duran 50
Al, anodized
Viton
(Perbunan, EPDM optional)
hard ferrite
device plug as per DIN 43650 (1 m infused cable optional, then IP67)
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 30
2008
Operating ranges (small design):

SW-07.2 only:
01 =
0.2 - 0.8 l/min
02 =
0.2 - 1 l/min
03 =
0.5 - 1.7 l/min
04 =
1.3 - 4 l/min
05 =
2.5 - 8 l/min
SW-07.1 to SW-07.4:
06 =
0.1 - 0.8 l/min
07 =
0.5 - 1.5 l/min
08 =
1 - 4 l/min
09 =
2 - 8 l/min (not 1/4)
10 =
3 - 10 l/min (not 1/4)
11 =
5 - 15 l/min (not 1/4)
12 =
8 - 24 l/min (not 1/4)
13 =
10 - 30 l/min (not 1/4 or
14 =
15 - 45 l/min (not 1/4 or
15 =
20 - 60 l/min (not 1/4 or
16 =
30 - 90 l/min (not 1/4 or
SW-08
Viscosity-Compensated Variable
Area Flowmeter, independent of
Mounting Position,
High-Pressure Version
Contents
Startpage
Description:
The SW-08 series of flowmeters and switches operates according to a modified variable area principle. The float is introduced into a cylindrical slit nozzle. The flowing medium moves
the float in the direction of flow. An externally mounted indicator instrument is magnetically coupled with the float and indicates the flowing volume on a scale. A reed contact is situated
outside the device. This reed contact is infused in a stepless
adjustable housing and thus protected from external influences. When the float reaches along with its integrated magnet
the position of the reed contact, the contact blades get closed. If the volume of flow is higher the float continues to move
maximum up to the stopper that prevents overriding of the
connecting range. This ensures a bistable switching action at
any time.
For viscous media up to 600 cSt

recalibration
Compact design
Viscosity compensation, mounting position and

functional safety:
device can be deployed in any mounting position. No readjustment is required as the artificially matured spring is under pretension. The strong pretension of the spring in combination
with an aperture in the float limit the effect of the medium's
viscosity fluctuations to a minimum in comparison with other
normal float flowmeters.

Robust design without sight glass
2008
NEW
st
on reque
t
u
p
t
u
o
e
lu
p
M12x1
intended for measuring and monitoring viscous fluids, for
example, in centrally controlled lubrication systems, oil circulation lubrication systems, transformer oils and so on.
www.profimess.de
S 31
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
Operating
ranges:
Materials:
Dimensions:
Type
Contacts:
NO-Contact:
230 V, 1 A, 50 VA
Change-over
contact:
250 V, 1.5 A, 50 VA
Ex-Change-over contact
(EEx m IIC T6):
250 V, 1A, 30 VA
Protection
class:
Weight (g)
HEX D
D1
without with
display
SW-08.2.x.x.x
SW-08.4.x.x.x
27
40
57
52
76
G 1/2
G 1
14
17
90
130
350
1200
SW-08.2.x.x.x
Special issues: Connecting adapter

G 1/4
14
98
G 3/8
14
108
400
450
0.1-0.8 l/min ... 35-110 l/min fluids

with viscosities up to max. 600 cSt
31
40
SW-08.4.x.x.x
G 1/4
G 1/2
G 3/4
21
21
21
152
152
152
1500
1500
1500
--1250
Contents
----1550
1550
1550
Startpage
IP65 with plug

IP67 with cable connection
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
SW-08. 4. 1. 1. 06. 1. 1. 1. 0
Variable Area Flowmeter and

Switch
Process connection:
HEX
Material:
SW-08 with display

instrument
Scale:
1 = for viscous media up to 600 cSt
Operating ranges:
SW-08.1 and SW-08.2 only:
01 =
0.1 - 0.8 l/min
03 =
0.5 - 1.6 l/min
04 =
0.8 - 3 l/min
05 =
2 - 7 l/min
SW-08.4 only:
06 =
0.1 - 0.8 l/min (1/4, 1/2, 3/4 with adapter)
07 =
0.5 - 1.5 l/min (1/4, 1/2, 3/4 with adapter
08 =
1 - 4 l/min (1/4, 1/2, 3/4 with adapter)
09 =
2 - 8 l/min (1/2 and 3/4 with adapter)
10 =
11 =
12 =
13 =
10 - 30 l/min (3/4 with adapter)
14 =
15 =
16 =
30 - 90 l/min
17 =
35 - 110 l/min
99 =
Special operating range
NO-Contact
max. pressure:
Brass version:
300
250
Stainless steel version: 350
300
Number of contacts:
1 = 1 contact
2 = 2 contacts
bar
bar
bar
bar
operating
operating
operating
operating
ranges
ranges
ranges
ranges
01
06
01
06
05,
16
05,
16
Pressure drop:
0.02 - 0.4 bar operating ranges 01 05,

0.02 - 0.2 bar operating ranges 06 16
max. temperature:
120C (160C on request)
Flow indicator
0 = switch only, no flow indicator
1 = flowmeter and switch, with indicator (SW-08.4 only)
Materials:
Wetted parts:
Brass version:
brass, Ni plated
Stainless steel version: stainless steel 1.4571
Seals:
Viton
(Perbunan, EPDM optional)
Magnets
(wetted):
hard ferrite
Special issues:
0 = none
El. connection:
Attention: please specify mounting position and direction of flow in detailed text
Accuracy:
device plug as per DIN 43650 (1 m

infused cable optional, then IP67)
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 32
2008
Contact function:
1 = NO-contact
3 = Ex change-over contact, not for SW-08.2 (EEx m IIC T6)
PROFI
MESS
Change-over contact
SM-05
Miniature Plastic Variable
Area Flowmeter
Contents
Startpage
Description:
The SM-05 series of variable area flowmeters for small volumes operates according to the variable area principle in
which the measuring element such as a stainless steel ball
can move in a conical flow tube in vertical direction. When
the medium being measured begins to flow from bottom to
top, the float, too, moves to top until a dynamic equilibrium
of forces freezes it at a certain height. The position that the
float reaches in this manner is proportional to the volume of
flow. The scale value that can be read on the upper edge of
the measuring ball, therefore, corresponds to the flow rate.
In the case of SM-05, any one of the operating ranges between 1.5-15 l/h and 10-100 l/h are possible in all its versions. The measuring tubes are provided with a female or a
female thread with an additional male thread which allows an
absolutely universal connection to processes. If the excrescent volume of flow needs to be regulated, the SM-05 provides optionally a stainless steel regulating valve to easily allow
flow volume control.
Excellent readability
Cost-effective
Optionally with regulating valve
Compact
Optionally with female and male
threads
Variable area flowmeters made of plastic are a cost-effective
alternative to glass-made devices because they can be
manufactured with significantly less effort. Especially users in
the fields of
Machine construction
Medical engineering
Pharmaceutical industry
Chemical industry and in
Research & Development
2008
where flow indicators are used in large numbers for simple

applications and maximum accuracy is not decisive factor
stand to benefit from this. An important aspect while assembling these devices is that the flow must always be from bottom to top and the medium is free from abrasive solid particles which, otherwise, may cause scratches inside the plastic tube and render it opaque. Due to this constraint, the
SM-05 cannot be deployed as a main component in tube
designing.
www.profimess.de
S 33
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Measuring medium: water and watery fluids
Operating ranges:
1.5...100 l/h in four steps
Process
connections:
R 1/4"-female and R 5/8"-male
Housing material:
PMMA
Float:
Regulating valve:
PVC, stainless steel 1.4301
Pressure:
PN10 for water at 20C
Contents
Startpage
Media temperature: 5C...+60C

Accuracy:
Table of dimensions SM-05

Operating range
Rp
[l/h]
[inch]
R for SM-05.x.2
[inch]
A
[mm]
B
[mm]
L
[mm]
h for SM-05.x.1
[mm]
h for SM-05.x.2
[mm]
1.5...15
2.5...15
5.0...15
10...100
0.625
0.625
0.625
0.625
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
105
120
120
120
15
15
15
15
20
20
20
20
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
Ordering codes
Ordering number:
SM-05. 1. 1. 2
Miniature Plastic Variable Area Flowmeter
Valve for flow regulation:

0 = no valve
1 = with regulating valve at the inlet
1 = R1/4"-female
2 = R1/4"-female and R5/8"-male
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 34
2008
Operating range for water at 20C:

1 = 1.5...15 l/h
2 = 2.5...25 l/h
3 = 5.0...50 l/h
4 = 10...100 l/h
SM-10
Sight Glass for Small Flow
Volumes
Contents
Startpage
Description:
The SM-10 series of flowmeters operates according to the proven variable area principle. The flowing medium moves the float
in a conical measuring tube in the opposite direction of gravitational force. The height of the float is a measure for the flow
and it can be read from a non-abrasive and burnt-in scale.
Optionally, inductive contacts fixed on the sight glass can be
used for obtaining limit values.
For fluids and gases

Armatures made of brass or stainless
steel
As a standard, all devices are equipped with a needle valve for

precise regulation of flow.
With built-in needle valve as standard

fitting
The SM-10 series of variable area flowmeters is primarily intended for controlling and monitoring low-viscosity fluid or
gaseous media. For standard conditions, scales for water or air
are predefined and enable a quick and simple dimensioning of
the devices. For other media or different process conditions
specially customized scales are available.
Optionally limit value emitter
2008
Accuracy class 2.5 or 4
www.profimess.de
S 35
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
Operating ranges:
SM-10.1:
Operating Operating range Contact

range
Nl/h Air, 20C, version
No.
1.2 bar abs.
Miniature version: height 111 mm

accuracy class 4
Standard version: height 146 mm
accuracy class 2.5
SM-10.2:
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Switch Panel Assembly:

Aperture dimensions:
Miniature version: 40 x 145mm
Standard version: 40 x 180 mm
Cut-Out:
Miniature version: 32 x 128mm
Standard version: 32 x 163 mm
Ordering codes
Ordering number:
SM-10. 2. 2. 1. 1. 06. 1. 1 0

with Sight Glass
0.5...5
0.8...8
1.6...16
4...40
6...60
10...100
25...250
50...500
80...800
100...1000
180...1800
240...2400
300...3000
400...4000
500...5000
Version
SM-10.1 SM-10.2
Miniature Standard
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B (min.)
B (min.)
B (min.)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
-
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
A
B
B
B
B
B
B (min.)
B (min.)
B (min.)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Contents
Startpage
l/h water
Version
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
1 = miniature
2 = standard
Process connection
1 = G 1/4-female rear side
2 = 1/4" NPT rear side (standard)
Material
0.25...2.5
0.5...5
1.2...12
2.5...25
4...40
6...60
10...100
12...120
16...160
x = available
- = not available
Contacts: The contact version is determined by the operating range.
(min.) = contact can be used as Min.-Contact only.
1 = brass
2 = stainless steel
Seal material
Dimensions
2 = PTFE / FFKM
Operating range
01...24 = as per table
99 = special operating range
Ventil
0 = none
1 = valve at the inlet (standard)
2 = valve at the outlet (no backstroke ball)
Limit contacts
0 = none
1 = 1 contact (version A)
2 = 2 contacts (version A)
Version
a (mm)
b (mm)
c (mm)
3 = 1 Contact (version B)
SM-10.1
SM-10.2
45
80
90
125
111
146
4 = 2 Contacts (version B)
Options (multiple specification possible)
0 = none
2 = cable connection box for devices with contact
Special type connections like hose spouts, SWAGELOK,

ERMETO or others on request.
Accuracy:
For operating the limit contacts isolating circuit amplifiers

KFA...SR2-Ex1 .W for 1 contact or KFA...SR2-Ex2.W for 2
contacts are required. Technical specifications and prices on
request.
PROFI
MESS
Pressure drop:
10 bar
100 C (80 C with contact)
armature and valve brass or
stainless steel, float stainless
steel, seals Viton or PTFE /
FFKM, sight glass borosilicate
SM-10.1: Class 4
SM-10.2: Class 2,5
200 mbar with valve
120 mbar without valve
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 36
2008
max. pressure:
max. temperature:
Materials:
1 = switching panel assembly
SM-12
Conical Glass Flowmeter as
per the Variable Area Principle
Contents
Startpage
Description:
A float made of plastic or metal gets lifted by a fluid flowing
vertically through a conical glass tube and set into rotation.
Its upward movement stops at a point where the gravitational
and dynamic forces become equal against each other. The
body's position in the cone, therefore, depends of the flow
with the result that the volume of flow can be read from the
scale engraved on the sight glass. The SM-12 has always a
millimeter scale on the glass tube that can be converted to
flow rates of different media with the help of the tables included in the supply. Optionally, an additional flow volume display directly on the glass tube or on a screw-mountable scale
attachment can be supplied.
Wide range of measuring

Antistatic sight glass for measuring small
volumes of gas
Low pressure drop
Seven different sight glass geometry and six different float
materials allow a wide range of measuring with the SM-12 for
all types of fluids and gases which are compatible with material being used. This data sheet provides an overview of possibilities for water and air at atmospheric state. Please ask us
for different media, pressures or temperatures.
Choice of scale designs

Conversion of scale to changed measuring
material data
2008
The SM-12 series of variable area flowmeters is deployed

wherever a volume of flow needs to be displayed without
electrical means. Specially manufactured floats produce a
negligible pressure drop at an accuracy class of 1.6. Often
the advantage is that the characteristics of the material being
measured can be assessed visually through the glass tube.
www.profimess.de
S 37
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
Operating range code: To determine the operating range
code, the desired operating range is ascertained in the relevant tables (Table 1 for water; Table 2 for fluids) and the code
is determined according to the measuring tube, the float and
the other listed criteria. For example, the code G-0-44-G-SS0-3-N indicates the operating range of 4...40 l/h water to a
millimeter and a flow volume scale directly of the glass tube,
a float in stainless steel 1.4571 with a diameter number 0. ID
1 without preparation for a limit contact, that is to say, without magnets in the float.
Armature material: The protective tube to protect the sight

glass from external damage can be optionally designed in
stainless steel 1.4571 or in coated steel. The table "Model
specification" provides information as to which measuring
tube can be equipped with which armature.
Valve: A number of device variants can be equipped with a
regulating valve. Optionally, the valve can be made of Cr-Ni
steel or brass. The sealing material is PTFE, but only for
brass valves and G1 and G2 measuring tubes BUNA is used.
Depending on the version, the valve can be mounted at the
inlet or outlet. The table "Model specification" provides information as to which measuring tube can be combined with
which valve.
Process connection: Rp female thread, NPT female thread,

hose spouts or PVC adhesive sleeves are available as variants for the connection. The table "Model specification" provides information as to which measuring tube can be fitted
with which connection.
Contents
Startpage
Limit contact: All G measuring tubes can be equipped with

REED contacts which require a magnetic float (the operating
range code takes this into regard). Optionally, MIN contacts
(normally closed) or MAX contacts (normally open) are available. Due to the limitation of G measuring tube, the operating
range for water is 40 l/h and for air 400 Nl/h.
Process connection material: As material, stainless steel

1.4571, coated steel or PVC can be used. The table "Model
specification" provides information as to which material can
be combined with which connection.
Material
Process
connection:
Ordering codes
SM-12. [ ]-[ ]-[ ] [ ]-[ ]-[ ] [ ]-[ ]-[ ]-[ ] 2. 2. 2. 0. 0. 0
Variable Area
Flowmeter with
Conical Glass
Armature:
Operating range code from

Table 1 or Table 2:
Process connection:
1 = female thread Rp (Code R0)
2 = female thread NPT (Code T0)
3 = hose spout (Code P0)
4 = adhesive sleeve (PVC, Code K0 only)
1 = stainless steel 1.4571 (Code SS)
2 = coated steel (Code ST)
3 = PVC (for adhesive sleeve, Code PC only)
Armature material:
1 = stainless steel 1.4571 (Code SS)
2 = coated steel (Code ST)
Valve:
0 = no valve (Code NNN)
1 = valve at inlet, seal BUNA (PTFE),
brass housing (Code RAE)
2 = valve at inlet, seal PTFE,
Cr-Ni steel housing (Code RBE)
3 = valve at outlet, seal BUNA (PTFE),
brass housing (Code RAA)
4 = valve at outlet, seal PTFE,
Cr-Ni steel housing (Code RBA)
stainless steel 1.4571, steel or PVC

(for adhesive sleeve)
stainless steel 1.4571 or steel, sealing
elements polypropylene and BUNA
Pressure:
Measuring tube
Pmax [bar]
L6; L7 G0; G1 G2 G4
16
10
9
6
Temperature:
80C max. (130C optional)
Mounting length:
310 mm to 404 mm
Weight:
0.7 to 8.4 kg
Mounting position:
vertical, flow from bottom
Operating ranges:
0.002 l/h to 10 m3/h water (20C)

0.1 l/h to 100 Nm3/h air
(20C, 1 bar abs.)
Range:
10:1 for G measuring tubes

20:1 for L measuring tubes
Accuracy:
Class 1.6 as per VDI 3513
Electrical specifications
Limit contact:
REED, bistabile
Voltage:
230 V max.
Switching current:
0.6 A max.
Switching load:
12 VA or 12 W
Limit contact:
0 = none
1 = MIN contact
2 = MAX contact
Protection class:
IP65
Self-capacity:
0 nF
Self-inductivity:
0 mH
Options:
0 = none
1 = with isolated switching amplifier for limit contact 24 V DC
2 = with isolated switching amplifier for limit contact 230 V AC
3 = oil and grease free for applications with oxygen
4 = with flow table for conversion
5 = with base stand for hose spout connection
Connecting cable:
LIYY 2 x 0.34, 1 m long
Weight of the
contact:
35 g
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 38
2008
Ord. No.:
Table 1
Contents
Startpage
Water/Fluids
Flow Table
Operating range code
Water/Fluids at 20C
Measuring tube
Recommended
combination Series 1
Alternative combination
Series 2
max.
flow
max.
flow
Pressure
drop *)
Pressure
drop *)
Length
Diameter
Float
Measuring
Scale
range conus
Material
Code
[l/h]
mbar
[l/h]
mbar
Code
Code
Code
0.025
0.04
1.5
13
0.04
0.063
1.5
14
0.063
0.1
17
Code
0.1
0.16
21
0.16
0.25
22
Series 1
0.25
0.4
23
TT; KR
0.4
0.8
2.5
24
Diameter
Code
Code
Code
1.2
27
31
1.6
2.8
3.5
32
2.5
33
6.3
34
6.3
10
4.5
37
10
16
41
16
27
42
G;
25
44
43
A;
40
66
44
63
10
110
10
47
40
10
25
44
63
12
40
47
100
16
63
51
Series 1
160
24
100
11
52
SS
250
15
160
53
400
16
250
54
630
18
400
57
1000
26
630
10
61
1600
26
1000
11
62
2500
30
1600
13
63
Series 2
4000
40
2500
16
64
PP; PF;
6300
44
4000
18
67
PC
10000
53
6300
21
71
[ ]-
[ ]-
[ ][ ]-
[ ][ ]-
[ ]-
Measuring tube length

(Type)
300 mm
300 mm
Measuring tube diameter
10...95 mm
Insert
0.63

for ordering code:
Flow ID
Series 2
SS
0
Series 1
3
1
M;
N
2
[ ]-
Series 2
2
[ ]-
[]
L
G
Measuring tube cone
[]
[ ][ ]
Medium scale
Scale on the measuring tube and mm gradation

gradation on the attached scale and mm gradation (recommended)
Measuring tube with mm gradation only
Material of
float

Titanium
Polypropylene
PTFE
PVC
Corundum
Float
diameter
1.6...66 mm
Flow ID
Liquid (fluids)
Factor 1 (water)
Factor 0.63 (water)
Float
insert
no magnet
with magnet (for limit value switch)
G
A
N
SS
TT
PP
PF
PC
KR
[]
L
3
2
N
M
2008
*) The specified pressure drop is merely a standard value and may be different depending on the diameter used.
www.profimess.de
S 39
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Table 2
Air / Gases
Flow table
Air/gases, 1 bar absolut
Mesuring tube
Alternative combination
Series 2
max.
flow
Pressure
drop*)
max.
flow
[l/h]
mbar
[l/h]
mbar
Code
1.9
1.5
Pressure
drow*)
Float
Contents
Recommended
combination Series 1
Length
Diameter
Measuring
tube conus
Scale
Material
Code
Code
Code
Code
13
4.5
1.5
14
4.4
17
Diameter
Flow ID
Insert
Code
Code
Code
Startpage
6.5
10
21
10
16
22
Series 1
14
23
23
TT; KR
23
1.5
40
2.5
24
33
1.5
55
27
50
80
31
70
110
3.5
32
100
160
33
180
2.5
260
4.5
34
250
2.5
360
4.5
37
Series 2
400
600
41
SS
630
950
42
G;
1000
1500
43
A;
1600
2200
44
2400
10
3500
10
47
400
1000
44
630
1600
47
1000
2500
51
Series 1
Series 1
Series 1
1600
4000
12
52
Al; PP;
2500
6300
11
53
PC
4000
10000
14
54
6300
16000
16
57
10000
25000
19
61
16000
40000
18
62
25000
63000
21
63
Series 2
Series 2
Series 2
40000
100000
29
64
PP; PC
M;N
63000
160000
32
67
100000
250000
34
71
[ ]-
[ ]-
[ ][ ]-
[ ]-
[]

for ordering code:
Measuring tube length
(Type)
300 mm
300 mm
Measuring tube diameter
10...95 mm
[ ]-
[ ][ ]-
[ ]-
L
G
[]
Measuring tube cone
[ ][ ]
Medium Scale
scale on the measuring tube and mm- gradation

attached scale and mm-gradation (recommended)
measuring tube with mm- gradation only
Material
Float

Aluminium
Titanium
Polypropylene
PVC
Corundum
Float
diameter
1.6...66 mm
Flow ID
Air (Gas)
Factor 10 (Air)
Factor 25 (Air)
Float
insert
no magnet
with magnet (for limit value switch)
G
A
N
SS
AL
TT
PP
PC
KR
[]
G
5
7
N
M
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 40
2008
*) The specified pressure drop is merely a standard value and may be different depending on the diameter used.
Model specification
Connection diameter
Model
SM-12
Process connection
Female thread
Contents without valves
Rp
NPT
Female thread Adhesive sleeve Code
Code
Code
Rp 1/4"
R0
Rp 1/2"
RAGH41
20 mm
Startpage
Rp 3/4"
Rp 1"
Rp 1 1/2"
32 mm
50 mm
Rp 2"
Rp 2 1/2"
75 mm
RAGH41
R0
RAGH01
R0
T0
RAGH01
R0
T0
RAGH01
R0
Hose spout
Adhesive
sleeve
Code
Code
K0
P0
K0
Connection
material
Armature
material
Valve
Measuring
tube
lengthdiameter
Code
Code
Code
Code
SS
SS
NNN
L6; L7; G0
SS; ST
ST
NNN
L6; L7; G0
SS (PC)
SS
NNN
L6; L7; G0
SS; ST (PC)
ST
NNN
L6; L7; G0
SS
SS
NNN
G1
RAGH01
R0
SS; ST
ST
NNN
G1
RAGH23
R0
SS
SS
NNN
G1
RAGH23
R0
RAGH02
R0
T0
RAGH02
R0
T0
RAGH02
R0
RAGH02
R0
RAGH04
R0
T0
RAGH04
R0
T0
RAGH05
R0
RAGH05
R0
RAGH05
R0
P0
SS; ST
ST
NNN
G1
K0
SS (PC)
SS
NNN
G1
K0
SS; ST (PC)
ST
NNN
G1
SS
SS
NNN
G2
G2
SS; ST
ST
NNN
K0
SS (PC)
SS
NNN
G2
K0
SS; ST (PC)
ST
NNN
G2
T0
SS
SS
NNN
G4
T0
SS; ST
ST
NNN
G4
ST
ST
NNN
G4
P0
P0
RAGH06
R0
T0
K0
SS (PC)
SS
NNN
G4
RAGH06
R0
T0
K0
SS; ST (PC)
ST
NNN
G4
RAGH01
R0
SS
SS
RB[ ]
L6; L7; G0
RAGH01
R0
SS
ST
RB[ ]
L6; L7; G0
RAGH01
R0
ST
ST
RA[ ]
L6; L7; G0
RAGH02
R0
SS
SS
RB[ ]
G1
RAGH02
R0
SS
ST
RB[ ]
G1
RAGH02
R0
ST
ST
RA[ ]
G1
RAGH04
R0
SS
SS
RB[ ]
G2
RAGH04
R0
SS
ST
RB[ ]
G2
RAGH04
R0
ST
ST
RA[ ]
G2
RAGH06
R0
ST
SS
RA[ ]
G4
RAGH06
R0
ST
ST
RA[ ]
G4
SM-12 with valve

Rp 1/2"
Rp 1"
Rp 1 1/2"
2008
Rp 2 1/2"
www.profimess.de
S 41
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Table of dimensions SM-12

Connection diameter Measuring tube Dimensions (mm)
Weight
Code
kg
1/2"
L6; L7; G0
356
224
0.7
1"
G1
360
224
1.3
1 1/2"
G2
386
224
2.5
21/2"
G4
394
212
Contents
Startpage
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 42
2008
SM-15
Plastic Flowmeters as per the
Variable Area Principle
Contents
Startpage
For every industrial application
Description:
The SM-15 series of flowmeters operates according to the proven variable area principle. The float gets lifted by the flowing
medium and indicates the flow with its upper edge on the
scale attached to the device. If floats with integrated magnets
are used, optionally, alarm contacts or a measuring transmitter
can be attached to the device. All devices possess a male
thread on the measuring tube and are additionally equipped
with standard PVC adhesive sleeves. As an option, also female
threaded fittings made of PVC, PP, PVDF, brass or stainless
steel can be supplied.
For fluid and gaseous media

Simple and robust design with high
operational safety
PVC, PA, PSU and PVDF versions
Low pressure drop
Easy to assemble
Due to a wide variety of materials and easily interchangeable
measurement scales, the SM-15 series plastic flowmeters can
be deployed for most of media including hostile media.
The main areas of application are water treatment, effluent
technology, chemical and food-processing industries and many
others.
High resolution scale
2008
Optional alarm contacts and analogue

output
www.profimess.de
S 43
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Material versions
Measuring tube:
max. pressure:
PVC-U; transparent
Float:
Polyamide; transparent, with

heavily reduced humidity
absorption
PVC:
10 bar to 20C, 1bar at 60C
Polyamide:
Polysulphone:
Polysulfon; transparent
PVDF:
PVDF; opaque (yellowish-white)
max. temperature:
PVDF, optional stainless steel

1.4301 and PVDF with integrated
magnet
without joints
Seals:
EPDM, optional Viton
Tube connections:
PVC, optional PP, PVDF, brass,

stainless steel
Contents
Startpage
PVC:
60 C
Polyamide:
75 C
Polysulphone:
100 C
PVDF:
110 C
with joints made of:

PVC:
60 C
PP:
as per temperature parameters for

the relevant measuring tube,
however max. 80 C
PVDF, brass,
stainless steel: as per temperature parameters for
the relevant measuring tube
Mounting position:
vertical, flow from bottom to top
Assembly:
with moderation line 5-7 x DN

before and after the device
Accuracy:
Cl. 4 as per VDI/VDE 3513, Bl. 2
Ordering codes
Ordering number:
SM-15. 2. 1. 202. 102. 1. 0
Accessories
Limit value switch:
Plastic Flowmeter
Material version (measuring tube):
bistable contacts, NO-contact or

NC-contact function
Analogue output:
Measuring device with integrated

measuring transmitter,
4...20 mA
Attention: Limit contacts or measuring transmitters operate
only in combination with a float with integrated magnet.
1 = PVC-U (only with scales for water)

2 = Polyamid
3 = Polysulfon
4 = PVDF
Scale:
1 = water
Indicator scales
2 = air (0 bar rel.)
For the media water (in l/h) and air (in Nm3/h) at relative
operating pressures of 0.1,2 and 3 bar, standard scales are
available.
For other media such as air at higher operating pressure,
HCL (30%), NaOH (30%) and, for the units m3/h, l/sec., l/min,
USGPM or IGPM, special type scales can be supplied on
request.
These supplementary special type scales can be attached
later easily and reliably on the flowmeter. There is no
need of any modifications to the measuring device.

9 = Special scale type
Operating range:
101... 612 = as per Table 1
Process connection:
as per Table 2
Float:
For other media and/or operational conditions, special type

scale can be offered on request.
1 = PVDF (standard)
For this, the following data is required:
3 = PVDF with integrated magnet
- Medium
(when using limit contacts or analogue output only)

Options:
- Operating pressure
00 = none
11 = 1 limit contact (NC-contact)
- Operating temperature
21 = 2 limit contacts (NC-contact)
- Operating density
12 = 1 limit contact (NO-contact)
- Operating viscosity
22 = 2 limit contacts (NO-contact)
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 44
2008
50 = measuring transmitter, 4...20 mA
Contents
Operating ranges (Table 1)
Limit contacts
Measur- Operat- Operating

ing
ing
range
tube
range water (l/h)
Operating range
Version:
bistable reed contacts.
Contact function:
NO-contact or NC-contact for

rising flow
Assembly:
adjustable to dove-tail rail of the

measuring tube
Switching load:
max. 220 VAC, max. 0.5 A,
Startpage
2
Air at 20C (Nm3/h) not for PVC-measuring tubes

0 bar rel.
1 bar rel.
2 bar rel.
3 bar rel.
101
3-24
0.2...1
0.2-1.3
0.25-1.6
0.3-1.75
102
5-60
0.2-2.5
0.4-3.2
0.2-3.8
0.3-4.40
103
10-100
0.5-3.6
0.6-5.0
0.8-6.0
0.8-7.0
104
25-250
0.5-9
1-13
1-16
1.5-18
201
5-50
0.4-2.8
0.4-3.2
0.5-4
0.5-4.5
Operating temperature: 0...+55 C
202
15-150
0.8-6.25
1-9.0
1-11
1.5-12
Hysteresis:
3 mm height of float
203
25-250
0.9-9.5
1.5-13.0
2-17.0
2-20
Connection layout:
2-wire, irrespective of polarity
204
40-400
2.0-15.0
2-21
3-26
3-30
301
15-150
0.5-5.5
1.0-8.5
1.0-11
1.0-10.5
302
40-400
2.0-14.0
2-20
3.0-26
4.0-30
303
60-600
2.5-22.0
4.0-31.0
4-38.0
5.0-45
304
100-1000
4.0-34.0
5-45
6-58.0
7.5-67.5
401
25-250
1.0-8.0
1.5-12.0
1.5-16
1.5-17.0
402
40-400
2.0-14.0
2-20
3.0-26
3.0-30
403
100-1000
4.0-34.0
5.0-45.0
5.0-55.0
6.0-66
404
150-1500
5.0-50.0
6-70
7.5-90.0
7.5-100.0
502
60-600
2.0-20.0
3.0-30.0
4.-35
5-40.0
503
100-1000
4.0-35.0
5-50
8.0-60
8.0-70
504
200-2000
7.0-70.0
10.0-100.0
10.0-120.0
15.0-130.0
505
300-3000
10.0-100.0
15-140
20.0-160.0
20.0-190.0
506
600-6000
20.0-200.0
30.0-280.0
40-280.0
40.0-400.0
507
1000-10000
30.0-310.0
40-460.0
60.0-510.0
70-600.0
508
2500-25000
100.0-800.0
110-1100
140.0-1240.0
166.0-1400.0
509
10000-50000 400-1500.0
500-2100.0
600.0-2500.0
700.0-2900.0
601
15-150
0.6-5.5
1.0-7.5
0.8-11
1-10.5
602
30-300
1.0-10.0
1.5-14.0
2.0-18
2.0-20
603
60-600
2.0-21.0
3.0-30.0
4.0-36.0
4.0-40.0
604
100-1000
3.0-34.0
5-50
5.0-60.0
5.0-70.0
605
150-1500
5.0-50.0
5.0-70.0
7-85.0
8.0-100.0
606
250-2500
7.0-80.0
10-110.0
10.0-140.0
15-160.0
606a
200-2000
8.0-70.0
10-100
10.0-120.0
12.0-135.0
606b
300-3000
10-100.0
15-140.0
20.0-160.0
20.0-190.0
607
400-4000
14.0-125.0
20.0-170.0
15.0-220.0
20.0-250.0
608
600-6000
20.0-200.0
30-280
30.0-380.0
40.0-400.0
609
1000-10000
30.0-320.0
40.0-440.0
50-540.0
60.0-620.0
610
1500-15000
50.0-500.0
80-700.0
80.0-800.0
102-880.0
611
2500-25000
80.0-800.0
100-1200
140.0-1240.0
166.0-1400.0
612
10000-50000 300-1600.0
400-2200.0
600.0-2500.0
700.0-2900.0
max. 10 A / 10 VA
Measuring transmitter
The optionally available measuring transmitter for the flowmeter
SM-15 is clipped to the dove-tail rail mounted on the measuring tube.
Thanks to the 2-wire technology voltage supply and output signal do not run separated from each other. The exact magnet
field sensors of the receiver capture the height of the magnetic
float and covert its position continually into a 4...20-mA output
signal. The measuring transmitter achieves an accuracy of
0.5% for the entire range where the output signal is additionally
flattened over a Low-Pass filter. In this way, slight fluctuations
of the float are compensated. After the assembly, by means
of an integrated zero key interfering magnetic fields can be
balanced.
PIN layout
4..20 mA
A
Pin 1: 8..28 VDC
+
8..28 VDC
Pin 3: external 0-key connection

(not required)
Pin 2: GND
2008
Other type of scales on request
www.profimess.de
S 45
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Measuring tube No. 14

Measur- Pressure
ing
drop
tube
mbar
(L in)
mm
Operat- Male Connecting joints

ing
thread
range (R)
PVCFemale thread (G)
adhesive
sleeve
P
P
P
stanV
P
V
dard
C
D
(mm)
F
Connection
No.
M
S
V
A
Startpage
Material-No.
0
1
101
(165)
3.3-4.8
3/4
d : 16
3/8
102
DN: 10
103
L1:171
Contents
6
01
104
2
201
(170)
2.5-4.3
d : 20
202
DN: 15
203
L1:176
1/2
02
3/4
03
04
05
1 1/2
06
07
2 1/2
08
09
1 1/4
10
1 1/2
10b
11
2 1/2
12
204
3
301
(185)
6.1-8.3
1 1/4 d : 25
302
DN: 20
303
L1:191
304
4
401
(200)
6.1-8.3
Measuring tube No. 56
1 1/2 d : 32
402
DN: 25
403
L1:206
404
5
502
1 1/2 d : 32
12.3-15.9 503
DN: 25
(335)
L1:341
504
2 1/4 d : 50
12.3-15.9 505
DN: 40
L1:341
506
2 3/4 d : 63
22.2-27.1 507
DN: 50
L1:341
508
33.7-40
3 1/2 d : 75
509
DN: 65
L1:341
601
(350)
1 1/2 d : 32
602
DN: 25
12.3-15.9 603
L1:356
604
605
12.3-15.9 606
d : 40
DN: 32
L1:356
606a
12.3-15.9 606b
2 1/4 d : 50
DN: 40
L1:356
607
22.2-27.1 608
609
610
2 3/4 d : 63
DN: 50
L1:356
3 1/2 d : 75
33.7-40.0 611
DN: 65
612
L1:356
Other dimensions L and L1 for PVDF measuring tube
The connection code comprises Material and Connection No.

Example: PCV female thread G1 for measuring tube 5:
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 46
2008
Material No. 2, Connection No. 05 Connection code 205
SM-20
Variable Area Flowmeter for
Small Flow Volumes in Compact
Design
Contents
Startpage
Description:
The SM-20 series of flowmeters operates according to the
proven variable area principle. The conical float is introduced
into a cylindrical measuring tube. The flowing medium moves
the float in the direction of flow. The movement of the float is
magnetically transferred to a display unit situated outside the
measuring tube. The display unit is provided with a scale that
is designed to match the operational conditions. Additionally,
it can also be equipped with contacts or an analogue output.
Operating pressures up to 160 bar,

operating temperatures up to 200C
Scales for all operational conditions
individually designed
Local display, MIN. MAX. contacts or
analogue output
The SM-20 series of variable area flowmeters is intended for
measuring and monitoring low-viscosity fluid or gaseous
media, for example, in cooling systems for welding machines,
laser and pipe installations, pump monitoring, compressors
and so on. Due to the fact that for all wetted parts high quality
stainless steel 1.4571 has been used, the device is excellently
suited for even hostile media.
Measuring tube fully

2008
Optionally available with valve
www.profimess.de
S 47
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions
Operating ranges and Process connections
flowmeter with local indicator
Operating range
No.
Water, 20C
Pressure drop
(l/h)
Air, 20C,
1.013 bar abs.
(Nl/h)
indicator, 1 MAX contact
0,1...1
3.75...37.5
indicator, 1 MIN-, 1 MAX contact
0,16...1,6
5.5...55
indicator, analogue output 4...20 mA
0,25...2,5
9.25...92,5
0,4...4
14...140
0,6...6
18,5...185
Version without needle valve

(connection on top / at bottom):
all joints as per Ordering codes,
PN 100 (standard) or PN 160, all flange connections
1...10
30...300
1,6...16
45...450
2,5...25
75...750
4...40
130...1300
11
Version with needle valve (rear connection):

all joints as per Ordering codes,
PN 40 (standard) or PN 100, flange connections not possible
10
6...60
185...1850
11
11
10...100
300...3000
11
12
16...160
450...4500
13
13
25...250
750...7500
13
indicator, 1 MIN contact
Process connections
(mbar)
Contents
Startpage
Attention: For versions without valve operating ranges 12 and 13 with

connection joints 3/8" (Code 42...)
Dimensions
Ordering codes
Ordering number:
SM-20.
41G4.
6.
0.
1.
approx.185
Process connection:
41G4 =G 1/4 female, PN40
41T4 = 1/4"NPT-female, PN40
41T6 = 1/4NPT-female, PN100
41T7 = 1/4NPT-female, PN160
53C4 = cutting ring joint 6 mm, PN40
53P1 = hose spout 6 mm, PN10
54P1 = hose spout 8 mm, PN10
01D4 = flanges DN15 PN40
02D4 = flanges DN25 PN40
01A1 = flanges ANSI 1/2", 150 lbs RF
02A1 = flanges ANSI 1", 150 lbs RF
01A2 = flanges ANSI 1/2", 300 lbs RF
02A2 = flanges ANSI 1", 300 lbs RF
cutting ring joint
cutting ring joint

approx.62
Operating range:
1 ...13 = as per Table
99
= special operating range
at
at
at
at
PN 100 (standard), PN 10. 40. 160

as per Ordering codes
max. temperature:
Local display:
With contacts:
With analogue output:
-80C ...+ 200C (+150C with valve)

-40C ...+150C
-40C ...+150C
Protection class:
IP 65
Accuracy:
+/- 4% of operating range value
Type:
inductive (NAMUR gem. EN 50227)
Nominal voltage:
8 VDC
Recommended for operating the contacts:

isolated switching amplifier SE01 (see Data sheet SM-25)
Analogue output
1 MIN contact
1 MAX contact
1 MIN, 1 MAX contact
analogue output 4...20 mA
Supply:
Output:
Load resistance:
El. connection:
Pulse output:
Ex-Version:
Options:
0 = none
PROFI
MESS
max. pressure:
Contacts
inlet, valve seat silver

inlet, valve seat PCTFE
outlet, valve seat silver
outlet, valve seat PCTFE
Display unit:
1 = local indicator
2 = local indicator,
wetted parts made of stainless steel

1.4571 housing made of 1.4301
13.5...30 VDC
4...20 mA
(U-13.5V) / 20 mA
Fast connection QUIKON
optionally available
optionally available
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 48
2008
Valve:
0 = none
1 = valve
2 = valve
3 = valve
4 = valve
Materials:
SM-25
Flange Connection, Irrespective
of Viscosity
Contents
Startpage
Description:
proven variable area principle. The float is introduced into a
conical measuring tube where the medium's viscosity has
nearly no effect on the float's movement. The flowing medium
moves the float in the direction of flow. The movement of the
float is magnetically transferred to a display unit situated outside the measuring tube. The display unit is provided with a
scale that is designed to match the operational conditions.
Additionally, it can also be equipped with contacts or an analogue output.
Operating pressures PN40 and PN100

as standard, higher pressures up to
320 bar on request
Operating temperatures up to 400C
Scales for all operational conditions,
individually designed
Local display, MIN. MAX. contacts or
analogue output
The SM-25 series of variable area flowmeters is intended for
measuring and monitoring fluid or gaseous media of any type.
Due to the fact that for all wetted parts high quality stainless
steel 1.4404 has been used, the device is excellently suited
for hostile media as well as for use in the food-processing
industry (by using Tri-Clamp or milk tube joints).
Measuring tube fully stainless steel

1.4404
2008
Optionally with PTFE lining
www.profimess.de
S 49
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Procedure for device layout:
1. Versions:
1.
Decide the version of device.
2.
Select the desired process connections

from the Table "Process connections".
Depending on the medium the SM-25 series of flowmeters is

available in fully stainless steel 1.4571 (SM-25.1) or with PTFE
lining versions for all wetted parts (SM-25.2).
3.
Select the operating range as per the Tables

"Operating ranges".
4.
Select the display component and the desired

output signals.
5.
Determine the required options.
Contents
Other materials such as Monel, Hastelloy, tantalum are available on request (SM-25.9).
Startpage
2. Process connections:
Measure- Connect- Mountingtube
ion
length
Code
No.
No.
L (mm)
15
(1/2 )
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
101
102
103
104
105
206
207
208
209
210
250
250
250
295
295
250
250
250
295
295
flange DN20 PN40

flange ANSI 3/4 150 lbs.*
flange ANSI 3/4 300 lbs.*
G 3/4-female*
3/4 NPT-female*
flange DN20 PN40
flange ANSI 3/4, 150 lbs.*
flange ANSI 3/4, 300 lbs.*
G 3/4-female*
3/4 NPT-female*
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
111
112
113
114
115
216
217
218
219
220
250
250
250
295
295
250
250
250
295
295
flange DN25 PN40

flange ANSI 1 150 lbs.*
thread socket DN25 PN40 (male)
as per DIN 11851*
Tri-Clamp DN25 / 1*
flange DN25 PN40
as per DIN 11851*
Tri-Clamp DN25 / 1*
flange DN25 PN40
flange ANSI 1, 150 lbs.*
G 1-female*
1 NPT-female*
1
1
1
121
122
123
250
250
250
1
1
2
2
2
126
127
228
229
230
275
250
250
250
250
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
233
234
335
336
337
338
339
275
250
250
250
250
310
310
20
(3/4 )
25
(1 )
flange DN15 PN40

flange ANSI 1/2 150
flange ANSI 1/2 300
G 1/2-female*
1/2 NPT-female*
flange DN15 PN40
flange ANSI 1/2 150
flange ANSI 1/2 300
G 1/2-female*
1/2 NPT-female*
lbs.*
lbs.*
lbs.*
lbs.*
Nominal- Process connection

diameter
measuretube
(DN)
No.
No.
L (mm)
32
(1 1/4 )
flange DN32 PN40*

Tri-Clamp DN32*
flange DN32 PN40
flange ANSI 1 1/4 150 lbs.*
Tri-Clamp DN32*
flange DN32 PN40
flange ANSI 1 1/4, 150 lbs.*
G 1 1/4-female*
1 1/4 NPT-female*
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
140
141
242
243
244
245
346
347
348
349
350
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
310
310
40
(1 1/2 )
Tri-Clamp DN40 / 1 1/2 *

Tri-Clamp DN40 / 1 1/2 *
flange DN40 PN40
1
2
3
3
3
151
252
353
354
355
250
250
250
250
250
50
(2 )
flange DN50 PN40*

Thread socket DN50 PN25 (male)
as per DIN 11851*
Tri-Clamp DN50 / 2 *
flange DN50 PN40
G 2-female*
2 NPT-female*
3
3
3
356
357
358
250
250
250
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
359
360
461
462
463
464
465
275
250
250
250
250
325
325
65
(2 1/2 )

as per DIN 11851*
G 2-female*
2 NPT-female*
4
4
4
466
467
468
275
325
325
80

as per DIN 11851*
Tri-Clamp DN80 / 3 *
flange DN80 PN40
flange ANSI 3, 150 lbs.
flange ANSI 3, 300 lbs.
4
4
5
5
5
469
470
571
572
573
275
300
250
250
260

as per DIN 11851
Tri-Clamp DN100 / 4
flange DN100 PN16*
flange DN100 PN40*
5
5
6
6
6
574
575
676
677
678
300
250
250
250
250
*) not with the option "Heating"

100
(4 )
Materials for thread connections R and NPT:

sealing material Perbunan,
inlay part stainless steel and swivel nut steel
PROFI
MESS
Measure- Connect- Mountingtube

ion
length
Code
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 50
2008
Nominal Process connection

diameter
measuretube
(DN)
3. Operating ranges:
Reference conditions:
Water at 20C
Air at 20C, 1 bar absolute.
Contents
Startpage a) SM-25.1 - Stainless steel version

Measuring
Operating
tube
range
code
No.
1
Water / Fluids
Operating
range
(m3/ h)
Measuring
cone
No.
Air/Gases
Float
No.
Pressure
drop
(mbar)
max.
viscosity
(mPas)
Operating
range
(m3/ h)
Measuring
cone
No.
Float
No.
Pressure
drop
(mbar)
101
0.0025-0.025
43
S0
40
2.9
0.075-0.75
43
S0
45
102
0.004-0.04
44
S0
40
4.5
0.12-1.2
44
S0
45
103
0.0063-0.063
47
S0
40
6.4
0.18-1.8
47
S0
45
104
0.01-0.1
51
S0
40
9.2
0.3-3
51
S0
45
105
0.01-0.1
53
L1
5.1
206
0.01-0.13
53
L1
12
5.1
0.55-5.5
53
M1
21
207
0.016-0.16
53
M1
15
8.2
0.4-4
53
L1
13
208
0.022-0.22
54
L1
12
7.1
0.65-6.5
54
L1
13
209
0.025-0.25
53
S1
40
13
0.8-8
54
M1
20
210
0.032-0.32
57
L1
12
8.8
1-10
57
L1
11
211
0.04-0.4
54
S1
40
18
1.4-14
57
M1
20
212
0.05-0.5
61
L1
12
10
1.6-16
61
L1
11
213
0.063-0.63
57
S1
40
23
2.2-22
61
M1
20
214
0.063-0.63
61
M1
15
17
2.5-25
62
L1
11
214a
0.08-0.8
62
L1
12
50
20
215
0.1-1
61
S1
40
27
3-30
62
M1
216
0.1-1
62
M1
15
19
4.5-45
62
S1
45
217
0.16-1.6
62
S1
40
31
218
0.23-2.3
62
V1
45
319
0.13-1.3
63
L2
17
17
4-40
63
L2
19
320
0.21-2.1
64
L2
17
20
5-50
63
M2
23
19
321
0.25-2.5
63
S2
42
44
6-60
64
L2
322
0.25-2.5
64
M2
17
16
7.5-75
64
M2
23
323
0.4-4
64
S2
42
50
10-110
64
S2
47
324
0.6-6
64
V2
43
425
0.32-3.2
67
L5
13
29
10-100
67
L5
16
426
0.5-5
71
L5
13
33
13-130
67
M5
25
427
0.63-6.3
67
S5
47
72
16-160
71
L5
16
428
0.85-8.5
72
L5
13
37
18-180
71
M5
25
429
1-10
71
S5
47
82
18-180
67
S5
54
430
1-10
72
M5
19
58
431
1.6-16
72
S5
47
92
30-300
72
M5
25
432
2.5-25
72
V5
63
45-450
72
S5
54
533
2.5-25
73
V8
60
50-500
73
L8
30
534
4-40
74
V8
60
70-700
73
V8
65
535
6.3-63
77
V8
60
75-750
74
L8
30
536
100-1100
74
V8
65
537
160-1600
77
V8
65
638
10-100
81
11
70
639
13-130
82
11
70
2008
Bold type operating ranges are preferred.
www.profimess.de
S 51
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
b) SM-25.2 Wetted parts with PTFE lining

Measuring
Operating
tube
range
code
Operating
range
(m3/ h)
No.
Water / Fluids
Air/Gases
Measuring
cone
No.
Float
No.
Pressure
drop
(mbar)
Operating
range
(m3/ h)
Measuring
cone
No.
Float
No.
Pressure
drop
(mbar)
250
0.01 - 0.1
51
A1
16
0.35 - 3.5
51
A1
20
251
0.016 - 0.16
52
A1
16
0.5 - 5
52
A1
20
252
0.025 - 0.25
53
A1
16
0.85 - 8.5
53
A1
20
253
0.04 - 0.4
54
A1
16
1.3 - 13
54
A1
20
254
0.063 - 0.63
57
A1
16
2 - 20
57
A1
20
255
0.1 - 1
61
V1
18
3.4 - 34
61
V1
22
356
0.16 - 1.6
62
A2
20
5 - 50
62
A2
25
357
0.25 - 2.5
63
A2
20
8.5 - 85
63
A2
25
358
0.4 - 4
63
V2
22
459
0.4 - 4
64
A5
20
13 - 130
64
A5
25
460
0.63 - 6.3
67
A5
20
20 - 200
67
A5
25
461
1 - 10
71
A5
20
35 - 350
71
A5
25
462
1.6 - 16
71
V5
22
563
1.6 - 16
72
V8
25
50 - 500
72
V8
27
564
2.5 - 25
73
V8
25
85 - 850
73
V8
27
565
4 - 40
74
V8
25
666
6.3 - 63
77
10
30
Contents
Startpage
Technical specifications (Measuring tube):

fluids and gases
Operating ranges:
see Tables 3a and 3b
Ratio of operating range:
10 : 1
Accuracy:
SM-25.1:
SM-25.2:
Class 1,6
Class 2,5
Process connection:
max. pressure:
Materials:
see Table
see Table
SM-25.1:
-180C...370C
SM-25.2:
-80C...130C
(Note max. operating temperatures of display unit
and possible options)
PROFI
MESS
SM-25.1:
all wetted parts are stainless steel

1.4404, (AISI316L)
SM-25.2:

1.4404, (AISI 316 L) with PTFE coating
Mounting position:
vertical
Direction of flow:
from bottom
Mounting length:
see Table Process connections
Straight inlet:
DN 15-65
DN 80-100
none
min. 5D
Protection class:
IP 65
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 52
2008
Measurable media:
Contents
4. Display unit:
Technical specifications (display unit):
Basically, the display unit consists of a polyamide or aluminium

housing with an indicator magnetically coupled to the float. The
scale may be designed for units of flow or in percentage. In the
display unit, measuring transmitter and contact components
can be mounted.
Indicator mechanical:
PA housing (Code 1): -25C ...100C
Al-Housing (Code 2): -25C ...130C
for higher or lower operating temperatures use option
"Insulation distance".
Contact components:
Startpage 4a. Housing designs

Material:
Code No.
Polyamide
Aluminium
Type:
inductive proximity switch SC3.5-NO or

SJ3.5-S1N as per DIN 19234 (NAMUR)
-25C ...100C (outside this
temperature range use the option
Insulation distance)
Nominal voltage:
8 VDC (Ri = 1 kOhm)
Output signal:
1 mA = 0, 3mA = 1
EEx ia IIC T6
Recommended accessories:
isolated switch amplifier
Type SE01 (see under Options)
4b. Contact components

Contact type:
Code No.
none
1 MIN.-contact
1 MAX.-contact
1 MIN.-contact + 1 MAX.-contact
2 MIN.-contact
2 MAX.-contact
Electrical measuring transmitter:

Output signal:
0...20 mA, 4 - 20 mA
Display:
LCD, 8-digit,
(programmable for display of units of flow or
as non-reversible total volume counter)
Auxiliary power:
see Table 4d
max. load:
4-wire:
500 Ohm
4c. Analogue outputs

Type:
Code No.
none
electrical measuring transmitter
electrical measuring transmitter (Ex)
pneumatic output
2/3-wire:
(U-13.5 V) / 20 mA
0C...100C (outside this temperature range
use the option Insulation distance")
PG11 oder 1/2" NPT
4d. Supply voltage and output signal
2008
Type:
Electrical measuring transmitter

in intrinsically safe version:
Code No.
none
00
115 VAC, 0...20 mA, 4-wire
01
Technical specifications as in standard device,

however:
115 VAC, 4...20 mA, 4-wire
02
Output signal:
230 VAC, 0...20 mA, 4-wire
03
230 VAC, 4...20 mA, 4-wire
04
24 VAC,
0...20 mA, 4-wire
05
24 VAC,
4...20 mA, 4-wire
06
24 VDC,
0...20 mA, 3-wire
07
24 VDC,
4...20 mA, 2-wire
08
24 VDC,
4...20 mA, 3-wire
09
24 VDC,
0...20 mA, 4-wire
10
24 VDC,
4...20 mA, 4-wire
11
pneumatic 0.2...1.0 bar
12
pneumatic 3...15 psi
13
4...20 mA
- 25C...70C
(outside this temperature range use
the option "Insulation distance")
Ex protection:
EEx ia IIC T6 as per Ex- test certificate
Recommended accessories:
feeding device Type SE11
(see under Options)
Pneumatic measuring transmitter:
on request
www.profimess.de
S 53
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
5. Options
Ordering codes
5a. Insulation distance (SM-25.A):

For media temperatures outside the values specified under
Technical specifications, an insulation distance of 60 mm is created between the measuring tube and display unit. With this the
temperature resistance can be increased up to values as specified for the measuring tube.
5b. Attenuation (SM-25.D):
It is recommended to provide attenuation of the float for gas
applications under the following conditions:
1.
121. 1. 321. 1. 0. 104.
Variable Area
Flowmeter
Contents
Version:
1
= stainless steel version
= wetted parts
PTFE coated
Startpage
Process connection:
101 ...678 = process connection as per Table 2
Float type
Operating pressure
SM-25.D.1:
L 1 bar
SM-25.D.2:
M 5 bar
SM-25.D.3:
S 10 bar
(for SM-25.1 only (stainless steel)
999
= special type connection

(please specify in detailed text)
Medium:
5c. Heating:
Heating elements (steam cover) are meant for maintaining a certain media temperature in the measuring tube. Heating elements
with 3 different process connections are available:
= water / fluids
= air / gases
Operating range:
101...666 = operating range as per Table 3
999
= special operating range

(please specify in detailed text)
SM-25.H.1:
DIN-flange DN15 PN40
SM-25.H.2:
DIN-flange DN25 PN40
SM-25.H.3:
thread connection R 1/4
(see also Table 1, "Process connections")
Housing design:
1...2
= housing material as per Table 4a
Contact components:
5d. Oil and grease-free (SM-25.F):

For applications with oxygen the devices free of oil and grease
can be supplied.
0...5
= contacts as per Table 4b
Analogue output and Supply voltage:

1. No.:
5e. Tests and certifications

on request
0...3
= analogue output as per Table 4c
2.-3. No.:
00...13
5f. Measuring point labels, customer-specific

scale labeling:
Please specify exact text for labels.
= supply voltage as per Table 4d
Options please specify in detailed text
5g. Isolated switching amplifier (Type SE-01):

Version:
as per DIN 19234 (NAMUR)
Supply voltage output:
SE-21.1: 230 VAC/DC, 1 channel, 1 change-over contact
SE-21.2: 230 VAC/DC, 2 channel, 2 change-over contact
SE-21.3: 24 VDC, 1 channel, 1 change-over contact
SE-21.4: 24 VDC, 2 channel, 2 change-over contact
Switching load:
max. 250 VAC, max. 2 A
Control power circuit
intrinsically safe [EEx ia] IIC
Ordering details:
To ensure smooth transaction of an enquiry or order, the
following details are required:
5h. Transmitter power supply for intrinsically safe operation

(Type SE-11):
Output:
0/4 ... 20 mA, with galvanic
separation of inlet and outlet
Supply voltage:
SE-11.1: 230 VAC
SE-11.2: 24 VAC/DC
max. load:
750 Ohm
Control power circuit:
intrinsically safe [EEx ia] IIC
1. 1. Model number as per Ordering codes

2. a. Name of the medium
b. Temperature
c. Pressure
d. Viscosity
e. Density
3. For gases: point of reference
4. Options:
a. Model number as per list of options
b. Customer-specific instructions
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 54
2008
PROFI
MESS
Ordering number:SM-25.
Dimensions:
Contents
Startpage
Fig 1:
Front view
Fig 2:
Measuring tube in
stainless steel version
Fig 3:
Measuring tube with PTFE

lining
Fig 4:
Option SM-25H.1 (heating)

and SM-25.A
(insulation distance)
Fig 5:
Measuring tube
with thread connection
(R or NPT)
Fig 6:
Measuring tube
with thread socket
as per DIN 11851
Measuring tube H1
No.
(mm)
H2
(mm)
Weight
(kg)
122
122
123
127
131
136
6.5
147
152
11
161
168
16
170
176
20
Dimension "L": see Table 2, "Process connections"
2008
Fig 7:
Measuring tube with

Tri-Clamp connection
www.profimess.de
S 55
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
auxiliary power supply
U = 24 V DC
SM-25
Contents
output 4-20 mA
Electrical measuring transmitter,

2-wire
limit contacts
power 230 V AC
Startpage
limit value max.
limit value min.
2 limit contacts with isolated

switching amplifier
isolated switching amplifier

U = 24 V DC
SM-25
output 0/4-20 mA

3-wire
limit contacts
power 230 V AC
limit value max.

limit value min.

switching amplifier
SM-25
output 0/4-20 mA
limit contacts

4-wire
power 230 V AC

230/115/24 V AC
24 DC
limit value max.

limit value min.

switching amplifier
Ex area
SM-25
EEx-Application:
safe area
Ex-measuring transmitter
U0 = 30 V
P = 1,4 W
Ci = 4,16 nF
Li = 0,15 mH
Feeding device
U0 = 21 V
IK = 75 mA
P = 660 W
[EEx ia / ib] IIC
Ci = 178 nF
Li = 6,7 mH
sensor power supply
output 0/4-20 mA
limit contacts
Isoltated switching amplifier

U0 = 10,6 V
IK = 19 mA
P = 51 mW
[EEx ia / ib] IIC
Ci = 2320 nF
Li = 97 mH
Electrical measuring transmitter

(EEx), 2-wire
power 230 V AC
limit value max.

limit value min.

switching amplifier
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 56
2008
DT-01
Calorimetric
Flow Sensor
Contents
Startpage
Description:
The calorimetric principle of measurement while monitoring
flow is based on the premise that transmission of heat from a
wall surface to a fluid improves as the velocity of flow increases and thus more energy passes to the flowing medium. In
the tip of a sensor made of stainless steel, an unheated
PT100 resistance records the medium's temperature while a
second one is heated electrically and exposed to the flow.
The difference in temperature of both these resistances is
proportional to the speed of flow and, therefore, to the volume of flow. On reaching a value of approx. 150 cm/s so
much of heat is released to the fluid that both the resistances
indicate the same temperature which determines the upper
limit of the operating range.
The DT-01 is a compact flow sensor and, as a standard, it
consists of a stainless steel sensor and plastic housing with
a 9-digit trend, 2-coloured status indicator and a setpoint
adjustable through a potentiometer with PNP or NPN output.
Optionally, the device can be supplied with an additional
temperature setpoint.
Short reaction time

High temperature gradient
Negligible pressure drop
Range of application::
The DT-01 series of devices is intended for cost-effectively
monitoring flow of water-like media. Due to their low resistance to flow and their insensitivity to soiling by sold particles, they provide an excellent alternative to the vane
method. Thanks to their design the sensors are suited for
use in any type of tube diameters. However, it must be ensured that a certain minimum speed of flow is present at the tip
of the sensor. Calorimetric flow sensors are widely used in
steel and metal-processing industries including the chemical
and beverage industries. Some of the typical applications
are, for example, monitoring coolants in automated welding
machines, plasma pumps or cooling aggregates, as protection against dry runs in pumps and monitoring water flow in
sprinkler systems.
Nominal diameter independent

High-quality materials
2008
No moving parts
www.profimess.de
S 57
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
DT-01 Calorimetric Flow Sensor
Supply voltage: 24 VDC +/-20%

Power
consumption:
Configuration:
The device can be provided with an additional adjustable
temperature switch that will monitor besides the flow also the
temperature of the media.
El. connection: plug M12x1, 4-pole

Protection
class:
The DT-01 is equipped with an M12 x 1, 4-pole plug system.
Process connection:
Available thread variants are G1/2" and G1/4" male thread as
a standard.
Sensor:
The tip of the device is available in two different lengths. The
short version projects 16 mm, the long version 27 mm into
the tube.
IP60 with plastic housing

IP67 with metal housing
Startpage
Types of
el. protection:
polarity-reversal-proof, short-circuit-proof
Display:
9-digit LED
Potentiometer: single-lead
Output:
PNP, NPN, 200 mA max.
Output:
Selectively, the device can be supplied with PNP or NPN
transistor output(s).
max. pressure: 100 bar, optional 200 bar,

intermittent overloading up to 150%
max.
15C to 70C
media temp.:
Housing:
The housing for electronic components can be plastic housing of protection class IP 60 or metal housing of protection
class IP67.
The metal variant has a transparent natural glass disc or an
all-metal cover made of stainless steel.
Temperature
gradient:
4C/s max.
Housing:
PA66, brass Ni plated
Sensor:
Process
connection:
G1/4-male, G1/2-male
Operating
range:
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
Contents
70 mA no load
1 cm/s to 150 cm/s,

optimally at 20 cm/s to 50 cm/s
Response time: 1 s to 13 s, optimally at 2 s

DT-01. 1. 1. 2. 1. 1. 1
DT-01 Calorimetric Flow Sensor

Configuration:
1 = standard
2 = with additional temperature setpoint
short peak
1 = plug connection M12 x 1, 4-pole
Process connection:
1 = G1/4" male thread
long peak
Output:
1 = PNP
2 = NPN
NPN
PNP
1
Housing:
1 = plastic housing IP60
2 = Metal housing IP67 with transparent disc
2 = Metal housing IP67 with all-metal cover
PROFI
MESS
brown
Braun
++
white
Wei
blue
Blau
1
2
Temp.
temp.
zz
zz
black
Schwarz
00V
V
brown
Braun
++
zz
white
Wei
temp.
Temp.
blue
3
Blau
00V
V
flow
Flow
4
black
Schwarz
flow
Flow
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 58
2008
Sensor:
1 = short sensor
2 = long sensor (not G1/4")
DT-02
as Separate Unit
Contents
Startpage
On reaching a value of approx. 150 cm/s so much of heat is

released to the fluid that both the resistances indicate the
same temperature which determines the upper limit of the
operating range. The DT-02 is a calorimetric flow sensor as a
separate unit and consists of a stainless steel sensor that is
connected to an evaluator by means of a cable. This is designed as a rail-mounted housing. It evaluates the sensor and
transmits the results to a PNP/NPN output and to another
relay output (in 230 V AC version only). Optionally, the device
can be supplied also with an additional temperature setpoint.
Requires less space

Vibration-proof
Stainless steel sensors
Range of application::
Wherever the compact DT-01 cannot be used due to lack of
space, vibrations or hostile environment, the DT-02 offers an
ideal solution thanks to the physical separation of sensor and
electronics. Calorimetric flow sensors are intended for costeffectively monitoring flow of water-like media. Due to their
low resistance to flow and their insensitivity to soiling by sold
particles, they provide an excellent alternative to the vane
method. Thanks to their design the sensors are suited for use
in any type of tube diameter. However, it must be ensured
that a certain minimum speed of flow is present at the tip of
the sensor. Calorimetric flow sensors are widely used in steel
and metal-processing industries including the chemical and
beverage industries. Some of the typical applications are, for
example, monitoring coolants in automated welding machines, plasma pumps or cooling aggregates, as protection
against dry runs in pumps and monitoring water flow in
sprinkler systems.
Additional relay output

230 V AC or 24 V DC versions
2008
Description:
The calorimetric principle of measurement while monitoring
flow is based on the premise that transmission of heat from a
wall surface to a fluid improves as the velocity of flow increases and thus more energy passes to the flowing medium. In
the tip of a sensor made of stainless steel, an unheated
PT100 resistance records the medium's temperature while a
second one is heated electrically and exposed to the flow.
The difference in temperature of both these resistances is
proportional to the speed of flow and, therefore, to the volume of flow.
www.profimess.de
S 59
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
DT-02 Calorimetric Flow Sensor as Separate Unit
Supply voltage: 24 VDC +/- 20% or 230 VAC

Power
consumption: 70 mA for 24 V DC (no load),
7 VA for 230 V AC
El. connection: supply and outputs over screw terminal
bar, sensor over plug M12x1, 4-pole
Protection
class:
Sensor:
IP 67
Evaluator device: IP 30
Display:
9-digit LED
Potentiometer: single lead
Output:
PNP, NPN, 200 mA max.,
additionally change-over-contact 5 A for
230 V AC (for 230 V version only)
Types of
el. protection: short-circuit-proof, polarity-reversal-proof
Configuration: The device can be provided with an additional adjustable temperature switch so as to facilitate besides
the flow monitoring of media temperature.
Electrical connection for the sensor: The DT-02 sensors
are equipped with an M12 x 1, 4-pole plug system.
Process connection for the sensor: The available thread
variants are G1/2" and G1/4" male thread as a standard. Also
a sensor with Tri-Clamp connectivity can be supplied.
Sensor: The tip of the device is available in two different
lengths. The short version projects 16 mm, the long version
27 mm into the tube. The Tri-Clamp sensor has a standard
length of 56 mm.
Output: Selectively, the device can be supplied with PNP or
NPN transistor output(s). The 230 V AC version has additional
relay outputs, change-over-contact 5 A for 230 V.
Startpage
Supply: The evaluator unit of the DT-02 is available as 24 V

DC or as 230 V AC device. The 24 V DC version has a
PNP/NPN transistor output for the flow setpoint and an
optionally available PNP/NPN transistor output for monitoring
temperature. The 230 V AC version has additionally a relay
output for flow and an optionally available relay output for
temperature.
max. pressure: 100 bar, 60 bar for Tri-Clamp, intermittent

overloading up to 150%
max.
15C to 70C
media temp.:
max. ambient
0C to 60C
temp.:
Temperature
4C/s max.
gradient.:
Housing:
Polycarbonate, ABS, Macrolon
Fixture for
floor assembly or snap-fitting on rails
housing:
(DIN EN 50 022)
Sensor:
Process
G1/4-male, G1/2-male, Tri-Clamp
connection:
Operating
1 cm/s to 150 cm/s,
range:
optimally at 20 cm/s to 50 cm/s
Response time: 1 s to 13 s, optimally at 2 s
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
Contents
DT-02. 1. 1. 2. 1. 1. 1.
DT-02 Calorimetric Flow Sensor as

Separate Unit
Configuration:
1 = standard
2 = with additional temperature setpoint
Electrical connection for the sensor:
1 = plug connection M12 x 1, 4-pole.
Process connection for the sensor:
3 = Tri-Clamp
Sensor dimensions for

assembly
Sensor:
1 = short sensor
2 = long sensor (not G1/4")
3 = Tri-Clamp
Transistor output:
1 = PNP
2 = NPN
PROFI
MESS
10
11
12 13
14
15 16
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 60
2008
Supply voltage:
1 = 230 V AC (with additional relay outputs)
2 = 24 V DC (with PNP/NPN outputs only)
DT-03
in Compact Design with
Optional Analogue Output
Contents
Startpage
Description: The sensor system of the DT-03 series flow

sensor is based on the calorimetric principle. A heated measuring resistance is mounted into a stainless steel sleeve in
such a manner that the fluid carries the heat proportional to
the inflow velocity. The heat output that must be fed to the
sensor in order to maintain the resistance temperature constant is, therefore, a measure for the volume of flow. A
second PT100 measuring resistance is located inside the
sleeve within the flow to measure the temperature of the
media. This will rule out temperature changes in the streaming fluid being interpreted erroneously as change of flow.
The electronic components in the DT-03 receive information
from the sensor about the flow and the temperature and convert them into a PNP or NPN switching output, a 0...10 V DC
or 4...20 mA analogue output or an impulse output. At the 4pole output plug of the DT-03 an analogue output and a switching output (on request as impulse output) are tapped that
can be freely assigned ex factory to the parameters of volume and temperature.
No moving parts
Optionally with temperature output
Switch or transmitter
Possible to mount in T pieces of
3/8" to 2"
Wetted stainless steel
2008
Range of application: The flow sensors of the DT-03 series

are the logical consequence of Profimess' proven DT-01 and
DT-02. Due to the new method of outputting flow and temperature also as analogue or impulse output and combining
both the parameters, the application spectrum of the calorimetric technology has experienced a vast expansion in the
technology of fluid measurement. The DT-03 sensors are
used wherever flow and temperature of fluid media need to
be tapped in narrow spaces and wherever it would be advantageous, due to the type of fluid, to use entirely stainless
steel switches for the wetted parts without any moving components.
www.profimess.de
S 61
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Operating range
Velocity:
water 20...50 cm/s (1-150),

oil on request
Accuracy:
+/- 10% set point value (tested on

water with 10xD in inflow and outflow
in rising tube)
Reproducibility:
Operating range
Temperature:
15...70C (others on request)
Storage
temperature:
-20...+80C
Materials:
Contents
wetted stainless steel 1.4571,

others stainless steel 1.4305
+/- 1%
Switching
hysteresis:
Operating pressure: max. 100 bar, option 200 bar

(if necessary, consider pressure
level of T-piece)
Operating
0...70C (electronics)
temperature:
flow 4% set point value, temperature

approx. 2K
Temp. gradient:
Startpage
max.4 K/s
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
Weight:
approx. 200 g (standard version)
Assembly:
staved cross points to inflow
DT-03. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 2. 2. 5
Programming
the setpoints:
Calorimetric Flowmeters and Switch
Connection size:
1 = G1/4"-male
2 = G1/2"-male
3 = swivel nut for T-piece assembly
4 = Tri-Clamp ISO 2852 size 38
Wetted material:
2 = PTFE (Teflon)
Sensor length:
0 = T-piece assembly (please specify nominal diameter
of 3/8" to 2" and material in detailed text)
1 = 28 mm (G1/4")
2 = 29.6 mm (G1/2")
3 = 45 mm (G1/2")
4 = 56 mm (Tri-Clamp)
by means of magnet supplied along,

the magnet is brought between 0.5
and 20 seconds to the marking on
the label. The excrescent measuring
value is stored as limit value, the LED
changes to O.K. status. Longer or
shorter magnetizing times than 0.5 or
20 seconds are ineffective (protection
against external magnetic fields)
Analogue output:
0 = no analogue output
1 = current 4...20 mA
2 = voltage 0...10 V DC
Assignment for analogue output:
1 = flow
2 = temperature
Switching output:
0 = no switching output
1 = PNP
2 = NPN
Assignment for switching output:
1 = flow
2 = temperature
Switching signal:
1 = MIN switch
2 = MAX switch
3 = Frequency output
Options (multiple naming such as 3/5/6 possible):
1 = special operating range for flow (max. 3 m/s, standard 1.5 m/s)
2 = special operating range for temperature (max. 120C, standard 70C,
min. -20C, standard 0C)
3 = Switch on delay from Alarm to O.K.
4 = Switch off delay from O.K. to Alarm
5 = Power-On-Delay
(delay after switching on until the switching output becomes active)
6 = inverted switching output
7 = special hysteresis (standard 4% of full scale value)
Supply voltage:
24 VDC +/- 10%
Power
consumption:
max. 100 mA
Electrical
connection:
round pin connector M12 x 1, 4-pole
Switching output:
transistor output PNP or NPN (shortcircuit and polarity reversal proof)
Switching current:
max. 100 mA
As frequency
output:
max. 2000 Hz
Analogue output:
4...20 mA max. load 500 Ohm

or 0...10 V DC load min. 1 kOhm
Display:
yellow LED (ON = O.K., OFF = Alarm)
Setting:
through magnet
Protection class:
IP 67
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 62
2008
Please specify operating range full scale value, output frequency for impulse output and the setpoint in detailed text.
Dimensions:
G1/2 A
45
38.5
16.5
29.6
Contents
30
13.6
HEX 27
27 AF
Startpage
G1/2 A
82
45
18
G1/4 A
45
28
12
13,2
16
HEX 32
32 AF
70
50.5
12
58
brown
+ 24 V DC 10%
white
analogue output
blue
0V
black
switching-/frecuency output
2008
PNP NPN
Z = load
www.profimess.de
S 63
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
DT-03N
Calorimetric Flowmeter
and Flowswitch for very
small Flow Volumes
Contents
Startpage
Description:
The sensor system of the DT-03N series flow sensor is
based on the calorimetric principle. A heated sensing resistor
is built into a stainless steel sleeve in such a manner that the
fluid carries the heat proportional to the inflow velocity.
The heat output that must be fed to the sensor in order to
maintain the resistance temperature at a constant level is,
therefore, a measure for the volume of flow. A second PT100
measuring resistance is located inside the sleeve within the
flow to measure the temperature of the media. This will rule
out temperature changes in the streaming fluid being interpreted erroneously as change of flow. The electronic components in the DT-03N receive information from the sensor
about the flow and the temperature and convert them into
a Push-Pull transistor switching output that can be linked to
NPN (but not open collector) as well as PNP inputs, including
additionally an analogue output. At the 4-pole output plug of
the DT-03N, a 4...20 mA or 0...10 V DC signal and a switching output (on request as impulse output) are tapped
which can be freely assigned ex factory to the parameters
of volume and temperature.
No moving parts
Optionally with temperature output
Switch or transmitter
Low pressure drops
Wetted stainless steel 1.4571
The DT-03N calorimetric flow sensors are capable of monitoring and measuring fluid media even in extremely small range
of volume. The compact design of the device combines
easy-to-operate analyzing electronics with a measuring tube
that includes wetted inlet and outlet paths, exclusively made
of stainless steel 1.4571. The insulating hoses fitted externally
on the measuring tube offer protection against ambient factors
and these cannot be removed by the user. In order to ensure
maximum error sensitivity of the sensor, the DT-03N should
be mounted for direction of flow from bottom to top as this
will facilitate optimum ventilation even in extremely low flow
speeds. The DT-03N is connected to the process side by
means of commercially available crimp connectors or clamp
screw joints.
2008
Linearised and temperature-compensated
www.profimess.de
S 65
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Operating range
for water:
6 mm tube: (0,001) 0,01 ...2 l/min

8 mm tube: 0,025...5 l/min
10 mm tube: 0.05...10 l/min
special operating ranges on request
Accuracy:
+/-5% FSO (special calibration possible)
Operating range
Temperature:
0...70C (-20C...+ 100C on request)
Hysteresis:
Flow 1% full scale value,

Temperature approx. 1K
Storage temp.:
-20...+80C
Materials:
wetted 1.4571, others PPS, PA66,

brass Ni plated
Operating
pressure:
max. 10 bar (others on request)
Pressure drop:
max. 0.3 bar at max. flow
Operating temp.:
0...70C (electronics)
max. 4 K/s
Weight:
approx. 200 g (standard design)
Programming the setpoints:

Using the supplied magnet, the magnet is kept over the
marking on the name plate for 0.5 to 2 seconds. The given
measured value is saved as the limit value and the LED
changes to O.K. status. Longer or shorter magnetizing
times than 0.5 or 2 seconds remain ineffective (as protection
against external magnetic fields). Immediately after programming the switching output goes into O.K. status (LED on,
output connected through, i.e. PNP = High and NPN = Low)
Contents
Startpage
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
Temp. gradient:
Supply voltage:
24 VDC +/- 10%
Power
consumption:
max. 100 mA
Electrical
connection:
round pin connector M12 x 1.4-pole
Connecting cable: length < 30 m,

supply pipes < 10 m, shielded
DT-03N. 08. 1. 1. 1. 2. 2. 5
Switching output: Transistor output Push Pull

(short-circuit and pole reversal proofed)
Calorimetric Flowmeter
and Flowswitch for small Volumes
Connection size:
06 = 6 mm tube diameter,
Operating range (0.001) 0.01 ...2 l/min
Operating range 0,025...5 l/min
Operating range 0,05...10 l/min
Analogue output:
Assignment for analogue output:
1 = flow
2 = temperature
Switching load:
max. 100 mA
As frequency
output:
max. 2000 Hz
Analogue output:
4...20 mA max. load 500 Ohm

or 0...10 V DC load min. 1 kOhm
Display:
yellow LED (ON = O.K., OFF = Alarm)
Setting:
through magnet
Protection class:
IP 65
1
2
Switching output:
0 = no switching outout
1 = Push-Pull (PNP and NPN)
brown
+24 V DC 10%
white
Analogue output
blue
0V
4 black
Assignment of switching output:

1 = flow
2 = temperature
Switching output / Frequency output

PNP NPN
Z = Last
Dimensions:
Switching signal:
1 = MIN switch
2 = MAX switch
3 = Frequency output (specify end-frequency, max. 2000 Hz in detailed text)
Options (multiple naming such as 3/5/6 possible):
1 = special operating range for flow
2 = special operating range for temperature
(max. 100C, standard 70C, min. -20C, standard 0C)
3 = Switch on delay from Alarm to O.K.
4 = Switch off delay from O.K. to Alarm
5 = Power-On-Delay
(delay after switching on until switching output becomes active)
6 = switching output inverted
7 = switching output fixed setting
8 = other filtering time
(standard = 0.5 s, possible are 0/0,2/0,5/1/2/4/8/16/32 s)
9 = special hysteresis (standard 1% of full scale value)
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 66
2008
Please specify operating range full scale value, output frequency

for impulse output and the setpoint in detailed text.
SM-00
Impeller Flowmeter for
Small Volumes of Fluid
Contents
Startpage
Description: The SM-00 is a universally applicable flowmeter

for small to medium volumes of thin fluid. A rotor mounted on
one side on a bearing pin is made to rotate by a flow obliquely directed through a nozzle where the rotor's blades are
equipped with magnets. A Hall effect sensor mounted externally on the flow housing emits a small voltage impulse every
time when one of the magnets passes by its front side. The
electronics of the SM-00 are capable of receiving these
impulses and translating them into an NPN Open-Collector
rectangular signal that will be made available to the plug output.
Arnite, Ryton or PVDF

Up to 100C
Up to 20 bar
Wide choice of operating range
Range of application: The SM-00 is the ideal device especially for tapping small volumes of flow of chemically hostile
fluids. The available material combinations are Arnite, Ryton
and PVDF which can be deployed in many areas of the chemical industry. With its range of up to 100C and 20 bar, for a
plastic device the limits in regard to pressure and temperature
are very outstretched and the Open-Collector signal in NPN
form can be evaluated by any common control device. The
available connection threads are G1/4" female thread as well
as G1/2" male thread where the user has the option to place
both the inlet and the outlet of flow on a single side of the
SM-00 or, to have, preferably, one connection on the right
side and another on the left side of the flowmeter.
Excellent media resistance
2008
The unique impeller bearing of the SM-00 ensures a long life

for the SM-00. As against many other devices available in the
market, the rotor is not mounted on both sides but it practically "floats" during operation over a one-sided bearing pin.
Thus, the design of the device ensures durability and, consequently, maximum possible rotational speed of the impeller.
www.profimess.de
S 67
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
the bearing pin can be also supplied in stainless steel 1.4571
and the O-Ring in Viton or EPDM.
The PDVF version of the SM-00 is used, especially when the
requirements of strength on the flowmeter are very high. In
the case of the variant with thread connection, the bearing
pin is made of stainless steel 1.4305 on the one side and, in
those with thread connections on both sides it is made of
PCTFE. Optionally, the stainless steel pin in the one-sided
version can also be replaced by a PCTFE pin. In this "chemical" version, the impeller magnets are fully infused and hence
not wetted.
Material version: The basic body of the SM-00 can be

made of materials such as Arnite, Ryton or PVDF where the
Arnite and Ryton versions are intended for standard applications while the PVDF version has been developed for applications in the chemical industry.
Connections: The available thread connections are G1/4"
female thread and G1/2" male thread which allow the user to
decide placing both the flow inlet and outlet on the same side
of the SM-00 or, preferably, one connection on the right side
and another on the left side of the flowmeter. The possible
operating ranges vary with different versions as detailed in the
Tables 1 and 2.
Nozzle size: The nozzle at the inlet of the SM-00 enables an
oblique direction flow within the body of the SM-00 and is largely responsible for the dynamic functioning of the flowmeter
and, therefore, for the length and position of the linear operating range. The relationship between the nozzle size and operating range is detailed in the Tables 1 and 2. The operating
ranges given in these tables indicate the linear range of the
relevant version. The specified pressure drop occurs when
the full scale value of the measuring range is reached.
Material:
SM-00.1
SM-00. 1. 1. 1. 0
housing made of PPS 40%GF (Ryton)

bearing pin made of stainless steel
1.4305 (1.4571 optional)
O-Ring made of silicon (Viton or
EPDM optional)
rotor made of PVDF
magnets made of ceramic Sr Fe O
SM-00.3.1
Housing made of PVDF

Bearing pin made of stainless steel
1.4305 (1.4571 or PCTFE (nozzle
PTFE) optional)
O-Ring made of Viton (EPDM optional)
Rotor made of PVDF
Magnets made of ceramic Sr Fe O
SM-00.3.(2...3)
Housing made of PVDF

Bearing pin made of PCTFE
O-Ring made of Viton (EPDM optional)
Rotor made of PVDF 4-magnet
(not wetted)
Impeller Flowmeter for Small Volumes

Material version:
1 = Arnite with bearing pin in stainless steel 1.4305,
O-Ring in silicon and turbine in PVDF
2 = Ryton with bearing pin in stainless steel 1.4305,
O-Ring in silicon and turbine in PVDF
3 = PVDF with bearing pin in stainless steel 1.4305
(PCTFE for thread on both sides),
O-Ring in Viton and turbine in PVDF
Connections:
1 = 2xG1/4" female on one side
(not nozzle sizes 3, 4, 5,6 and 10 mm)
2 = 2xG1/4"male on both sides (not nozzle sizes 3.3 and 10 mm)
3 = 2xG1/2"male on both sides (nozzle size 10 only)
Nozzle size:
1 = 1.0 mm
2 = 1.2 mm
3 = 1.5 mm
4 = 2.0 mm
5 = 2.5 mm
6 = 3.0 mm (both sides in G1/4" male thread only)
7 = 3.3 mm (both sides in G1/4" female thread only)
10 = 10 mm (in G1/2" male thread only)
housing made of PBT 35%GF (Arnite)

bearing pin made of stainless steel
1.4305 (1.4571 optional)
O-Ring made of silicon
(Viton or EPDM optional)
rotor made of PVDF
SM-00.2
Ordering codes:
Flow volume:
depends on the version and nozzle,

see Tables 1 and 2
Accuracy:
+/- 2% of measured value
Reproducibility:
< +/- 0.25%
Temperature range:
SM-00.1
-10C...+65C
SM-00.2
-10C...+100C
SM-00.3
-10C...+100C
Options:
0 = none
1 = O-Ring in Viton instead of silicon for versions in Arnite and Ryton
2 = O-Ring in EPDM instead of silicon for versions in Arnite and Ryton
3 = O-Ring in EPDM instead of Viton for versions in PVDF
4 = Bearing pin in stainless steel 1.4571 instead of 1.4305 for versions in Arnite
and Ryton
5 = Bearing pin in stainless steel 1.4571 instead of 1.4305 for versions in PVDF
with one-sided thread
6 = Bearing pin in PCTFE instead of stainless steel 1.4305 for versions in PVDF
with one-sided thread
Pressure:
max. 20 bar at 20C
Mounting position:
horizontal recommended
Nozzle sizes:
see Tables 1 and 2
Process connection: G1/4" female on one side or

G1/4"male on both sides (left/right), or
G1/2"male on both sides (for large
operating ranges only)
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 68
2008
PROFI
MESS
Startpage
Options: The bearing pin in the Arnite and Ryton versions of

the SM-00 is made of stainless steel 1.4305 as a standard
and the sealing ring is made of silicon. If the medium in question has special requirements in regard to the material,
Ordering number:
Contents
Supply voltage:
Contents
Startpage
4.5...24 VDC
+4.5 - 24 VDC
Power consumption: 5...13 mA

Output:
rectangular impulse NPN open

collector
Signal load:
20 mA max.
Current leakage:
10 A max.
Electrical
connection:
Open collector
4k7
Signal
3 Pin -AMP 2.8 x 0.8 mm (counterplug available as accessory)
Duty Cycle:
Signal
100 nF
50% +/- 5%
Simple circuit
0 VDC
Table of operating ranges SM-00.1/2

Nozzle size
Version Arnite or Ryton,

connections G 1/4"- female one-sided

connections G 1/4"- male both sided
[mm]
Flow
[l/min]
Impulse rate
[Imp./l]
1.0
1.2
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.3
4.0
5.6
10.0
0.0274...0.5867
0.0315...0.7777
0.0417...1.3434
0.1109...2.3268
0.0673...2.7421
2223
1787
1386
1013
754
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.60
0.1396...5.3606
509
1.00
Pressure drop for

Flow
full scale value [bar] [l/min]

connections G 1/2"- male both sided
Impulse
Pressure drop for
rate [Imp./l] full scale value [bar]
0.0410...0.5670
0.0505...0.8225
0.0427...1.2504
0.0911...2.4055
0.1503...3.7478
0.1022...5.6310
2063
1700
1314
988
760
565
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.1235...8.3893
0.3088...9.2647
381
236
0.80
0.45
Flow
[l/min]
Impulse
rate [Imp./l]
3.00...26.69
65
Pressure drop for

full scale value [bar]
0.32
2008
Table of operating ranges SM-00.3

Noozle Version PVDF with bearing pin in 1.4305.
size
[mm] Flow
Impulse Pressure drop
[l/min]
rate
for full scale
[Imp./l]
value [bar]
Version PVDF with bearing pin in PCTFE.

Flow
[l/min]
rate
for full scale
[Imp./l]
value [bar]
Version PVDF,
connections G 1/4"- male both-sided
Flow
[l/min]
rate
for full scale
[Imp./l]
value [bar]
1.0
1.2
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.3
4.0
5.6
10.0
0.0440...0.5498
0.0532...0.8447
0.0668...0.9314
0.1170...2.2198
0.1147...2.7205
0.1048...2.8494
0.0419...0.5899
0.0343...0.8014
0.0523...1.2731
0.0692...2.3482
0.0664...3.7142
2277
1834
1447
1010
739
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.0551...0.4789
0.0480...0.8273
0.0784...1.1325
0.1087...2.2155
0.0741...2.7640
4962
3752
3020
2078
1443
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
0.66
0.7173...6.0997
555
1.00
0.2571...5.0044
1033
1.00
4366
3485
2827
2049
1544
1109
0.2098...9.2712 793
1.7820...10.7990 511
Version PVDF,
connections G 1/2"- male both-sided
Flow
Impulse
Pressure drop
[l/min]
rate
for full scale
[Imp./l]
value [bar]
1.00
1.00
0.55
1.00
0.64
0.41
1.00
0.49
3...26.69
www.profimess.de
S 69
130
0.32
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Dimensions
SM-00.1.1
Contents
Startpage
SM-00.1.2
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 70
2008
SM-00.1.3
Dimensions
SM-00.2.1
Contents
Startpage
SM-00.2.2
2008
SM-00.2.3
www.profimess.de
S 71
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Dimensions
SM-00.3.1
Contents
Startpage
SM-00.3.2
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 72
2008
SM-00.3.3
SM-04
Impeller Flowmeter, Switch and
Indicator in Modular Design
Contents
Startpage
Robust and compact flow sensor
Description:
The SM-04 series of impeller flowmeters consists of a sensor
and an optionally available measuring transmitter. The sensor
has an impeller that is fitted in a housing made of POM, PVDF,
brass or stainless steel. The impeller is set into rotation by the
streaming medium. Depending on the material version, this rotational movement is tapped by an inductive, optical or Hall sensor-system and output as a frequency signal which is proportional to the flow. For the evaluation of the signal, different types of
measuring transmitters are available which can amplify, convert
or display the impulse signal from the sensor.
Variety of materials
Location-independent
Operating range ratios up to 40:1
No inflow outflow lines required
Due to their modular design, the SM-04 series of impeller flowmeters represents a versatile measuring and monitoring system
for all low-viscosity fluids that do not corrode the materials
being used.
2008
Different measuring transmitters

can be mounted directly or are
available for DIN rail mounting
www.profimess.de
S 73
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
A. Flow sensor
Versions:
Supply voltage:
SM-04.1:
SM-04.2:
SM-04.3 / 4:
SM-04.1:
SM-04.2:
SM-04.3:
SM-04.4:
Questra housing, inductive pickup

PVDF housing, optical pickup
brass housing, Hall sensor
stainless steel housing, Hall Sensor
5 - 30 VDC
24 VDC +10%
10 - 30 VDC
Power consumption max.: 30 mA (SM-04.1: 10 mA)
Housing sizes and process connections:

SM-04.x.1: for small volume flows, connection 3/8"
SM-04.x.2: for medium volume flows, connection 1"
Output current max.:
100 mA (SM-04.1: 200 mA)
Output signal:
Rectangular signal
SM-04.1:
SM-04.2:
SM-04.3 / 4:
The connections can be designed as female or male

threads (G) or as hose spout (for PVDF housing only).
Startpage
4 - 29 V
9 - 23 V
4 - 23 V
Output circuit:
PNP or NPN,
(SM-04.1 also NAMUR)
El. connection:
2 m cable or plug connection
Protection class:
IP 67
Dimensions:
Type
H
(mm)
H1
(mm)
L
(mm)
L1
(mm)
Weight
(kg)
SM-04.1.1
SM-04.1.2
SM-04.2.1
SM-04.2.2
SM-04.3.1
SM-04.3.2
SM-04.4.1
SM-04.4.2
50
70
50
70
50
70
50
70
38
33
38
33
38
33
38
33
50
70
50
70
50
70
50
70
84
110
84
110
84
110
84
110
0.2
0.5
0.2
0.5
0.6
1.8
0.6
1.8
Optional:
NPN,
NAMUR (SM-04. 1/2 only)
Ordering codes (sensors):

Ordering number
Contents
SM-04. 1. 2. 1. 4. 1. 1
Flow Sensor with Impeller
Version:
1 = with Questra housing, inductive pickup
2 = with PVDF housing, optical pickup
(optionally with inductive pickup)
3 = with brass housing, Hall sensor
4 = with stainless steel housing, Hall sensor
max. pressure:
SM-04.1/2:
SM-04.3/4:
max. temperature:
SM-04.1/2:
SM-04.3/4:
Accuracy:
Reproducibility:
Size of housing:
1 = 50 x 50 mm, for 3/8" tube
2 = 70 x 70 mm, for 1" tube
Type of process connection:
1 = female thread G
2 = male thread G
3 = hose spout
9 = special type connection, please specify in detailed text
60C
120C
+ 3% of full scale value
+ 1% of full scale value
Materials:
SM-04.x.2 only:
4 = 2...30 l/min (2.3 l/min linearized)
5 = 3...60 l/min (3...5 l/min linearized)
6 = 4...100 l/min (4...6 l/min linearized)
1 = 2 m cable (standard)
2 = plug connection
Output circuit:
1 = PNP impulses
2 = NPN impulses
3 = NAMUR (except SM-04.2)
4 = mounted frequency receiver with a setpoint
5 = mounted frequency receiver with power output 4-20 mA, 3-wire
6 = Digital mounted display with 2 transistor switching outputs,
graphical display and power output 4 - 20 mA, 3-wire
SM-04.1
SM-04.2
SM-04.3
SM-04.4
Housing
Questra
(opt. PVDF)
PVDF
brass

(opt. 1.4571)
Cover
Questra
(opt. PVDF,
Macrolon)
PVDF
brass
(opt. Macrolon)

(opt. 1.4571,
Macrolon)
Connection
PVDF
PVDF
(opt. brass, stainl. (opt. brass,
steel, flange)
stainless steel)
brass
(opt. flange)

(opt. flange)
Rotor
PVDF with
SS-caps (opt.
Titanium caps)
PVDF
PVDF
PVDF
Axis
ceramic
ceramic
ceramic
ceramic
Bearing
Iglidur
(opt. ceramic)
Iglidur
(opt. ceramic)
Iglidur
(opt. ceramic)
Iglidur
(opt. ceramic)
Magnets
---
---
5xSm2Co17
(opt. 2 or 10
magnets)
5xSm2Co17
(opt. 2 or 10
magnets)
O-Ring
Viton
(opt. EPDM)
Viton
(opt. EPDM)
Viton
(opt. EPDM)
Viton
(opt. EPDM)
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 74
2008
Operating ranges (applicable for water):

SM-04.x.1 only:
1 =0.2...1.5 l/min (0.1...0.5 l/min linearized)
2 = 0.3...10 l/min (0,2...2 l/min linearized)
3 = 0.5...12 l/min (0,4...2 l/min linearized)
PROFI
MESS
16 bar
100 bar
SD-04
Impeller Flowmeter with Dosing
or Switching Electronics
Contents
Startpage
Description: An impeller made of PVDF is set into motion by
a flowing medium. It generates through completely compound-filled magnets an impulse signal in the transmitter electronics proportional to the flow. Depending on the version the
measuring transmitter, this signal is converted into different
functions. In the simplest version, the electronics offer two
threshold value relays that can be used for monitoring the
MIN/MAX flow. The next level has a 4/20 mA signal and a
pulse output, which can be designed as a transistor or
REED-output, and, in addition, two resettable totalizers that
can be used as the main and day counters. Naturally, also
the current flow rate can be displayed and furthermore two
additional relay outputs are available, if switchpoints are
necessary. The full version of SD-04 includes a dosing device
with 2 totalizers, 2 relays and 3 dosing modes. The dosing
volume can be set through a keypad, binary inputs or pulsemodulated through a PLC. The dosing device is capable of
determining the K factor of other flow sensors by means of
"Teach-in" or, in the same way, to enhance (litre-wise) the
accuracy of the inbuilt own sensor. Moreover, for testing the
system a flow can be simulated in a "dry run, thereby meeting the highest requirements of modern dosing technology.
The sensor and electronics are connected to each other
through a simple bayonet lock; therefore, the electronics are
easily interchangeable. Pick-up sensors and transmitter variants can be interchanged in any manner.
Range of application: Thanks to the variety of materials and
connectivity in the flow pick-up sensor in the SD-04, the user
has immense possibilities of application. Polypropylenes,
PVDF and PVC offer a choice of synthetic materials that are
resistant to nearly all hostile media and, materials such as
brass and stainless steel logically supplement the choice
favoring metals. All commonly used thread variants, DIN and
ANSI flanges in stainless steel and Tri-Clamp supports and
welded ends are available as connectors and thus enable
coupling the SD-04 to nearly any process. The nominal diameter ranges from DN15 to DN50 and covers, therefore, a
wide range of flows. Impeller sensors ensure reliable operation in the range of 0.3...10 m/s flow velocity which means
that their accuracy of 0.5 % from one end of the range plus
2.5 % of the measured volume is available for a range of
1:33. In dosing technology, especially the SD-04 has hardly
any match, considering its variety in respect to volume specifications, resistance to different media and, not the least, its
excellent price to performance ratio.
Nominal diameters DN15 to DN 50

Pressure-proof up to 16 bar
DC- or AC power supply
Variety of materials
2008
Flanges and connections for food-processing

applications
www.profimess.de
S 75
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
Sensor housing material: If different connectors are used,

the housing for the flow pick-up sensor can be selected from
a range of materials such as PP, PVDF, PVC, brass or stainless steel. Also female and male threads, gluing and welding
sleeves, flanged and Tri-Clamp connectors are available.
Custom-made designs can be offered on request. In all the
versions the impeller is made of PVDF while the axle and
bearing are ceramic and the O Rings are made of FPM
(Viton).
Operating range:
Flow velocity:
Accuracy:
from 3 l/min
0.3...10 m/s
<= (0.5% full scale value + 2.5%
measured value)
for water 20C and
full scale value = 10 m/s
Repeatability:
0.4% measured value
Media temperature: PVC
0...50C
PP
0...80C
PVDF
0...100C
brass, stainless
steel
0...100C
(high temperature on request)
Media temperature: 0...60C
Nominal diameter: All nominal diameters ranging from

DN15 to DN50 are available. Suitable threaded, welded,
glued or flanged connectors are provided in the table of
dimensions for reference.
Transmitter: Depending on the application, the flow sensor
is equipped, as the case may be, with an electronic switching
system, a flow transmitter with totalizers or a dosing unit. The
different functions are:
Flowswitch: The electronics offer two relay outputs designed as NO-contact which can be used for controlling the
MIN/MAX flow.
Storage temp.:
0...60C
Relative humidity:
Pressure:
Plastic:
80% max.
Metal:
Housing material:
Flow transmitter: The transmitter electronics provide a

power signal of 4...20 mA proportional to the flow and offer
an additional impulse output that is designed by default as
transistor output (selectively NPN or PNP); optionally it can
be supplied as a REED output. In addition, the device has
two resettable totalizers, which can be used as the main
and supplementary counters. In operating status, the dis
play electronics indicate the current value of the flow.
Optionally, two additional relay outputs are available.
Impeller:
Axle and bearing:
O-Rings:
Electronics housing:
Front film:
Nominal diameters:
10 bar to 20C
(see P-T diagram)
16 bar
PP, PVDF, PVC, brass or antimagnetic stainless steel 1.4404/316L
PVDF
ceramic
FPM
PC
polyester
DN15 to DN50
Switching load:
Flow transmitter:
Supply:
Output signal:
Load:
Pulse output:
Impulse length:
Reed-relaypuls output:
Dosing unit:
Supply:
4 digital inputs:
Options: Instead of a transmitter directly mounted on the

sensor the electronic unit can be also designed separately for
switch board or wall mounting. The pick-up has then a topfitted pre-amplifier that transmits the initial signal to the electronic unit.
Digital outputs:
Relay outputs:
Switching load:
El. connection:
12...30 VDC or 230 VAC

2 adjustable NO-contacts,
no potential
3 A active load at 230 V
12...30 VDC or 230 VAC
4...20 mA
max. 900 Ohm at 30 VDC
max. 800 Ohm at 230 VAC
Open-Collector NPN or PNP,
5...30 V DC, 100 mA shielded,
voltage drop 1.5 V DC at 100 mA,
no potential
100 ms
max. 34 V, 0.2 A, switching frequency
max. 5 Hz
12...30 VDC or 230 VAC
5...30 V DC, functions selection of
dosing volume and Start/Stop
actuation
Open-Collector NPN or PNP,
0...30 V DC, 100 mA protected, for
status display and alarm signal
2 NO-contact adjustable, no potential
3 A active load at 230 V
PG13.5 (plug connector on request)
www.profimess.de
S 76
2008
Flowswitch:
Supply:
Relay outputs:
Supply voltage: Selectively, every electronic unit can be supplied with DC or AC power supply system.
GMBH
Startpage
Dosing unit: The dosing unit is provided with two totalizers, two relays and three dosing modes. Relay 1 exclusively controls the opening of the main dosing valve while,
Relay 2 can be programmed to Alarm, Stop dosing or
Control auxiliary valve. The dosing volume can be specified
manually over the keypad, over the binary inputs or over
the width of a connected voltage impulse.In the case of
manual input, the dosing volume can be entered directly or
one of the seven values stored in memory can be selected.
Similarly, selection through binary outputs is also from
these seven values. In the case of pulse width dependent
default value, the dosing volume is proportional to the
duration of a voltage impulse present at the binary input 1.
This option allows a simple volume specification through
the voltage output of a PLC. Using the "Teach-In" function,
the flow sensor can be calibrated to the available flow conditions by litre-wise quantifying or the K factor of a separate
pick-up can be read. The dosing operation can be tested
in "dry" status by means of a simulation feature.
PROFI
MESS
Contents
Ordering codes
Nominal diameter options
Contents
Startpage
Flow
SD-04. 2. 2. 2. 2. 0
Ordering number:
Flowmeter with
Dosing or Switching Electronics
Sensor housing material:

1 = polypropylene with weld-on ends
1a = polypropylene with swivel nut and weld-on sockets
2 = PVDF with weld-on ends
2a = PVDF with swivel nut and weld-on sockets
3 = PVC with adhesive ends
3a = PVC with swivel nut and adhesive sockets
4 = brass with G-female thread
5 = brass with G-male thread
6 = brass with NPT-female thread
7 = stainless steel with G-female thread
8 = stainless steel with G male thread
9 = stainless steel with NPT-female thread
10 = stainless steel with weld-on ends
11 = stainless steel with Tri-Clamp as per ISO2852
12 = stainless steel with flanges as per DIN2501
13 = stainless steel with flanges as per ANSI B16-5-1988
Nominal diameter:
1 = 15 mm
2 = 20 mm
3 = 25 mm
4 = 32 mm
5 = 40 mm
6 = 50 mm
Transmitter:
1 = measuring device with 4...20 mA and pulse output
(PNP and NPN), 2 totalizers and interchangeable flow display
2 = measuring device with 4...20 mA and pulse output (NPN
and PNP),
2 additional relays, 2 totalizers and interchangeable flow
display
3 = measuring device with 4...20 mA and pulse output (REED),
2 totalizers and interchangeable flow display
4 = flowswitch with two relays
5 = dosing device with 2 totalizers,
dosing flow display and 2 relays
Supply voltage:
1 = 12...30 VDC
2 = 115...230 VAC
Flow velocity
Options:
0 = none
1 = measuring transmitter separately for board-mounting
2 = measuring transmitter separately for wall-mounting
Measuring error diagram
P-T Diagramm
Application range for the complete
device (fitting and transmitter)
max. Fehler
error [%]
max.
(%)measured
(bezogen value
auf den Mewert)
10
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
-50
8
6
4
2
Standard
Teach-In
-2
-4
-6
-8
-10
PVC + PP
PVDF
PVDF (PN 10)
PVC (PN 10)
PP (PN 10)
-30
-10
+10
+30
+50
+70
+90
+110
2008
Flow velocity (m/s)

Durchflugeschwindigkeit
www.profimess.de
S 77
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Dimensions SD-04
Contents
Startpage
PVC housing with swivel nut and adhesion sockets; PP

and PVDF housing with swivel nut and weld-on sockets
Brass and stainless steel housing with female thread G

Nominal diameter [mm] G
L [mm]
L2 [mm]
H [mm]
15
G 1/2
85
16.00
122
Nominal diameter [mm] D [mm]
L [mm]
L1 [mm]
L3 [mm]
H [mm]
20
G 3/4
95
17.00
119
15
20
128
90
96
122
25
G1
105
23.50
120
20
25
144
100
106
119
32
G 1 1/4
120
23.50
123
25
32
160
110
116
120
40
G 1 1/2
130
23.50
127
32
40
168
110
116
123
50
G2
150
27.50
134
40
50
188
120
127
127
50
63
212
130
136
134
Brass and stainless steel housing with NPT-female thread

L2 [mm]
H [mm]
15
NPT 9/16 3.35
L [mm]
0.67
4.81
20
NPT 3/4
3.74
0.72
4.69
25
NPT 1
4.14
0.71
4.73
32
NPT 1 1/4 4.73
0.83
4.85
40
NPT 1 1/2 5.12
0.79
5.00
50
NPT 2
0.95
5.28
5.91
PP- and PVDF housing with weld-on ends

L [mm]
L2 [mm]
H [mm]
15
20
85
14
122
20
25
92
16
119
25
32
95
18
120
32
40
100
20
123
40
50
106
23
127
50
63
110
27
134
Brass and stainless steel housing with male thread
L [mm]
L2 [mm]
H [mm]
L [mm]
L2 [mm]
15
20
90
16.50
122
15
G 3/4
84
11.50
122
20
25
100
20.00
119
20
G1
94
13.50
119
25
32
110
23.00
120
25
G 1 1/4
104
14.00
120
32
40
110
27.50
123
32
G 1 1/2
119
18.00
123
40
50
120
30.00
127
40
M55x2
129
19.00
127
50
63
130
37.00
134
50
M64x2
149
20.00
134
PROFI
MESS
H [mm]
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 78
2008
PVC housing with adhesive ends
Dimensions SD-04
Contents
Startpage
Stainless steel housing with weld-on ends

Nominal diameter [mm] L [mm]
D [mm]
H [mm]
15
84
21.3
122
20
94
26.9
119
25
104
33.7
120
32
119
42.4
123
40
129
48.3
127
50
149
60.3
134
Stainless steel housing with flange as per DIN 2501

Nominal
I [mm]
diameter [mm]
J No. of x
diameter
K [mm] M [mm] N [mm] L [mm] H [mm]
15
25
4 x 14 mm
65
95
45
130
122
20
25
4 x 14 mm
75
105
58
150
119
25
25
4 x 14 mm
85
115
68
160
120
32
30
4 x 18 mm
100
140
78
180
123
40
30
4 x 18 mm
110
150
88
200
127
50
40
4 x 18 mm
125
165
102
230
134
Stainless steel housing with flange

as per ANSI B16-5-1988
2008
Nominal diam. I [inch] J No. of x

[mm/ inch]
diameter
K [inch] M [inch] N [inch] L [inch] H [inch]
15 / 9/16
0.93
4 x 0.62"
2.38
3.51
1.38
5.12
4.81
20 / 3/4
1.12
4 x 0.62"
2.75
3.90
1.69
5.91
4.69
Stainless steel housing with

Tri-Clamp connector as per ISO 2852
25 / 1
1.12
4 x 0.62"
3.13
4.26
2,00
6,30
4,73
32 / 1 1/4
1,22
4 x 0,75"
3,50
4,61
2,50
7,09
4,85
Nominal diameter [mm] L [mm]
D [mm]
H [mm]
40 / 1 1/2
1,42
4 x 0,75"
3,88
5,00
2,88
7,88
5,00
15
130
34.00
122.00
50 / 2
1,62
4 x 0,75"
4,75
5,99
4,02
9,06
5,28
20
150
50.50
119.00
25
160
50.50
120.00
32
180
50.50
123.00
40
200
64.00
127.00
50
230
77.50
134.00
www.profimess.de
S 79
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Inflow and outflow lines SD-04
Contents
Regulating valve
Regelventil
50 x D
5xD
Startpage
90 bender
22 xx 90
Krmmer
33-dimensional
dimensional
40 x D
5xD
25 x D
5xD
20 x D
5xD
18 x D
5xD
15 x D
5xD
90 bender
22 xx 90
Krmmer
2 x 90
bender
90
Krmmer
or T piece
oder
T-Stck
Extension
Erweiterung
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 80
2008
Reduction
Reduktion
SU-01
Ultrasonic Flowmeter
and Switch
Contents
Startpage
Description:
The SU-01 series of flowmeters and switches operates
according to the method of ultrasonic runtime difference.
Two ultrasonic elements function alternatively as transmitter
and receiver with the result that a sound signal is accelerated
by the flow once as positive and the next as negative. The
difference in the time that the signal requires to cover the
stretch of measurement is directly proportional to the mean
velocity of flow. Consequently, the microprocessor-controlled
electronics are capable to calculating the volume of flow on
the basis of the known inner diameter of the measuring tube.
Depending on the option, this value is displayed on a wellilluminated 7-segment display in l/min, m3/h, gpm or gph.
Two transistor switching outputs can be set as NC-contact
or NO-contact and freely programmable in regard to their
position, hysteresis and function. Also switching action in
window technology is possible. A start-up bridging can be
selected between 0 and 99.9 seconds, so also staggering of
switching on or off for switching outputs between 0 and 9.9
seconds. If the device is provided with an analogue output,
this can be intercepted through software and the flow range
can be assigned freely to 4 and 20 mA values.
The SU-01 has an adjustable keypad lock. It is stable for
long periods, vibration and shock-proof and its display unit
can be rotated in 90 steps.
Low pressure drop

Two setpoints
Window technology
Optional analogue output
7-segment LED display
The new SU-01 flowmeter offers all the advantages of comfortable, accurate and stable flow measurement and monitoring at negligible pressure drop and minimal requirements for
inflow and outflow lines. It is well-suited for water and waterlike media in the temperature ranges of +4C to +130C and
pressure levels up to 25 bar. The pricing of the SU-01 product group is far below that of the magnetic-inductive flowmeters. Therefore, the user is enabled to cost-effectively
cover such applications which require very low pressure drop
over the measuring device and, as much as possible, rule
out any moving parts in the measuring system. The high
speed of sensor response and the wide range of measurement are the other advantages that make the SU-01 surpass
its mechanical siblings. The standard delivery package includes also a peak value memory that can be erased in the
operating menu.
Self-monitoring
2008
No inflow and outflow lines
www.profimess.de
S 81
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
In the basic version, the SU-01 is provided with two transistor
switching outputs which can be adjusted independent of
each other. The position of setpoints, start-up bridging, stagger time and hysteresis can be selected freely. In the next
assembly level an additional 4...20 mA output is available
which can be intercepted through software and its assignment to flow values can be done while setting the parameters
for the device.
Optionally, an impulse output is available.
Operating range: Five different measuring tubes are available that cover the operating ranges 0.04...10 l/min to
0.68...170 l/min. The process connection depends on the
size of the selected measuring tube and it can be either
G3/4" male, G1" male, G11/4" male or G2" male.
Repeatability:
Scan rate:
500 ms (for peak value memory)
Dimensions:
100 x 140 mm
Weight:
3/4" variant 850 g,

1" variant 1200 g,
11/4" variant 3000 g,
2" variant 4000 g
15...32 V DC, polarity-reversal-proof
Power consumption:
approx. 50 mA no load
Protection class:
IP65 / III
El. connection:
plug M12x 1, 4-/5-pole
Measuring medium:
water and water-like media
Display rate:
500 ms
Operating ranges:
10 l/min, 25 l/min, 40 l/min,

100 l/min or 170 l/min
Digital display:
4-digit 7-segment LED display,

height of digits 12 mm, red
Error display:
LED yellow and as normal text in

the display
Process connections: G3/4"-male, G1"-male, G11/4"

male, G2" male depending on
operating range
In and outflow lines: integrated into measuring body
Transistor switching outputs:

Switching function:
NO-contact / NC-contact,
adjustable
standard- / window technology,
adjustable
Wetted parts:
pressed brass
Electronics housing:
aluminium pressure casting
Seals (Medium):
Klingersil
Adjustment range:
0...125% of full scale value
Keypad:
polyester
Reset hysteresis:
0...125% of full scale value
max. 100 Hz
3 press-keypad with perceptible

pressure point
Pressure:
25 bar max.
Media temperature:
+4C...+130C for separate

mounting
Electronics temp.:
-10C...+70C
Storage temp.:
-30C...+80C
Linearity error:
+/- 2,5% of measured value

at 25C
Temperature effect:
Switching current:
max. 500 mA, short-circuit-proof
Stagger time:
0,0...9.9 s, adjustable
Start-up bridging:
Display:
0,0...99.9 s, adjustable
LED(s) green
Analogue output:
Rate of updating:
+/- 0,2% of full scale value per 10K
Ordering codes
500 ms
Resolution:
10 bit
Power output:
4...20 mA
Load:
max. RI = (Ub-12 V) / 20 mA
Load effect:
0.3% / 100 Ohm
Option:
voltage output 0...10 V DC,

max. 10 mA, short-circuit-proof
adjustment range 25%...100% of
full scale value
Compensated range: -10C...+70C
Impulse output:
Ordering number:
Startpage
Supply voltage:
Operating elements:
Contents
on request
SU-01. 2. 1.
Ultrasonic Flowmeter and Sensor

Version:
1 = with 2 switching contacts
2 = with 2 switching contacts and analogue output
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 82
2008
Operating range:
1 = 0.04...10 l/min with G3/4" connections
3 = 0.16...40 l/min with G1 " connections
5 = 0.68...170 l/min with G2" connections
Dimensions [ in mm]
Table of connections
Device plug
M12 x 1, 4-pole
Version with
Version with
2 switching outputs 2 switching outputs
and 1 analogue output
Pin 1
+UB (1532 V DC)
+UB (1532 V DC)
Pin 2
SP 2 (0.5 A max)
analog
Contents
Pin 3
0V
0V
Pin 4
SP 1 (0.5 A max)
SP 1 (0.5 A max)
Pin 5
Startpage
Type
SU-01.x.1
SU-01.x.2
SU-01.x.3
Dimensions
010 l/min
025 l/min
040 l/min
a
110
110
100
b
100
100
100
c
G 3/4
G 3/4
G1
SP 2 (0.5 A max)
Connection layout
SU-01.1
SU-01.2
Type
SU-01.x.4
SU-01.x.5
Dimensions
0100 l/min
0170 l/min
a
280
300
b
130
135
c
G 11/4
G2
Pressure drop
Pressure drop in mbar
1000
SU-01.x.5
SU-01.x.2
100
SU-01.x.4
SU-01.x.1
SU-01.x.3
10
0,1
10
2008
Flow rate in
m3/h
www.profimess.de
S 83
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
SM-08
Miniature Turbine Flowmeter
for Fluid Media
Contents
Startpage
Description:
principle of a turbine wheel.
In this the fluid flows into the turbine body and gets deflected
by the guide blades at an angle of 90. The resulting tangential flow sets a rotor into a rotation that is proportional to the
flow.
Depending on the device version, this rotational movement is
converted into an output frequency by means of an inductive
proximity sensor or a Hall sensor. A main feature of the turbine flowmeter SM-08 is that the deviation in mass-production
is very low compared to other similar designs. Consequently,
individual tuning for each turbine to match the particular
downstream electronic unit becomes unnecessary; the SM08 is thus ideally suited for use in series applications.
High accuracy of measurement and

resolution
Low deviation in mass-production
Due to their compact design, wide range of measurement
and highly accurate measuring, the SM-08 series of turbine
flowmeters is suitable for applications in the following areas:
Cooling water measurement
Medical engineering
Plastics industry
Solar installations
Machine tools
Photo laboratories
Tapping and dosing installations
Cooling and heating applications
Heat volume logging
Plastic, brass or stainless steel designs

High temperature resistance
Convenient dimensions for assembly
2008
Affordable low-cost alternative available
www.profimess.de
S 85
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Principle of measurement
sensor bolt
connecting cable
Hall sensor
Contents
tube piece
Startpage
turbine cage
impeller
magnet
guide blading
SM-08.15:
Operating range 2...20 (2.40) l/min
Axial turbine flowmeter
with guide blades
SM-08.25:
Operating range 4...160 l/min
SM-08.40:
Operating range 0.4...25 m3/h
with partial stream evaluation
The fluid flowing into the flowmeter gets

divided by the guide blades into four
partial jets which strike the rotor from
four directions and set it into rotation.
Due to the uniform load on the bearing
from four sides, the forces become largely neutralized and the wear is reduced to a minimum. In addition, extremely hard bearing material such as
sapphire and carbide metal ensure
extraordinary long life span.
The fluid streaming into the flowmeter

sets the turbine wheel into rotation.
Due to the high-quality sapphire bearing and low RPM, the turbine has an
extraordinarily long life span. The rotor
RPM is converted into an electrical
pulse signal (frequency).
In the center of the brass-made turbine

body a plastic turbine system is situated. An annular gap is designed around
the turbine system. Part of the fluid
stream sets the turbine into rotation
while the other part of the stream is
allowed to pass through the annular
gap without obstruction. The rotor RPM
is then converted into an electrical
pulse signal (frequency). Due to highquality sapphire bearing and low RPM,
the turbine has an extraordinarily long
life span.
Dimensions
SM-08.15
SM-08.25
SM-08.40
2000 50
ca. 1500
2000
3 x 0,25 mm2
3 x 0,14 mm2
knurlswivel nut
PVC
3 x 0,25 mm2
~ 44
44
G 1 1/4
ca. 62
G 3/4
ca. 43
swivel nut
G 3/4
145
HEX 27
80
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 86
2008
74
Technical specifications SM-08.15

Materials:
Axial Turbine Flowmeter with Guide Blade
Contents Materials:
SM-08.15.x.K:
Startpage
Housing and pick-up:

PPO Noryl GFN3
Turbine insert: PEI ULTEM
O-Ring: NBR, optionally Viton
Bearing/axle: ARCAP AP1D with car
bide metal pins and sapphire bearings
Impeller inserts: hard ferrite for Hall
sensor, stainless steel for inductive
pick-up
SM-08.15.x.M:
Housing: brass
Pick-up: PPO Noryl GFN3, brass for
high-pressure version
Turbine insert: PEEK Victrex 450G
O-Ring: FKM
Bearing/axle: ARCAP AP1D with car
bide metal pins and sapphire bearings
Impeller inserts: hard ferrite for Hall
sensor, stainless steel for inductive
pick-up
SM-08.15.x.V:
Housing: stainless steel 1.4571

Pick-up: stainless steel 1.4571
Turbine insert: PEEK Victrex 450G
O-Ring: FKM
Bearing/axle: ARCAP AP1D with
carbide metal pins and sapphire bearings
Impeller inserts: hard ferrite
Ordering codes:
Ordering number: SM-08.15 S. K. H. N. P. 2. x. VE
Axial Turbine Flowmeter with
Guide Blades
max. pressure:
Operating range:
S = 2...20 l/min (max. 40 l/min),
with standard bearings
V = 2...40 l/min,
with reinforced bearing
SM-08.15.x.K:
SM-08.15.x.M.I/H:
SM-08.15.x.M.P:
SM-08.15.x.V:
Material:
K = housing made of PPO Noryl
(not for high-pressure version)
M = housing made of brass
V = housing made of stainless steel
(for high-pressure version only)
10 bar
10 bar
300 bar
300 bar
max. temperature:
85C
SM-08.15.x.K:
SM-08.15.x.M.I/H: 85C
SM-08.15.x.M/V.P: 150C
(for water without additives only)
Version:
I = with inductive pick-up (with PNP output only)
H = with Hall sensor
P = with Hall sensor up to 300 bar, 150C
Accuracy:
SM-08.15.x.x.H/P: 1% of full scale value
SM-08.15.x.x.I:
0,5% of full scale value
Output signal:
P = PNP (with inductive pick-up only)
N = NPN
Supply:
O = none (with Option ...T only)
P = 1.5 m PVC cable
(high-temperature version with silicon cable)
S = plug connection M12x1, 4-Pin
SM-08.15.x.x.H/P: 4,524 VDC

SM-08.15.x.x.I:
1030 VDC
Output signal:
Additional temperature sensor:

0 = none
1 = PT-100 in brass sleeve
2 = PT-100 in stainless steel sleeve
3 = PT-1000 in brass sleeve
4 = PT-1000 in stainless steel sleeve
SM-08.15.x.x.H:
SM-08.15.x.x.P:
SM-08.15.x.x.I:
Process connection:
A = G 3/4-male (standard)
I = G 3/4-female (for high-pressure version in stainless steel only)
x = Connection adapter as per Table "Connection adapter"
2008
Options:
H
= with integrated sieve filter (T max. 60C)
Ax = with mounted measuring transmitter 4.. 20 mA
(x = operating ranges full scale value 5, 10. 20 or 40 l/min)
VE = with mounted switching output
VEP = with mounted switching output and additional impulse output
(5-Pin plug required)
T
= prepared for mounted evaluator electronics TD-325
(must be ordered separately)
rectangular impulses, 855 ppl

NPN Open Collector
NPN Open Collector
NPN or PNP Open Collector
max. particle size:
0.5 mm
Start-up:
from 0.3 l/min
Protection class:
IP 54
www.profimess.de
S 87
PROFI
MESS
GMBH

Materials:
Axial-Turbine Flowmeter
SM-08.25.x.M:
Materials:
Housing and impeller: PP
Pick-up: PPO Noryl GFN 3V 960; for
inductive PA-66
Turbine insert: PPO Noryl GFN 2V
73701
O-Ring: NBR
Bearing/axle: PA/sapphire, stainless
steel 1.4436
Impeller inserts: permanent
magnets Recoma 28, Ni plated,
stainless steel for inductive pick-up
SM-08.25.x.V:
Ordering codes:
Ordering number: SM-08.25 S. K. H. N. P. 2. x. VE
Axial-Turbine Flowmeter
Operating range:
S = 4160 l/min
(continuous load 80 l/min)
Material:
K = housing made of PP
(not for high-pressure version)
V = housing made of stainless steel
(for high-pressure version only)
SM-08.25.x.K:
SM-08.25.x.M.I/H:
SM-08.25.x.M.P:
SM-08.25.x.V:
Housing: stainless steel 1.4571

Pick-up: stainless steel 1.4571; for
inductive PA-66
73701
O-Ring: NBR, optional Viton
steel Impeller inserts: permanent
magnets Recoma 28, Ni plated
10
10
50
50
bar
bar
bar
bar
max. temperature:
80C at 2 bar, 60C at 5 bar,
30C at 10 bar
SM-08.25.x.K.I:
60C at 5 bar, 30C at 10 bar
SM-08.25.x.M.V/H: 85C
SM-08.25.x.M.I:
60C
SM-08.25.x.K.H:
Output signal:
N = NPN
O = none (with option ...T only)
P = 2 m PVC cable
(SM-08.25.S.K.H or ...M.H only)
S = plug connection M12x1, 4-Pin
Accuracy:

0 = none
1 = PT-100 in brass sleeve for SM-08.25.x.K
2 = PT-100 in stainless steel sleeve for SM-08.25.x.K
3 = PT-1000 in brass sleeve for SM-08.25.x.K
4 = PT-1000 in stainless steel sleeve for SM-08.25.x.K
5 = PT-100 or PT-1000 for SM-08.25.M/V
see Table "Connection adapter"
3% of measured value
Supply:
SM-08.25.x.x.H/M: 4,524 VDC
SM-08.25.x.x.I:
1030 VDC
Output signal:

NPN Open Collector for Hall sensor,
PNP Open Collector for inductive
pick-up
max. particle size:
< 0.63 mm
Protection class:
IP 54
Process connection:
A = G 1 1/4-male
x = connection adapter as per Table "Connection adapter"
Options:
H = with flat filter 0.63 mm, stainless steel, including O-Ring made of EPDM
Ax = with mounted measuring transmitter 4...20mA
(x = operating range full scale value 60. 100 or 160 l/min)
T
www.profimess.de
GMBH
Startpage
max. pressure:
Version:
I = with inductive pick-up
P = with Hall sensor up to 50 bar
PROFI
MESS
Contents
S 88
2008
SM-08.25.x.K:
Housing: brass
Impeller: PPO Noryl GFN 2V 73701
Pick-up: PPO Noryl GFN 3V 960,
brass for high-pressure version; for
inductive PA-66
73701
O-Ring: NBR, optionally Viton
steel 1.4436
magnets Recoma 28, Ni plated,

Axial-Turbine Flowmeter with Partial Stream Evaluation
max. pressure:
Contents Materials:
SM-08.40.x.M:
Startpage
SM-08.40.x.M.I/H: 10 bar
SM-08.40.x.M.M: 50 bar
Housing: brass
Impeller: PPO Noryl GFN 2V 73701
Pick-up: POM, brass for
high-pressure version
Turbine insert: PA Grivory HTV4X1
O-Ring: NBR
Bearing/axle: PA, sapphire, stainless
steel
magnets Recona 28, Ni plated,
max. temperature:
SM-08.40.x.M.H/M: 85C
SM-08.40.x.M.I:
60C
Accuracy:
of 0.4...3 m3/h
of 3...25 m3/h
Supply:
SM-08.40.x.x.H/M: 4.524 VDC
SM-08.40.x.x.I:
1224 VDC
Ordering codes:
Output signal:
rectangular impulses, 26,6 ppl

NPN Open Collector for Hall sensor,
PNP Open Collector for inductive
pick-up
Operating range:
S = 0.425 m3/h
max. particle size:
0.5 mm
Material:
Filter:
flat filter 0.63 mm,

included in delivery
Ordering number: SM-08.40 S. M. H. N. P. 5. x. VE

Axial Turbine Flowmeter with
Partial Stream Evaluation
Version:
I = with inductive pick-up
P = with Hall sensor up to 50 bar
Output signal:
N = NPN
O = none (with Option ...T only)
P = 2 m PVC cable (SM-08.40.S.M.H only)
S = plug connector M12x1, 4-Pin
5 = PT-100 or PT-1000 for SM-08.40
see Table "Connection adapter"
Process connection:
A = G 2-male
x = connection adapter as per Table "Connection adapter"
2008
Options:
Ax = with mounted measuring transmitter 4.. 20 mA
(x = operating range full scale value 150. 250 or 400 l/min)
T
www.profimess.de
S 89
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Pressure drops:
Impulse rates:
SM-08.15
Pressure drop dp [bar]
Impulse rate [1/l]
2,5
2500
2,0
2000
1,5
1500
1,0
1000
Contents
Startpage
SM-08.15, inductive
SM-08.15, Hall sensor
0,5
500
0
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
10
15
20
25
Flow Q [l/min]
30
35
40
Flow Q [l/min]
SM-08.25
Impulse rate [1/l]
0,6
60
0,5
50
SM-08.25, 1
0,4
40
SM-08.25, 11/4
0,3
30
0,2
20
0,1
10
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
180 200
220 240
0,1
Flow Q [l/min]
0,2 0,3 0,5 0,71,0
2,0 3,0 5,0
10
20 30 50
100 200
Flow Q [l/min]
SM-08.40
1,8
1,6
1,4
1,2
1,0
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 90
2008
Flow Q [m3/h]
Connection adapter
- including appropriate sealing
Connection adapter SM-08.15
Contents
Startpage
Type
Description
Fits to:
A15ST10K
hose spout, PA 6.6,

d = 10 mm
A15ST12K
Tmax. / Pmax.
Type
Description
Fits to:
Tmax. / Pmax.
SM-08.15 20C at 10 bar,

60C at 2,5 bar
A40VA40MPT-100
joint, brass, with PT-100

in brass sleeve, G 1 1/2 -male
SM-08.40 85C, PN 16
hose spout, PP,

d = 12 mm
SM-08.15 20C at 10 bar,

60C at 2,5 bar
A40VA40MPT-1000

in brass sleeve, G 1 1/2 -male
SM-08.40 85C, PN 16
A15ST15K
hose spout, PP,

d = 15 mm
SM-08.15 20C at 10 bar,

60C at 2,5 bar
A40VA40M
joint, brass,
G 1 1/2 -male
SM-08.40 85C, PN 16
A15ST19K
hose spout, HDPE,

d = 19 mm
SM-08.15 20C at 10 bar,

60C at 2,5 bar
A40VA50M
joint, brass,
G 2 -male
SM-08.40 85C, PN 16
A15STW13K
hose spout, PP, angled,

d = 13 mm
SM-08.15 60C, PN 10
A40LA42M
solder connection, brass,

for copper tube d = 42 mm
SM-08.40 85C, PN 16
A15STW13M hose spout, brass, angled,

d = 13 mm
SM-08.15 90C, PN 10
A15KM22K
adhesive sleeve, PVC,

d = 22 mm
SM-08.15 20C at 10 bar,

60C at 2,5 bar
A15SN20K
welding nipple, PP,

d = 20 mm
SM-08.15 20C at 10 bar,

60C at 2,5 bar
Accessories SM-08
A15VA10M
joint, brass,
G 3/8-male
SM-08.15 110C, PN 16
Type
Description
A15VA15M
joint, brass,
G 1/2-male
SM-08.15 110C, PN 16
SM-08.Z.L3
connecting cord with tipped coupling box M 12x 1,

4-Pin, shielded, L = 3 m
A15VI10M
joint, brass, Ni plated,

G 3/8-female
SM-08.15 110C, PN 16
SM-08.Z.L5
as above, however L = 5 m
A15VI15M
joint, brass,
G 1/2-female
SM-08.15 110C, PN 16
SM-08.Z.L10 as above, however L = 10 m
A15KL18M
compression fitting, brass,

SM-08.15 110C, PN 16
SM-08.Z.S
A15KL22M
compression fitting, brass,

SM-08.15 110C, PN 16
A15LA15M

SM-08.15 90C, PN 16
A15LA18M

SM-08.15 90C, PN 16
coupling box M12x1, 4-Pin, for self-customization
2008

Type
Description
Fits to:
Tmax. / Pmax.
A25ST25K
hose spout, PP,

d = 25 mm
SM-08.25 20C at 10 bar,

60C at 2,5 bar
A25ST30K
hose spout, PP,

d = 30 mm
SM-08.25 20C at 10 bar,

60C at 2,5 bar
A25ST32K
hose spout, PP,

d = 32 mm
SM-08.25 20C at 10 bar,

60C at 2,5 bar
A25SM25K
welding sleeve, PP,

d i = 25 mm, d a = 33 mm
SM-08.25 20C at 10 bar,

60C at 2,5 bar
A25KM25K
adhesive sleeve, PVC,

d i = 25 mm, d a = 33 mm
SM-08.25 20C at 10 bar,

60C at 2,5 bar
A25VA25MPT-100

in brass sleeve, G 1 -male
SM-08.25 85C, PN 16
A25VA25MPT-1000

in brass sleeve, G 1 -male
SM-08.25 85C, PN 16
A25VA25M
joint, brass,
G 1 -male
SM-08.25 85C, PN 16
A25VA32M
joint, brass,
G 1 1/4 -male
SM-08.25 85C, PN 16
A25LA28M

SM-08.25 85C, PN 16
A25VA25V
joint, stainless steel,

G 1 -male
SM-08.25 85C, PN 16
www.profimess.de
S 91
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
SM-08VE(P)
Limit Value Emitter with 16 Discretely Adjustable
Setpoints
Wide range of switching, hence only

1 flow sensor for all applications
Safe monitoring of small volumes of flow Contents
Absolutely precise setpoint adjustment
Self-monitoring
Excellent price to performance ratio
Startpage
Monitoring of cooling circulation in high-end equipment such
as laser installations, HF generators etc.
Description:
The core of the turbine flow sensor SM-08...VE is the extremely robust miniature turbine SM-08 which has been reliably
in use for years in major applications. The turbine transmits a
frequency signal that is proportional to the flow to a microprocessor. This monitors the set minimum flow and activates
the alarm contact without potential if the flow falls short. Even
a likely blockage in the turbine is definitely identified and reliably signalized.
Besides the switching output (contact), optionally, also an
impulse signal is available. Thus, besides monitoring, also a
constant or temporary flow measurement is performed.
Switching output only
or
+U
alarm output
GND
Switching output and

Pulse output
alarm output
+U
pulse output
GND
Switch
position
Setpoint in l/min
SM-08.15
SM-08.25
SM-08.40
rising
falling
rising
falling
rising
falling
0,5
10
1,5
13
10
1,5
19
15
2,5
10
24
20
2,5
12
10
30
25
3,5
14
12
35
30
3,5
17
15
40
35
4,5
20
18
47
40
5,5
22
20
58
50
7,5
27
25
75
65
10
9,5
33
30
90
80
12
11,5
38
35
115
100
16
15,5
44
40
150
130
20
19,5
55
50
190
160
25
24,5
75
70
230
200
30
29,5
105
100
310
275
The specified setpoints refer to water, 20C. Customer-specific setpoint tables

can be implemented for above 25 devices.
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 92
2008
see "Setpoint table"

Setpoint range:
Accuracy of switching:
0,2 l/min 2% of setpoint
SM-08.15:
SM-08.25:
SM-08.40:
Setpoint adjustment: by means of 16-digit rotary switch
Output:
Switching output: connecting to supply voltage,
max. load 100 mA,
no potential to 125V AC/DC
Impulse output:
connecting to supply voltage,
max. load 100 mA,
no potential to 125V AC/DC
Display:
2 LED
Green: Flow OK,
Red: Alarm
Electrical
4-pin plug, M 12 x 1
connection:
Supply voltage:
1224 VDC, max. 25 mA
max. media temp.: 80C
Setpoint table
SM-08Ax
Flow Test
F/I-Measuring Transmitter with Analogue Output
Hand-held Measuring Device for Flow,

Total Volume and Temperature
Contents
Startpage
with
nally
optio erature
temp sor
sen
The hand-held measuring device Flow Test can be connected

to all flowmeters with NPN or PNP frequency output. It serves
as temporary display of flow and total volume. Besides, with
an additional temperature sensor the media temperature can
be ascertained. The device is battery-operated and it powers
also the connected flowmeter SM-08.
All SM-08 series of turbine flowmeters can be equipped with

an integrated F/I measuring transmitter. With this they transmit an analogue signal output of 4...20mA instead of the
impulse output.
Output:
4...20 mA, power limiting at 26 mA
Sensor inputs:
Scaling:
as per Ordering codes

SM-08.15, SM-08.25, SM-08.40.
other scaling on request
Customizing the
flowmeter:
programmable impulse rate
Supply voltage:
1830 VDC
max. power:
30 mA
Sensor power
supply:
12 VDC from integrated charger
max. load:
250 Ohm to GND
Display:
LCD
Electrical
connection:
4-pin plug, M 12 x 1
max. media temp.:
80C
Displayed unit:
Flow:
Total volume:
Temperature:
l/min, l/h, m3/h, USGPM, IGPM

l, m3, USGAL, GAL(UK)
C, F
Housing:
frequency of flowmeters,
NPN or PNP, PT-100, 3-wire
130 x 70 x 20 mm,
aluminium, gold-colour anodized
2008
Delivery package includes:

- Flow test hand-held measuring device
- Measuring cord with 4-Pin coupling box M12x1 for SM-08
- Battery charger
- Service kit-box
www.profimess.de
S 93
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
TD-325
Control and Display Device for Assembly on Turbine
Flowmeter SM-08
The TD-325 includes a number of display and control

functions:
2-digit LED display for
- Flow
- Total volume (resettable)
- Total volume (not resettable)
- Temperature (optional)
- Bargraph display 0...100% for flow,
volume (resettable) or temperature
Menu-driven programming over
2 light-reflexive keys (Protection class IP 65)
Key-lock to prevent unintentional error inputs
Menu language German, English, French free selection
Rotatable housing made of stainless steel
Optional analogue output, allocation to flow,
total volume or temperature
Optionally with 2 limit contacts, allocation to flow,
total volume or temperature
Optional impulse output, on request also with frequency
divider
Contents
Startpage
The TD-325 can be mounted on any

SM-08 flowmeter. Optionally, a variant
with front ring for switch-board
mounting is available. The electrical
connection is made over a fixed 2
meter long connecting cable or one
or two plug connectors M12 x 1.
The control and display device is intended for evaluating the

signals from the SM-08 turbine flowmeter and, normally, it is
delivered directly mounted on the SM-08 (Option SM-08.T).
~ 65
79
Ordering codes:
TD-325 2. A3. F1. K2. S. 1. 0
Signal input:
Flow:
Control and Display Device

for SM-08
Input signals:
1
= Impulses from flowmeter
2
= Impulses from flowmeter
and PT-100-signal
Temperature:
Display:
Programmable
units:
Analogue outputs:
O = none
A1 = 420 mA
A2 = 020 mA
A3 = 010 V
Supply:
Frequency output:
O = none
F1 = as per impulse rate SM-08
F2 = with frequency divider
Ambient temp.:
Media temp.:
Analogue output:
Limit values:
O = none
K2 = 2 contacts
Alarm output:
K = 2 m PVC cable
S = plug M 12x1
Assembly:
1
= mounted on flowmeter
2
= with front ring for switch-board mounting
Frequency output:
Housing:
Special issues:
O = none
9
= please specify in detailed text
PROFI
MESS
Protection class:
frequency signal 0.5...2000 HZ

programmable impulse rates
PT-100, 3-wire, -10+150C
2-row LCD-display, 16 characters
each
l/min, l/h, m3/h, GPM(US), GPM(UK)
l, m3, GAL(US), GAL(UK)
C, F
1224 VDC with integrated sensor
power supply 10 VDC
-10+ 60C
-20+ 90C
0/420 mA, max. load 800 Ohm
to 24 VDC or 010 V
2 transistor switching outputs, PNP
Open Collector, programmable as
MIN. or MAX. Alarm, adjustable
hysteresis, stand-by or operating
power function
PNP Open Collector, TTL-level
partial rate programmable
stainless steel -round housing, d =
80 mm, h = 55 mm, 350 rotatable
IP 65
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 94
2008
Ordering number:
SM-11N
Stainless Steel
Turbine Flowmeter
Contents
Startpage
Description:
The turbine wheel of the flow meter SM-11N is positioned
concentrically on both sides and it rotates inside the housing
proportionally to the mean flow velocity. An inductive Pick-Up
screw-mounted on the housing wall deflects the turbine
wheel's rotational movement and outputs a sinus-shaped
power signal to the booster below the plug connector which
in turn generates a square-shaped impulse signal in the PNP
3-wire circuit. Optionally, the bearings for the SM-11N can
be made of PTFE or carbide metal, while all other wetted
parts are made of stainless steel. This allows the SM-11N
to conveniently measure a wide range of low viscosity fluids.
Accuracy at 0.5% of measured value

Operating ranges up to 135 m3/h
Suitable for plug-in display SD-01
Up to 400 bar
The turbine flow meter SM-11N is used if flow volumes of
low viscosity fluids need to be measured highly accurately.
The permissible temperature range up to 120C and pressure
levels up to 400 bar make the device capable of handling
a wide range of applications covering the entire industry.
Depending on the process, the user can opt for a tube or
flange connector. At the output of SM-11N a PNP transistor
impulse signal is available which is compatible with most
downstream analyzing devices and, if required, can be easily
converted into a 4...20 mA or 0...10 V DC analogue output.
Moreover, Profimess' plug-in display SD-01, which can be
mounted directly between the plug and the cable box of
SM-11N and does not require additional power supply, offers
an excellent way to visualize the measured value.
Carbide metal or PTFE bearings
2008
Flange or tube connection
www.profimess.de
S 95
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Accuracy:
No. of measuring
channels:
Operating voltage:
Ub = 12...30 V DC
Output signal:
voltage impulses PNP
Impulse amplitude:
0.8 x Ub
Impulse form:
square
see table "Bearing types"
Mounting position: horizontal 5

Housing material: stainless steel
Flange material:
steel or stainless steel
Bearing material:
PTFE or carbide metal
Pressure:
see table for connector types
Media
temperature:
Ambient temp.:
Required
run-in distance:
Startpage
Duty cycle /
Channel:
-20C...+120C for steel flange

connection
-30C...+120C for stainless steel
flange connection or tube connection
Contents
1:1 15 %
Power requirement: max. 0.6 W
-20C...+120C for steel flange

connection
-30C...+120C for stainless steel
flange connection or tube connection
Output power:
max. 0.3 W short-circuit protected
Protection class:
IP 65 DIN 40050
Options:
ATEX approval for EX Zone 1,

intrinsically safe
10 x pipe diameter to achieve
the specified accuracy
24 Volt (brown )
Signaling channel 1
Channel 1 (green)
Required
flow-out distance: 5 x pipe diameter to achieve
the specified accuracy
0 Volt (white)
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
Connector types
SM-11N. 7. 1. 1. 1
Connector types
Type
Nominal
diameter
Tube connection
SM-11N.1
320
SM-11N.2
320
40/160/250/400
SM-11N.3
12
320
40/160/250/400
SM-11N.4
15
320
40/160/250/400
SM-11N.5
15
320
40/160/250/400
SM-11N.6
18
320
40
SM-11N.7
25
320
40/160/250/400
SM-11N.8
37
SM-11N.9
50
SM-11 Stainless steel Turbine Flowmeter

Operating range end:
1 = 0.275 m3/h
2 = 0.55 m3/h
3 = 1.1 m3/h
4 = 2.2 m3/h
5 = 4 m3/h
6 = 8 m3/h
7=16 m3/h
8 = 34 m3/h
9 = 68 m3/h
10 = 135 m3/h
40/160/250/400
40/160/250/400
40/64/100/160/250/400
SM-11N.10 75
Bearing material:
1 = carbide metal
2 = PTFE
10/40/64/100/160/250/400
Bearing types
Bearing types
Pressure levels:
1 = 10 bar
2 = 40 bar
3 = 64 bar
4 = 100 bar
5 = 160 bar
6 = 250 bar
7 = 320 bar
8 = 400 bar
Nominal
diameter
Carbide metal
Flow in
l/min
Accuracy
PTFE
Flow in
l/min
Accuracy
1% v. MW.
SM-11N.1
0,92...4,58
SM-11N.2
1,83...9,17
1% v. MW.
SM-11N.3
12
3,67...18,3
1% v. MW.
SM-11N.4
15
7,33...36,7
0,5% v. MW.
7,33...36,7
0,5% v. MW.
SM-11N.5
15
13,3...66,7
0,5% v. MW.
13,3...66,7
0,5% v. MW.
SM-11N.6
18
26,6...133
0,5% v. MW.
13,3...133
0,5% v. MW.
SM-11N.7
25
53,4...267
0,5% v. MW.
26,7...267
0,5% v. MW.
SM-11N.8
37
113...567
0,5% v. MW.
56,7...567
0,5% v. MW.
SM-11N.9
50
227...1133
0,5% v. MW.
113...1133
0,5% v. MW.
SM-11N.10 75
450...2250
0,5% v. MW.
225...2250
0,5% v. MW.
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 96
2008
Type
Process connection:
1 = tube connection
2 = stainless steel flange connection
3 = steel flange connection
PROFI
MESS
Flange
Available pressure levels in bar
Elektrische Daten:
Dimensions for tube connection
Contents
Type
D A B
C
L
E
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
F
G K T
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
SM-11N.1
14,3
25
82
58
M20 x 1,5 12
12
SM-11N.2
14,3
25
82
58
M20 x 1,5 12
12
7,5
SM-11N.3
12
18,3
36
86
76
M24 x 1,5 14
16
12
8,5
SM-11N.4
15
22,9
41
87
76
M30 x 2
16
20
15
10,5
SM-11N.5
15
22,9
41
87
76
M30 x 2
16
20
15
10,5
SM-11N.6
18
27,9
48
89
130
M36 x 3
18
25
19
12
SM-11N.7
25
41
55
98
155
M52 x 2
22
38
25
16
7,5
Startpage
Dimensions for flange connection

Type
D
[mm]
L
[mm]
C
[mm]
Connecting flange
SM-11N.1
114
84
DN10
SM-11N.2
114
84
DN10
SM-11N.3
12
127
86
DN15
SM-11N.4
15
127
87
DN15
SM-11N.5
15
127
87
DN15
SM-11N.6
18
141
90
DN20
SM-11N.7
25
153,5
93
DN25
SM-11N.8
37
179
95
DN40
SM-11N.9
50
198
105
DN50
SM-11N.10
75
330
120
DN80
Structure and function
2008
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
housing
front retainer
rear retainer
turbine wheel
signal emitter coil
iron core
magnet
clamp ring
www.profimess.de
S 97
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
SM-16
Low-Cost Turbine Flowmeter
for Fluid Media without
Auxiliary Power Supply
Contents
Startpage
Counter and/or flowmeter versions
Description:
The SM-16 series of turbine flowmeters consists of an interchangeable nylon turbine which is built into a flow housing
made of nylon or aluminium, and a local evaluator and display
electronic unit. This functions as a total and a partial volume
counter and as a flowmeter.
The turbine wheel is set into rotation by the streaming medium. The ferrites embedded into the turbine blades are scanned through an inductive pick-up system. The sequence of
impulses generated thus is proportional to the flow and is
displayed by means of a microprocessor controlled electronic
unit.
Local 6-digit LCD display

Battery-operated, simple battery
replacement
Aluminium or nylon versions
Intrinsically safe (EEx ia IIC T4)
Due to the interchangeable battery the devices do not
depend on external power supply and, therefore, they can be
deployed without extensive cabling wherever flow volumes
need to be accurately measured or counted locally.
The integrated microprocessor allows on-the-spot calibration
with the result that accuracy is increased or the device can
be adjusted, apart from water, for even highly viscous media.
Operating ranges 1...10 and

10...190 l/min
2008
www.profimess.de
S 99
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions
Medium:
low-viscosity non-hostile fluid

(higher viscosities with on-thespot calibration)
Operating ranges: - 1...10 l/min

- 10...190 l/min
(with reference to water)
Pressure drop:
1...10 l/min:
10...190 l/min:
0,14 bar max.

0,35 bar max.
Materials:
- Aluminium housing
- Nylon housing
Process connection:
1 ISO female thread
Electronic:
max. temperature:
Operation:
Storage:
-10...60 C
-40...+70 C
- Counter for total volume (not resettable)

and partial volume counter
(resettable) and current value meter
- Field calibration on EEPROM possible
max. pressure:
Al-Housing:
Nylon-Housing:
Supply:
Accuracy:
Startpage
Materials
20 bar
10 bar
No.
Al version
Nylon version
Housing
aluminium
nylon
Turbine
nylon
nylon
Rotor mounting
ferrite
ferrite
Retainer
Nylon
nylon
LCD, 6-digit
automatic On and Off switching
Axis
tungsten-carbide
tungsten-carbide
Bearing
ceramic
ceramic
+/- 1.5%
(+/- 1.0% with on-the-spot calibration possible)
Lantern ring
stainless steel
stainless steel
Electronics housing
nylon
nylon
Sealing
rubber
rubber
2 x lithium battery, 3.0 V,

CR 12600 SE approx. 2000
hours of operation
Display:
Contents
Protection class:
IP 65
Dimensions:
102 x 64 x 51 mm
Layout
Ordering codes
Ordering number:
SM-16.
09.
A.
11.
Turbine Flowmeter
Version:
09 = counter for total and partial volume
and flowmeter
Material:
A = aluminium housing
N = nylon housing
Operating range:
11 = 1...10 l/min
12 = 10...190 l/min
Special issues:
0 = none
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 100
2008
Special versions:
For the operating range 10-100 l/min, a low-cost version of the
SM-16 for petrol, diesel and kerosene in aluminium or another
version for water in nylon that operates with accuracy of 2.5%
and up to 20 bar pressure is available. These versions function
purely as flow counters.
Ordering number for this version:
SM-16.09.A.99V (diesel)
SM-16.09.N.99V (water)
For applications with deionized water, stainless steel instead of
the standard aluminium as material can also be supplied.
SI-01
Contents
Startpage
Cost-effective
Separate or compact measuring
transmitter
Neopren or EPDM lining
DN25...DN1200
Description: The SI-01 series of electromagnetic flowmeters

is always a combination of measuring pick-up SI-01 and
measuring transmitter MU-5000 which can be either directly
mounted on the pick-up or separately mounted on the wall
by means of a fixing metal plate. The measuring pick-up consists of a magnetically non-conductive measuring tube with
plastic lining, magnetic coils fastened diametrically on the
tube and at least two electrodes which are inserted through
the tube's wall and establish contact with the measuring
medium. As current passes through the magnetic coils, a
clocked magnetic field is generated which penetrates the
magnetically non-conductive measuring tube and induces in
the electrically conductive medium a voltage proportional to
the flow velocity. The electrodes inside the tube tap this voltage and pass it on to the measuring transmitter MU-5000.
Now the transmitter generates a current signal in the range of
0(4)...20-mA which is linearly connected to the mean velocity
of flow.
The measuring pick-up has a SENSORPROM memory module in which its individual data is stored. The result is that nearly every measuring pick-up of the SI-01 series can be operate
along with every MU-5000 measuring transmitter without the
need for prior parameterization.
DIN or ANSI flange
2008
Range of application: Electromagnetic flowmeters are suited for measuring nearly all electrically conductive fluids, pulp
and slurry that have a conductivity of at least 5 microSiemens. Temperature, pressure, density and viscosity are of
no consequence for the method of measurement so long as
the measurement is performed within the velocity range of
0.5... 10 m/s and the permissible material specifications do
not fall short or are not exceeded. The main applications for
the SI-01 series are found in the following areas:
Water removal
Water treatment
Water distribution
Effluent treatment
Industrial water applications
Filtration installations
For applications that necessitate higher temperatures or pressure, more hostile media or other nominal diameter ranges,
the high-quality measuring pick-up of the SI-02 offers a reliable solution.
www.profimess.de
S 101
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
Nominal diameter: The SI-01 series of electromagnetic flowmeters is designed to cater to simple applications in the area
of water and effluent treatment. For this reason, typical nominal diameters of DN25 (1") to DN1200 (48") in DIN levels are
available.
Measuring principle: electromagnetic induction
Flange design and pressure level: The process connection

for the SI-01 is always designed as flange connection matching with the selected nominal diameter and may comply
with the DIN or the ANSI (AWWA) standard. The pressure
level of the DIN flanges depends on the selected nominal diameter and is rated up to DN50 PN40, above this up to
DN200 PN16 and up to DN1200 PN10. On request, ranges
between DN65 and DN200 with a DIN flange in PN10 can
also be supplied. In the version with ANSI (AWWA) flanges
the pressure level is 150 lbs in the range of 1" to 24" or Class
D (10 bar) in the range of 28" to 48".
Operating range:
0.5... 10 m/s for the specified

accuracy, below and above this
greater deviations
Accuracy:
+/- 0.5% of measured value
3.125 Hz
Conductivity of
medium:
at least 5 micro-Siemens/cm
Ambient
temperature:
Lining: As lining material Neopren or EPDM can be selected

depending on the medium and temperature. The temperature
range for the Neopren lining is 0...70C, for the EPDM lining
between -10 and +95C can be used.
Measuring transmitter: In principle, the SI-01 is suited for
operations with a directly mounted measuring transmitter or
for separate mounting. The MU-5000 measuring transmitter
can be used universally (see data sheet MU-5000), hence it
can be mounted directly on the measurement pick-up or
positioned away from it by means of a wall fixture. If the SI-01
is required as a spare, since the MU-5000 measuring transmitter is already available, only the measurement pick-up can
be ordered without the measuring transmitter.
Cable gland: The terminal housing for the SI-01 can be
equipped with a cable gland PG13.5 or, depending on the
selected flange standard, with M20x1.5 joint for DIN flanges
or 1/2"-NPT for ANSI (AWWA) flanges.
Exciter frequency:
Startpage
-40C...+95C for separate measuring transmitter -20C...+50C for

directly mounted measuring transmitter
Media temperature:
0C...+70C for Neopren lining 10C...+95C for EPDM lining
Operating pressure:
0.01...40 bar absolute

(note pressure level of the flange)
Lining:
Neopren or EPDM
Materials:
Flange
and housing:
Measuring tube:
Electrodes:
plain carbon steel ASTM A105

AISI304 (stainless steel 1.4301)
AISI316 Ti (stainless steel 1.4571)
Process connection: DIN flange for nominal diameters

DN25...DN1200 PN10 to PN40
ANSI flanges B16.5 for nominal
diameters 1"...24", 150 lbs.
AWWA flanges C-207 for nominal
diameters 28"...48",
Class D (10 bar)
Weight:
see Dimension drawings
Electrical specifications measuring pick-up:
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
Contents
SI-01. [0][0][2][5]. 3. 2. 1. 2
(see also data sheet Measuring transmitter MU-5000)

Cable insertion:
PG13.5 or M20x1.5 for DIN flanges

or 1/2"-NPT for ANSI (AWWA) flanges
Protection class:
IP 67 (IP 68 on request)
EMC:
89/336 EEC
Nominal diameter DN25 to DN1200:
[ ][ ][ ][ ] e.g. 0040 for DN40
Flange version and pressure level:
1 = as per EN 1092-1 (DIN flange) PN10
for nominal diameters DN200...DN1200
4= as per ANSI B16.5 Class 150 for nominal diameters 1"...24"
5 = as per AWWA C207 Class D for nominal diameters 28"...48"
Separate mounting
Lining:
1 = Neopren for media temperatures up to 70C
2 = EPDM for media temperatures up to 95C
Measuring transmitter:
0 = none
1 = with MU-5000. accuracy 0.5%
-
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 102
2008
Cable gland:
1 = PG13.5
2 = M 20x1.5 (not for ANSI flanges)
3 = 1/2"-NPT (for ANSI flanges only)
Dimensions SI-01
A1
DN
D1
L1)
EN 1092-1-201
Contents
Startpage
(mm)
187
197
205
212
222
242
255
276
304
332
357
362
387
418
443
494
544
571
606
653
704
755
810
(mm)
25
40
50
65
80
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
700
750
800
900
1000
1100
1200
(mm)
59
82
72
72
72
85
85
85
137
137
137
270
270
310
350
430
500
556
560
630
670
770
792
(mm)
338
348
356
363
373
393
408
427
455
483
508
513
538
569
594
645
695
722
757
804
906
906
961
(mm)
200
200
200
200
200
250
250
300
350
450
500
550
600
600
625
750
875
1000
1125
1250
1375
1500
(mm)
104
124
139
154
174
214
239
282
338
393
444
451
502
563
614
715
816
869
927
1032
1136
1238
1348
AWWA
C-207
Class D
(mm)
875
937
1000
1125
1250
1500
BS 1560/
ANSI 16.5
Class 150
(mm)
200
200
200
200
272
250
250
300
350
450
500
550
600
600
680
820
Weight3)
(mm)
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
(kg)
5
8
9
11
12
16
19
27
40
60
80
110
125
175
200
300
350
380
475
560
700
1200
1250
1) When using earth rings

the flange thickness must be
added to the mounting length
2) TC = Earth ring Type C
3) Weights are approximate values
and applicable to PN16 without
D = flange outer diameter
see flange tables
Mean values are not available
155 (6.10)
131 (5.16)
TC 2)
D1
A1
M20 (1/2 NPT )
B
L
TC
Connector length standard cable
Connector length special cable
[ S /cm]
[ S /cm]
50
300
40
200
30
20
100
10
5
5
5
100
150
300
200
600
300 [m]
900
[ft]
50 100
200
150 300 600
2008
cable
length
Kabellnge
300
900
400
500
1200 1500
[m]
[ft]
cable
length
Kabellnge
www.profimess.de
S 103
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Contents
Flow nomogram SI-01 / SI-02

Startpage
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 104
2008
flow velocity
SI-02
Electromagnetic
Flowmeter for
General Applications
Contents
Startpage
Universally applicable
Separate or compact measuring
transmitter
Variety of lining material
DN15...DN2000
DIN- or ANSI flanges
High-temperature version
2008
Pressure level up to PN100
Description: The SI-02 series of electromagnetic flowmeters

is always a combination of measuring pick-up and measuring
transmitter MU-5000 which can be either directly mounted on
the pick-up or separately mounted on the wall by means of a
fixing metal plate. The measuring pick-up consists of a
magnetically non-conductive measuring tube with plastic
lining, magnetic coils fastened diametrically on the tube and
at least two electrodes which are inserted through the tube's
wall and establish contact with the measuring medium. As
current passes through the magnetic coils, a clocked magnetic field is generated which penetrates the magnetically nonconductive measuring tube and induces in the electrically
conductive medium a voltage proportional to the flow velocity.
The electrodes inside the tube tap this voltage and pass it on
to the measuring transmitter MU-5000. Now the transmitter
generates a current signal in the range of 0(4)...20-mA which
is linearly connected to the mean velocity of flow.
The measuring pick-up has a SENSORPROM memory module in which its individual data is stored. The result is that nearly every measuring pick-up of the SI-02 series can be operate
along with every MU-5000 measuring transmitter without the
need for prior parameterization.
Range of application: Electromagnetic flowmeters are suited for measuring nearly all electrically conductive fluids, pulp
and slurry that have a conductivity of at least 5 microSiemens. Temperature, pressure, density and viscosity are of
no consequence for the method of measurement so long as
the measurement is performed within the velocity range of
0.5... 10 m/s and the permissible material specifications do
not fall short or are not exceeded. Applications for the SI-02
series are found in a wide range of industrial segments since
the material combinations ensure resistance to nearly all
media in respect of different electrodes and lining materials.
www.profimess.de
S 105
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
Nominal diameter: The SI-02 series of electromagnetic flowmeters is designed to cater to a large number of applications
in the entire industry. For this reason, typical nominal diameters of DN15 (1/2") to DN2000 (78") in DIN levels are available.
Flange design and pressure level: The process connection
for the SI-02 is always designed as flange connection matching with the selected nominal diameter and may comply
with the DIN or the ANSI (AWWA) standard.
Ordering codes:
Ordering number: SI-02. [0][0][1][5]. 4. 1. 1. 1. 1. 2
for General Applications
Nominal diameter DN15 to DN2000:

[ ][ ][ ][ ] e. g. 0040 for DN40
Flange design and pressure level:
0 = as per EN 1092-1 (DIN flange)
PN6 for nominal diameters DN65...DN2000
PN63 for nominal diameters DN50...DN400.
not for PTFE lining
PN100 for nominal diameters DN25...DN350.
not for PTFE lining
7 = as per ANSI B16.5 Class 150
for nominal diameters 1/2"...24"
8 = as per ANSI B16.5 Class 300
for nominal diameters 1/2"...24"
9 = as per AWWA C207 Class D
for nominal diameters 28"...78"
Flange material:
1 = flanges made of plain carbon steel ASTM A 105
2 = flanges made of stainless steel AISI 304 (1.4301)
3 = flanges and sensor made of stainless steel AISI 316L, polished
Electrode material:
1 = AISI 316Ti (stainless steel 1.4571)
2 = Hastelloy C276
3 = Platinum (no earthing electrodes)
4 = Titanium
5 = Tantalum (no earthing electrodes)
Lining:
1 = Neopren for media temperatures 0C to +70C,
0.01 to 100 bar
2 = EPDM for media temperatures -10C to +95C,
0.01 to 40 bar
3 = Linatex for media temperatures -40C to +70C,
0.01 to 40 bar
4 = Ebonite for media temperatures 0C to +95C,
0.01 to 100 bar
5 = PTFE for media temperatures -20C to +100C,
0.3 to 50 bar, DN15 to DN600 only
6 = PTFE for media temperatures -20C to +180C,
0.6 to 50 bar, DN15 to DN300 only
The pressure level of the DIN flanges depends on the selected nominal diameter and it can be selected as per the
Ordering codes. In the ANSI flanges, pressure levels of 150
lbs. or 300 lbs. are available, for higher nominal diameter ranges of 28" to 78" AWWA flanges of Class D (10 bar) are
used.
Flange and housing material: In the standard delivery
package, the flange and housing for the measurement pickup consist of carbon steel with anti-corrosive 2-component
coating. Optionally, the flanges made of stainless steel AISI
304 (1.4301) with housing made of carbon steel or, flanges
and housing made of polished stainless steel AISI 316L
(1.4404) can be ordered.
Contents
Startpage
Electrode material: The standard electrodes for the SI-02

are of stainless steel AISI 316 Ti (1.4571). Optionally, depending on the properties of the measuring medium also materials such as tantalum, Hastelloy, platinum or titanium can be
used. In the case of PTFE lining or the electrode materials
platinum and tantalum, the measurement pick-up does not
contain earthing electrodes. Especially in the case of plastic
piping the earthing for the medium should be implemented
through earth rings available separately. These can be easily
clamped at the inlet of the measurement pick-up.
Lining: As lining material Neopren, EPDM, Linatex, Ebonite
or PTFE can be selected depending on the medium and temperature. With regard to pressure and temperature, the application range mainly depends on the lining. For high-temperature applications, the measurement pick-up can be supplied
with a special PTFE lining up to 180C media temperature.
Measuring transmitter: In principle, the SI-02 is suited for
operations with a directly mounted measuring transmitter or
for separate mounting. The MU-5000 measuring transmitter
can be used universally (see data sheet MU-5000), hence it
can be mounted directly on the measurement pick-up or
positioned away from it by means of a wall fixture. If the SI-02
is required as a spare, since the MU-5000 measuring transmitter is already available, only the measurement pick-up can
be ordered without the measuring transmitter.
Cable gland: The terminal box for the SI-02 can be provided
with a cable gland PG13.5 or, depending on the selected
flange standard, with a gland M20x1.5 for DIN flanges or
1/2"-NPT for ANSI (AWWA) flanges.
Electrical specifications measurement pick-up:

(see also Data sheet for measuring transmitter MU-5000)
Cable insertion:
PG13.5 or M20x1.5 for DIN flanges

or 1/2"-NPT for ANSI (AWWA)
flanges
Protection class:
IP 67 (IP 68 on request)
EMC:
89/336 EEC
Measuring transmitter:
0 = none
1 = with MU-5000, accuracy 0.5%
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 106
2008
Cable gland:
1 = PG13.5
2 = M20x1.5 (not for ANSI flanges)
3 = 1/2"-NPT (for ANSI flanges only)
Measuring principle: electromagnetic induction
Contents
Exciter frequency:
Conductivity of
medium:
12.5 Hz for DN15...DN65

6.25 Hz for DN80...DN150
3.125 Hz for DN200...DN1200
1.57 Hz for DN1400...DN2000
Testing pressure:
1.5 x nominal pressure
Vibration-proof:
18...1000 Hz any,
3.17 g effective, in all directions
as per EN 60068-2-36
Lining:
Neopren, EPDM, Linatex, Ebonit,

PTFE or PTFE for high temperature
at least 5 micro-Siemens/cm
Startpage Operating range:
Accuracy:
0.5... 10 m/s at specified accuracy,

below and above this greater
deviations
Materials:
Flange
and housing:
Standard: carbon steel with

anti-corrosive 2-component coating
(min 150 micrometer)
Option 1: flanges made of stainless
steel AISI 304 (1.4301), housing
carbon steel
Option 2: flanges and housing made
of stainless steel AISI 316L (1.4404),
polished
AISI 304 (stainless steel 1.4301)
AISI 316 Ti (stainless steel 1.4571)
Option: Hastelloy C-276,
Platinium/Iridium, Titanium, Tantalum

(+/- 0.25% of measured value
optional)
Ambient
temperature:
-40C...+100C for separate

-20C...+50C for directly mounted
Media temperature: 0C...+70C for Neopren lining

-10C...+95C for EPDM lining
-10C...+70C for Linatex
(rubber) lining
(for temperatures below -10C
stainless steel flanges must be used)
0C...+95C for Ebonite lining
-20C...+100C for standard
PTFE lining
-20C...+180C for high-temperature
PTFE lining
Attention: For stainless steel flanges
note the pressure-temperature curve!
Operating pressure: 0.01...100 bar absolute
for Neopren lining
for EPDM lining
0.01...40 absolute
for Linatex lining
for Ebonite lining
for standard PTFE lining
(DN15...DN600 only)
for high-temperature PTFE lining
(DN15...DN300 only)
Measuring tube:
Electrodes:
Earthing
electrodes:
similar to measuring electrodes

excepting for PTFE lining (use earth
rings)
Process connection: DIN flanges for nominal diameters

DN15...DN2000:
PN40 at DN15...DN65
PN16 at DN65...DN150
PN10 at DN200...DN1000
PN6 at DN1100...DN2000
(Options see Ordering codes)
ANSI flanges B16.5 for nominal
diameters 1/2"...24" pressure level
150 lbs. or 300 lbs.
AWWA flanges C-207 for nominal
diameters 28"...78" Class D (10 bar)
Weight:
see Dimension drawings
Connector length standard cable
Connector length special cable
[ S /cm]
[ S /cm]
50
300
40
200
30
20
100
10
5
5
5
100
2008
150
200
300
600
cable
length
Kabellnge
50 100
300 [m]
900
200
150 300 600
[ft]
300
900
400
500
1200 1500
[m]
[ft]
cable
length
Kabellnge
www.profimess.de
S 107
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Dimensions SI-02
DN
(mm)
15
25
40
50
65
80
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
700
750
800
900
1000
1100
1200
1400
1500
1600
1800
2000
A1
A 1)
(mm)
187
187
197
205
212
222
242
255
276
304
332
357
362
387
418
443
494
544
571
606
653
704
755
810
925
972
1025
1123
1223
(mm)
338
338
348
356
363
373
393
406
427
455
483
508
513
538
569
594
645
695
722
757
804
906
906
961
1076
1123
1176
1274
1374
(mm)
59
59
82
72
72
72
85
85
85
137
137
137
270
270
310
350
430
500
556
560
630
670
770
792
1000
1020
1130
1250
1375
D1
(mm)
104
104
124
139
154
174
214
239
282
338
393
444
451
502
563
614
715
816
869
927
1032
1136
1238
1348
1675
1672
1915
1974
2174
TC 3)
L 2)
EN1092-1-201
PN 6, 10, 16
PN 25
PN 40
(mm)
200
200
200
200
200
200
250
250
300
350
450
500
550
600
600
625
750
875
1000
1125
1250
1375
1500
1750
2000
2250
2500
(mm)
200
200
200
200
200
272
250
250
300
350
450
500
550
600
600
680
750
(mm)
200
200
200
200
200
272
250
250
300
350
450
500
550
600
600
625
750
ANSI 16.5
PN 64 PN100 Class Class
150
300
(mm) (mm)
(mm) (mm)
200
200
260
200
200
280
200
200
300
200
276
200
350
200
320
272
340
272
323
272
400
250
380
310
450
250
420
335
450
300
415
300
530
350
480
350
620
450
550
450
600
680
500
500
700
800
550
550
600
750
600
600
640
680
730
820
860
(mm)
875
937
1000
1125
1250
1500
1875
D1
A1
M 20 (1/2" NPT )
B
L
TE
Weight4)
Contents
(mm)
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
(mm)
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
8
8
8
8
10
10
10
10
(kg)
4
5
8
9
11
12
16
19
27
40
60
80
110
125
175
200
300
350
380
475
560
700
1200
1250
1753
2600
2341
3253
4060
Startpage
1) 15mm shorter for

AISI terminal boxes
(high-temperature version)
2) When using earth rings
the flange thickness must be
added to mounting length
3) TC = earth ring Type C,
TE = earth ring Type E
(included for PTFE measuring
transmitter in high-temperature
version and pre-mounted)
4) Weights are approximate values
(for PN16) and applicable without
5) PN35 = 272
D = flange diameter
see flange tables - not available
155 (6.10)
131 (5.16)
TE 3)
AWWA
C-207
Class D
TC
Separate mounting
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 108
2008
Flow-Nomogramm SI-01 / SI-02
Contents
2008
Startpage
www.profimess.de
S 109
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
MU-5000
Measuring Transmitter for
Electromagnetic Flowmeters
SI-01 and SI-02
Contents
Startpage
Description:
The MU-5000 is a high-performance measuring transmitter
based on a micro-processor with built-in alphanumeric multilanguage display. The MU-5000 is always a part of SI-01 or
SI-02 series of measurement pick-up. It supplies power to its
magnetic coils and evaluates the signal transmitted by the
electrodes. On the output side, the device has a power output of a 0(4)...20-mA signal as well as an active and a passive impulse output. All outputs can be adjusted in unidirectional (positive flow direction only) as well as bidirectional (forward and backward) way and, a parameterizable limit value
can be evaluated with an additional relay. A programmable
time-constant acts on the display and output signals.
Moreover, the measuring transmitter has a digital input with
which the internal counter can be set to zero or the output
signal can be controlled or fixed. The measurement pick-ups
of the SI-01 or SI-02 series possess a SENSORPROM
memory module in which their individual data is stored. The
result is that every measurement pick-up of the SI series can
operate along with every MU-5000 measuring transmitter
without the need for prior parameterizing. After connecting
the MU-5000 to a measurement pick-up the specific data is
read into the MU-5000 and it begins to function immediately.
The standard accuracy of the MU-5000 is 0.5% of the measured value. In combination with the SI-02, however, the
system can also be supplied optionally with calibration set
to 0.25%.
Easy to assemble
Separate or compact
Easy commissioning and
maintenance
Optimal dynamics
Self-diagnostics
2008
IP67
www.profimess.de
S 111
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
Display: The MU-5000 measuring transmitter can be supplied as a blind version without a display or with a back-lit
display for flow rate, counter values and errors with 3x20
characters. Since without a display the device cannot be programmed, the settings must be specified for flow volume
range and outputs while ordering.
Measuring principle:
Magnetic-inductive with clocked

constant field
Empty tube:
Empty tube identification

(special cable required for
separate mounting)
Zero point setting:

Creep volume
suppression:
automatic
Exciter frequency:
measurement pick-up size of

pulsating DC (125 mA)
Assembly: The standard MU-5000 measuring transmitter

can be mounted directly on a measurement pick-up of the
SI-01 or SI-02 series or, located separately from the measurement pick-up by means of a wall-mounting unit. In the case
of a separate variant, the terminal box of the SI-01/02 is
connected to the measuring transmitter by means of a
double-shielded cable while in the compact version it is
mounted directly on the base of the terminal box. Another
possibility of separate assembly for the MU-5000 is the 19"
design. This version is suitable for mounting into a 19" component assembly carrier that can also be designed as back
panel housing or for switch-board mounting.
Supply voltage: The MU-5000 can be supplied in a version
for low voltages (11 ...30 V DC and 11 ...24 V AC) or for high
voltages (115/230 V AC). Communication through HART protocol is only possible in the case of the variant with high voltage in the standard housing with display.
Electrode input
impedance:
Accuracy:
Ambient temperature
during operation:
0...9.9% of max. flow
Contents
Startpage
> 1 x 10 14 Ohm
(optional +/- 0.25%
of measured value)
-20C...+50C
in the version with display
-20C...+60C
in the version without display
-40C...+70C
Materials:
Compact version:
Ordering codes
Ordering number:
19"-slider:
MU-5000 1. 1. 1
Measuring Transmitter for Electromagnetic

Flowmeters SI-01 and SI-02
Fiberglass reinforced polyamide

(on request stainless steel
AISI 316)
standard 19" slider
(aluminium/steel) as per DIN
41494 width 21 TE, height 3 HE
Vibration-proof:
Display:
0 = no display
1 = with display
Assembly:
1 = for direct mounting on the measurement pick-up
2 = with wall-mounting unit for assembly
separate from measurement pick-up
3 = measuring transmitter for mounting on the 19" component
assembly carrier (HART protocol not possible)
Compact version:
18...1000 Hz any,
3.17 g effectively, sinusoidal in all
directions as per IEC 68-2-36
19-slider:
1...800 Hz, 1 g, sinusoidal in all

directions as per IEC 68-2-36
Weight:
Supply voltage:
1 = 11...30 V DC and 11...24 V AC
2= 115/230 V AC 50/60 Hz
3 = 115/230 V AC 50/60 Hz with HART protocol for versions with display
(MU-5000.1) only
Compact version:
0.75 kg
19-slider:
0.8 kg
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 112
2008
Dimensions
Protection class:
Supply voltage:
Contents
AC/DC-Version:
11...30 VDC or 11...24 VAC
Compact version:
IP 67
AC-Version:
115...230 VAC +10%-15%

(50...60 Hz), 17 VA
19-slider:
IP 20
EMC-functioning:
fault emitting as per EN 50081-1

(light industry), fault-proof as per
EN 50082-1 (industry)
Digital input:
11...30 V DC,
activation time 50 ms,
current for 11 V DC I = 2.5 mA,
current for 30 V DC I = 7 mA
Power consumption:
AC/DC-Version:
Startpage
AC-Version:
Cable insertion:
6 W at 24 VAC
(IN = 250 mA, IST = 8A (30 ms))
or
11 W at 12 VDC
(IN = 400 mA, IST = 4A (250 ms))
9 VA at 230 VAC
Digital output:
PG 13.5 or M 20 x 1.5 at
DIN-flanges or 1/2"-NPT
at ANSI (AWWA)-flanges
Frequency:
0...10 kHz, 50% scan ratio

(uni/bidirectional)
0.1...30 s, adjustable
Time-constant:
Impulse (activ):
24 VDC, 30 mA,
1kOhm<= Ri <= 10 kOhm,
short-circuit-proof
Impulse (passive):
3...30 VDC, max. 110 mA,

200 Ohm<= Ri <= 10 kOhm
Time-constant:
0.1...30 s, adjustable
Power supply
Relay output:
Time-constant:
change-over relay,
as the current output
Load:
42 VAC at max. 2 A,
24 VDC at max. 1 A
Power output:
Output signal:
0 ... 20 mA or 4 ... 20 mA
Load:
< 800 Ohm
Time-constant:
0.1... 30 s adjustable
Galvanic Isolation:
All inputs and outputs are galvanic

isolated.
2008
Display and keypad:

Counter:
two 8-digit counter for

forward, backward and net flow
Display:
back-lit alphanumeric text, 3x20

characters for display of flow rate,
counter values, settings and
errors, display of backward flow
by minus symbol.
Time-constant:
time-constant as current output

time-constant
www.profimess.de
S 113
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
VM-01
for Viscous Fluids,
for OEM Applications
Contents
Startpage
For media with viscosities between

20 - 4000 cSt
Aluminium housing, steel gear-wheels
Low pressure drop
High pressure resistance
2008
Description:
The VM-01 series of the flowmeter measuring sensor consists
of a par of toothed wheels which is driven by the flow of fluid
according to the working principle of a gear-wheel pump. The
bearing for the measuring sensor is designed as a radial and
axial sliding contact bearing (VM-01.2: ball bearing). The gearwheel movement is scanned by means of a magneto-resistive
sensor that is hermetically separated from the measuring
chamber. The gear-wheel diameter of the VM-01 is ideal due to
its low resistance to flow and especially low sound level.
The gear-wheel flowmeters of the VM-01 series are mainly
used for measuring consumption, control of filling operations
and for monitoring lubrication points.
Due to their small dimensions and, particularly, due to the low
pricing, they are excellently suitable for OEM applications.
www.profimess.de
S 115
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions and Operating ranges
Type
Operating
range
(l/min)
Viscosity
range
(cSt)
Connection
Measuring
volume
(ml/impulse)
Resolution
VM-01.0
0.02...4
20...4000
G 1/4-female
0.04
25.000
VM-01.1
0.25...10
20...4000
G 3/8-female
0.2
5.000
VM-01.2
0.16...16
20...3000
G 3/8-female
0.25
4.082
VM-01.3
1...65
20...4000
G 3/4-female
500
VM-01.4
1...200
20...4000
G 1-female
5.222
191.5
max. pressure:
VM-01.0.1:
VM-01.0.2:
VM-01.1:
VM-01.2:
VM-01.3:
VM-01.4:
200
160
160
160
160
80
bar
bar
bar
bar
bar
bar
Temperature range:
-10C +80C
Accuracy:
VM-01.1:
VM-01.2:
VM-01.3:
+/- 3% above 20 mm2/s

+/- 0.3% above 20 mm2/s
+/- 2.5% above 20 mm2/s
0.5 kg
0.7 kg
1.9 kg
Supply voltage:
12...30 VDC,
polarity-reversal-proof
Output signal:
rectangular impulses,
min. 0.8*UB,
scan ratio
1:1 (+/- 15%)
Protection class:
IP 65
Power consumption:
0.6 W max.
Contents
Startpage
Materials
Weight:
VM-01.1:
VM-01.2:
VM-01.3:
(impulse/l)
Type
Housing
Gear-wheels
Bearing
VM-01.0.1
VM-01.0.2
aluminium (anodized)
stainless steel
ball bearing
stainless steel 1.4462 ball bearing
VM-01.1.1
steel
VM-01.1.2
stainless steel 1.4462 multi-layer sliding bearing
VM-01.2
steel
multi-layer sliding bearing
ball bearing
VM-01.3
aluminium
steel
multi-layer sliding bearing
VM-01.4
aluminium
(hard-seamed)
steel
ball bearing
Dimensions:
VM-01.0 and VM-01.1
G 1/4
oder G 3/8
24 Volt (brown)
signalling channel 1
channel 1 (green)
VM-01.2: same as VM-01.1, however, housing 55 x 65 mm,

height 108 mm
0 Volt (white)
VM-01.3
Ordering codes
Ordering number:
VM-01. 1. 2
G 3/4 or G 1

Operating ranges:
0 = 0.02 - 4 l/min
1 = 0.25 - 10 l/min
2 = 0.16 - 16 l/min
3 = 1 - 65 l/min
4 = 1 - 200 l/min
1 = aluminium
Width x depth: 90 x 100 mm
2 = stainless steel (VM-01.0 and VM-01.1 only)
VM-01.4: same as VM-01.3, however, housing 120 x 170 mm,

height 150 mm
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 116
2008
Material:
SD-01
Plug-In Display for
Gear-Wheel Sensors
Contents
Startpage
Display and F/I converter
Description:
The SD-01 series is a universally applicable on-the-spot display for all gear-wheel volume sensors of Profimess GmbH
provided with the plug connection as per DIN43650. The display is simply inserted between the plug and plug socket of
the volume meter. Optionally, the display unit can display the
flow as the current value or the accumulated volume as the
sum. In the basic version, the SD-01 transmits the rectangular signal from the gear-wheel volume sensor without modifying it. In the next extended level, the device is equipped with
a F/I converter which translates the rectangular signal in into
a freely parametrizable 0(4)...20mA signal. Another method is
to equip the display unit with two relay contacts which can
be used for monitoring MIN/MAX parameters of a flow volume or to implement a simple dosing function. All necessary
settings for the SD-01 are stored in an EEPROM and are
preserved even in the event of a power failure. If previously
supplied gear-wheel volume sensors need to be upgraded
with the SD-01, the user can remove just the plug PCB of
the sensor and mount the display unit without much effort.
Capable to simple dosing

No additional auxiliary power supply
Upgrades for sensors already supplied
2008
In practice, use of impulse emitting volume sensors is widely
popular. Often the user wishes, on the one hand, to process
the measured value within his guide system but, on the other
hand, also make it available on-the-spot so as to optically
monitor maintenance work or regulating operations. Also,
many controls are capable of processing only analogue
inputs but not impulse signals or, for this purpose, an expensive impulse input card must be added. The SD-01 plug-in
display offers an ideal and cost-effective solution to this problem. This version with the display of the accumulated volume and two relay contacts is moreover capable of dosing
through the connected volume sensor by connecting one of
the relay outputs to a magnetic valve and by utilizing the
second as the START/STOP input. This feature turns the
volume sensor/SD-01 unit into a practical dosing system.
www.profimess.de
S 117
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
Output signal: Selectively, the SD-01 passes on the rectangular signal from the gear-wheel sensor without modifying it, it
enables conversion to parametrizable 4...20 mA, or provides
two relay contacts which can be utilized to switching flow limit
values or for dosing the volumes.
Supply voltage:
10...19 VDC or 18...28VDC
Power
consumption:
120 mA max.
Display:
7-segment LED, 7.62 mm, red
Supply voltage: The available supply voltage ranges are

10...19 V DC or 18...28 V DC.
Range:
0.000...9999 with floating point,

overflow >9999 display 9999
Display: Depending on the version, the display of the SD-01

displays either the measured current volume flow or the accumulated volume. If dosing function is required, select the option
"2 = Volume". The device's second relay output is used as a
digital input which resets the counter and allows counting until
it works in the "HIGH" status.
Keypad:
two keys behind the front aperture
Protection class:
IP65
El. connection:
plug DIN43650 4-pole,

Operating
temperature:
0...60C
Storage
temperature:
-25C...+85C
Housing:
aluminium
Dimensions:
height without plug approx. 35 mm,

width approx. 60 mm,
depth approx. 60 mm
Weight:
ca. 0.12 kg
Output rating per

channel:
0.3 W max., short-circuit-proof
Analogue output (Option):

Output:
0(4)...20 mA, short-circuit-proof
Load:
<= 250 Ohm at 24 VDC supply

<= 50 Ohm at 12 VDC supply
Resolution:
10 Bit
Version: SD-01.2
24 VDC, 1 A max.
Version: SD-01.1
1
PIN 1 = 12/24 VDC
PIN 2 = GND
1
PIN 1 = 12/24 VDC
PIN 2 = GND
PIN 1 = 12/24 VDC

PIN 2 = GND
PIN 3 = relay 1
PIN 3 = 0/4 - 20 mA
PIN 3 = channel 1
PIN
PIN
PIN
= relay 2
Startpage
Impulse output (incremental signal):

Impulse amplitude: approx. 0.8 x Supply voltage,
depends on load
Impulse form in
symmetrical output
signal:
rectangle, scan ratio for each channel
1:1, +/-15%
Impulse
displacement
between two
channels:
90, +/- 30
Relay outputs:
Load:
Version: SD-01.3
Contents
= channel 2
Ordering codes
Ordering number:
SD-01. 2. 1. 1.
Dimensions
Plug-In Display for Gear-Wheel Volume Sensors

Output signal:
1 = rectangular signals
2 = analogue output 0(4)...20 mA
3 = 2 relay contacts 24 V DC 1 A
Supply voltage:
1 = 24 VDC
2 = 12 VDC
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 118
2008
Display:
1 = current flow value
2 = volume (sum of flow), not for SD-01.1
VM-04
High-Precision
for Viscous Fluids
Contents
Startpage
For media with viscosities above 1 cSt

Cast or stainless steel versions available
Accuracy better than 0.3% of measured
value
High resolution
2008
Description:
The VM-04 series of the flowmeters measuring sensor consists
of a pair of toothed wheels which is driven by the flow of fluid
according to the working principle of a gear-wheel pump. The
bearing for the measuring sensor is designed as a radial or
axial sliding contact bearing. The gear-wheel movement is
scanned by means of two magneto-resistive sensors which are
phase displaced by 90 and hermetically separated from the
measuring chamber. The two-channel scanning enables a higher resolution of measurement and detection of direction of
flow by means of suitable electronic devices. Optionally, all
devices can be supplied with an explosion-proof design with
separate switching amplifier. The gear-wheel flowmeter VM-04
is outstanding due to its low resistance to flow and especially
low sound level.
Due to their excellent accuracy of measurement along with
high resolution, these devices are especially suited for use in
test beds for measuring small and least volumes of flow. Some
of the areas of deployment are:
Measurement of consumption
Controlling filling operations
Dosing oils and chemicals
Measurement of flow for paints and varnishes
Ratio regulation for polyol and isocyanate
www.profimess.de
S 119
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
1...100000 mm2/s
depending on viscosity and usage
rate of the device
(exact values on request)
Viscosity range:
Pressure drop:
Temperature range:
Standard version:
VM-04.9:
High-temp.
version:
Materials:
Series 1-4:
Series 5:
Electronics:
Standard:
Ex-Version:
Supply voltage:
Output signal:
Protection class:
Power consumption:
Versions (Tab. 1)
Depending on the area of usage and the media properties,
the VM-04 can be supplied in 8 different product series:
Series
-10 C ... +120 C

-20...+80 C
-30...+150 C
housing GGG 40,
measuring device 1.7139
housing stainless steel 1.4404
measuring device stainless steel
1.4462
2 sensors, 90 phase displaced
for detection of direction
with separate switching amplifier
12...30 VDC,
rectangular impulses, PNP, min.
0.8*UB, scan ratio 1:1 (+/- 15%)
IP 65
0.9 W max..
min.
viscosity
(mm2/s)
Accuracy
(% of
measured
value)
Media
Foreign
properties
particles
Viscosity Lubricating
GGG40
20
+/- 0.3
low
good
GGG40
50
+/- 0.5
medium
good
30 m
GGG40
100
+/- 1.0
high
good
50 m
GGG40
100
+/- 0.5
medium
negligible
30 m
stainless steel
1.4404
stainless steel
1.4404
GGG40
100
+/- 0.5
medium
negligible
30 m
20
+/- 0.3
low
good
20 m
20
+/- 1
low
bad
20 m
stainless steel
1.4404
20
+/- 1
low
bad
20 m
6
7
8
Contents
20 m
Startpage
Application examples (Tab. 2)

Series Application
example
1
Ordering codes
Ordering number:
Material
VM-04 3. 1. F. PS.. 3. S. 0
flow measurement
and counting
Medium
Bearing
Bearing play
lubricating oils
ball bearing
small
filling
gear oil
ball bearing
enlarged
consumption measurement
offset paint
bronze
sliding bearing
large
ratio regulation
Polyol +
Isocyanat
carbidemteal
sliding bearing
enlarged
dosing
clear varnish
carbidemetal
sliding bearing
enlarged
dosing
solvents
7/8
ball bearing
small
solvents
hybrid
ball bearing
small
Operating ranges:
2...9 = as per table 3
Operating ranges in l/min (Tab. 3)
Series:
Start
l/min
Type
Sealing:
0.001
F = Viton (-15C+120C)
E = EPDM (-30C+120C)
P = FEP (-30C+120C), Viton kernel with PTFE mantle
Series
1
VM-04.2
0.008-2
0.004
VM-04.3
0.02-4
0.02-4
0.02-4
0.008
VM-04.4a
0.04-8
0.01
VM-04.4
0.16-16 0.16-16
7/8
0.02-2* 0.008-2 0.008-2
0.16-16 0.16-16 0.16-16 0.16-16
0.01
VM-04.5
0.2-40
0.2-30
Connection type:
0.02
VM-04.6
0.4-80
0.4-80
0.6-40
0.3-60
0.3-60
0.4-80
0.4-80
PS = with assembly plate, connection sideways
0.03
VM-04.7
0.6-160 0.6-160
PU = with assembly plate, connection at bottom
0.04
VM-04.8
1-250
1-250
1.2-80
1-160
1-160
1-250
R = without assembly plate, connection sideways

(Series 5-6 only)
3**
VM-04.9
3-315
3-315
Process connection:
0.6-100 0.6-100 0.6-160
* accuracy 3%, linearity 1.5%

** only spare parts, model discontinued
2 = G 1/8-female (operating range 2 only)*

3 = G 3/8-female (operating ranges 3...4 only)
Parameters (Tab. 4)
4 = G 1/2-female (operating ranges 5...6 only)
Type
6 = G 1-female (operating ranges 7...8 only)

8 = G 1 1/2-female (operating range 9 only)
max. pressure
(bar)
Pressure
peaks
(bar)
Acoustic
pressure level
(dB(A))
Resolutions
Imp. / l
VM-04.2
400
480
< 60
40.000
Electronics version:
VM-04.3
400
480
< 60
25.000
S = standard
VM-04.4a
400
480
< 60
10000
H = high-temperature version (Series 3, 4, 5 on request)
VM-04.4
400
480
< 60
4.081,63
X = intrinsically safe with separate switching amplifier (EEx ia IIC)
VM-04.5
400
480
< 70
2.500
Special issues
VM-04.6
400
480
< 70
965.25
VM-04.7
315
350
< 70
333.33
VM-04.8
315
350
< 72
191.5
VM-04.9
210
240
< 80
95
0 = none
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 120
2008
* for operating range 2 with connecting plate the thread size is G 3/8-female
Flow resistance VM-04

Series 1, 2, 6, 7, 8 Parameter: viscosity (mm2/s)
Contents Operating range 2

1000
600
16000
5000
300
16
16
bar
bar
14
14
12
10
100
8
6
4
34
20
Durchflusswiderstand p
Startpage
2000
Operating range 2 (section)

3000
2000
1000
600
12
10
8
300
6
4
100
34
0
0
0,5
1
Flow Q
1,5
2,0 l/min
16000
5000
300
16
bar
bar
14
14
12
100
10
8
6
34
4
2
16
0
1
1,5
2
Flow Q
2,5
3,5
3000
2000
1000
1000
10
600
8
6
300
100
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5 l/min
Operating range 5
2000
1000
3000 2000
600
bar
14
14
12
300
10
8
6
100
34
1000
300
600
16
bar
0,5 l/min
Flow Q
16
12
100
10
8
34
4
2
0
0
2008
0,4
12
0
0,0
4 l/min
Operating range 4
3000
0,3
10
0,5
0,2
Operating range 3 (section)
2000 1000 600
0,1
Flow Q
Operating range 3
0
0,0
8
Flow Q
10
12
14
16 l/min
10
15
20
Flow Q
25
www.profimess.de
S 121
30
35
PROFI
MESS
40 l/min
GMBH
Series 1, 2, 6, 7, 8 Parameter: viscosity (mm2/s)

Operating range 6
Operating range 7
1000
600
300
3000 2000
16
bar
14
14
3000
16
bar
100
12
10
34
8
10
6
4
2
1000
600
300
Contents
12
100
10
8
34
Startpage
4
2
0
0
10
20
30
40
Flow Q
50
60
70
80 l/min
20
40
60
80
Flow Q
100
120
140
160 l/min
Operating range 8
3000
2000
1000
600
16
bar
14
300
12
10
100
34
10
4
2
0
0
50
100
150
200
250 l/min
Flow Q
Series 3 Parameter: viscosity (mm2/s)

Operating range 6
Operating range 8
2000
16
bar
1000
12
600
10
8
300
14
14
3000
12
2000
10
8
6
1000
600
300
100
6
4
100
PROFI
MESS
10
20
Flow Q
30
40 l/min
10
20
30
40
Flow Q
50
60
70
80 l/min
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 122
2008
3000
16
bar
Flow resistance VM-04

Series 4, 5 Parameter: viscosity (mm2/s)
Contents Operating range 4

3000
Operating range 7
2000
1000
3000
600
14
14
12
300
10
8
6
100
34
1000
600
12
10
300
8
6
100
4
34
2
0
0
8
Flow Q
10
12
14
16 l/min
3000
20
40
60
80
100 l/min
Flow Q
Operating range 5
Operating range 8
2000
1000
3000
600
16
16
bar
bar
14
14
12
300
10
8
100
6
34
2000
16
bar
Startpage
16
bar
2000
1000
12
600
10
8
300
6
100
34
0
0
10
15
Flow Q
20
25
30 l/min
40
80
Flow Q
120
160 l/min
Operating range 6
3000
1000
600
16
bar
14
300
12
10
8
100
34
4
2
0
2008
10
20
30
Flow Q
40
50
60 l/min
www.profimess.de
S 123
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Electrical cable connection VM-04

24 Volt (brown)
Contents
channel 1 (green)
Startpage
channel 2 (yellow)
0 Volt (white)
Signal pattern VM-04

BB
CC
DD
EE
A
A
11
15
150
UUAA
II
22
4
4
UU
AA
II II
300
30
H
H
90
90
0
K
K
JJ
G G
Channel I
A rising flank
B one impulse (corresponds to the
throughput of a geometrical tooth-volume Vgz)
C falling flank
D switch on phase
D switch off phase
F scan ratio 1:1 15%
Channel II
G channel displacement
H flow direction 1
K reversal of direction of rotation
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 124
2008
H flow direction 2
VS-01
Aluminium
Screw-Spindle Volume Meter
for Viscous Media
Contents
Startpage
Description: In a robust all-metal housing made of aluminium two steel spindles with a cycloid profile are situated
which are set into rotation by the volume of flow being measured. The high precision manufactured spindles are held in
a ball-bearing and rotate without noise and pulsations. The
pair of spindle forms volumetrically precisely defined measuring chambers which represent a measure for the required
volume. The speed of rotation is, therefore, directly proportional to the current value of the flow. A screw-fitted proximity
switch located outside the measuring chamber detects the
rotational movement of the spindles without contact and
transmits it as impulses either in the form of a PNP-3-wire or
a NAMUR 2-wire signal. If the VS-01 is equipped with a
second proximity switch, the signals from the pick-up are
displaced by 90C to each other, with the result that the
direction flow can be detected on the basis of the signal
configuration. Thus, forward and reverse flows are identified
and, for example, in dosing operations or measurement of
consumption the measurements are not falsified. Optionally,
the flow body is provided with an additional G1/4" boring
which can be used for positioning a factory-mounted 4...20
mA temperature transmitter. The VS-01 delivers an accurate
flow and media temperature of a measuring point and is,
therefore, the ideal device for measuring fuel consumption in
Otto or Diesel engines.
Cost-effective
Highly accurate
Range of application: The VS-01 series of screw-spindle

volume meters is suitable for accurately measuring media
with viscosities of 1 to 1 x106 mm2/s, regardless of their
conductivity and their temperature. Also gasoline can be
reliably tapped where other flowmeters often pose a problem
due to their dependence on viscosity, the hostile properties
of the fuel and its low resilience. All versions of the VS-01
have a wide operating range where the smallest flowmeter
nearly starts at zero and the largest is capable of handling up
to 150 l/min.
The extremely cost-effective material combination of the VS01 offers a price advantage directly to the user as against
gear-wheel volume sensors. With up to processing pressures
of 40 bar and media temperatures up to 100C, the screwspindle volume meter represents an economical and yet an
accurate device to accomplish demanding tasks of measurement safely and with long-term stability.
Non-sensitive to viscosity
Flange or thread connection
Detection of direction
2008
Optionally with temperature transmitter
www.profimess.de
S 125
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Version:
Size:
The screw-spindle volumeter VS-01 is available in 4 different
sizes. the nominal flow rates of these versions are 10 l/min,
30 l/min, 50 l/min and 100 l/min where the connections are
DN15, DN20. DN25 and DN25 respectively.
Media:
Process connection:
Each size of the VS-01 can be supplied with thread as well
as flange connections. Possible thread sizes are R1/2" female, R3/4" female and R1" female. Possible flanges are DN15,
DN 20 or DN25, at pressure level PN16 or PN40.
Number and function:
of pick-ups:
The proximity switches that tape the movement of the screwspindles transmit the measurement either as PNP 3-wire or
as NAMUR 2-wire signal. As a standard, the VS-01 are provided with only one such proximity switch. Optionally, a second
proximity switch can be mounted that doubles the impulse or
detects the direction of flow. The impulse signal of the
second sensor is then displaced by 90 as against the first
signal with the result that the flow direction is detected on the
basis of the sequence of the signals
Attached temperature sensor:
For measuring the media temperature additionally, a PT100
temperature sensor can also be supplied that can be fixed on
the body of the VS-01 through a G1/4" boring. The temperature sensor transmits the range -20C...+100C as 4...20 mA
value. It is designed in 2-wire technology and powered with
24 V DC.
Flow ranges:
VS-01.1:
VS-01.2:
VS-01.3:
VS-01.4:
chemically neutral, easily lubricating,

non-abrasive
Contents
range 0.1...15 l/min,
nominal flow 10 l/min
Startpage
Measuring chamber volume:

VS-01.1:
1.65 ml/U
VS-01.2:
6.24 ml/U
VS-01.3:
10.5 ml/U
VS-01.4:
25.6 ml/U
RPM:
VS-01.1:
VS-01.2:
VS-01.3:
VS-01.4:
K-Factor:
VS-01.1:
VS-01.2:
VS-01.3:
VS-01.4:
range 61...9120 U/min,

for nominal flow 6060 U/min
1214 Impulses per litre
Millilitre per impulse:

VS-01.1:
0.824 ml/Impulse
VS-01.2:
3.12 ml/Impulse
VS-01.3:
5.24 ml/Impulse
VS-01.4:
12.8 ml/Impulse
VS-01. 2. 2. 11. 1. 0
Ordering number:
Aluminium Screw Spindle Volume Meter
Size:
1 = nominal
2 = nominal
3 = nominal
4 = nominal
flow
flow
flow
flow
10 l/min, DN15
30 l/min, DN20
50 l/min, DN25
100 l/min, DN25
Impulse frequency:
VS-01.1:
range 2.0...304 Hz,
nominal flow 202 Hz
VS-01.2:
range 1.6...242 Hz,
nominal flow 161 Hz
VS-01.3:
range 1.6...239Hz,
nominal flow 159 Hz
VS-01.4:
range 1.3...195 Hz,
nominal flow 130 Hz
Process connection:
1 = thread connection
2 = flange connection PN16
3 = flange connection PN40
Pressure:
40 bar max.
Temperature
range:
-20C...+100C
Number and function of pick-ups:

01 = 1 PNP-pick-up
11 = 2 PNP-pick-ups
02 = 1 NAMUR-pick-up
22 = 2 NAMUR-pick-ups
12 = 1 PNP-pick-up and 1 NAMUR-pick-up
Viscosity range:
1 to 1 x 106 mm2/s
Materials:
Housing:
Spindles:
aluminium, anodized
steel nitrified
Attached temperature sensor G1/4":

0 = no temperature sensor
1 = with temperature sensor
(please specify media temperature in detailed text)
Special issues:
0 = no special issues
1 = special version, please specify in detailed tex
PROFI
MESS
Bearing:
rolling contact bearing

(rolling contact bearing steel)
with steel cage
Sealing:
O-Rings made of Viton 80 Shore
Screws:
8.8
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 126
2008
Ordering codes
Dimensions
Contents
Mechanical Integration:
Filtration:
0.3 mm mesh width max.
Mounting position: any
Flow direction:
bidirectional
Connections:
tube thread R
DIN flange
NPT thread (option)
ANSI flange (option)
customer-specific special type
connections are possible
Startpage Electrical integration:

Sensor thread:
Sensors :
Temperature
sensor:
Weight:
M12 x 1
PNP 3-wire or NAMUR 2-wire
2-wire, -20C...+100C correspond to
4...20 mA , special ranges are possible
ca. 0.12 kg
VS-01
Thread
R inch
p bar
l
d
l1
mm
mm
mm
kg
VS-01.1
1/2
40
110
45 x 45
65
0,6
VS-01.2
3/4
40
145
55 x 55
95
1,1
VS-01.3
1
40
165
60 x 60
105
1,8
VS-01.4
1
40
200
70 x 70
140
2,7
VS-01.1
15
40
105
95
65
1,1
VS-01.2
20
40
135
105
95
1,6
VS-01.3
25
40
150
115
105
2,2
VS-01.4
25
40
185
115
140
3,1
VS-01
Proximity sensors:
PNP 3-wire:
Method of measurement: inductive
Material: PBTP
Temperature: -30C...+100C on the
front surface, -30C...+80C on the
cable
Cable: PUR 3x0.10 mm 2 m length
Switching: PNP rectangular signal
Load current: 50 mA max.
Frequency range: 0...5000 Hz
Voltage: 10...30V DC
Voltage drop: <= 3 V DC
Protection class: IP67
NAMUR 2-wire:
Method of measurement: inductive

Material: PBTP
Temperature: -30C...+75C on the
front surface, -30C...+80C on the
cable
Cable: PUR 2x0.14 mm 2 m length
Switching: NAMUR DIN 19234 Sinus
signal
Explosion protection class: EEx ia
IIC T6 Zone 1
Load current: attenuated < 1 mA, nonattenuated > 4 mA
Frequency range: 0...5000 Hz
Voltage: 8.2 V DC +/- 0.1 V DC
Load resistance: 1 kOhm +/- 1%
2008
Temperature sensor: Method of measurement: PT100,

IEC 751 DIN 43760
Material: stainless steel 1.4571
Operating range: -20C...+100C,
special ranges are possible
Sealing: Viton
Output: 4...20 mA, 2-wire
Load: 500 Ohm max.
plug coupling (5-pole)
Voltage: 24 V DC, polarity-reversal-proof
Weight: 135 g
DIN-flange
DN mm
p bar
L
mm
D mm
L1 mm
m
kg
Connection circuit diagram VS-01.x.x.01
Connection circuit diagram VS-01.x.x.02
www.profimess.de
S 127
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Choice of model size

Loading capacity VS-01.1
Contents
Startpage
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 128
2008
Life span values are applicable to lubricating media at temperatures up to 100C.

Abrasive and hostile media can lower the life span.

Loading capacity -VS-01.2
Contents
Startpage
2008

Abrasive and hostile media can lower the life span
www.profimess.de
S 129
PROFI
MESS
GMBH

Contents
Startpage
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 130
2008


Contents
Startpage
2008

www.profimess.de
S 131
PROFI
MESS
GMBH

Linearity VS-01
Contents
Startpage
VS-01.1
VS-01.2
VS-01.3
VS-01.4
The diagram shows the characteristics of Profimess' volumeter VS-01.

Every volumeter is calibrated to document the device-specific values.
Operating range VS-01
VS-01.1
VS-01.2
VS-01.3
VS-01.4
PROFI
MESS
1
2
Accurate functioning of the measuring instrument is ensured.

The 'Intermittent operation' range shows the instrument's load
reserves
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 132
2008
The operating range is evident from the simultaneous depiction of linearity and loading capacity.
VZ-01
Oil Counter
Contents
Startpage
Mounting on pressure or
suction side
Space-saving and flexible
mounting
Temperature-independent
Description:
The VZ-01 series of volume counters are cylindrical piston
meters that function without auxiliary electrical power. A hollow slitted cylinder is situated in a cylindrical housing. Due to
the guide slot, the cylinder makes oscillating movements as
soon as the measuring chamber is flooded with the medium.
The piston movement is transmitted magnetically to a totalizing roller counter which totalizes the volume of flow over a
certain period. If necessary, the counter can be equipped
with a remote value emitter designed as a reed or inductive
contact which will transmit an electrical impulse for each defined volume.
Viscosity-independent
2008
Cylindrical piston meters are used wherever flow of oil or
liquid fuel needs to be tapped in a simple but highly accurate
method without depending on auxiliary electrical power.
Some of the typical examples are in its deployment in the
bunker piping in ships or as measurement of consumption in
the forerun and return in diesel engines. Using the VZ-01
even simple dosing processes can be controlled where even
hostile media can be measured by using special type of
materials (Teflon or stainless steel pistons, stainless steel
chamber). A major advantage of the volume counters is that
the outcome of measurement does not depend on temperature and viscosity. This represents a plus point in some applications as against float devices or measuring turbines.
www.profimess.de
S 133
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
VZ-01 Oil Counter
Switching element:
Size: see Table
RE, RV = Reed tubes with

protected contact
IN = inductive slit initiator
as per IEC60947-5-6
max. temperature: In the case of oil counters belonging to

the sizes 04M, 04 and 08 the media temperature must not
exceed 60C. And in the case of sizes 15 to 50 the maximum
media temperature is 130C. Optionally, a high-temperature
version up to 180C is available.
Process connection: The VZ-01 of sizes 04M, 04 and 08
have only thread connections as per the Table "Sizes". The
sizes 15 to 40 offer a choice between thread or flange
connections.
Nominal pressure: The nominal pressure for thread connections is PN 16 while for flange connections either PN 25 or
PN 40 can be selected.
Switching voltage:
Contents
RE, RV = max. 48 V AC/DC

IN = 5...15 VDC
Switching current:
RE, RV = max. 50mA

(Ri = 47 Ohm / 0.5W)
Startpage
IN = >3mA for 8V DC / 1kOhm

Standby current:
RE, RV = open contact

IN = <1mA for 8V DC / 1kOhm
Switching load:
RE = max. 3VA
RV = max. 2W
Switching time:
RE = 30...70%
(impulse value 1)
= 10...30%
(impulse value 0.1 and 0.01)
= 65...90%
(impulse value 0. 00125/0.00311
l/Imp.)
RV = 50% +/- 10%
IN = 50% +/- 10%
RE = -10C...+60C
Impulse emitter: The remote emitter can be selected from

the Table "Sizes.
RV = -10C...+70C
IN = -10C...+70C
Protection class:
RE = IP 65 (IEC 60529)
RV = IP 65 (IEC 60529)
IN = IP 65 (IEC 60529)
El. connection:
Ordering number:
VZ-01. 15. 2. 2. 1. 2.
RV = fixed cable 3 m length

(2 x 0.14 mm2)
Oil Counter
Size:
04M = 04M (without impulse emitter only)
04 = 04
08 = 08
15 = 15
20 = 20
25 = 25
40 = 40
50 = 50
RE = plug for cable

2 x 0.35 mm2
IN = plug for cable

2 x 0.35 mm2
Option:
analogue output 420 mA
Materials:
piston aluminium, housing steel

(brass for size 04M-08),
measuring chamber brass,
(special materials such as hard
rubber or Teflon are possible)
Process connection:
1 = thread
2 = flange
Counter:
roller counter in litres
Process connection:
flange or thread connection
Nominal pressure for flanges:

0 = thread connection PN16
1 = PN 25
2 = PN 40 (for 180C only)
Permissible Media:
heating fuel (extra-light, light,

medium and heavy), Naphta,
Bunker C, Diesel fuel, gasoline
and other lubricating media
Impulse emitter
0 = none
1 = RE (Sizes: 04, 08 only, see table)
2 = RV (Sizes: 15...50 see table)
3 = IN (Sizes: 15...50 see table)
Option:
Display in US gallons (1 gallon

corresponds to 3.785 litres),
special alignment (pairing out for
differential measurements),
approval by German Lloyds
max. temperature in C:
1 = 60C for 04M, 04 and 08 only
2 = 130C for 15 to 50
3 = 180C for 15 to 50
Please specify the impulse rate in detailed text.
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 134
2008
Ordering codes:
Table of sizes:
Contents
Startpage
Type:
Diameter
DN
Thread size
Nominal pressure thread
Nominal pressure on the flange
max. temperature
max. flow
Continuous flow
min. flow
Start-up at approx.
Measuring error limit
Unit
VZ-01.04M VZ-01.04
VZ-01.08
VZ-01.15
VZ-01.20
inch
0.125
0.125
0.25
0.5
0.75
15
1/8-female 1/8-female 1/4-female 3/4-male
VZ-01.25
1
VZ-01.40
VZ-01.50
1.5
20
25
40
50
1-male
11/4-male
2-male
bar
25
25
25
16
16
16
16
16
bar
25/40*
25/40*
25/40*
25/40*
25/40*
60
60
60
130/180*
130/180*
130/180*
130/180*
130/180*
l/h
40
80
200
600
1500
3000
9000
30000
l/h
25
50
135
400
1000
2000
6000
20000
l/h
0.5
10
30
75
225
750
l/h
0.3
0.4
1.6
12
30
90
300
Plus Minus
1% of
M.V.
Plus Minus
1% of
M.V.
Plus Minus
1% of
M.V.
Plus Minus
1% of
M.V.
Plus Minus
1% of
M.V.
Plus Minus
1% of
M.V.
Plus Minus
1% of
M.V.
Plus Minus
1% of
M.V.
Plus Minus
1% of
M.V.
Repeatability
Plus Minus
0.2%
Plus Minus
0.2%
Plus Minus
0.2%
Plus Minus
0.2%
Plus Minus
0.2%
Plus Minus
0.2%
Plus Minus
0.2%
Plus Minus
0.2%
Plus Minus
0.2%
Least readable volume

Registering ability
Registering duration
Mesh width for safety filter
Mesh width for strainer
Measuring chamber volume
Housing surface
0.001
0.001
0.01
0.01
0.1
0.1
0.1
m3
100
100
1000
1000
10000
10000
10000
100000
4000
2000
7400
2500
10000
5000
1667
5000
mm
0.125
0.125
0.15
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.8
0.8
mm
0.08
0.08
0.1
0.25
0.4
0.4
0.6
0.6
ccm
12.5
12
36
100
330
1200
Weight without joints

Weight with thread
Weight with flange PN 25
Weight with flange PN 40
Impulse emitter REED
RE 1
RE 0.1
RE 0.01
RE 0.00125
RE 0.00311
IN inductive DIN 19234
RV RE
RV RE
Impulse
RE 0.00125 Qmax
frequency
Qmin
Impulse
RE 0.00311 Qmax
frequency
Qmin
Impulse
IN
Qmax
frequency IN
Qmin
kg
0.65
0.65
0.75
kg
2.2
2.5
4.2
17.3
kg
3.8
4.5
7.5
20.3
41
kg
4.4
5.5
7.8
20.5
42
I/Imp
I/Imp
0.1
0.1
I/Imp
0.01
I/Imp
0.00125
I/Imp
0.00311
I/Imp
0.01
0.01
0.1
0.1
I/Imp
0.1
10
I/Imp
100
Hz
17.777
Hz
0.222
Hz
17.864
Hz
0.357
Hz
16.667
41.667
8.333
25
8.333
Hz
0.278
0.833
0.208
0.625
0.208
Nominal pressure for flange

max. temperature
25/40*
selectable
130/180*
selectable
(M.V. = measured value)
red varnished red varnished, red varnished, red varnished, red varnished,
Ral 3013
Ral 3013
Ral 3013
Ral 3013
Ral 3013
2008
Table of dimensions:
Size
Length
Width
Height
Connetions
VZ-01.04M
VZ-01.04
VZ-01.08
VZ-01.15
VZ-01.20
VZ-01.25
VZ-01.40
VZ-01.50
65
65
79
bottom
65
65
79
bottom
65
65
79
165
105
165
Height in
130C
version
without emitter
Height in
130C
version
with RV
Height in
130C
version
with IN
Height in
180C
version
without emitter
Height in
180C
version
with RV
Height in
180C
version
with IN
sideways
106
130
185
147
171
225
105
sideways
115
139
194
156
180
234
190
130
sideways
142
166
221
183
207
261
300
210
sideways
235
259
273
235
259
313
350
280
sideways
291
315
329
291
315
369
bottom
www.profimess.de
S 135
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Pressure drop curves /Viscosity specifications

Stokes, Centi-Stokes, mm2/s
Pascal seconds, milli-pascal seconds
Poise, Centipoise (obsolete)
Kinematic viscosity
Dynamic viscosity
St, cSt, mm2/s

Pas, mPa.s
P, cP
VZ-01.04
VZ-01.08
10000
10000
Contents
Startpage
100
100
pressure
drop in
in mbar
mbar
Druckverlust
1000
pressure
drop in
in mbar
mbar
Druckverlust
1000
10
10
E
D
0,1
0,1
B
A
0,01
0,01
10
100
1000
10
flow in l/h
Durchfluss
in l/h
Q min 1 l/h
Q max 80 l/h
Q min 4 l/h
10000
10000
1000
1000
100
100
pressure
drop in
in mbar
mbar
Druckverlust
VZ-01.20
pressure
drop in
in mbar
mbar
Druckverlust
VZ-01.15
10
E
D
100
1000
flow in l/h
Durchfluss
in l/h
Q max 200 l/h
F
E
10
0,1
0,1
A
A
0,01
0,01
10
100
1000
10
100
flow in l/h
Durchfluss
in l/h
Q min 10 l/h
PROFI
MESS
1000
10000
flow in l/h
Durchfluss
in l/h
Q max 600 l/h
Q min 30 l/h
Q max 1500 l/h
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 136
2008
Conversion
Contents Thumb rule
cSt x density = mPa.s

Englergrade E in mPa.s: based on comparison table only
Saybold units in mPa.s: based on comparison table only
Redwood units in mPa.s: based on comparison table only
1 cSt > 1 mm2/s > 1 mPa.s
VZ-01.25
VZ-01.40
10000
10000
1000
1000
100
100
10
pressure
drop in
in mbar
Druckverlust
pressure
drop in
in mbar
Druckverlust
Startpage
F
E
F
10
E
D
C
D
C
0,1
0,1
0,01
100
10
1000
0,01
100
10000
1000
flow in l/h
Durchfluss
in l/h
10000
100000
flow in l/h
Durchfluss
in l/h
Q min 75 l/h
Q max 3000 l/h
Q min 225 l/h
Q max 9000 l/h
VZ-01.50
10000
Viscosity lines for VZ-01.04 and VZ-01.08
1000
A = 5 mPa.s
B = 50 mPa.s
C = 100 mPa.s
D = 200 mPa.s
E = 500 mPa.s
Viscositylines for VZ-01.15 to VZ-01.50
pressure
drop in
in mbar
Druckverlust
100
10
B = 25 mPa.s
C = 50 mPa.s
D = 100 mPa.s
E = 200 mPa.s
F = 500 mPa.s
If the pressure drop is above 1 bar, we recommend using the

next greater nominal diameter for the counter. Maximum permissible pressure drop = 3 bar.
E
D
1
A = 5 mPa.s
0,1
A
0,01
100
1000
10000
100000
flow in l/h
Durchfluss
in l/h
2008
Q min 750 l/h
Q max 30000 l/h
www.profimess.de
S 137
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
GM-01
for Gases
Contents
Startpage
Low-cost version
Independent of media's pressure
and temperature fluctuations
No moving parts
Description:
The GM-01 series of electronic mass flowmeters uses a thermal method to estimate the flow of gas. Two temperature
sensors, of which one is heated, project into the streaming
medium. As a result of this streaming heat energy gets ablated from the heated sensor. So as to balance the loss of
energy current supply to the sensor must be increased. The
level of current supply depends on the mass flow of the
medium. By employing the thermal method of measurement
a flow can be measured regardless of the pressure and temperature fluctuations in the medium which, otherwise, pose a
problem when volumetric measuring devices such as variable
area or turbine flowmeters are used.
All wetted parts are made

of stainless steel
Voltage output 0..5 V
Excellent repeatability
2008
Can be used for various gases

by applying conversion factors
Pure gas measurement

Gas analyzers
Particle monitors
Humidity analysis
Air/Oxygen measurement
Monitoring anesthetics (O2) in the filed of medicine
Measurement of gas specimens
Emission measurement
Monitoring aerators/skimmers
Measurement of H2 and O2 in burner controlling
Blow counter systems
Ferment supply
and many others
www.profimess.de
S 139
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Accuracy:
Repeatability:
Measuring span:

1:20
Code
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
99
Temperature effects:
Zero point:
< +/- 0.075 %

of full scale value / C
Span:
< +/- 1% of 10 C to 50 C
Pressure sensitivity:
< +/- 0.0073% / kPa
Position sensitivity:
< +/- 0.5% of full scale value after

zero point correction in the mounted state
Operating
pressure (max.):
10 bar
Operating temperature: 5C ... 65 C
Operating range *
0...10 ml/min
0...20 ml/min
0...50 ml/min
0...200 ml/min
0...500 ml/min
0...1 l/min
0...2 l/min
0...5 l/min
0...10 l/min
0...20 l/min
0...50 l/min
special operating range
Contents
Startpage
*All specifications refer to N2, 1040 mbar, 0C

(standard conditions)
-25 C ... 100 C
Materials:

SS 316 and SS304
5-pole AMP pin-board type

171826-5, counter plug AMP type
172053-5
Voltage supply:
11.5...15.5 VDC, 50 mA
Voltage output:
0...5 V
Weight:
0.5 kg
Dimensions
Diagram with 1/4" compression fitting
all dimensions in mm
Ordering codes
Ordering number:
GM-01.
04.
1.
2.
Thermal mass flowmeter for gases
Operating range:
01 ...99 = Operating range code as per Table
Process connection:
1 = 1/4 NPT-female
2 = 1/8 compression fitting
Pin
No.
Function
ground supply voltage.
signal 0...5 V
Connection
X (mm)
blank
1/8" compression
130.0
ground signal
1/4" compression
132.1
11.5.. 15.5 V DC supply
3/8" compression
134.6
Options:
0 = none
1 = connecting cable, 3 m, with plug
2 = oil and grease free for oxygen applications
zero point potentiometer
1/4 NPT-F
inlet side
1/4 NPT-F
outlet side
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 140
2008
fixing screws
GM-10
for Gases without Auxiliary
Power
Contents
Startpage
Description: The GM-10 series is the world's first batteryoperated, thermal mass flowmeter for gases. The device has
a CMOS flow sensor that enables due to its extremely small
dimensions a quick response speed while ensuring excellent
accuracy. An all-metal body made of aluminium or stainless
steel is equipped in its interior with a flow rectifier and subsequent resistance that divides the volume flow of gases into a
defined main and an auxiliary flow. The auxiliary flow is guided through a measuring chamber in which the approximately 12 mm sensor is directly located. The sensor gets cooled
by the mass flow of gas in such manner that its heat loss is
proportional to the number of gas molecules flowing along
regardless of their packing density. Consequently, the mass
flow can be ascertained in a wide area without compensating
for pressure and temperature. This principle of measurement
is unique as against conventional methods like the float principle because no inflow and outflow lines are required. In its
standard version, the GM-10 displays the standard volume
flow on a large LCD display in normal text and as bargraph
display. It can be supplied in its extended levels with additional precision regulating valve, totalizer (cannot be reset) and
adjustable switching contact.
Battery-operated
required
Extremely fast response time
Dynamic at high accuracy
Pressure and temperatureindependent
Optional switching contact
and regulating valve
Range of application: The GM-01 series of thermal gas

mass flowmeters has been developed to replace on a longterm basis the variable area flowmeter that enjoyed a fine
track-record for years for small gas flows. In contrast to this
measurement system, it offers obvious advantages like higher accuracy and independence from pressure and temperature and, it can be deployed even without auxiliary power
supply.
The device is suited for a number of various gases (see
Technical Description) and covers the volume flow range of
4...200 Nml/min to 4...200 Nl/min in steps. Considering
these advantages, the GM-10 can be used in different areas
of the industry like, for example, gas supply systems, semiconductor production, welding technology, machine construction, supply of compressed air, fuel cells, fermenters,
chemical engineering, laboratories, ovens, burners, medical
engineering, analyzing devices, laser technology, surface
coating and so on.
In the laboratory applications especially, the GM-10 is often
deployed along with its optionally available integrated manual
regulating valve since it permits adjustment of very low gas
volume flows and maintenance of constant levels.
LCD display with optional

totalizer
2008
Bargraph display
www.profimess.de
S 141
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
Normally, the GM-10 functions as a battery-operated mass

flowmeter displaying the standard volume flow on its LCD
display as a numeric value and by means of a bargraph display. In the next extended level, a manual regulating valve is
added to the device to accurately regulate the volume flow.
Optionally, the GM-10 can be supplied with an electrical switching contact with or without a regulating valve. However, in
this case an external 24 V DC supply is necessary since the
battery capacity is insufficient for operating the switching output.
Media:
Measuring tube material: The measuring tube can be

made of aluminium or electro-polished stainless steel regardless of the media. However, the CMOS sensor made of PBT
is wetted and deployment of the GM-10 is, therefore, limited
to measuring and regulating non-hostile gases. The sealing
material used is Viton, however, optionally it can be supplied
in EPDM.
Options: Alternative sealing materials, external 24 V DC
power supply instead of battery-operation, a non-resettable
totalizer, a housing for switch panel mounting and separately
deliverable calibration protocols are available as options at
additional charges.
Medium: As measuring media all non-hostile and dry gases
can be considered. Gases that are not listed in the Ordering
codes but comply with these requirements can be ordered as
special medium. All devices are supplied ex factory in real
gas calibration.
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
GM-10. 2. 1. 2. L
Thermal Mass Flowmeter with Battery Operation
Version:
1 = flowmeter
2 = flowmeter with regulating valve
3 = flowmeter with switching contact (no battery operation)
4 = flowmeter with regulating valve and switching contact
(no battery operation)
Accuracy:
Dynamics:
Response
pattern:
Pressure:
Temperature:
Materials:
Seals:
Display:
Gas
connection:
Inflow line:
Mounting
position:
Front
dimension:
Testing
pressure:
Leakage rate:
dry, non-hostile gases

(see also list in Ordering codes)
1:50
Contents
500 ms (accuracy better than 99%)

up to 10 bar, higher on request
0...50C
aluminium or stainless steel electropolished,
measuring component PBT
Viton, optionally EPDM
4-digit LCD-display
Startpage
G 1/4"-female to 50 Nl/min above this

G 1/2"-female
not required
up to 5 bar any, above this horizontal
48 x 96 mm (DIN standard)
1.5 x max. operation pressure
<1 x 10 -8 mbar l/s He
Supply voltage: Lithium battery type AA
(life span approx. 2 years) or
24 VDC +/- 10%
Protection
IP 50, for switch panel mounting IP 65
class:
EMC:
EN 50081, EN 50082
Limit switch:
MIN or MAX, freely adjustable, potential-free
change-over contact 24 V, 1 A
Failsafe:
can be activated
Delay:
0...180 s adjustable
Hysteresis:
adjustable
Alarm
can be activated
suppression:
Alarm
automatic or manual
resetting:
Measuring tube material:

1 = aluminium
2 = stainless steel
Medium:
L= air
N = nitrogen
O = oxygen
HE = helium
C = carbon dioxide
P = propane
B = butane
H = hydrogen
M = methane
99 = please specify special type medium in detailed text
' Please specify the operating range in detailed text - see table.
PROFI
MESS
Operating range and dimensions:

Operating range (Air)
2...100 Nml/min
4...200 Nml/min
10...500 Nml/min
20...1000 Nml/min
40...2000 Nml/min
100...5000 Nml/min
0.2...10 Nl/min
0.4...20 Nl/min
1...50 Nl/min
2...100 Nl/min
4...200 Nl/min
Connection
G1/4"-female
G1/4"-female
G1/4"-female
G1/4"-female
G1/4"-female
G1/4"-female
G1/4"-female
G1/4"-female
G1/4"-female
G1/2"-female
G1/2"-female
A [mm]
114
114
114
114
114
114
114
114
114
160
160
B [mm]
89
89
89
89
89
89
89
89
89
89
89
C [mm] D [mm]
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
54
54
54
54
manual regulating
D+25mm
E [mm]
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
35
35
valve
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 142
2008
Options:
0 = none
1 = seals EPDM instead of Viton
2 = external supply 24 V DC instead of battery operation for GM-10.1/2
3 = totalizer (cannot be reset)
4 = switch panel mounting
5 = calibration protocol
GR-01
and Controller
for Gases
Contents
Startpage
With integrated regulator valve for

accurate flow control
Independent of media's pressure and
temperature fluctuations
No moving parts
All wetted parts are made of stainless
steel
Voltage output 0...5 V or 4...20 mA
2008
Can be used for various gases by

applying conversion factors
Description:
The GR-01 series of electronic mass flowmeters uses a thermal method to estimate the flow of gas. Two temperature
sensors, of which one is heated, project into the streaming
medium. As a result of this streaming heat energy gets ablated from the heated sensor. So as to balance the loss of
energy current supply to the sensor must be increased. The
level of current supply depends on the mass flow of the
medium. By employing the thermal method of measurement
a flow can be measured regardless of the pressure and temperature fluctuations in the medium. The integrated regulating
valve controls the gas flow depending on the measured flow
and the pre-defined setpoint value. Consequently, the GR-01
provides a control loop complete with estimation of actual
value, definition of setpoint value and flow control.
Pure gas measurement
Gas analyzers
Particle monitors
Humidity analysis
Air/Oxygen measurement
Monitoring anesthetics (O2) in the field of medicine
Measurement of gas specimens
Emission measurement
Monitoring aerators/skimmers
Measurement of H2 and O2 in burner controlling
Blow counter systems
Ferment supply and many others
www.profimess.de
S 143
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Operating ranges
Accuracy:
00.010...20.000
Reproducibility:
each full scale value from 0...10

Nml/min to 0...20 Nl/min N2 with
reference to 1040 mbar, 0 C
Contents
Measuring and
Regulating span:
1:50
Temperature stability:
+/- 0.1% of full scale value per C
Dimensions
all dimensions in mm
Operating pressure
(max.):
Startpage
100 bar with regulating valve

325 bar without regulating valve
0 C ... 65 C
Materials:
all wetted parts are stainless

steel, seals Viton, Teflon, Kalrez
Sub-D plug including counterplug
Voltage supply:
24 VDC +/- 5%
Set point value input /

Actual value output:
(0)4...20 mA, max. 1000 Ohm

or 0...5 V
Regulating valve:
currentless opened or
currentless closed
122 [Sub-D plug]
Mounting boring
M 4 [2x]
Connection
X
(mm)
1/8 clamping ring
124
1/4 clamping ring
129
6 mm clamping ring 129

1/4 NPT
Ordering codes
118
Additional details
Ordering number:
GR-01.
10.000.
Thermal Mass Flowmeter and

Controller for Gases
Operating range:
00.010...20.000 = operating range full scale value in Nl/min
O-Ring / Valve seating:
2 = Buna
3 = Teflon
4 = Kalrez (including adapter)
Regulating valve:
0 = none (325 bar max.)
1 = currentless closed (100 bar max.)
2 = currentless opened (100 bar max.)
1.
1. 1.
1.
For accurate design of the device, the following

application-specific data is required:
Medium
Temperature
Inlet pressure
Outlet pressure
Setpoint value at which the flow
needs to be regulated.
The following applies to pressure details:

Inlet pressure Outlet pressure > 1 bar
Input / Output signals:

1 =4...20 mA (standard)
2 = 0...20mA
3 = 0...5V
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 144
2008
Process connection:
1 = 1/4 NPT-female
4 = 6 mm compression fitting
GR-02
Contents
Startpage
Description: The GR-02 series of mass flowmeter for gases

has a CMOS flow sensor that is capable of measuring at
very high accuracy according to the thermal principle that
applies to gas flow. The measurement pick-up is located
directly within the gas flow and detects the quantum of heat
that the passing gas molecules carry off a heating element.
With its significantly small dimensions and direct contact to
the medium, the GR-02 is capable of measuring at extremely
fast speeds of response time. The measuring tube can be
delivered in aluminium or stainless steel where the measuring
chamber is always made of plastic. This limits its use to nonhostile gases or gaseous mixtures with only low hostile content. A major advantage of the thermal measuring principle is
that the volume flow can be measured and put out under
normal conditions, largely independent of the processing
pressure and the gas temperature. Selectively, the GR-02
can be supplied as a mere flowmeter with analogue output
signal or as flowmeter and controller with integrated regulating valve. In the version with valve, the flow of gas volume is
regulated proportionally to an analogue input signal while this
unit can also be seen as a "constant gas source". The parameters of the PI-controller, the operating range settings, selection of media and many other features can be verified and
modified through suitable Windows software over the serial
RS-485 interface.
Practically independent of pressure

and temperature
Short response times
Highly accurate and dynamic
Low pressure drop
Serial interfacing
2008
Range of application: The GR-02 device series represents

the new generation of thermal mass flowmeters for gases.
The extremely cost-effective CMOS technology combines a
dependable accuracy of up to 0.5 % of the full scale value,
fast response times and excellent dynamics into a flowmeter
and controller that offers maximum operational convenience.
Considering the advantages like modular construction of the
measuring system, its assembly in any position and the convenience of cleaning the measuring pick-up without elaborate recalibration, the GR-02 can be deployed in various applications some of which are:
analyzing devices
semi-conductor industry
compressed air installations
laser
welding equipment
fuel cells
burners
www.profimess.de
S 145
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Ordering codes
Version:
Ordering No.: GR-02. 2. 1. 1. 1. 1. V[0][5]-N[0][1]. L. B5
The GR-02 is supplied as a mere flowmeter or as a flow controller with integrated regulating valve. The meter estimates
the current volume flow and transmits it in the form of an
analogue signal at the output. The controller functions like a
"constant gas source". The device measures the volume flow
as the actual value and transmits it as analogue output. At
the same time, the set point value is fed to the input of the
GR-02 in the form of another analogue signal. The electronics
estimate the difference in the regulation and adjust the integrated valve by means of an interface-programmable PI controller.
Version:
1 = flowmeter
2 = flowmeter and controller
Accuracy and span
1 = +/-1.5% of full scale value,
span 1:30 (standard)
2 = +/-0.5% of full scale value,
span 1:100
Basic body and seals:
1 = aluminium with Viton (standard I)
2 = aluminium with EPDM
3 = stainless steel with Viton (standard II)
4 = stainless steel with EPDM
Output signals:
2 = current 4...20 mA NAMUR NE43
6 = voltage 0... 10 V DC
Set point value input signal for controlling
function:
0 = no set point value input in only meter (GR-02.1)
2 = current 4...20 mA NAMUR NE43
6 = voltage 0... 10 V DC
Pressure ratios for controlling function:
0 = only meter without valve (GR-02.1)
V[][]-N[][] (inlet and outlet pressure in bar absolutes)
Medium:
L = air
N = nitrogen
O = oxygen
HE = helium
C = carbon dioxide
P = propane
B = butane
H = hydrogen
M = methane
7 = please specify special type medium in detailed text
Operating range:
A1 = 0...25 Nml/min, G1/4"
A2 = 0...50 Nml/min, G1/4"
A3 = 0...100 Nml/min, G1/4"
A4 = 0...200 Nml/min, G1/4"
A5 = 0...500 Nml/min, G1/4"
B3 = 0...1000 Nml/min, G1/4"
B4 = 0...2000 Nml/min, G1/4"
B5 = 0...5000 Nml/min, G1/4"
C3 = 0...10 Nl/min, G1/4"
C4 = 0...20 Nl/min, G1/4"
C5 = 0...50 Nl/min, G1/4"
D3 = 0...50 Nl/min, G1/2"
D4 = 0...100 Nl/min, G1/2"
D5 = 0...200 Nl/min, G1/2"
99 = please specify customer-specific requirement in detailed text
PROFI
MESS
Startpage
Accuracy and span: There are two versions of accuracies

available. The more affordable standard variant measures at
an accuracy of +/-1.5% of full scale value and has a measuring span of 1:30. The more accurate version has an accuracy of +/-0.5% of full scale value at a span of 1:100.
Basic body and seals: The measuring tube of the GR-02 is
made of aluminium or stainless steel. The measuring chamber in which the CMOS sensor is located is, however, always
made of plastic and constantly wetted. The standard sealing
material is Viton; optionally also EPDM is available.
Output signals: The signal pattern over which the measured
volume flow can be tapped at the output of the GR-02, is either 4...20 mA, 0...20 mA, 0...5 V DC, 1...5 V DC, 0...10 V DC
or 2...10 V DC. Also an output signal with 4...20 mA as per
NAMUR NE43 can be supplied.
Set point value signal for controlling function: If the GR02 is designed as a flowmeter and controller, the set point
value of the flow must be set as an analogue signal. This is
either 4...20 mA, 4...20 mA as per NAMUR NE43, 0...20 mA,
0...5 V DC, 1...5 V DC, 0...10 V DC or 2...10 V DC. The mere
flowmeter version of the GR-02 has no set point value input.
Pressure ratios in regulating function: The integrated
regulating valve of the GR-02.2 as a flowmeter and controller
must be set for inlet and outlet pressure. For this reason,
both these values must be specified as absolute pressure in
[bar].
Medium: As measuring media all non-hostile, dry gases can
be considered. Gases that are not listed in the Ordering
codes but comply with the requirements can be ordered as
special type medium. All devices are supplied ex factory with
real gas calibration.
Operating range: There are various operating ranges from
0...25 Nml/min to 0...200 Nl/min available. Customer-specific
full scale values are available on request. Up to operating
range values of 5 Nl/min, the process connections are G1/4"female; above this, the measuring tubes have a G1/2"-female
thread. Currently, higher operating ranges up to 1000 Nl/min
with G3/4"-female are being developed. However, these versions would be available soon.
www.profimess.de
GMBH
Contents
S 146
2008
Mass Flowmeter
and Controller
Measuring medium: dry, non-hostile gases

(see also listing in the Ordering codes)
Supply voltage:
Contents Accuracy:
GR-02.x.1:
GR-02.x.2:

+/-0.5% measured value,
better on request
Startpage Pressure drift:
< 0.2 % per bar (typically N2)
Dynamics:
GR-02.x.1:
GR-02.x.2:
1:30
1:100
Response pattern: < 150 ms (measured value within the

standard specification of +/-2%)
Inflow and outflow
lines:
none
Power
consumption:
24 VDC +/- 10 %
meter approx. 60 mA, 1.6 W
controller approx. 170 mA, 4 W
Protection class:
IP50
EMC:
EN 50081, EN 50082
El. connection:
Output signals
analogue:
D-Sub plug 9-pole
Output signals
digital:
4...20 mA, 0...10 VDC, 0...5 VDC,

1...5 VDC, 2...10 VDC or 4...20 mA
as per NAMUR NE43
RS-485 (Modbus RTU protocol) for
flow and temperature
Set point value

input for regulator: 4...20 mA, 0...10 VDC, 0...5 VDC,
1...5 VDC, 2...10 VDC oder 4...20 mA
as per NAMUR NE43
Pressure:
10 bar max.
Temperature:
0...50C
Materials:
aluminium or stainless steel electropolished, PBT measuring component
Seals:
Viton, optional EPDM
Software:
Reading of actual values for flow and

temperature
Specification of set point values
Mounting position: any, from 5 bar horizontal
Entering regulator parameters
Gas connection:
Changing gases
G1/4"-female up to 50 Nl/min, above

this G1/2"-female (G3/4"-female up to
1000 Nl/min is currently under
development)
Testing pressure:
1.5 x operating pressure
Leakage rate:
meter < 1 x 10-8 mbar l/s He,

regulator < 1 x 10-6 mbar l/s He
Optional recording of measuring data

through logging function
Table of dimensions
2008
GR-02.1,
GR-02.1,
GR-02.2,
GR-02.2,
1/4"
1/2"
1/4"
1/2"
A
94
145
124
170
B
87
87
117
117
C
25
35
25
35
D
25
25
25
25
E
69
79
69
79
F
25
35
25
35
G
44
44
44
44
www.profimess.de
S 147
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
GS-01
Compressed Air Counter
with Switching and Analogue
Output
Contents
Startpage
Analogue or impulse
output
Display of current value
or total
Can be used as preselection
counter
Practically independent of
pressure and temperature
Maximum and minimum value memory
Low pressure drop
2008
Description: The GS-01 series of compressor air counter is

a thermal mass flowmeter for gases according to the principle of hot-wire anemometer that is equipped with an electronic unit which is developed especially for applications in the
field of industrial compressed air. A calorimetric measuring
unit consisting of a heated and a resistance to just measure
the temperature forms the sensor component of the GS-01.
A volume of compressed air passing through the measuring
tube carries off the heat from the heated resistance that is
proportional to the velocity. The resulting electrical change of
the heated resistance is evaluated by means of the measuring bridge and the effect of media temperature is compensated by the measuring resistance. The extremely user-friendly
designed electronic unit has two outputs which can be adjusted optionally as a PNP transistor output for incorporating a
limit value switch or an impulse output or as an analogue output for transmitting a 4...20 mA signal. Thus, the possible
combinations of outputs for the GS-01 are:
2 x NO-contacts / NC-contacts, adjustable with regard to
position and hysteresis of the setpoint or as Window function
1 x NO-contact / NC-contact and an additional analogue
output (scalable) or
1 x NO-contact / NC-contact and an additional impulse
output (programmable).
The rotatable 4-digit digital display on the GS-01 displays eit-
her the accumulated sum of the compressed air flow (consumption of compressed air) in Nm3 or the current value of
the flow in Nm3/min or in Nm3/h optically. The maximum
value that can be displayed is 4000 *103 m3 where at such
high values a yellow LED indicates that the displayed 4-digit
value must be multiplied by the factor 1000. On pressing a
button, the device can display the current media temperature
and the accumulated sum after the last counter reset. Using
a programming device, the display can be adjusted to let it
remain switched off in RUN mode. An automatic Reset function of the totalizer can be programmed to different time
intervals. In addition, the GS-01 has a minimum and a maximum memory that can store the lowest and the highest value
measured until its next resetting.
Range of application: Today, consumption of compressed
air in machines and equipment is a cost factor that cannot be
ignored at all. Due to this fact the consuming industry increasingly demands measuring devices which, on the one hand,
help satisfactorily monitor consumption of compressed air
and, on the other hand, do not cause additional pressure
drop within the system which in turn would further escalate
costs. The new compressed air counter GS-01 is our answer
to this problem. It enables visual check of current consumption on a clearly readable display and, it can display the volume of compressed air consumed up to a point like a "water
clock for air" and store the value. Two programmable switching contacts trigger an alarm in the event of exceeding or
falling short of a defined volume flow and, optionally, they can
be programmed using window technology. It means that a
defined range is considered as "good" and, on escaping this
Window alarm is sounded. Optionally, the user may avoid one
of the switching outputs and, instead, opt for an impulse or
analogue output or program the switching output as the preselection counter.
The fact that the GS-01 is a mass flowmeter based on the
thermal principle also underlines the advantages of measuring
volume flow largely regardless of pressure and media temperature and implies a pressure drop in the range of only few
millibars.
The accuracy of 3% of measured value + 0.3% of full scale
value and the option of operating range up to 700 Nm3/h
round off a device that pays off within the shortest span of
time, not the least, due to its excellent price to performance
ratio.
www.profimess.de
S 149
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
The GS-01 can be supplied in 4 versions with different nominal diameters and volume flow ranges measurable by them.
The available connection sizes are R1/2", R1", R11/2" and
R2". The tapping ranges are in the same sequence 0...90
Nm3/h, 0...270 Nm3/h, 0...492 Nm3/h and 0...840 Nm3/h.
Measuring error:
Air quality A:
+/- (3% of measured value + 0.3% of
full scale value)
Air quality B:
+/- (6% of measured value + 0.6% of
full scale value)
Measuring
dynamics:
1:300
Measuring medium: Operating compressed air
Pressure:
16 bar max.
Air quality
(DIN8573):
Media temperature: 0...60C
Class 141
(measuring errors see below Value A)
Class 344
(measuring errors see below Value B)
Display range:
Operating range:
Ambient temp.:
0...60C
Storage temp.:
-20...+85C
max. rel. humidity:
90%
0...90 Nm3/h
0...270 Nm3/h
0...492 Nm3/h
0...840 Nm3/h
Vibration-proof:
5 g (DIN IEC 68-2-6, 55-2000 Hz)
Housing materials:
PBT-GF 20, PC (APEC), Macrolon,

V2A (1.4301), Viton
GS-01.1
GS-01.2
GS-01.3
GS-01.4
0.25 (0.3)...75 Nm3/h

0.75 (0.8)...225 Nm3/h
1.3 (1.5)...410 Nm3/h
2.3 (3)...700 Nm3/h
Sensor materials:
V4A (1.4401) for GS-01.3 and GS-04

only.
V2A (1.4301), ceramic glass-passivated, PEEK (Polyether-Etherketon),
polyester, Viton, aluminium anodized
Setting range:
Reset point:
Analogue
start-point:
Analogue
end-point:
In steps of:
GS-01.1
GS-01.2
GS-01.3
GS-01.4
0.7...75 Nm3/h
2.0...225 Nm3/h
3.5...410 Nm3/h
6.0...700 Nm3/h
Supply voltage:
19...30 VDC
Load capacity:
2 x 250 mA
Protection class:
IP65, III
GS-01.1
GS-01.2
GS-01.3
GS-01.4
0.3...74.6 Nm3/h
0.9...223.9 Nm3/h
1.5...408 Nm3/h
3.0...697 Nm3/h
EMC:
GS-01.1
GS-01.2
GS-01.3
GS-01.4
0.0...56.3 Nm3/h
0.0...168.8 Nm3/h
0.0...307.5 Nm3/h
0.0...525.0 Nm3/h
Short-circuit
protection:
clocked
Polarity-reversal
protection:
yes
GS-01.1
GS-01.2
GS-01.3
GS-01.4
18.8...75.0 Nm3/h
56.3...225.0 Nm3/h
102.5...410 Nm3/h
175...700 Nm3/h
Overload-proof:
yes
Voltage drop:
<2V
GS-01.1
GS-01.2
GS-01.3
GS-01.4
0.1
0.1
0.5
1.0
Connecting thread: GS-01.1

GS-01.2
GS-01.3
GS-01.24
Response time:
IEC
IEC
IEC
IEC
ESD:
HF radiated:
burst:
HF guided:
Nm3/h
Nm3/h
Nm3/h
Nm3/h
< 0.1 s
Ordering codes:
Ready/delay
time:
0.5 s
Electrical
connection:
plug connection M12
Analogue
output signal:
4...20 mA scalable
Load for
analogue output:
< 500 Ohm
Impulse output:
consumption volume counter
Impulse rate:
adjustable
Impulse length:
adjustable
Display:
GS-01.
Unit:
Compressed Air Counter
PROFI
MESS
range
range
range
range
4 kV CD / 8 kV AD
10 V/m
2 kV
10 V
Power consumption: < 100 mA
R 1/2"-male
R 1"-male
R 11/2"-male
R 2"-male
Ordering number:
1000/4/2
1000/4/3
1000/4/4
1000/4/6
4 LED green for Nl/min

(for GS-01.4 103 Nl/min),
Nm3/h and Nm3
Function display:
1 LED yellow
Connection status: 2 LED yellow
0.25 (0.3)...75 Nm3/h, connections in R1/2"-male

0.75 (0.8)...225 Nm3/h, connections in R1"-male
1.3 (1.5)...410 Nm3/h, connections in R1 1/2"-male
2.3 (3)...700 Nm3/h, connections in R2"-male
Measured values:
4-digit alphanumeric display
Programming:
4-digit alphanumeric display
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 150
2008
Setpoint:
Size:
1 = operating
2 = operating
3 = operating
4 = operating
Startpage
GS-01.1
GS-01.2
GS-01.3
GS-01.4
(in brackets the displayed value)
Contents
GS-01.1
Contents
Startpage
GS-01.2
GS-01.3
GS-01.4
Connection diagrams
2008
2 switching outputs
Pin layout
1 switching output +
1 analogue output
www.profimess.de
S 151
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
GM-50
Contents
Startpage
Operating range up to 75 m/s in 8 levels

Optional LED display
6 different mounting lengths
4...20-mA output
Digital filter
Description: The GM-50 series of air velocity transmitter is

the ideal instrument for measuring air velocities in large pipes
and ducts. The device uses a mass flow sensor that allows
accurate measurement at different flow velocities and temperatures. The rate of cooling in a heated measuring resistance
is estimated which is directly proportional to the velocity of
flow streaming along. At the output of the GM-50 the measured value can be tapped in the form of a 4...20 mA signal selectively in 3- or 4-wire system. In addition, the device has an
optionally available LED display on which the measured value
is displayed digitally, and an adjustable filter that attenuates
the output with the time element of 0.5 to 15 seconds. The
result is that a possible turbulent, restive flow does not lead
to strong fluctuations in the output and the display.
Since the GM-50 as a mass flowmeter always refers its measured values to air pressure and, in this respect, it is calibrated at factory to a standard status, it is possible to recalibrate
the sensor to another pressure within the framework of parameterization.
2008
Range of application: The flow velocity of air or emission

flow is often measured in the air-conditioning, ventilation and
building technologies. Modern sensor elements of the GM-50
enable accurate and convenient measurement regardless of
the air temperature at an enormously large span of operating
range. Outmoded measuring instruments such as apertures,
dynamic pressure probes or tubes can be conveniently replaced by the GM-50 with its principle of thermal mass flow
measurement. In the course of commissioning, the user has a
choice of eight different operating ranges between 0...1.25
and 0...75 m/s, can customize to existing air pressure and
adapt the 4 or 20 mA value of the output to his evaluator
electronics. All settings for the device are performed through
two keys and a potentiometer extremely easily.
www.profimess.de
S 153
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
Digital display: The GM-50 series of air velocity transmitter

can be supplied with or without a digital display unit. In its
version with a display unit the measured value of the flow
velocity is displayed on-the-spot digitally. However, the GM50 is parameterized through the internal LEDs and is, therefore, independent of an external display. The transmitter can be
deployed without restrictions even in harsh industrial areas by
dispensing with the display unit and using a robust IP66
metal housing.
Supply voltage:
12...35 VDC or 10...16 VAC
Power
consumption:
300 mA max.
Output:
4...20 mA, in 3- or 4-wire system
Output filter:
0.5...15 seconds, adjustable
Load:
600 Ohm max.
El. connection:
screw clamps
Mounting length: The GM-50 is available in six different

mounting lengths. Depending on the size of the air duct
where measurements are performed, a length that reaches at
least one-third of the diameter of the piping must be chosen
since the mean flow velocity occurs in the most ideal situation.
Contents
Startpage
Protection class: IP 66 (no display unit)

IP 23 (with display unit)
Display:
Display
4 1/2-digit red LED
Resolution
0.01 m/s
Media:
clean air and compatible,

non-inflammable gases
Weight
377 g
Accuracy:
3% FS in the temperature range 0...50C

4% FS in the temperature range -40...0C and 50...100C
Reaction time:
Dimensions:
GM-50.1
1.5 seconds
(outlet filter on minimum value)
Operating
temperature:
-40...+100C
Ambient
temperature:
0...+60C
Pressure:
6.89 bar max.
Mounting
position:
independent
Humidity:
non-condensing
Process
connection:
1/2"-NPT-male
Weight:
357.2 g
inch
[mm]
GM-50.0
Ordering codes
Ordering number:
inch
[mm]
GM-50. 1. 1

Digital display:
0 = no display unit
1 = with digital display unit
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
S 154
2008
Mounting length:
1 = 152.4 mm (6")
2 = 304.8 mm (12")
3 = 457.2 mm (18")
4 = 609.6 mm (24")
5 = 762 mm (30")
6 = 914 mm (36")
PT-00
Surface
Contents
Startpage
Description:
The PT-00 series of resistance thermometers are surface
temperature sensors on the basis of Pt100. Depending on
the requirement, the devices can be supplied with permanent
connecting cable or with housing and cable gland. A Pt100
temperature sensor is inserted into the protection fitting in 2wire circuit which changes its ohmic resistance depending on
the temperature. According to the version, the surface fittings are screw-mounted through a mounting hole or clamped by means of strap retainers to the surface to be measured. These thermometers are available in aluminium or stainless steel.
Easy and fast assembly

For round and plane surfaces
Temperature range of -190..to..+260C
Thanks to their easy and fast assembly by means of strap
retainers, hose band clips or screws, the PT-00 series of surface resistance thermometers well suited for a number of
applications such as temperature measurement in closed
pipelines as well as on plane surfaces. Since the temperature
is measured indirectly, there is no interference with the process medium and, moreover, there is no or very less mechanical groundwork required at the location of measurement.
The temperature transmitters in the PT-00 series are not
affected by any operational pressure or chemical influences
of the medium, thus ensuring their durability. Due to the less
thermal mass of the PT-00, the object being measured is not
at all affected which enormously simplifies a streamlined
measurement of surface temperature.
Different protection fittings
2008
Less thermal mass
www.profimess.de
T1
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Dimensions:
pipe ends Sn-plated,

with wire sleeves
Connection:
PT-00.1/2
Contents
Connecting cables: silicon, ambient temperature
-50... + 180C
PTFE, ambient temperature
-190...+260C
Kapton, ambient temperature
-50...+260C
Sensor element:
Pt100 temperature sensor,

DIN EN 60751, Cl. B, 2-wire
Protection fitting:
stainless steel 1.4571, aluminium,

plastic
Startpage
PT-00.3
PT-00.4
PT-00.5
PT-00.6
Process connection: strap retainers, hose Binder or

screw fastening
2500 mm standard, special lengths
on request
Cable length:
Versions:
The PT-00 series of contact resistance thermometers is
supplied with various fittings for screw-mounting or for
fastening with strap retainers or hose clips. In PT-00.1 and
PT-00.2 versions, the electrical connection is made through
a clamp housing while, in all other versions, it is implemented through a 2.5 meter long cable that has silicon, PTFE
or Kapton sheathing depending the type of fittings.
Protection class:
The various versions of PT-00 with clamp housing belong
to the IP54 protection class as a standard. Optionally, the
is also available with IP65.
Ordering codes:
PT-00. 3. 0
Ordering number:
Contact Resistance Thermometer
Version:
1 = tube contact sensor with clamp housing,(-50...+ 120C)
2 = surface contact sensor with clamp housing, (-50... + 120C)
3 = with connecting cable PTFE, fixture hole,
protective aluminium fittings (-190...+260C)
4 = with connecting cable PTFE, fixture hole,
protective stainless steel fittings (-190...+260C)
5 = with connecting cable Kapton, no fixture hole,
protective stainless steel fittings (-50...+260C)
6 = with connecting cable Silicon, fixture by container strap,
protective aluminium fittings (-50... + 180C)
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
T2
2008
Protection class for version PT-00.1 and

PT-00.2 with clamp housing:
0 = version with cable (Protection class always IP54)
1 = IP54
2 = IP65
PT-01
Compact
Contents
Startpage
Description:
A temperature-dependent electrical resistance is situated
integrated in a stainless steel protection tube. It changes
its ohmic resistance in relation to the temperature of the
media. In the version with a built-in transmitter this value is
converted into a 4...20 mA current signal and made available at the connections of the square-type plug point in 2wire system. In the version without a transmitter, the plain
resistance can be tapped at the plug point. The sensor
element is designed in 3- or 4-wire system in order to
compensate for the measuring errors through the electrical
feeder cables.
Small design
Integrated transmitter
Power or resistance output
The PT-01 series of Compact Thermometers is unbeatable
in their diversity. A choice of 2 shaft diameters, 5 different
shaft lengths and 3 different connecting threads allow the
user to customize them practically in any location of measurement. In addition, the wide range of temperatures of 200C to 400C contributes to the fact that these sensors
are used nearly in the entire industry with great success.
From a temperature of 150C upwards, the thermometers
are provided with an additional neck tube that serves as a
cooling line and protects the sensitive electronic components against overheating.
Stainless steel
2008
-200C to 400C
www.profimess.de
T3
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
PT-01 Compact Resistance Thermometer
Linearity:
Output: resistance outputs PT100 3- or 4-wire without a

transmitter are possible. With transmitter the device gives
a 4...20 mA current signal in 2-wire circuit.
Also a 2 x PT100 version is available on request.
Min. measuring
span:
30 Kelvin
Process connection: As gland G1/2-, G3/4- or G1-male

can be selected.
Process
Connection:
typically < 0.1%
Material:
Shaft diameter: Protective pipes with 6 mm or 9 mm are

available.
Shaft
diameter:
Shaft length: Depending on the required depth of

immersion, various lengths are available for selection.
Customized manufacturing on request.
Contents
Startpage
G1/2A, G3/4A or G1A,

special type threads on request
6 mm or 9 mm
Shaft length:
25, 100, 160, 200 or 250 mm,

customized lengths on request
Neck tube:
50 mm from 150C
4...20 mA, 2-wire or 1 x PT100,
3-wire Class B or 1 x PT100,
4-wire Class B (optionally Class A)
Output:
socket connector as
per DIN 43650 (PG 11)
Supply voltage: 10 to 35 VDC
35.5
socket connector as per

DIN 43650 (PG 9)
Electrical
connection:
silicon
sealing
square type plug as per DIN 43650

35.5
Protection
class:
50
+2
IP 65 DIN 40050
silicon sealing
HEX 30
HEX 30
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
PT-01. 2. 2. 1. 2. [][][]
G1/2A
[][][]
G1/2A
L1
L1
PT-01 Compact Resistance

Thermometer
socket connector as
per DIN 43650 (PG 11)
Output:
1 = 1 x PT100 3-wire
2 = 1 x PT100 3-wire
3 = 4...20 mA 2-wire
socket connector as
per DIN 43650 (PG 11)
Process connection:
1 = G1/2A
2 = G3/4A
3 = G1A
35.5
silicon
sealing
75
+2
35.5
Shaft diameter:
1 = 6 mm
2 = 9 mm
75
transmitter
silicon
sealing
+2
50
+2
Insertion length:
1 = 25 mm
2 = 100 mm
3 = 160 mm
4 = 200 mm
5 = 250 mm
HEX 30
HEX 30
G1/2A
L1
G1/2A
L1
Temperature range
[][][] initial value
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
T4
2008
Temperature range
[][][] end value
Possibilities of installation for resistance thermometers,

insertion thermoelements and industrial thermometers
welded bushing for male
thread
compression fitting for

screwing in for smooth shaft
stopper flange for ceramic

protection tube
screw in bushing for

ceramic protection tube
Contents
screw in protection tube for male

thread, one-piece

thread, multi-piece
weld in protection tube for

male thread
screw in protection tube for swivel nut,

one-piece
screw in protection tube

for swivel nut, multi-piece
weld in protection tube for swivel

nut
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
T 32
2008
Startpage
PT-02
Insertion Resistance
Thermometer
Contents
Startpage
Description:
A temperature-dependent electrical Pt100 resistance is
situated in a protective stainless steel tube as specified by
the customer. It changes its ohmic resistance value proportionally to the temperature of the media and the same
is tapped at the connecting head of the PT-02 in 3- or 4wire system. This ensures compensation of measuring
errors through the electrical feeder lines. If the device has
an integrated head transmitter, it generates a 4...20 mA
current signal, proportional to the temperature, directly
from the tapped resistance value as per the proven 2-wire
system. The transmitter can also be supplied as ex-version
with intrinsically safe power supply so that the head can
be used in Zone 1.
The PT-02 series of insertion resistance thermometers
is manufactured as per the customer specifications with
regard to process connection, shaft length and shaft diameter. They are ideally suited for use in protected tubes (in
high pressure applications or hostile media) as well as for
direct insertion into the process. The wide range temperatures from -200C to 600C contributes to the fact that
these sensors are used nearly in the entire industry with
great success. From a temperature of 120C upwards, the
thermometers are provided with an additional neck tube
that serves as a cooling line and protects the connecting
head against overheating. In order to ensure maximum
accuracy, only carefully tested measuring elements as per
DIN are used, thus allowing the customer to select from
Classes A and B.
All types of designs

Integrated transmitter
Current or resistance output
Stainless steel
-200C to 600C
Insertible into process or protection tube
2008
Special type connections
www.profimess.de
T5
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Ordering codes:
PT-02. 1. 2. 1. 1.
[][][][]
3. 2.
[][][][] [][][][]
PT-02 Inserting Resistance Thermometer

Neck tube:
Inserting Resistance
Thermometer
Neck tube:
1 = no neck tube (up to 120C)
2 = with neck tube
(from 120C upwards)
Process
Connection:
Process connection:
1 = smooth shaft
2 = G 1/2-male
3 = G 1/2 swivel nut
4 = G 3/4-male
5 = G 3/4 swivel nut
6 = G 1-male
7 = G 1 swivel nut
8 = NPT 1/2-male
9 = NPT 3/4-male
10 = M 18 x 1.5-male
11 = M 18 x 1.5 swivel nut
12 = M 20 x 1.5-male
13 = M 20 x 1.5 swivel nut
14 = M 27 x 2-male
15 = M 27 x 2 swivel nut
16 = clamp 1
17 = clamp 2
18 = special connection (flange or
aseptic gland) in detailed text
Measuring
element:
Output:
From a temperature of 120C upwards

using a neck tube is recommendable
which serves as a cooling line.
The process connection can be designed
as male thread or swivel nut. For pharmaceutical or food-processing industries
aseptic glands or clamp connections are
available. Chemical and petro-chemical
industries can be supplied with any type
of flange connection.
Output:
1 = 3-wire
2 = 4-wire
3 = 4...20 mA with head transmitter
Insertion length:
[][][][] shaft length from sealing surface in mm
The user can select from among elements

of Classes A (+/- (0.15 + 0.002*t) C) and
B (+/- (0.3 + 0.005*t) C).
Depending on the further processing of
the signal, the Pt 100 can be designed as
3- or 4-wire system. For integrated head
transmitter a 4...20 mA 2-wire signal is
generated.
Shaft diameter:
1 = 3 mm (for mounting in protection tube)
2 = 6 mm
3 = 8 mm
4 = 15 mm
Connecting head:
2 = form B (standard for head transmitter)
3 = form BUZ
4 = form BUZ-H
5 = form NS
6 = form GG
Protection
class:
Supply voltage: 24 VDC (for head transmitter)

Output:
1 x Pt100 3-wire, 1 x Pt100 4-wire or

4...20 mA 2-wire
IP65
Temperature range:
[][][][] initial value
Temperature range:
[][][][] end value
Pressure:
max. 6 bar for protective stainless tube

(mounting in high-pressure protective
tubes possible)
Temperature:
max. 70C at head transmitter
Neck tube:
from media temperature 200C upwards

the standard is a 120 mm neck tube
(customized manufacturing possible)
Temperature
range:
Material:
Accuracy:
Electrical
connection:
Process
Connection:
-200C...+600C
shaft, neck tube and thread in stainless
steel 1.4571
Pt100 Class A or B as per DIN IEC 751
ceramic clamping block in connecting
head
welded or screwed in bushing, protective tube, compression fitting
www.profimess.de
GMBH
Startpage
Insertion length: Customer can specify the inserting

length from the sealing surface.
Connecting
head:
6 different connecting heads as per DIN
are available.
Please refer to Drawing for connecting
heads. In versions with integrated head
measuring transmitter the head Form B is
used as a standard.
Measuring element:
1 = 1 x Pt100, Class A as per DIN EC 751
2 = 1 x Pt100, Class B as per DIN EC 751
PROFI
MESS
Contents
T6
2008
Ordering no.:
Versions:

Connecting Heads for
PT-02 and TE-01
Contents Form A cover with 2 fastening screws
Form B over with 2 fastening screws

Material: aluminium pressure casting
Startpage
Form BUZ flap cover with bracket

Material: aluminium pressure castin
Form BUZ-H high flap cover with bracket
Form NS cover with screw closure

Material: fiberglass reinforced polyamide
Form GG cover with screw closure

Material: steel/cast iron
2008
HEX 27
www.profimess.de
T7
PROFI
MESS
GMBH

thread


protection tube

Contents

thread, one-piece

thread, multi-piece

male thread

one-piece


nut
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
T 32
2008
Startpage
PT-03
Contents
Startpage
Description:
The PT-03 series of resistance thermometers is universally
applicable temperature sensors on the basis of Pt100. A
temperature-sensitive resistance is situated in a protective
sleeve made of stainless steel which is permanently fixed
to a cable. It can be supplied in different variants with
regard to material and length. the measuring resistance is
available in 2-, 3- or 4-wire versions and, optionally, also in
accuracy class A.
Using the PT-03, a temperature range of -200C to +600C
can be easily captured. However, the maximum temperature on the cable must not exceed 400C.
With screw thread or smooth shaft

Cable tolerance up to 400C
Resistance thermometers are widely used in the industry
in a variety of versions. Besides the versions with clamp
connection housing or plug, the PT-03 exemplifies a simple
and cost-effective method for measuring temperatures
securely and accurately even in cumbersomely accessible
places like ducts or narrow machine areas. By attaching
an additional protective hose on the joint between the
cable and protective sleeve, the protection class in some
of the versions can be upgraded to IP68 so that the PT-03
is also suitable for measuring temperatures in wells.
Basically, any type of fluid and gaseous media can be
measured which are compatible with the material used.
Sleeve -200...+600C
Pt-100, 2-, 3- or 4-wire
3 or 6 mm sensor diameter
2008
Customized lengths available
www.profimess.de
T9
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Protection
sleeve:
Temperature
on cable:
stainless steel 1.4571, optionally 1.4541 or

2.4816 Inconel
Shaft length:
Shaft
diameter:
Cable material: PVC up to 85C, silicon up to 200C,

PTFE up to 300C,
fiberglass with braiding up to 400C
25 mm, 50 mm, 100 mm, 150 mm,

200 mm, 250 mm, 400 mm,
special type lengths on request
Cable length:
3 mm or 6 mm
Connecting
thread:
Contents
1000 mm standard,
special type lengths on request
Startpage
G1/2-male or smooth shaft, optionally

G1/4-male, G3/8-male, M10x1-male,
M20x1.5-male, M6-male or compression
fitting
Media
temperature:
400C max.
Measuring
element:
Accuracy:
-200...+600C
Protection
class:
1xPt100 2-wire, 1xPt100 3-wire,

1xPt100 4-wire or 2xPt100 2-wire
Class B, optionally Class A
IP65 as per IEC 751 Class B, optionally
IP68
El. Connection: bare cable ends, insulated
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
PT-03. 2. 1. 1. 1. 1. 0
Version:
1 = with G1/2-male, 3 mm for screwing in
2 = with G1/2-male, 6 mm for screwing in
3 = 3 mm for inserting
4 = 6 mm for inserting
Insertion or sleeve length:
1 = 25 mm
2 = 50 mm
3 = 100 mm
4 = 150 mm
5 = 200 mm
6 = 250 mm
7 = 400 mm
[][][][] = = special type length in mm
Cable material:
1 = PVC up to 85C (standard)
2 = Silicon up to 200C
3 = Teflon up to 300C
4 = Fiberglass with braiding up to 400C
Cable length:
1 = 1000 mm (standard)
[][][][] = special type length in mm
Measuring element:
1 = 1 x Pt100 Class B, 2-wire
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
T 10
2008
Options (multiple naming like /2/9/10 are possible):

0 = none
1 = process connection G1/4-male instead of G1/2-male for PT-03.1 or PT-03.2
2 = process connection G3/8-male instead of G1/2-male for PT-03.1 or PT-03.2
3 = process connection M10x1-male instead of G1/2-male for PT-03.1 or PT-03.2
4 = process connection M6-male instead of G1/2-male for PT-03.1
5 = process connection M20x1.5-male instead of G1/2-male for PT-03.2
6 = compression fitting G1/4 for PT-03.3
7 = compression fitting G1/2 for PT-03.3 or PT-03.4
8 = compression fitting M10 for PT-03.3
9 = sensor class A instead of Class B
10 = material 1.4541 instead of stainless steel 1.4571
11 = material Inconel instead of stainless steel 1.4571
PT-05
in wall-mounted Housing
Contents
Startpage
Room temperature measurement
Description:
A Pt100 sensing resistor belong to accuracy class A or B
is situated in a stainless steel tube; it changes its ohmic
resistance according to the room temperature present outside
the measuring tube. This resistance value is tapped either
unaltered at the connecting terminals inside the wall-mounted
housing of the PT-05 or, first, converted into a 4...20 mA
output signal and then made available in 2-wire system.
Wall-mounting
Class A or Class B
Optionally with analogue output
2008
The PT-05 resistance thermometer measures room temperatures by simple method and is, therefore, used in building
and air-conditioning technologies. Wherever room temperature
plays an important role in regulating processes, it must be
tapped accurately and output electrically. In this respect,
PT-05 offers a cost-effective and yet robust solution.
www.profimess.de
Twischlehe 5 27580 Bremerhaven Tel.: (0471) 98 24 -151 Fax: (0471) 98 24 -152 E-Mail: info @ profimess.de
T 11
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Dimensions:
Housing:
65 x 58 x 35 mm (H x B x T)
PT-05
Feeler length:
50 mm stainless steel
Contents
6
Feeler diameter:
6 mm
10
90
Temperature range: -50C...+70C
Startpage
Accuracy of
measurement:
Class A or Class B as per

DIN EN 60751
(optionally 1/5 DIN CI.B)
Output:
1 x Pt100 3-wire or 2 x Pt100 3-wire

or 4...20 mA 2-wire
Options:
Pt1000 or NI100 instead of Pt100

on request
65
Protection class:
IP65 as per DIN 40 050
Cable gland:
PG11
Power output:
4...20 mA, 2-wire technology
Load:
max. Us -8V/ 21.6 mA
Supply voltage:
8...36 VDC
PG 9
35
58
PT-05.x.1
Reaction on
feeler break:
current exceeds 21.6 mA
Reaction on
short-circuit:
current falls below 3.5 mA
+
1 2 3 4 5
A
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
PT-05. 1B. 1. 0 -70. 0
Pt 100
Resistance thermometer
in wall-mounted housing
Sensing resistor:
1B = 1 x Pt100, Class B, 3-wire
1A = 1 x Pt100, Class A, 3-wire
2B = 2 x Pt100, Class B, 3-wire
2A = 2 x Pt100, Class A, 3-wire
PT-05.x.2
1
6
+
Transmitter:
0 = none
1 = standard transmitter 4...20 mA, 2-wire, fixed setting
2 = standardt ransmitter 4...20 mA, 2-wirr, programmable
through serial interface
7
R load
Supply voltage
Temperature range of power output:

0 = no power output
[][][] - [][][]C Assignment of power output to temperature range
in detailed text
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
Twischlehe 5 27580 Bremerhaven Tel.: (0471) 98 24 -151 Fax: (0471) 98 24 -152 E-Mail: info @ profimess.de
T 12
2008
Special features:
0 = none
1 = Please specify in detailed text
TD-01
Digitemp
Temperature Measuring
Transmitter with Display
Contents
Startpage
Description:
The temperature measuring transmitter TD-01 Digitemp
has in its vertical stainless steel shaft a Pt100 resistance
that reacts to changes in the ambient temperature by
changing its ohmic resistance. For one, the device utilizes
the connected supply voltage of 9 to 30 V DC for converting this resistance signal into a proportional current and,
at the same time, to display the temperature value on a 3
1/2-digit LED display. Since, optionally, Pt100 resistances
of Class A can be selected as a measuring element, maximum possible accuracies can be achieved in the temperature range of -200...+600C.
The robust version of the TD-01 with bayonet ring housing
of nominal size 100 (4) and connecting thread and stainless steel immersible shaft enable the device to easily
solve even the toughest tasks of temperature measurement. If the location of measurement should present the
most difficult conditions of pressure and medium, it is possible to insert the TD-01 into a DIN protection tube that will
protect the measuring transmitter from the process environment and still facilitate reliable measurements (protection tube available on request). The TD-01 is electrically
connected according to the proven 2-wire system. The
large and comfortably legible LED display draws its power
from the measuring loop and, therefore, need not be
powered additionally.
The user profits from using the TD-01 Digitemp in two
ways. For one, the highly accurate and reproducible measuring value is available as the current value of the measuring station and, at the same time, the process temperature can be directly captured at the location of measurement
with one glance.
Genuine 2-wire transmitter

Large LCD display without auxiliary
power
Fully stainless steel
Turnable process connection
2008
Optional battery-operated version
www.profimess.de
T 13
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
TD-01 Temperature Measuring Transmitter
Temperature range:
-200C to +600C
Temperature:
max. 70C on the display head
Neck tube:
from media temperature of 200C

a 120 mm neck tube is a standard feature (customized manufacturing possible)
Process connection:
Besides the version with smooth

shaft for inserting into a protective tube, 7 different variants of
thread joints are available.
Other type of connecting thread
joints or flange designs are available on request.
Depending on the required accuracy Pt100 sensors of Class
A(+/-(0.15 + 0.002*t) C) or
B (+/- (0.3 + 0.005*t) C)
can be used.
Sensor:
Insertion length:The inserting length of the device

is the shaft length from sealing
surface to the end of shaft.
Therefore, it includes the length
of the thread.
Shaft diameter:
Temperature range:
Accuracy:
display 0.1% +/- 1 digit

power output 0.2% including
sensor tolerance
Display:
31/2-digit LCD, -1999 to 1999

dots
Housing:
bayonet ring 4 (100 mm),

Protection tube:
3 standard diameters are available. Customized designs are

available on request.
Supply voltage:
9 to 30 VDC
The temperature range can be

freely selected within the limits of
-200 to + 600 C and the same
will be set at the factory as per
customer's specification.
Output:
unit signal 4 to 20 mA
Load:
Rb = (Ub-9 V) / 20 mA max,
Ub = Supply voltage
Protection class:
IP 65
Options:
battery-operated version
Contents
Startpage
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
TD-01. 2. 2.
[][][][]
2.
[][][][] [][][][]
Digitemp, Temperature Measuring

Transmitter with Display
Process connection:
1 = smooth shaft
2 = G 1/2, turnable
3 = G 3/4, turnable
4 = G 1, turnable
5 = M 18 x 1.5, turnable
8 = M 27 x 2, turnable
Sensor:
1 = Pt100 DIN 751 Cl. A
2 = Pt100 DIN 751 Cl. B
Insertion length:
[][][][] shaft length from sealing surface in mm
Shaft diameter:
1 = 6 mm
2 = 8 mm
3 = 10 mm
Temperature range:
[][][][] Initial value corresponds to 4 mA
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
T 14
2008
Temperature range:
[][][][] End value corresponds to 20 mA
TD-01
Contents
50
45
100
Startpage
Digitemp
Digitemp
C C
10
20
25
15
50
Einbaulnge / Insertion Length - L1
10
14
100
Tauchrohr
Immersion tube
d2
Digitemp
Digitemp
45
C C
40
10
Einbaulnge / Insertion Length - L1
TD-01.1
Tauchrohr
Immersion tube
d2
TD-01.(28)
Wiring diagram
1
D
A
A
9...30
V / DC
U
U
IK
2008
Pt 100
3-Leiter
www.profimess.de
T 15
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
GT-04
Gas Expansion Thermometer
with Nitrogen Filling
Contents
Startpage
Description
The GT-01 series of gas expansion thermometers consists of
a housing with integrated movement and a sensor system
connected directly or through a capillary tube. The sensors
are filled with neutral nitrogen gas that serves as a transmission medium for the temperature data. The nitrogen gas
pressure in the sensor system is evaluated by the movement
and mechanically displayed.
Housing sizes from 2.5 to 10

Steel housing in black or stainless steel
Versions with directly attached sensor or
with capillary tube
Temperature sensor and process
connection, individually configurable
Measuring range of -200...+50 to 0...800C
Optionally, alarm contacts or analogous
output
2008
Measuring accuracy:
Cl. 1.6, Cl. 1.0 and Cl. 0.6
Thanks to a wide variety of possible versions, GT-04 gas
expansion thermometers can be used in nearly any type of
applications where the process temperature needs to be
captured locally or by means of a remote display.
Moreover, limit contacts, analogous output signals or optionally available temperature recorders enable evaluation of
temperature data as well as controlling processes upstream
or downstream.
www.profimess.de
T 17
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Ordering codes
Ord.-No. GT-04. R. S. 100. L. A. 37. 0. 0. 9x90. BX1. 0. 0
Versions and material:
see pages 3...5
Limit contacts and

analogous outputs:
see page 6
Options:
see page 6
Gas Expansion
Thermometer
Version (page 3):
R = with directly
mounted sensor
C = with capillary tube
max. process pressure:

without protection
sleeve:
S = special design
Housing material
(page 3):
with protection
sleeve:
S = steel, black
X = stainless steel
Housing diameter
(page 3):
min. sensor length:
63 = 2.5 (63 mm)

80 = 3 (80 mm)
Contents
Startpage
min. 16 bar
(depending on temperature,
sensor diameter and length)
25 bar
(special designs for higher
pressure on request)
see table 5, page 5
Depending on the medium and the sensor diameter

different minimum sensor lengths are recommended.
Example:
Sensor diameter:
10 mm
Medium:
water
Lmin = 60 mm
oil:
Lmin = 100 mm
air:
Lmin = 160 mm
100 = 4 (100 mm)

160 = 6 (160 mm)
250 = 10 (250 mm)
xxx = special design, please
specify in detailed text
Attenuation (page 3):
max. sensor length:
X = unfilled (standard)
L = with glycerin filling
S = with silicon oil filling
max. length of
capillary tube:
K = with oil filling for devices with

built-in limit contacts
Accuracy:
2.5, 3:
4, 6, 10:
Optional:
6, 10:
Version (page 3):

A...H = as per table 1
Operating range (page 4):
3m
(greater lengths on request)
40 m
Cl. 1.6
Cl. 1.0
Cl. 0.6
Overload safety:
Capillary tube (page 4):

0 = none
30 % of operating range end

value however, max. 800C
(optionally 100%)
K...XP = as per table 3

Capillary sheathing (page 4):
0 = none
K...PB = as per table 4
Sensor (page 5):
DxL = sensor diameter x sensor length
as per table 5
Process connection (page 5):
BX1...CS3X6 = as per table 6
Electrical output signals (page 6):
0 = none
M...TT2 = as per table 7
Options (page 6):

Multiple naming possible
0 = none
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
T 18
2008
A...L = as per table 8
Version (Table 1):
Versions
with directly mounted sensor
Contents
connection at the bottom
R=
Thermometer with directly mounted sensor
C=
Thermometer with capillary tube
A
Materials
Startpage
connection at the back, in the
center
connection at the bottom, at 90

angle (A...D: direction of 90
angle)
connection at the back, at the

center with rim at the back
S=
Housing steel, black, with bayonet ring, IP-54

mineral glass dial, 4 mm aluminium scale, white,
lettering black aluminium indicator, black brass
movement
X=
Housing stainless steel 1.4301, with bayonet ring,

IP-65 mineral glass dial, 4 mm aluminium scale,
white, lettering black aluminium indicator, black
brass movement
Housing diameter
Nominal size:
Diameters: 2.5, 3, 4, 6, 10
with capillary tube
connection at the bottom with

wall holder

rim at the back for surfacemounting

rim in the front for flush mounting
2008
rectangular housing 72x72, 96x96,

144x144, 192x192, 72x144 vertical or
horizontal, 96x192 vertical or horizontal
Temperature recorder rectangular: 192
x192, 288x288 mm, round: d = 260 mm
Attenuation
connection at the back with rim

at the back
connection at the back, in the

center with rim in the front
connection at the back, eccentric with triangular front ring and

U-clamp for flush mounting
Customized
designs:
(on request)
X=
unfilled
L=
with glycerin filling for vibration attenuation
S=
with silicon oil filling

(increased vibration attenuation)
K=
with oil filling

(for devices with built-in limit contacts)
www.profimess.de
T 19
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Capillary tube (Table 3):
for GT-04.C...only
Scale graduation in C
Range in C
Class 1.0
and 1.6
Class 0.6
(Option)
-200...+50
option
-120...+40
option
-110...+50
option
-100...+100
option
-100...+50
option
-80...+40
option
-60...+40
0.5
option
-60...+60
option
Material
d
(mm)
Tmin.
(C)
Tmax.
(C)
copper
2.5
-120
400
stainless steel
1.4541
2.5
-260
800
stainless steel
with 4 PVC
coating
-60
120
XP
d
(mm)
Tmin.
(C)
Tmax.
(C)
Code
7.5
-60
120
SP
-260
800
flexible, stainless
steel 1.4401 with
PVC coating
7.5
-60
120
XP
lead cladding
16
-20
200
PB
Remarks
-50...+50
0.5
option
10
-40...+20
0.5
option
11
-40...+40
0.5
standard
12
-40...+60
0.5
option
Capillary sheathing (Table 4):
13
-40...+80
option
for GT-04.C...only
14
40...+110
option
15
-40...+120
0.5
option
16
-40...+160
option
17
-30...+30
0.5
standard
18
-30...+50
0.5
option
19
-30...+70
0.5
option
20
-30...+170
option
21
-20...+40
0.5
option
22
-20...+60
0.5
option
23
-20...+80
0.5
option
24
-20...+100
option
25
-20...+120
option
26
-20...+180
option
27
-15...+45
0.5
option
28
-10...+15
0.5
0.2
29
-10...+30
0.2
for 72x144 & 96x192

designs only
30
-10...+50
0.5
option
31
-10...+110
option
32
-10...+150
option
33
0...+25
0.5
0.2
for 72x144 & 96x192
34
0...+40
0.2
designs only
35
0...+60
0.5
standard
36
0...+80
0.5
option
37
0...+100
0.5
standard
38
0...+120
standard
39
0...+160
standard
40
0...+200
option
41
0...+250
option
42
0...+300
option
43
0...+400
10
option
44
0...+500
10
option
45
0...+600
10
option
46
0...+700
10
option
47
0...+800
10
option
PROFI
MESS
Material
flexible, stainless
steel1.4301 with
PVC coating
flexible,
stainless steel
1.4401
Code
www.profimess.de
GMBH
T 20
Contents
Startpage
2008
No.
Sensor
Contents
Process connection (Table 6)
The temperature sensors are basically made of stainless

steel 1.4541. Minimum sensor length is limited by the parameter Ls (see Table 5). This parameter indicates the sensitive part of the sensor which must be immersed into the medium in any case.
Version
Connec.
Material
brass stainless
steel
(max.
400 C) 1.4301
1/2 BSP
BM1
BX1
3/4 BSP
BM2
BX2
BM3
BX3
1/2 BSP
with permanent nipple 3/4 BSP
for GT-04.R
1 BSP
and
GT-04.C
1/2 NPT
---
CX1
---
CX2
---
CX3
---
CX4
3/4 NPT
---
CX5
NPT
---
CX6
1/2 BSP
with turna3/4 BSP
ble nipple
for GT-04.R 1 BSP
& GT-04.C
---
A04X1
---
A04X2
---
A04X3
with swivel
nut for
HEX 1
While specifying, please use the following format:
GT-04.R
and
Startpage Sensor diameter x sensor length (in mm)
BSP
GT-04.C
Example: 10x200
HEX 1
HEX 1
Sensor dimensions (Table 5)
HEX 1
Possible sensor diameter and minimum sensor length Ls (in mm)

GT-04.R
sensor directly mounted
minimum sensor length:
L = Ls
HEX 1
GT-04.C
with capillary tube
minimum sensor length:
L = Ls
HEX 1
Thermometer with
alarm contact
Standard Thermometer
1/2 BSP B01B1

with double
--3/4 BSP
nipple and
swivel nut
--1 BSP
for GT-04.R
--1/2 NPT
and
GT-04.C
--3/4 NPT
HEX 2
HEX 1
HEX 2
GT-04.R
Sensor
directly
mounted
GT-04.C
with
capillary
up to 5 m
190
190
---
---
---
6.35
155
155
---
---
---
125
125
---
---
---
90
90
170
170
170
68
68
130
130
130
10
55
55
100
100
100
11
45
45
80
80
80
(in mm)
GT-04.C
GT-04.R
GT-04.C
with
Measuring capillary
capillary
span
above 5 m
above 5 m >100 C
HEX 1
2008
HEX 1
HEX 2
HEX 2
B01X2
B01X3
B01X4
B01X5
NPT
---
B01X6
1/2 BSP
with double
3/4 BSP
nipple and
swivel nut,
1 BSP
can be shif1/2
NPT
ted to
capillary for
3/4 NPT
GT-04.C
1 NPT
---
CS2X1
---
CS2X2
---
CS2X3
---
CS2X4
---
CS2X5
---
CS2X6
1/2 BSP
with double
3/4 BSP
nipple and
swivel nut,
1 BSP
can be shif1/2
NPT
ted to sensor for GT3/4 NPT
04.R and
GT-04.C
1 NPT
---
CS3X1
---
CS3X2
---
CS3X3
---
CS3X4
---
CS3X5
---
CS3X6
Sensor
Diameter
B01X1
12
35
35
65
65
65
12,5
35
35
60
60
60
13
35
35
65
65
65
14
30
30
50
50
50
15
25
25
45
45
45
16
25
25
40
40
40
Other process connections:
18
20
20
35
35
35
20
20
20
31
31
31
Metric threads, aseptic glands, tri-clamp, surface sensors, helical sensors

for air etc. on request
HEX 1 HEX 2
www.profimess.de
T 21
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Options (Table 8)
Limit contacts and analogous outputs

Limit contacts are intended for alerting when certain threshold limits are crossed in either direction. The GT-04 thermometers in housing sizes 4 (100 mm) and 6 (160 mm) as
well as the rectangular housing designs can be optionally
equipped with up to 4 snap action contacts or inductive
contacts integrated into the housing. The contacts will be
designed as NO-contact or NC-contact (as the case may
be, with reference to increasing temperature). In addition,
micro-switches with higher switching load, contacts mounted
on the housing or pneumatic contacts can be supplied on
request.
Analogous outputs are meant for transferring the measuring data to higher-level display, evaluation or control
systems.
Angle of rotation measuring transmitters mounted into the
housing or PT-100 measuring transmitters with sensor integrated PT-100 sensor are available.
housing stainless steel 1.4401

instead of 1.4301
for GT-04...X...
dial made of safety glass
from 4
maximum indicator,
can be reset with key
for devices without contact
maximum indicator,
can be reset with key
for devices with contact
movement and indicator

made of stainless steel 1.4301
double scale C + F
precision measuring version

class 0.6
for 6 (160 mm), 10 (250 mm),

144x144, 192x192,
72x144 mm only
mirror scale
in combination with precision

measuring version only
for 6 (160 mm), 10 (250 mm)
only
for housing diameters 4,

6, rectangular housing
96x96, 144x144, 72x144 mm
1 contact
NC-contact or NO-contact,
change-over
Mx
2 contacts
NC-contact, NO-contact or
2 change-over
Mxx
3 contacts
not meant for 72x144 housing
Mxxx
NC-contact or NO-contact,
Mxxxx
Startpage
H
I
K
sensor HALAR coated
x = 1: NO-contact function
x = 2: NC-contact function
x = 3: change-over
4 contacts
polished sensor
snap action contacts

( 30 W / 50 VA)
micrometer indicator
Versions (Table 7)
Contents
max. 1000 mm, max. 200C
Stainless steel sensor protection sleeves

can be used for sensors with A04, B, C and CS3 connections Versions (Table 9)
TS02...
with male thread
sensor-side
HEX 1
TS03...
Inductive contacts as per NAMUR

(intrinsically safe contact protecting relay required for operation)
with female
thread sensor-side
Ix
1 contact
2 contacts
NC-contact, NO-contact or
2 change-over
Ixx
Type
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Ixxx
max.
sensor diameter
10
10
10
12.5
12.5
12.5
L (mm) (min. length)
100
100
100
63
63
63
sensor connection
d1 (mm)
G 1/2
G 1/2
G 1/2
G 1/2
G 1/2
G 1/2
Process connection
d2 (mm)
G 1/2
G 3/4
G1
G 1/2
G 3/4
G1
internal diameter
d3 (mm)
10.5
10.5
10.5
13
13
13
external diameter
D (mm)
12.5
12.5
12.5
15
15
15
HEX 1 (mm)
22
27
41
22
27
41
HEX 2 (mm)
27
32
41
27
32
41
HEX 2
Analogous outputs:
Angle of rotation
measuring transmitter with
4...20 mA, 3-wire output
diameters 100, 160 mm

96x96, 144x144 mm
Angle of rotation
0...20 mA, 3-wire output

96x96, 144x144 mm
Angle of rotation
0...100 Ohm, 3-wire output

96x96, 144x144 mm
PT-100-Measuring
transmitters with 4...20 mA, 96x96, 144x144, 72x144 mm
2-wire output, including
PT-100 element in the sensor
and cable
RT43
RT03
R
TT2
Parameter L1:
Example: TS02.2.120
PROFI
MESS
for sensor connections B, C, CS3: L1 = sensor length

for sensor connection A04: L1 = sensor length + 15
protection sleeve with G1/2-male
sensor-side, G 3/4male
process-side, length 120 mm,
for sensor diameter 10 mm
www.profimess.de
GMBH
T 22
2008
3 contacts
BT-01
Bimetallic
Thermometer
Contents
Startpage
Description:
In bimetallic thermometers, varying thermal expansion of
metals is utilized to measure and regulate temperatures. A
spring element is present in an immersible brass or stainless steel tube that consists of two curved metallic strips
rolled over each other, possessing different coefficients of
thermal expansion. When the temperature rises the outer
metallic strip expands more than the inner strip. The torsion
of the spiral resulting from this action directly influences an
indicator movement that displays the temperature on a
dial.
Affordable price
Robust
Accuracy Class 1.0
The BT-01 series of precision bimetallic thermometers offers
an excellent alternative to machine or glass thermometers
considering the fact that they are just as cost-effective and
accurate as their siblings, however, offer better reading
comfort. The design of the bimetallic thermometer is extremely robust and the protection tubes which can be supplied in brass or stainless steel, are resistant to hostile
media. These thermometers are available for direct mounting as well as for inserting into protection tubes, optionally
with a smooth shaft, permanently fixed threaded stem or
swivel nut in all commonly used thread variants. This
makes the BT-01 compatible with nearly any type of processes. Starting from a minimum temperature of -40C up
to a maximum temperature of +500C, the BT-01 series of
thermometers is capable of recording a temperature range
that covers a large section of all applications.
Bayonet ring housing

Many possibilities of connection
2008
Switching contacts
www.profimess.de
T 23
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
BT-01 Bimetallic Thermometer

Mounting position: The mounting position of BT-01 can be
selected between axial and vertical positions. For most of
the versions a pivoted housing that can be tilted in both
directions is available on request.
-25C to +70C
Pressure:
PN16 without additional protective tube
Nominal size: The housing diameters can be selected

between 2.5 (63 mm), 3 (80 mm), 4 (100 mm) and
6 (160 mm)
Measuring accuracy:
Class 1 as per DIN 16 204
Housing:
Bayonet ring cap, 2.5, 3, 4, or

6 diameter
Housing material:
Stainless steel or steel sheet

black powder-coated
Protection class:
IP 65
Options:
crimped ring housing

housing with collar ring
low-cost version
Process connection: All versions are available with

smooth shaft, permanently fixed screw on pin, turnable
screw on pin or with loose-fitting swivel nut where only the
variants with permanently fixed pin can be provided with
NPT thread.
Immersion tube diameter: The immersion tube diameters
can be selected between 6, 8 and 10 mm to facilitate
mounting in protection tube as well as for direct mounting.
Contents
Startpage
Shaft length: The immersion shaft is manufactured as per

customer's specification for length which must be indicated
in mm from the point of sealing surface.
Design: If the housing and process connection are separated, for example, by means of an insulating layer, the thermometer can be fitted with a neck tube which is, however,
intended for versions with permanently fixed thread pin in
view of the design.
Housing material: Housing materials are available in stainless steel or steel sheet.
Operating range [C]: The operating ranges are between 40C and +500C.
Additional features: For all devices marking or maximum
indicators and fluid filled housings are available (for 4 and
6 mm diameters only).
Connecting thread: With regard to connecting threads
various cylindrical or conical thread standards can be selected.
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
T 24
2008
Material: As materials for the immersion tube and thread

brass or stainless steel can be selected.
Ordering codes:
BT-01. V. 100. 2. 2. [][][][]. 1. E. 06. D. 2. 1.
Ordering number:
Contents
Bimetallic Thermometer
Mounting position:
A = axial
V = vertical
Startpage
Nominal size:
2.5 (63 mm) diameter
80 = 3 (80 mm) diameter
Process connection:
1 = smooth shaft
2 = fixed screw on pin
3 = turnable screw on pin
4 = loose swivel nut
Immersion tube diameter:
1 = 6 mm
2 = 8 mm
3 = 10 mm
Shaft length:
[][][][] please specify shaft length in mm
Design:
1 = without neck tube
2 = with neck tube (for fixed screw on pin only)
Housing material:
E = stainless steel
S = steel sheet (on request)
Measuring range [C]:
01 = -40 to +40
02 = -40 to +60
03 = -30 to +50
04 = -20 to +40
05 = -20 to +60
06 = 0 to +60
07 = 0 to +80
08 = 0 to +100
09 = 0 to +120
10 = 0 to +160
11 = 0 to +200
12 = 0 to +250
13 = 0 to +300
14 = 0 to +350
15 = 0 to +400
16 = 0 to +500
99 = other ranges on request
Additional features (from 4):
A = none
B = marking indicator
C = maximum indicator
D = silicon oil filling (up to 250C)
E = glycerin filling (up to 100C)
Connecting thread:
0 = none (smooth shaft)
1 = G 1/2
2 = G 3/4
3 = G 1
4 = 1/2-NPT (for fixed screw on pin only)
5 = 3/4-NPT (for fixed screw on pin only)
6 = M 18x1.5
7 = M 20x1.5
8 = M 24x1.5
9 = M 27x2.0
2008
Material (Immersion tube and thread):

1 = brass (on request)
2 = stainless steel
www.profimess.de
T 25
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
BT-01 Dimensions:
Contents
h
Startpage
d
10
15
40
dG
Immersion tube
d2
Insertion
length L1
Version without Neck tube
Immersion tube
d2
dG
PROFI
MESS
Insertion length L1
www.profimess.de
GMBH
T 26
2008
40
MT-01
Contents
Startpage
Description:
The immersion tube of the MT-01 series of industrial thermometers is either directly in contact with the medium or it
is built into a protection tube to counter high processing
pressure or chemically hostile environment. Within a short
span of time it picks up the medium's temperature and
transfers it to a glass capillary in its interior. The fluid filling
in the capillary expands proportionally to the temperature.
Its height is a reference for the measured temperature
which can be read on an enameled scale with an accuracy of 1% of the range end value.
Long scale
Robust design
Scratch-proof lettering
The Profimess MT-01 Industrial Thermometers are deployed where temperatures need to be reliably measured without the use of electrical power. Their top portion is V-shaped and, therefore, can be comfortably read from any
angle of view. It consists of brass-coloured anodized
aluminium in which the lettering is placed below the anodized layer to ensure maximum mechanical strength. The
prismatic capillary in the stem consists of solid glass
material with a diameter of approx. 6 mm and has a black
enameled graduation which also is absolutely resistant to
scratches. The immersion tubes of the MT-01 series are
made of brass for media temperatures up to 300C.
Moreover, steel or stainless steel tubes are also used. For
special applications like sea-water, different suitable materials can be used.
Legible from any direction

Straight or angled immersion tube
2008
Connectible to any type of protection

tubes
www.profimess.de
T 27
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Ordering codes:
Ordering number:
Versions:
MT-01. 2. 2. 1. 1. 1. 4. 2. 1
MT-01 Industrial Thermometer
Process connection: The thermometer can be connected

to the process or to the protection tube without screw
threads by insertion, with threads for screw mounting or
by means of a brass swivel nut.
Process connection:
1 = plug-in design, no thread
2 = screw on design
3 = brass swivel nut
Immersion tube position: The top part and immersion

tube are in vertical or rectangular position to each other.
A third possibility is aligning it at 135.
Immersion tube position:

1 = immersion tube vertical
2 = immersion tube 90 angled
3 = immersion tube 135 angled
Filling: For operating ranges up to 200C the capillary is

filled with a blue fluid. In the operating range of 60...+40C only a red colouring is available. For temperatures above 200C only mercury filling is used. Mercury
filling can also be provided even from -30C on request.
Graduation:
1 = Celsius (C)
2 = Celsius and Fahrenheit (C + F)
Insertion length: For MT-01 intended for insertion, the

insertion length is according to the immersion tune length
from lower edge of the pin and, in the screw on version
and the variant with swivel nut it is the immersion tube
length including the thread.
Filling:
1 = blue filling up to 200 C (-60/+40C red)
2 = mercury over 200 C
Connecting thread: Different thread types are available

for the thread pin of MT-01.2 as well as for the swivel nut
of MT-01.3.
Immersion tube material: Up to 300C brass is used as
a standard. Above this range, steel St35 or stainless steel
1.4571 are used. Special materials are available on
request.
Insertion length:
1 = 63 mm
2 = 100 mm
3 = 160 mm
4 = 250 mm
5 = 400 mm
Connecting thread:
0 = no thread
1 = G1/2A, SW27
2 = G3/4A, SW32
3 = M20 x 1.5, SW27
4 = M27 x 2, SW32
immersion tube material:

1 = brass
2 = steel
MT-01.2.2
Temperature range:
-60C...+600C
Material:
top part aluminium anodized,

shaft as per requirement
Accuracy:
+/- 1% of scale full value
Process connection:
G1/2A, G3/4A, M20x1.5 or

M27x2 thread pin or swivel nut
MT-01.2.3
MT-01.3.1
HEX 27
HEX 32
HEX 27
HEX 32
HEX 32
HEX 27
www.profimess.de
GMBH
T 28
2008
HEX 27
HEX 32
PROFI
MESS
Startpage
Graduation: The top part of MT-01 can have a single-side

Celsius scale or a Celsius and a Fahrenheit scale on the
right and left side of the capillary.
Operating range:
1 = -60...+40 C
2 = -30...+50 C
3 = 0...+60 C
4 = 0...+100 C
5 = 0...+120 C
6 = 0...+160 C
7 = 0...+200 C
8 = 0...+300 C
9 = 0...+400 C
10 = 0...+500 C
11 = 0...+600 C
MT-01.2.1
Contents

thread


protection tube

Contents

thread, one-piece

thread, multi-piece

male thread

one-piece


nut
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
T 32
2008
Startpage
TE-01
Contents
Startpage
Description:
In thermocouples, the temperature dependence of the
electrical voltage between two wires of different materials
is utilized to which a setpoint of the temperature to be
measured and to which another point of a fixed reference
temperature are subjected. In the TE-01 the welded ends
of both the wires being used are embedded in a metallic
or ceramic protection tube which are insulated from each
other. The reference point is situated in the connecting
head of the device. When the temperature of the measuring point at the tip of the protection tube changes in relation to the reference temperature, a thermal voltage occurs
which is proportional to the change in the temperature and
the same can be tapped at the connecting head. For foolproof and accurate functioning of the thermoelements, the
reference temperature must be constant and 0C. In case
of values like 20C or 50C, the resulting errors can be
balanced by generating a compensation voltage or by
taking the ratios in the evaluating software outputs into
consideration. However, if the TE-01 is used with a headmounted measuring transmitter which is capable of converting the thermal voltage directly into a 4...20 mA current
signal, the compensation will be generated internally and
hence minimizes the measuring errors..
Temperatures up to 1600 C
Thermoelements are used in the industry wherever conventional resistance thermometers reach their limitations.
This is the case, mostly, if the media temperatures are too
high or if space constraints exist.
For operating the TE-01, the user has a choice of three
mostly used elements (Type J, Type K and Type S) depending on the required working temperature and the extent
of the resulting thermal voltage. Normally, only elements
belonging to Class 1 are used which ensures the maximum accuracy. Depending on the media temperature and
media properties protection tubes made of stainless steel
or ceramic can be supplied. A wide range of connection
variants offer maximum possible compatibility with the process. Insertion lengths and shaft diameters can be implemented directly according to customer specifications so
that the TE-01 can be customized to any point of measurement.
Head-mounted measuring transmitter

Wide range of thread variants
2008
Insertion length as per customer

specification
www.profimess.de
T 29
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Ordering codes:
Versions:
[][][][]
2. 2.
[][][][] [][][][]
TE-01 Thermocouples in Protection Tube
Protection tube: For temperatures up to 800C protection

tubes made of stainless steel can be used. For higher temperatures, we recommend ceramic protection tubes with a
metallic support tube that is capable of managing temperatures up to 1600C.
Process connection: The versions with a metallic protection tube can be supplied with a variety of connecting
thread types or with a smooth shaft. Linking to the process
can be, for example, by means of a screw in bushing or
compression fitting.
In the case of variants with ceramic protection tube, the
materials like C610 and C799 are available which can be
supplied with 15 mm or 24 mm diameters. In this, the process connection is on the metallic support tube over a
stopper flange or a screw in bushing with compression fitting.
Output: Depending on the temperature range and the
required thermal voltage, thermoelements of Types J (FeCuNi up to 750C), K (NiCr-Ni up to 1200C) or S (Pt10RhPt up to 1600C) are mounted. Other DIN types can be
supplied on request. In the versions with integrated headmounted measuring transmitter the resulting thermal voltage is converted directly into a 4...20 mA current signal in 2wire system.
Insertion length: The insertion length is the length of the
shaft from the sealing surface and is manufactured as per
the customer specifications.
Shaft diameter: In the case of stainless steel protection
tubes the diameters can be selected from 6 mm, 9 mm, 11
mm and 15 mm depending on the conditions of available
space. In the case of ceramic protection tubes only 15 mm
or 24 mm are used.
Connecting head: Six different connecting heads as per
DIN are available. Please refer to Drawings for connecting
heads. For versions with integrated head measuring transmitters, the connecting head BUZ-H must be used if the
operating range exceeds 800C.
Protection tube:
1 = screw in version with stainless steel
protection tube (up to 800C)
2 = version with ceramic protection tube
(up to 1600C)
Process connection:
1 = smooth shaft (for version TE-01.1)
2 = G1/2 (for version TE-01.1)
3 = G3/4 (for version TE-01.1)
4 = G1 (for version TE-01.1)
5 = NPT1/2 (for version TE-01.1)
6 = NPT3/4 (for version TE-01.1)
7 = M18x 1.5 (for version TE-01.1)
8 = M20 x 1.5 (for version TE-01.1)
9 = M27 x2 (for version TE-01.1)
10 = Protection tube 15x2 of C610 capable
up to 1500C (for version TE-01.2),
support tube 200 mm 22x2
11 = Protection tube 15x2.5 of C799
capable up to1600C (for version TE-01.2),
12 = Protection tube 24x2.5 of C610 capable
13 = Protection tube 24x3 of C799 capable
Support tube 200 mm 32x2
Output:
1 = Type J (Fe-CuNi) as per DIN IEC 584
(up to 750 C)
2 = Type K (NiCr-Ni) as per DIN IEC 584
(up to 1200 C)
3 = Type S (Pt10Rh-Pt) as per DIN IEC 584
(up to 1600 C)
4 = Type J (Fe-CuNi) with head-mounted transmitter
5 = Type K (NiCr-Ni) with head-mounted transmitter
6 = Type S (Pt10Rh-Pt) with head-mounted transmitter
Insertion length:
[][][][] Shaft length from sealing surface in mm
Supply voltage:
Output:
Protection class:
24 VDC (for head transmitter)

Typ J, Typ K, Typ S or 4...20 mA
IP65
Connecting head:
1 = Form A (standard for ceramic protection tube)
2 = Form B (standard for stainless steel protection tube)
3 = Form BUZ
4 = Form BUZ-H (standard for head-mounted transmitter)
5 = Form NS
6 = Form GG
Pressure:
Temperature:
Temperature range:
[][][][] Initial value
Neck tube:
Temperature range:
[][][][] End value
Range:
Material:
Accuracy:
Electrical
connection:
Process
Connection:
max. 6 bar for stainless steel

protection tube
(insertion into high-pressure protection
tubes possible)
pressureless for ceramic protection tube
max. 70C at the connecting head for
head-mounted transmitter
from media temperature of 200C a 120
mm neck tube is the standard.
(customized manufacturing available)
up to 1600C
1.4571 for stainless steel protection tube
ceramic and steel for ceramic protection
tube
Class 1 as per DIN IEC 584
ceramic connection terminal in connection head
stopper flange, welded or screw in
bushing
www.profimess.de
GMBH
Startpage
Shaft diameter of stainless steel protection tube:

1 = 6 mm
2 = 9 mm
3 =11 mm
4 = 15 mm
5 = Ceramic protection tube
PROFI
MESS
Contents
T 30
2008
Ordering number: TE-01. 1. 2. 1.

TE-01
Contents
PG 16
PG 16
80
94
Startpage
50
57
2008
HEX
SW
d2
Insertion Length
Einbaulnge L1
d1
Nominal Length
Nennlnge L
200
120
M 24 x 1.5
d1
d2 / ceramic
d1/ support tube
15 mm
22 mm
24 mm
32 mm
www.profimess.de
T 31
PROFI
MESS
GMBH

Connecting Heads for
PT-02 and TE-01
Contents Form A cover with 2 fastening screws
Form B over with 2 fastening screws

Startpage
Form BUZ flap cover with bracket

Material: aluminium pressure castin
Form BUZ-H high flap cover with bracket
Form NS cover with screw closure

Material: fiberglass reinforced polyamide
Form GG cover with screw closure

Material: steel/cast iron
2008
HEX 27
www.profimess.de
T7
PROFI
MESS
GMBH

thread


protection tube

Contents

thread, one-piece

thread, multi-piece

male thread

one-piece


nut
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
T 32
2008
Startpage
TS-01
Temperature Switch
Contents
Startpage
Description:
A fully compound-filled bimetallic thermostat is embedded in a fitting made of brass or stainless steel. The thermostat has a temperature value set at the factory itself.
On reaching this temperature when the sensor is fully
immersed into the medium, the switch connects either as
a NO-contact or a NC-contact between pins 1 and 2 of
the DIN plug which is included in the delivery. On
request, the plug can be provided with an additional LED
which will display the switching status.
Compact design
Brass or stainless steel
Cost-effective
2008
As a temperature switch, the TS-01 is unbeatable in its
simplicity. It is widely used in various applications and it
is capable of reliably monitoring temperatures with fixed
switch- and return points in the narrowest of space at a
very affordable price. The version made of stainless steel
1.4305 is resistant to a number of extremely hostile
media, thus making the TS-01 ideally suited for applications in the chemical and petrochemical industries without
any problem.
www.profimess.de
T 33
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
TS-01 01 Temperature Switches
Contents
Sensor material:Optionally the TS-01 is available

in brass or stainless steel
versions
Connecting parameters: The connection point can be
freely selected between
40...130C at intervals of 10C
Connecting function:
The TS-01 can be supplied as

NC-contact or NO-contact.
Materials:
Ni-plated brass Ms 58 or stainless steel 1.4305, plug material

PA 6.6
Startpage
Connection:
G 1/2-male
(G 3/4-male on request)
Pressure:
PN100
Hysteresis:
10K up to 20K
Media temperature:
setpoint +50 K
Tolerance:
+/-10 K
NO-contact
NC-contact
0.12 kg
Weight:
sensor should be fully covered

from media in front
Mounting:
plug connection DIN 43650-A

(plug type Hirschmann)
Protection class:
IP 65
Switching load:
250 VAC, 10 A
Media:
Option:
e.g. water, gas/air, oil

Tolerance selection from smaller
hysteresis up to 10K
Ordering codes:
TS-01. 1. [50].
Ordering number:
Temperature Switches
Sensor material:
1 =brass
2= stainless steel (on request)
Setpoint in C:
[040]
[050]
[060]
in 10K steps up to 130C
[130]
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
T 34
2008
Connecting funtion:
1 = NO-contact
2 = NC-contact
TS-02
Stem Thermostat
Contents
Startpage
Description
The TS-02 series of stem thermostats has a fluid-filled copper
chamber system which is inserted into a brass or stainless
steel protection tube by means of a sideways-mounted
locking screw. When this stem is subjected to a media temperature to be monitored, the fluid becomes warm and, subsequently, begins to vaporize with increasing temperature.
A pressure switch permanently fixed to the capillary system
detects the resulting vapour pressure and connects to a
potential-free change-over contact which can be loaded up
to 8 A at 250 V AC. The setpoint of the TS-02 can be set
externally within the operating range of the particular version
by means of a screw-driver and read on a scale.
High switching load

Plug connection
Optionally in hazardous areas
With a separate protection tube
2008
The TS-02 stem thermostat is used wherever the temperature
of a solid, fluid or gaseous medium in containers, silos, conduits or pipes needs to be reliably monitored. In this, it meets
the highest requirements of pressure and sealing tightness as
well as robustness and life span. The brass or stainless steel
protection tubes used for insertion can withstand pressures
up to 63 bar (brass 25 bar). They are compatible with a large
number of media as well. Also the micro-switch used here
fits into the entire concept of the TS-02. With a switching
load of 2.0 kW, it is capable of directly controlling even smaller and medium drives. In this way, for example, maximum
temperature monitoring can be implemented to directly cutoff
a pump or a compressor by deploying a single cost-effective
device.
www.profimess.de
T 35
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
TS-02 Temperature Switch
Temperature:
see table
Protection
tube material:
max. media temp.:
see table
The temperature switch is supplied as

a standard along with a protection
tube that can be made of Ni-plated
brass or stainless steel
max pressure:
the maximum permissible pressure for

a brass protection tube is 25 bar, for
a stainless steel protection tube 63
bar
Process connection For process connection, a G 1/2 or

a 1/2-NPT connecting thread can
be selected.
Insertion length:
The insertion lengths are taken

measured from sealing edge as
135 mm or 220 mm
Operating range:
Type
Operating range Hysteresis
TS-02.x.x.x.A
-20...+30C
1.5 K
110C
TS-02.x.x.x.B
10...50C
1.5 K
110C
TS-02.x.x.x.C
40...90C
2.5 K
125C
TS-02.x.x.x.D
80...130C
4K
150C
Mounting position:
any position
Housing material:
Aluminium pressure casting GD

AL Si 12
Adjustment:
the scale value corresponds to the

lower setpoint (for decreasing
temperature), the upper setpoint is
higher by the hysteresis
Setpoint:
Can be set externally by means of an

screw-driver on the setting spindle
Vibration:
Up to 4g no significant deviations. In
higher acceleration, the hysteresis
decreases slightly. Usage above 25g
not permissible.
max. Temp.
Electrical
connection:
Insulation
parameters:
Plug connection as per DIN 43650

with cable insertion of M 16x1.5
Protection class:
IP 54 in vertical mounting position
Switching load:
250 VAC 8 A (Ohmic), 5 A (inductive)
Contacts:
change-over (SPDT)
Contents
max. ambient temp.: -15+70C,

in hazardous areas 60C
Options:
Ordering codes:
Startpage
Excess voltage category III, degree of

pollution 3, Rated surge voltage 4000
V. Compliance to DIN VDE 0110
(01.89) is confirmed.
maximum or minimum limiter, gold
contacts, ATEX version Zone 1 and
Zone 21 (0 and 20 available on
request), setpoint can be set at
factory
60
46 0.2
112
DIN 43650
TS-02. 1. 1. 1. B.
Ordering number:
48.5
45.5
37
8.2
4.5
Temperature switch
Protection tube material
1 = Ni-plated brass
2 = stainless steel 1.4571 and 1.4401
PG 11
Process connection
1 = G 1/2-male
2 = 1/2-NPT-male
49
www.profimess.de
GMBH
T 36
2008
PROFI
MESS
Operating range in C
A = -20...+30C
B = +10...+50C
C = +40...+90C
D = +80...+130C
100
Insertion length
1 = 135 mm
2 = 220 mm
TS-03
Surface-Mounting
Thermostat with Rigid
or Flexible Connection
Contents
Startpage
Description: Thermostats belonging to the TS-03 series are

universally applicable temperature switches which, according
to the mounted evaluating unit, are designed as temperature
switches, temperature controllers or temperature limiters.
The limiter and switch versions can also be supplied with
safety engineering which means that, in the event of a defect
in the measuring system in the TS-03, an a alarm signal is
sounded and cannot be reset again. Any contamination in
the medium under surveillance with the filling in the TS-03
cannot escape undetected under any circumstances. In this,
the principle of measuring is simple but very reliable. A fluid
or gas is located within the sensor system of the TS-03
depending on the control range. When the temperature rises
the filled medium expands. In turn, a micro-switch is activated by means of a mechanical transmission system on reaching the limiting temperature. Depending on the design as a
controller, switch or limiter, this switch acts as a change-over
or NC-contact which reverts to the initial position either automatically on returning to normal temperature value or
manually by releasing the appropriate button.
The TS-03 series is available with a rigid or flexible connection so that they can be directly screw mounted into the process or also installed away from the process. The delivery
includes suitable protection tubes and different lengths and
materials are available.
Designed as switch, controller

or limiter
Range of application: Thermostats belonging to the TS-03

series are used wherever any fluid or gaseous medium needs
to be reliably monitored for reaching a limiting temperature.
The micro-switch used is capable of processing high degree
of switching performance and, therefore, capable of switching pumps, magnetic valves or heating rods directly.
Thanks to the wide range of connection variants designed for
universal application of brass, steel or stainless steel protection tubes including rigid or flexible versions and the various
temperature ranges up to 500C, the limits for the TS-03 are
very far fetched which has enabled the devices to achieve a
strong market penetration.
Optionally with safety engineering

Temperatures up to 500C
Gas or fluid-filled
2008
Brass, steel or stainless steel

protection tube
www.profimess.de
T 37
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
Temperature controller: If the media temperature at the
sensor of the temperature controller exceeds the externally
adjustable limiting temperature, the micro-switch is actuated
by means of the transmission mechanism and the power circuit gets broken or closed. On dropping below the limit (by
hysteresis) the micro-switch is reset automatically to initial
position.
Control ranges:
see Tables 1 and 2
Filling:
up to 300C end value of the control

range fluid,
above this gaseous
Housing:
Cover polycarbonate unbreakable,

colour pebble gray RAL 7032,
bottom part aluminium pressure
casting painted,
colour anthracite gray RAL 7015
Contents
Temperature switch: If the media temperature at the sensor

of the temperature controller exceeds the limiting temperature
adjustable internally by means of a screw-driver, the microswitch is actuated by means of the transmission mechanism
and the power circuit gets broken or closed. On dropping
below the limit (by hysteresis) the micro-switch is reset automatically to initial position.
Safety temperature switch: If the media temperature at the
safety temperature switch exceeds the limiting temperature
below the limit (by hysteresis) the micro-switch is reset automatically to initial position. In case of possible damage to the
measurement system, that is, if the expansion fluid escapes,
the pressure in the diaphragm drops and breaks the power
circuit continuously. Unlocking will no longer be possible.
Similarly, if the sensor cools down to below -20C the power
circuit gets broken. Subsequently, on reaching a temperature
above -20C the power circuit is gets closed automatically.
Safety temperature limiter: If the media temperature at the
safety temperature limiter exceeds the limiting temperature
below the limit (by hysteresis) the micro-switch is reset automatically to initial position. In case of possible damage to the
measurement system, that is, if the expansion fluid escapes,
the pressure in the diaphragm drops and breaks the power
circuit continuously. Unlocking will no longer be possible.
Similarly, if the sensor cools down below -20C, the power
circuit gets broken. Subsequently, on reaching a temperature
above -20C the safety temperature limiter must be unlocked
manually.
Capillary material:

ange copper 2.0090,
above this stainless steel 1.4571
Sensor material:

range copper 2.0090, above this up to
350C end value of the control range
stainless steel 1.4571 hard soldered,
above this stainless steel 1.4571
welded
Capillary length:
1000 or 2000 mm
Bending radius of
capillary:
max. 5 mm
Ambient temp.:
max. 80C
Storage
temperature:
-50C...+50C
Accuracy:
TR
Startpage
+/- 1.5% in the upper 1/3 of the scale

+/- 6% at the start of scale
TW, STW and STB +0 / - 5% in the upper 1/3 of the scale

+0 / - 10% at the start of scale
Hysteresis:
see Tables 1 and 2
Temperature error
in rigid connection:
TR and TW
0.08% / K for operating range
< 200C
0.06% / K for 200C <= operating
range <=350C
0.14% / K for 350C < operating
range <= 500C
in deviations of 22C
ambient temperature
Ordering codes:
TS-03. [-][T][R][S][1][7]
Surface-Mounting Thermostat
Version as per Table 1 (rigid shaft)
or Table 2 (flexible cord):
[[][][][][] e.g TRS17 for temperature controller,
rigid shaft 8 x 100 mm stainless steel, 20C...150C, G1/2
PROFI
MESS

< 200C
range<= 350C
range
<= 500C
ambient temperature
www.profimess.de
GMBH
T 38
2008
STW and STB

Ordering number:
Contents
Additional
temperature
error in flexible
connection:
TR and TW
Startpage
2008
STW and STB
Connecting element:
TR, TW and STW micro-switch with change-over contact
STB
micro-switch with NC-contact and
restart lock
< 200C
range <=350C
range <= 500C
ambient temperature,
per meter of capillary
< 200C
0.11 % / K for 200C <= operating
range <= 350C
range
in deviations of 22C ambient
temperature, per meter of capillary
Process
connection:
see Tables 1 and 2
Rated position:
as per DIN 16 257 NL 0...NL 90
Weight:
approx. 0.5 kg
Switching load:
AC 230 C +/- 10%, 10 (2) A,

cos Phi = 1 (0.6) for hysteresis > 2%
AC 230 C+/- 10%, 6(1.2) A,
cos Phi = 1 (0.6) for hysteresis <= 2%
DC 230 V+10%, 0.25 A
Cable insertion:
choke nipple M20 x 1.5 for 8...10 mm

cable diameter
Protection class:
IP54 as per EN 60 529
www.profimess.de
T 39
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Dimensions
TR with sleeve U
Contents
Startpage
HEX
TW/STW with sleeve UZ
HEX 27
STB, flexible, with sleeve U
HEX 24
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
T 40
2008
HEX
Table 1
Contents
2008
Startpage
Version code
TRS01
TRS02
TRS03
TRS04
TRS05
TRS06
TRS07
TRS08
TRS09
TRS10
TRS11
TRS12
TRS13
TRS14
TRS15
TRS16
TRS17
TRS18
TRS19
TRS20
TRS21
TRS22
Shaft
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
Function
TR
TR
TR
TR
TR
TR
TR
TR
TR
TR
TR
TR
TR
TR
TR
TR
TR
TR
TR
TR
TR
TR
Control range [C]

-10C...+40C
0C...50C
0C...50C
0C...50C
0C...50C
20C...90C
20C...90C
0C...100C
0C...100C
0C...100C
0C...100C
0C...100C
0C...100C
0C...100C
20C...120C
20C...150C
20C...150C
20C...150C
20C...150C
50C...200C
50C...300C
20C...500C
Hysteresis [%]]
3-4
1.5
1.5
3-4
3-4
6-8
3-4
1.5
3-4
3-4
3-4
1.5
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
5
Process connection
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
UZ G1/2
UZ G1/2
UZ G1/2
Immersion tube x Length [mm]

8 x 200
15 x 100
15 x 100 CrNi
8 x 200
8 x 300
15 x 100
8 x 150
8 x 120
8 x 120
8 x 120 CrNi
8 x 150
8 x 200
8 x 200
8 x 300
8 x 150
8 x 100
8 x 100 CrNi
8 x 200
8 x 300
8 x 200
8 x 150
8 x 200
TWS01
TWS02
TWS03
TWS04
TWS05
TWS06
TWS07
TWS08
TWS09
TWS10
TWS11
TWS12
TWS13
TWS14
TWS15
TWS16
TWS17
TWS18
TWS19
TWS20
TWS21
TWS22
TWS23
TWS24
TWS25
TWS26
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
-10C...+40C
0C...50C
0C...50C
0C...50C
0C...50C
20C...90C
20C...90C
20C...90C
20C...90C
0C...100C
0C...100C
0C...100C
0C...100C
0C...100C
20C...150C
20C...150C
20C...150C
20C...150C
20C...150C
20C...150C
50C...200C
50C...200C
50C...200C
50C...300C
50C...300C
20C...500C
3-4
1.5
1.5
3-4
3-4
1.5
6-8
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
1.5
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
5
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
UZ G1/2
UZ G1/2
UZ G1/2
UZ G1/2
UZ G1/2
UZ G1/2
8 x 200
15 x 100
15 x 100 CrNi
8 x 200
8 x 300
15 x 100
15 x 100
8 x 150
8 x 200
8 x 120
8 x 120 CrNi
8 x 150
8 x 200
8 x 300
8 x 100
8 x 100
8 x 100 CrNi
8 x 200
8 x 200 CrNi
8 x 300
8 x 120
8 x 200
8 x 300
8 x 150
8 x 150 CrNi
8 x 200
STWS01
STWS02
STWS03
STWS04
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
STW
STW
STW
STW
20C...150C
50C...300C
50C...350C
20C...500C
4-6
4-6
4-6
7
U G1/2
UZ G1/2
EZS G3/4
UZO G1/2
8 x 150
8 X 200
170
200
STBS01
STBS02
STBS03
STBS04
STBS05
STBS06
STBS07
STBS08
STBS09
STBS10
STBS11
STBS12
STBS13
STBS14
STBS15
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
rigid
STB
STB
STB
STB
STB
STB
STB
STB
STB
STB
STB
STB
STB
STB
STB
30C...110C
30C...110C
30C...110C
60C...130C
60C...130C
20C...150C
130C...200C
130C...200C
50C...300C
30C...110C
20C...150C
50C...300C
50C...350C
20C...500C
20C...500C
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
UZ G1/2
UZ G1/2
UZ G1/2
U G1/2
U G1/2
UZ G1/2
EZS G3/4
UZO G1/2
UZ G1/2
8 x 150
8 x 200
8 x 300
8 x 150
8 x 200
8 x 200
8 x 150
8 x 300
8 x 200
8 x 150
8 x 200
8 x 200
170
200
8 x 200
www.profimess.de
T 41
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Table 2
Shaft
Function Control range [C] Hysteresis [%]]
Capillary [mm]
Process
Connection
Sensor x Length
[mm]
TRF01
TRF02
TRF03
TRF04
TRF05
TRF06
TRF07
flexible
flexible
flexible
flexible
flexible
flexible
flexible
TR
TR
TR
TR
TR
TR
TR
-10C...+40C
0C...50C
20C...90C
0C...100C
20C...150C
50C...300C
20C...500C
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
5
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
185
185
138
107
88
63
148
TWF01
TWF02
TWF03
TWF04
TWF05
TWF06
TWF07
TWF08
TWF09
TWF10
TWF11
TWF12
TWF13
flexible
flexible
flexible
flexible
flexible
flexible
flexible
flexible
flexible
flexible
flexible
flexible
flexible
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
TW
0C...50C
0C...50C
20C...90C
0C...100C
0C...100C
20C...150C
20C...150C
50C...200C
50C...200C
50C...300C
50C...300C
20C...500C
20C...500C
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
5
5
1000
2000
1000
1000
2000
1000
2000
1000
2000
1000
2000
1000
2000
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
185
185
138
107
107
88
88
101
101
63
63
148
148
STBF01
STBF02
STBF03
STBF04
STBF05
STBF06
STBF07
STBF08
STBF09
STBF10
STBF11
STBF12
STBF13
STBF14
STBF15
STBF16
STBF17
flexible
flexible
flexible
flexible
flexible
flexible
flexible
flexible
flexible
flexible
flexible
flexible
flexible
flexible
flexible
flexible
flexible
STB
STB
STB
STB
STB
STB
STB
STB
STB
STB
STB
STB
STB
STB
STB
STB
STB
20C...500C
30C...110C
30C...110C
60C...130C
20C...150C
20C...150C
20C...150C
50C...200C
50C...200C
130C...200C
50C...300C
50C...300C
50C...300C
20C...500C
20C...500C
20C...500C
20C...500C
7
-
4000
1000
2000
1000
1000
2000
1000
2000
1000
1000
1000
2000
1000
1000
1000
2000
4000
ES G3/4
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
ES G3/4
200
6 x 108
6 x 108
6 x 116
6 x 77
6 x 77
6 x 77
6 x 85
6 x 85
6 x 114
6 x 55
6 x 55
6 x 55
6 x 127
6 x 127
6 x 127
200
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
T 42
Contents
Startpage
2008
Version code
IR-01
Low-Cost Infrared Thermometer
Contents
Startpage
Description
Non-contact measurement of temperature with infrared thermometers is a modern, reliable and fast system of measuring
temperatures.
The device measures the heat radiation originating from an
object. From this, it determines the surface temperature while
taking the emission factor of the object of measurement in to
regard. The emission factor is determined by the optical properties of the object of measurement and depends on the
material and the surface characteristics of the object of measurement. Commonly used values for faint and non-translucent objects of measurement within the infrared range are
estimated at approx. 0.95. For extremely reflecting objects
the emission factors can be 0.3 to 0.2.
The IR-01 captures the temperature of a measuring spot that
gets larger as the distance from the device increases. In this,
a Laser pilot light facilitates the orientation of the thermometer and thus the determination of the exact location of measurement
Ergonomic and robust

Fast and reliable
Easy to operate
Using infrared thermometers becomes necessary, if the

object of measurement cannot be or should not be contacted
for reasons such as:
Operating range -32C...+500C
it is too far,
it is moving,
Adjustable emissivity from

20...100%
the object is under voltage,

it is a toxic chemical,
the object of measurement must remain sterile or
2008
Laser pilot light
it is too hot to allow measurement with a thermoelement.
www.profimess.de
T 43
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
-32C...500C (400C)
Emissivity:
adjustable from 20...100% (fixed

0.95 for IR-01.1)
Accuracy:
1% of measuring value in C + 1
Digit (2% of measuring value in C
+ 1 Digit for IR-01.1)
0.5% of measuring value in C + 1
Digit (1% of measuring value in C
+ 1 Digit for IR-01.1)
Repeatability:
Normal, max, min, mean value

(AVG), deviation from starting
value (DIF), continuous measuring with locking lever, automatic
cut off
Functions:
Operating range:
Display resolution:
Working temperature:
0.1 K of-10C...200C in AVG

mode, 1 K in other type of measuring
Contents
Startpage
0...55C / 32...131F
Temperature
coefficient:
0.03% / K (at 23 C)
Supply:
Response time t90:
0.3 s
Viewing device:
Spectral range:
Weight:
IR-Detector:
8...14 m (no effect due to water

or CO2)
Thermopile
Housing material:
ABS
Display illumination:
automatic
Protection class:
IP 20
Temperature display:
Large display:
Small display
C and F adjustable,
3-digit, 9 mm height
4-digit, 4.5 mm height
Battery life
(alkaline batteries):
25 h
9 V Battery
Laserpilot light (only IR-01.2)
320 g (including battery)
Optics
20 mm
68 mm
0,6 m
100 mm
1m
spot diameter
distance
220 mm
2m
distance ratio: 10:1

Aperture:
20 mm
Ordering codes
Ordering number:
IR-01.
1.
Infrared Hand-Held Thermometer

Version
1 =operating range -32C+400C, emissivity cannot be adjusted
2 = operating range -32C+500C,emissivity can be adjusted
3 = operating range -32C+600C,emissivity can be adjusted
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
T 44
2008
4 = operating range -32C+800C, emissivity can be adjusted
IR-02
Compact Infrared
Thermometer with
Power Output
Contents
Startpage
Description: The IR-02 infrared thermometer is a pyrometer
with a thermopile detector which is equipped with a robust
Germanium lens. It utilizes the spectral region of 8... 14
micrometers so as to measure temperatures in the range of 32C to +900C at a distance ratio of 5:1 without contacting.
The radiation of the object of measurement in this wavelength is constantly compared with the radiation of the sensor's surroundings and the current value of the object's surface temperature is delivered to the output of the IR-02 within at least 100 milliseconds. A 4...20 mA signal proportional
to the temperature is available in 2-wire system. Decisive for
the quality and the accuracy of measurement is the knowledge about the emissivity of the surface being measured. The
value indicates the ratio of the intensity of radiation of the
surface of a black emitter to that of the actual surface. A list
of common surfaces and the relevant emissivities is included
in the delivery package of the IR-02. Using a hand-held device for parameterization, the emissivity of 20...100%, the response time between 100 milliseconds and 10 seconds as
well as the allocation of the 4...20 mA signal to a temperature range can be easily and quickly transmitted to the IR-02.
Besides, a maximum value memory can be switched or reset
and the measured value of an already installed IR-02 can be
displayed. The parameters once transmitted continue to be
present even during an outage.
Range of application: Non-contacting infrared thermometers are used in the industry whenever it is not possible to
attach a conventional temperature sensor due to high temperature of the object being measured or due to its geometrical characteristics. Pyrometers recognize only surface temperatures; they are free from repercussions and can measure
even objects of small specific heat capacity or less thermal
conduction such as plastic or various types of glass. The
dynamics are solely determined by the evaluation electronics,
with the result that fast changing conditions of temperature
can be captured. The IR-02 is a genuine 2-wire transmitter
and its operating range within -32C...+900C can be freely
selected by the user by means of a hand-held programming
device. Its various electronics are situated in a robust stainless steel housing. A wide range of accessories like cooler
housing, Laser pilot light or blower attachments and convenient assembling brackets enable permanent installation in the
most difficult processes even at high ambient temperatures,
in dusty atmosphere or in vacuum chambers. Typical applications are found, for example in the glass, paper and plastic
industries as well as in Research & Development activities.
-32C +900C
2-wire technology
Configurable with hand-held device
High degree of accuracy
Digital signal processing
Short response times
2008
Solid stainless steel housing
www.profimess.de
T 45
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Version:
Accessories:
Temperature range: The entire coverage of IR-02 is from 32C to +900C. Within these limits the 4...20 mA 2-wire output can be freely assigned. This is done in the factory before
dispatching the IR-02 or by means of an optionally available
hand-held parameterizing device which is also used for setting the parameters such as emissivity and response time as
well as for configuring the maximum value memory. The minimum span of the adjustable operating range is 50K.
Assembling bracket:
Using the assembling
bracket the pyrometer can
be easily adjusted and fixed
at one (single part bracket)
or two levels (two-part
bracket) by +/-45 independent of each other.
The IR-02 is fixed by means
of two counter nuts on the pyrometer.
Optics: The IR-02 infrared thermometer is supplied with one

of the three available optics that can be removed or exchanged only at the factory. Optics VII offers a large measuring
spot even from small distances to the point of measurement,
Optics VIII has a measuring spot that becomes smaller and
Optics IX has a relatively smaller diameter at large distances.
The object to be measured should be always larger than the
measuring spot found at the relevant distance between the
pyrometer and the point of measurement.
Contents
Startpage
Stainless steel blower

attachment:
The blower attachment protects the pyrometer lens in
rough industrial conditions
against soiling due to dust,
humidity or flying particles and
ensures trouble-free functioning of the device. The required air passage is in approximately at 25...30 l/min pressurized air under 0.2...0.5 bar.
Cable length: The standard cable length of IR-02 is 2

meters. Optionally, the device can be provided with a longer
cable.
Cooler housing with stainless steel blower

attachment:
The cooler housing acts as protection for the pyrometer in
environments where the permissible ambient temperature
of 70C exceeds. By using this cooler housing the
pyrometer can be operated in ambient temperatures of up
to 170C. The cooling water flow should be 4 l/min at 20C
water temperature.
Vacuum adapter with Zn Selenide window:
Installation of the pyrometer to a vacuum chamber can be
performed with the vacuum adapter.
Ordering codes
Ordering number: IR-02.
Laser stainless steel

pilot attachment:
The Laser pilot attachment enables the user to
view even small objects of
measurement easily and
safety by means of a
Laser point. It is provided
with a counter thread and
screwed on to the pyrometer on the front side.
[][][][]-[][][][] 1. 1. 0
Compact Infrared Thermometer

Temperature range as per 4...20 mA:
[][][][]-[][][][] (initial to end temperature in C)
Optik:
1 = Optics VII (Measuring spot 2 mm for a distance of 100 mm)
2 = Optics VIII (Measuring spot 6 mm for a distance if 300 mm)
3 = Optics IX (Measuring spot 16 mm for a distance of 800 mm)
Cable length:
1 = 2m Cable (standard)
2 = 5m Cable
3 = 10m Cable
4 = 15m Cable
5 = 30m Cable
Plastic carry case: Especially in the field of research the

IR-02 needs to be transported from one point of measurement to another. A plastic carry case protects the pyrometer, sensitive optics and accessories from damaged during
transportation.
Accessories:
0 = no accessories
1 = assembling bracket, single part
2 = assembling bracket, two-part
3 = blower attachment
4 = cooling hood with blower attachment (air or water cooling) including holder
5 = vacuum adapter with window made of Zn Se including sealing and screwring
6 = pilot light attachment
7 = plastic carry case
8 = hand-held parameterizing device without interfacing cable
9 = hand-held parameterizing device with interfacing cable
10 = interfacing cable for hand-held parameterizing device
www.profimess.de
GMBH
T 46
2008
PROFI
MESS
Hand-held parameterizing device: Using a hand-held

parameterizing device temperature range, emissivity and
response time can be transmitted through the service
interface of IR-02 to the Pyrometer for storing in its electronics. The maximum value memory of IR-02 is switched
off or reset with the hand-held device. If the temperature of
an already installed Pyrometer has to be recorded, this is
also possible with the practical operating device. The standard delivery includes a hand-held programming device
and interfacing cable.
Operating range:
-32C...+900C, fractional range from

50K Minimum span adjustable through
hand-held parameterizing device
Supply voltage:
Spectral range:
814 m
Distance ratio:
50 :1
Accuracy:
1% of measuring value in C +1K (at 23C)
Contents
Startpage Repeatability:
Measuring output: 4...20 mA, linear, pronounced DC

Caution: at ambient temperatures
> 75C approx. 3.9 mA is put out
Load:
0.5% of measuring value in C +1K
Response time
t90:
Emissivity:
100ms...10s, adjustable in steps through

hand-held parameterizing device
20%...100%, adjustable through handheld parameterizing device
Operating
temperature:
070C
Storage temp.:
-20C70C
Thread:
M40 x1.5-male
Length:
approx. 138 mm
Weight:
approx. 450 g
24 V DC +/- 25%, stabilized,

wobble 50 mV max.
700 Ohm max. (for 24 VDC)

Power
consumption:
2 W max.
Protection class:
IP65 as per DIN 40050
CE sign:
Corresponds to EU directive on electromagnetic compatibility, for operation

with open cap the CE approval become
void
HEX 46
M40 x 1.5
housing
cover
service
interface
30
74.5
~25
113
Optics:
Optic VII
Distance a [mm] a = 0 (Aperture) 100
Measuring spot
diameter M [mm] 15
2
Optic VIII
Measuring spot
diameter M [mm] 15
6
2008
Optic IX
Measuring spot
diameter M [mm] 15
16
200
300
18
35
600
1000
22
45
1500
2500
36
68
a = 0 mm
a = 100 mm
a = 200 mm
Aperture
M = 15 mm
M = 2.5 mm
M = 18 mm
www.profimess.de
T 47
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Accessories
BG-01
Flow Limiter
Contents
Startpage
Flow quantity regulation without

Description
The BG-01 series of flow limiters has been developed for limiting the flow of water-like media to a particular value. They
ensure that the flow value does not exceed even during fluctuating admission or dwell pressures. In contrast to most of the
devices of this type normally available in the market, the BG-01
limiters have a stainless steel spring element instead of the
commonly used plastic membrane. As a result of the differential pressure occurring over the limiter, the spring element gets
pressed more or less against the sealing surface of the housing. The split opening between the sealing surface and the
spring varies continually. As a result of the enlargement of the
split opening when the pressure falls or, as the case may be,
its decrease when the pressure rises, the quantity of fluid passing through the device is maintained at a constant rate.
Power-saving through consumptiondependent limiting of flow quantity

Compact design
Easy to mount
All-metal version without internal
plastic components
2008
Brass or stainless steel material
These devices are used for all water-like media. They can be
deployed in water distribution systems in the industry, in sanitary and car-washing installations and in other fields.
www.profimess.de
Z1
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
Functioning and structure:
Process connection:
G 1/2-female both sides

G 3/4-female both sides
inlet G 1/2-female, outlet G 1/2-male
inlet G 3/4-female, outlet G 3/4-male
Contents
fixed orifice
water flow limiter
Material:
Startpage
Body: brass or stainless steel 1.4305

Star: stainless steel 1.4310
Cone: stainless steel 1.4301
Rivet: stainless steel 1.4301
Locking ring: stainless steel 1.4121
Proportional to the pressure, the free cross section is decreased as the pressure increases. This ensures constant flow
quantity.
Flow quantities:
1 - 30 l/min water in 1 l/min steps.
The flow quantities are preset according to the design of the
devices and cannot be changed by the customer. By adding
several individual elements nearly any flow value can be achieved (see data sheet BG-03).
1) housing
2) ring funnel
3) regulating orifice
4) clamp ring
Ordering codes
Dimensions
Ordering number
BG-01.
1. 1. [ ] [ ]
Flow Limiter
Process connection:
1 = G 1/2-female both sides
2 = G 3/4-female both sides
3 = inlet G 1/2-female, outlet G 1/2-male
4 = inlet G 3/4-female, outlet G 3/4-male
Material:
1 = brass
2 = stainless steel
Flow quantity:
[ ] [ ] = 01 - 30 l/min in 1 l/min steps
Special version:
0 = none
Type
GT
GL
GI
GA
BG-01.1
43
14
BG-01.2
45
15
BG-01.3
43
14
14
G 1/2
G 1/2
24
BG-01.4
45
15
15
G 3/4
G 3/4
30
G 1/2
HEX
24
G 3/4
30
PROFI
MESS
min. regulating pressure:
2 bar
max. differential pressure:
10 bar
Testing pressure:
100 bar at 20C
max. temperature:
200 C
Accuracy:
up to including 2 l/min
15%
from 3 l/min 10%
www.profimess.de
GMBH
Z2
2008
Accessories
BG-03
Flow Limiter for Large
Quantities of Flow
Contents
Startpage
Flow quantity regulation without

Description
The BG-03 series of flow limiters has been developed for
limiting the flow of water-like media to a particular value. They
ensure that the flow value does not exceed even during fluctuating admission or dwell pressures. In contrast to most of the
devices of this type normally available in the market, the BG-03
limiters have a stainless steel spring element instead of the
commonly used plastic membrane.
As a result of the differential pressure occurring over the limiter,
the spring element gets pressed more or less against the sealing surface of the housing. The split opening between the sealing surface and the spring varies continually. As a result of the
enlargement of the split opening when the pressure falls or, as
the case may be, its decrease when the pressure rises, the
quantity of fluid passing through the device is maintained at a
constant rate.
Power-saving through consumptiondependent limiting of flow quantity

For nominal pipe diameters of
DN20...DN80
For screw fitting in existing pipes and
completely with flow housing
All-metal version without internal plastic
components
These devices are used for all water-like media. They can be
deployed in water distribution systems in the industry, in sanitary and car-washing installations and in sterilization and water
treatment installations.
2008
Brass or stainless steel material
www.profimess.de
Z3
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Functioning and structure
Design and dimensions
see data sheet BG-01
The flow limiters are available as disc with male thread or builtin completely in a stainless steel flow housing.
Flow quantities
Various individual elements can be supplied for the following
flow quantities:
1 -30 l/min water in 1 l/min steps.
By adding several elements on one limiter disc, nearly any
flow quantities can be achieved.
D
size of limiter
disc
(malethread G)
max.
number of
limiter
elements
Flow quantities
from...to
(l/min.)
Flow housing
possible process
connections
3/4
1...30
1 1/2
3...90
3/4, 1
5...150
1, 1 1/4, 1 1/2
Contents
Startpage
2 1/2
9...270
1 1/4, 1 1/2, 2
13
13...390
2, 2 1/2
H = 12 mm
Ordering codes
Ordering number
Type
BG-03. 1. 50. 1. 32. 100
Flow Limiter
Limiter disc material:
1 = brass disc, stainless steel inserts
2 = stainless steel disc, stainless steel inserts
Outer diameter of limiter disc:
20 = G 3/4
40 = G 1 1/2
50 = G 2
65 = G 2 1/2
80 = G 3
Flow housing:
0 = none
1 = flow housing with female thread G
9 = others (on request)
Gi
Ga
BG-03.x.40.1.20.xxx
G 1 1/2
G 3/4
91
52
BG-03.x.40.1.25.xxx
G 1 1/2
G1
91
52
BG-03.x.50.1.25.xxx
G2
G1
157
84
BG-03.x.50.1.32.xxx
G2
G 1 1/4
157
84
BG-03.x.50.1.40.xxx
G2
G 1 1/2
157
84
BG-03.x.65.1.32.xxx
G 2 1/2
G 1 1/4
225
118
BG-03.x.65.1.40.xxx
G 2 1/2
G 1 1/2
225
118
BG-03.x.65.1.50.xxx
G 2 1/2
G2
225
118
BG-03.x.80.1.50.xxx
G3
G2
270
141
BG-03.x.80.1.65.xxx
G3
G 2 1/2
270
141
Process connection of flow housing:

00 = ohne
20 = G 3/4-female
25 = G 1-female
32 = G 1 1/4-female
40 = G 1 1/2-female
50 = G 2-female
65 = G 2 1/2-female
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
Z4
2008
Flow quantity:
xxx = in l/min. water
Accessories
FT-01
Strainer with and without
Magnetic Separator
Contents
Startpage
For pipes of G 1/4 to G 3
Description
The FT-01 series of strainers is designed as slanted seat filter;
they reliably prevent damages to the devices installed inside
the pipe caused by impurities in the medium. Especially measuring devices with magnetic components can be protected by
strainers with magnetic separators against malfunctioning due
to ferrite particles.
Filter mesh grade 0.6 or 0.25 mm

Compact design
2008
Gunmetal, brass and stainless steel

versions
These devices can be used for fluids, gases and vapours up to
150C water, mineral, gear, heating and hydraulic oils etc. so
as to protect pumps, gear trains and flow measuring devices.
www.profimess.de
Z5
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions
Versionen:
max. temperature:
with magnetic separator

for pipes of G1/2 to G3,
filter mesh grade 0.6 mm
without magnetic separator
for pipes of G1/4 to G3,
filter mesh grade 0.6 or 0.25 mm
Material:
150
Housing:
Sieve insert:
Magnetic system:
gunmetal, brass, stainless steel

stainless steel
ferrite
Contents
Startpage
Material:
gunmetal, brass and stainless steel versions
Ordering codes
Dimensions:
Ordering number
FT-01. 2. 1. 3. 1.
L
Strainer
HEX 1
t
Version:
1 = no magnetic separator
2 = with magnetic separator (for VA only 1/2" and 1")
D
Material:
1 = gunmetal(for nominal diameters only 1/4" to 2")
2 = brass (for nominal diameters only 2 1/2" and 3")
3 = stainless steel (for nominal diameters only 1/2 to 2")
H
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
1/4 (FT-01.1 only)

3/8 (FT-01.1 only)
1/2
3/4
1
11/4
11/2
2
21/2
3
HEX 2
Filter mesh grade:

1 = 0.6 mm (standard)
2 = 0.25 mm (FT-01.1 only)
PROFI
MESS
Typ
HEX 1 HEX 2
FT-01.x.0
FT-01.x.1
FT-01.x.2
FT-01.x.3
FT-01.x.4
FT-01.x.5
FT-01.x.6
FT-01.x.7
FT-01.x.8
FT-01.x.9
0.25
0.375
0.5
0.75
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
3
56
56
64
75
90
112
120
150
220
243
11
11
12
14
15
18
18
22
23
26
35
35
42
50
62
78
82
95
125
140
21
21
25
31
38
47
54
66
85
100
17
17
22
27
32
41
46
56
70
75
www.profimess.de
GMBH
Z6
2008
Connection:
0 = female thread
1 = female thread
2 = female thread
3 = female thread
4 = female thread
5 = female thread
6 = female thread
7 = female thread
8 = female thread
9 = female thread
Accessories
NV-01
Needle Valve in Brass,
Steel or Stainless Steel
Contents
Startpage
Up to 250C
Description
Profimess' needle valves are intended for precise regulation
of the quantity of fluids flowing through pipes. The device
body has two parts (screw fitting) where the top part is screwed into it. Designs available in brass, steel and stainless
steel in nominal diameters of G1/8" to G11/2" allow a wide
range of applications which is why these devices are used
across many industries.
Up to PN200
Compact design
2008
Profimess' needle valves are deployed wherever flowing
fluids in industrial installations need to be blocked, reduced
or regulated. The stainless steel version of the valves can be
deployed up to 200 bar and 350C where, however, the
dependence of maximum pressure and the operating temperature must be taken into consideration.
They are particularly suitable for using as blocking elements
in measuring operations in fill level and flow control.
www.profimess.de
Z7
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
NV-01.1
1/8
G
4
D
50
L
70
H
12.5
M
0.24
kv
NV-01 Needle Valve in Brass, Steel or Stainless Steel
max. operating
pressure:
NV-01.1 PN100 at 20C

NV-01.2 PN200 at 20C
NV-01.3 PN200 at 20C
Gland nut:
NV-01.1
CuZn39Pb3F37
brass (Ms58)
brass (Ms58)
brass (Ms58)
Perbunan to G1/2
Teflon from G1/2
brass (Ms58)
1/2
6.5
55
78
14
1.08
3/4
9
67
90
18
1.62
1
11
75
95
22.5
3.0
11/4
13
110
105
30
3.6
11/2
15
110
110
32.5
3.6
11/4
15
110
145
28
3.1
11/2
22
130
145
33
5.56
Contents
Startpage
Material:
Housing:
Head piece:
Spindle:
Gland base ring:
Spindle sealing:
Gland nut:
NV-01.2
steel 9 S 20 K
steel 9 S 20 K
Graphite
steel 9 S 20 K
Material:
Housing:
Head piece:
Spindle:
Gland base ring:
Spindle sealing:
Gland nut:
NV-01.3
stainless
stainless
stainless
stainless
PTFE
stainless
steel
steel
steel
steel
3/8
6
50
78
12.5
0.6
Kv value in m3/h
Required pressure reduction

Temperature:
50C 100C 200C 300C 400C
Reduction:
6% 15% 37% 60% 84%
max. operating temp.: NV-01.1 100C
NV-01.2 350C
NV-01.3 250C
Material:
Housing:
Head piece:
Spindle:
Gland base ring:
Spindle sealing:
1/4
5
50
78
12.5
0.48
D
L
NV-01.2 and NV-01.3

1/8
1/4
3/8
G
4
5
6
D
50
50
55
L
72
72
72
H
12
12
12
M
0.24 0.48 0.6
kv
1.4571
1.4571
1.4571
1.4571
steel 1.4571
1/2
7
60
77
14
0.74
3/4
9
75
97
17
1.35
1
12
100
110
22
1.66
Kv value in m3/h
Ordering codes:
Ordering number
NV-01. 3. 1.
NV-01 Needle Valve
Material:
1 = brass
2 = steel
3 = stainless steel
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
Z8
2008
Process connection:
1 = G 1/8"
2 = G 1/4"
3 = G 3/8"
4 = G 1/2"
5 = G 3/4"
6 = G 1"
7 = G 11/4"
8 = G 11/2"
Accessories
MV-01
2/2-way Solenoid Valve
for Fluids
Contents
Startpage
Nominal diameters 1/4"-2"
Description
The pilot-controlled full-way valve with servo membrane and
forced-lifting is currentless closed. In this status, the core closes the pilot-control boring in the center of the membrane
holder due to spring action. The media pressure above the
membrane builds up over a membrane throttle boring and
closes the valve. When the valve's magnetic coil is supplied
with current, the resulting magnetic field lifts up the core
which, first, opens the pilot-control boring to let the closing
pressure above the membrane weaken and the valve can
open fully due to the excrescent media pressure and the
coil's magnetic force. This mechanism allows switching the
MV-01 from a particular differential pressure of 0 bar.
Pressure up to 10 bar
24 V DC and all common AC variants
Forced-lifting
2008
Magnetic valves are primarily used in processes in which flow
of fluids, steam or gas need to be switched on or shut off frequently and at precisely defined point of time. The simple but
reliable devices are very frequently deployed especially in the
dosing technology. As against the commonly used pilot-controlled valves which require a certain minimum differential
pressure in order to switch on and to hold it connected
through, no minimum differential pressure is required for reliable functioning in the case of forced lifting method on which
the design of the MV-01 is based. A variety of possible material combinations for the valve body in brass or stainless steel
and the membrane materials like NBR, FPM or EPDM, as well
as the available operating voltages in the AC and DC range,
render the MV-01 into one of the most universally applicable
solenoid valve in the market.
www.profimess.de
Z9
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions
FPM is used for Per-solutions and hot oils with additives and
EPDM should be used for oil- and greaseless fluids like hot
water and alkaline washing and bleaching lye.
Housing material: For various nominal diameters brass housings are available while stainless steel housings are supplied
as a standard only up to 1" size and 8.3 m3/h Kv value.
However, special designs are available on request.
Contents
Accessories: Besides the required standard plug socket

also sockets with LED for switching status display, varistor for
surge voltage protection or integrated rectifier can be supplied.
Kv value: For these flow values of water as the medium at

20C (from 1.9 to 30.0 m3/h) exactly 1 bar pressure will drop
at the relevant valve. These are taken into regard so as to
assess the loss of pressure on the valve with reference to the
entire range.
Startpage
Connection: All cylindrical thread sizes between G1/4" and

G2" are available. However, the relationship between the Kv
value and the thread must be taken into consideration.
Housing material:
brass or stainless steel 1.4404
Internal
components:
Supply voltage: Besides 24 V DC also all commonly used

variants of AC voltage can be supplied.
Membrane material: Among plastic materials, NBR
(Perbunan), FPM (Viton) and EPDM are available. Depending
on the medium and the required temperature any one of the
alternatives can be supplied. NBR is used for neutral fluids
like water, hydraulic oil and oils and greases without additives.
for brass housing brass, stainless steel

and PPS
for VA housing stainless steel and PPS
Pressure:
10 bar max.
Temperature:
for NBR membrane -10...+90C

for FPM membrane 0...90C
for EPDM membrane -30...+120C
Ambient
temperature:
55C max.
Mounting position: any, preferably with drive towards top
Ordering codes
Ordering number
Supply:
MV-01. 2. 2. 2. 1. 1. 0
24 VDC or 24/110/230 VAC, 50 Hz,

others on request
Solenoid Valve for Fluids
Voltage tolerance: +/- 10%

Housing material:
1 = brass
2 = stainless steel (up to only G1" and Kv value of 8.3 m3/h)
Kv value (water):
1 = 1.9 m3/h
2 = 3.6 m3/h
3 = 8.3 m3/h
4 = 11.0 m3/h
5 = 30.0 m3/h
IP65
El. connection:
DIN43650 A plug
Performance and response timings
Connection:
1 = G1/4"-female for Kv = 1.9 only
2 = G3/8"-female for Kv = 1.9 only
3 = G1/2"-female for Kv= 1.9 and 3.6 only
4 = G3/4"-female for Kv = 3.6 and 8.3 only
5 = G1 "-female for Kv = 8.3 and 11.0 only
6 = G1 1/4"-female for Kv = 11.0 only
7 = G1 1/2"-female for Kv = 30.0 only
8 = G2"-female for Kv = 30.0 only
Kv
Nominal Threads Power
values diameter
consumption
[m3/h] [mm]
AC
AC
DC
Drawing Operation [W]
[VA]
[VA/W]
Supply voltage:
1 = 24 VDC
2 = 24 VAC, 50 Hz
3 = 110 VAC, 50 Hz
4 = 230 VAC, 50 Hz
Membrane material:
1 = NBR
2 = FPM
3 = EPDM
Response timings
Weight
Open
[ms]
Close
[ms]
[kg]
1.9
10
G 1/4
34
14/8
10
50
100
0.4
1.9
10
G 3/8
34
14/8
10
50
100
0.4
1.9
10
G 1/2
34
14/8
10
50
100
0.4
3.6
13
G 1/2
36
14/8
10
120
350
0.55
3.6
13
G 3/4
36
14/8
10
120
350
0.55
8.3
20
G 3/4
38
14/8
10
250
2000
1.1
8.3
20
G1
38
14/8
10
250
2000
1.1
11
25
G1
160
38/18
72/4*
250
2000
1.7
11
25
G 11/4
160
38/18
72/4*
250
2000
1.7
30
40
G 11/2
202
38/18
72/4*
700
2500
3.5
30
40
G2
202
38/18
72/4*
700
2500
3.5
* Coil for UC with integrated high-performance electronics in the device plug socket.
A
A with LED
A with LED and varistor
A with LED,
www.profimess.de
GMBH
Z 10
2008
Accessories:
0 = none
1 = device plug socket DIN43650 Form
varistor and rectifier (24 V only)
PROFI
MESS
Protection class:
Contents
Startpage
Table of dimensions
G thread
DN
G
G 1/4
10
G 3/8
G 1/2
G 1/2
13
G 3/4
G 3/4
20
G1
G1
25
G 11/4
G 11/2
40
G2
F
12
12
14
14
16
16
18
18
20
22
24
AC coil
B
DC coil
B
AC/DC coil
C
L (Ms/VA)
82.00
32.00
45.00
82.50
40.00
51.00
37.50
50/55
95.50
32.00
45.00
96.00
40.00
51.00
45.00
58/65
115.50
32.00
45.00
116.00
40.00
51.00
66.00
80/100
158.50
163.00
179.50
184.50
49.00
53.00
49.00
53.00
104.50
95/-
49.00
53.00
158.50
163.00
179.50
184.50
49.00
53.00
104.50
132/-
2008
Sectional view
www.profimess.de
Z 11
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Accessories
KG-01
Ball Valve in Brass
or Stainless Steel
Contents
Startpage
Description
The KG-01 series of ball valves is suited for blocking flow
of various media. Due to the materials used, such as PTFE,
Viton, brass or stainless steel, they are resistant to chemically
hostile, gaseous, fluid, viscous, powdery and polluted substances.
Permissible ranges of pressure and temperature allow them
to be deployed in difficult processes, for example, in chemical
and petrochemical industries, in metal and container construction or in the air-conditioning, ventilation and thermal
technologies.
High temperature resistance

Up to PN64
2 or 3-way versions
2008
Viton and PTFE sealings
www.profimess.de
Z 13
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Brass version:
Contents
max. testing pressure: 2-way ball valve PN25

3-way ball valve up to PN30
for 1" PN16- from 1" PN10
max. temperature:
-30C...+180C
Housing:
brass nickel plated
Ball:
brass hard chrome-plated
Ball sealing:
PTFE
Spindle sealing:
Viton
Startpage

max. testing pressure: 2-way ball valve PN40
(PN64 on request)
3-way ball valve PN63
max. temperature:
-30C...+180C
Housing:
Ball:
2-way ball valve

3-way ball valve
Ball sealing:
PTFE
Spindle sealing:
PTFE
Options: flange connection, emptying boring, tetrahedral

cap, spindle extension, low-cost versions with reduced passage, pneumatic and electrical drives
Ordering codes:
Ordering codes
Ordering number
KG-01. 4. 2. 1.
KG-01 Ball Valve

Typ:
1= 2-way, thread female/female
2= 2-way, thread female/male
3= 3-way L boring
4= 3-way T boring
Material:
1 = brass
2 = stainless steel (not KG-01.2)
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
Z 14
2008
Prozeanschlu:
1 = G1/4" (not 3-way stainless steel)
2 = G3/8" (not 3-way stainless steel)
3 = G 1/2"
4 = G 3/4"
5 = G 1"
6 = G 11/4"
7 = G 11/2"
8 = G 2"
Accessories
UM-01
Universal Transmitter for
RTD, TE, Ohm, Potentiometer,
mA and V
Contents
Startpage
Description:
The UM-01 universal transmitter is a module for assembling
into a switchgear cabinet that can receive at the input measured values from resistance thermometers, thermo-elements,
ohmic resistors, potentiometers or devices with analogue
signals and translates them into a galvanically separated
analogue signal. Optionally, the UM-01 can also be equipped
with two additional programmable relay outputs; alternatively
it can be supplied only as a cost-effective switching unit with
relay outputs. The UM-01 is programmed through a separately available mountable display PE451 which is fixed on the
front side of the measurement converter to display continuously the input signal, the units, the device TAG-No. and
the relay or the output status, as required. The special feature
of PE451 is, however, that the UM-01 operates even without
it and that the program parameters in the PE451 remain
saved. Programming more than one UM-01 is, therefore, a
child's play. Once the configuration is done, the settings are
easily read into any new measurement converter on mounting
and pressing the button; cumbersome resetting of parameters is, therefore, unnecessary. The UM-01 measurement
converter is powered universally by DC or AC voltages and is
compatible with most common transmitter devices like thermo-elements of type B to type LR, resistance thermo-meters
NI100 and PT100 as 2, 3 or 4-wire and transmitters with
analogue output range of 0...20 mA or 0...10 V DC.
The UM-01 has been developed in accordance with the
most stringent safety measures and hence can be used in
installations with SIL 2.
Ideal for evaluation of resistance

thermometers or levelmeters with
REED-chains
Galvanic separation of analogue signals
Models with relay and analogue output
Optionally with DNV approval
for shipping
Universal power supply through
21.6...253 V AC or 19.2...300 V DC
Including sensor power supply
Wherever temperatures are measured using thermo-elements
or resistance thermometers or levels are output by levelmeters
as a potentiometer signal, the UM-01 is the ideal supplement
in the line of measuring devices. It converts the linear input
signal into an analogue output signal and offers, additionally,
the facility of tapping two setpoints as a potential-free relay
NO contact. Since the transmitter connected at the input of
UM-01 is powered directly by the UM-01, the measurement
converter is perfectly suited as a signal separator that establishes a galvanic separation between the measuring and
analyzing circuits. The UM-01 has been conceived for universal application so as to enable the user to save costs on
inventory, since he would only need a single device as
against two to three variants earlier. Optionally, the UM-01
can be supplied with UL approval for markets in USA or with
DNV approval for shipping applications.
Programmable through attachable

display
2008
SIL 2
www.profimess.de
Z 15
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
-20C...+60C
General specifications:
Universal power supply:
Power consumption:
Fuse:
Insulation voltage,
Test / Operation:
Communication
interface:
Signal / Noise ratio:
Response time
(O...90%, 100...10%):
Temperature input:
mA-/ V input:
Calibration temp.:
Cable diameter:
1 x 2.5 mm2 max. flex
Terminal joint torque:
0.5 Nm
Rel. humidity:
< 95% RF (non-condensing)
2.3 kV AC / 250 V AC
Dimensions
with PE451:
109 x 23.5 x 116 mm (H x W x D)
Programming front PE451

min. 60 dB (0...100 kHz)
Dimensions
without PE451:
109 x 23.5 x 104 mm (H x W x D)
Protection class
Housing / Terminal:
IP5O / IP20
Weight:
Compliance with directives:

EMV2004/108/EG
Irradiation and Error
stability:
EN 61326
LVD 73/23/EWG:
EN 61010-1
FM:
3600, 3611,3810 and
ISA 82.02.01
0.1% of operating range
0.01% of operating range
per C
Input type
Basic accuracy
Temp. coefficient
mA
4 A
4 A / C
Volt
20 V
2 V / C
RTD
0,2C
0,01C / C
Lin. R
0,1 Ohm
0,01 Ohm / C
Potentiometer
0,1 Ohm
0,01 Ohm / C
TE-Types E, J, K, L, N, T
1C
0,05C / C
TE-Types B, R, S, W3, W5, LR
2C
0,2C / C
Input type
MIN value
MAX value
Standard
Pt100
-200C
+850C
IEC60751
Ni100
-60C
+250C
DIN 43760
Lin. R
0 Ohm
10000 Ohm
Potentiometer
10 Ohm
100 kOhm
50 Ohm max.
nom. 0.2 mA
< 0.002 Ohm / Ohm

yes
< 15 Ohm
Thermo-element input:
NAMUR NE21, criterion A

1% of measuring range
Ordering codes:
UM-01. 2. 1
Type
MIN value
MAX value
Standard
+400C
+1820C
IEC 60584-1
-100C
+1000C
IEC 60584-1
-100C
+1200C
IEC 60584-1
-180C
+1372C
IEC 60584-1
-200C
+900C
DIN 43710
-180C
+1300C
IEC 60584-1
-50C
+1760C
IEC 60584-1
-50C
+1760C
IEC 60584-1
-200C
+400C
IEC 60584-1
-200C
+600C
DIN 43710
W3
0C
+2300C
ASTM E988-90
W5
0C
+2300C
ASTM E988-90
LR
-200C
+800C
GOST 3044-84
Compensations
accuracy (CJC) through
internal feelers:
< 1C
Feeler detection
all TE types:
yes
Feeler error current
on detection:
nom. 0.2 A, otherwise 0 A
UM-10 Universal Transmitter for RTD,

TE, Ohm, Resistance, Potentiometer,
mA and Volt
Output variants:
1 = Limit switch with two potential-free relays
2 = Transmitter with 4...20 mA- or 0...10 V DC output
3 = Transmitter with 4...20 mA- or 0...10 V DC output
and two potential-free relays
Power input:
Operating range:
Programmable
operating ranges:
Input resistance:
Programming unit PE451:

0 = none
1 = with programming unit PE451 for front-side
mounting on the UM-01
PROFI
MESS
-1...25 mA
0...20 and 4...20 mA
nom. 20 Ohm + PTC 50 Ohm
www.profimess.de
GMBH
Startpage
Basic weight 145 g plus 25 g

in relay outputs plus 15 g
with PE451
Cable resistance
per wire for RTD:
Feeler current
for RTD:
Effect of wire
resistance
(3- or 4-wire RTD):
Feeler detection RTD:
Short-circuit
detection WTH:
0,5% of measuring range
Ordering number:
Contents
Inputs:
RTD-, linear resistance and potentiometer:
Accuracy basic values:
EMV error
voltage factor:
Extended EMV
error stability:
Burst:
25...16 V DC / 0...20 mA
21,6...253 V AC, 50...60 Hz

or 19.2...300 V DC
2.5 W
400 mA SB / 250 V AC
1s
400 ms
20...28C
Accuracy in general:
Absolute accuracy:
Temperature coefficient:
2-wire power supply

(terminals 44, 43):
Z 16
2008
Contents
Voltage input:
Operating range:
Programmable
Operating ranges:
Input resistance:
Applications
-20 mV...12 V DC
Input signals:
0/0.2...1; 0/1...5; 0/2...10 V DC

nom. 10 MegaOhm
Current
44
43
Current output
(only UM-01.2 and UM-01.3):
Signal range
(range):
0...20 mA
Programmable
Operating ranges:
0/4...20 or 20...4/0 mA
Load:
max. 20 mA/800 Ohm / 16 V DC
Load stability:
< 0.01% of measuring range /
100 Ohm
Feeler error detection: 0 / 3.5 / 23 mA / no
NAMUR NE43 Up-/
Downscale:
23 mA / 3.5 mA
Power limiting:
28mA
42
41
Output signals:
Relais
12
14
Voltage output
Signal range
(range):
0...10 VDC
Programmable
Operating ranges:
0/0,2...1; 0/1...5; 0/2...10;
1...0,2/0; 5...1/0; 10...2/0 VDC
Load:
min. 500 kOhm
13
10 V
10 V
1V
1V
24
23
22
21
11
Analogue, 0/4...20 mA and voltage
Power supply:
Relay outputs
Relay function:
Setpoint value, Window,
Feeler error, Power and Off
Hysteresis in %/
counter units:
0.1...25% / 1...2999
On-/Off delay:
0...3600 s
Maximum voltage:
250 VRMS
Maximum current:
2 A AC or 1 A DC
Maximum AC power:
500 VA
Feeler error
confirmation:
Close / Open / Hold
2008
TE
connection, wires
4
3
2
Outputs:
Startpage
Voltage Potentiometer
WTH
RTD and lin. R
33
21,6...253 VAC
or
19,2...300 VDC
32
31
www.profimess.de
Z 17
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Accessories
AZ-02
4-digit Digital Display
96 x 48 mm
Contents
Startpage
All common input signals
Description
The AZ-02 Digital Display offers to the user everything that
the current process measuring technology demands from
electronic evaluation devices. This device is freely scalable
and capable of utilizing a wide spectrum of current, voltage
and impulse signals as well as thermo-elements and resistance thermometers. Equipped with a 4-digit LED display
and two relay outputs, optionally it provides an output for
sensor power supply and a power or voltage output for further processing of the measurement. As per the customer's
choice, the device can be equipped with a green display unit
instead of a red one. In addition, other dimensions for
assembly and 4 1/2 or even 5-digit displays can be supplied.
Output for sensor power supply

Two relay outputs
Processor controlled
Programmable analogue output
2008
This universal display unit is capable of processing signals
from all commonly used sensors in fill level, pressure, flow
control or temperature measuring technology and displaying
them visually. The relay and analogue outputs freely configurable for hysteresis and range optimally evaluate and process
the measurement. The AZ-02 is, therefore, also capable of
serving as a control unit for simple system operations. A
remarkable feature of the device is that it is easy to handle
and to program. The front side has three keys to facilitate
this, leaving nothing to the imagination.
www.profimess.de
Z 19
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions
AZ-02 Universal Digital Display
Mounting section:
92 + 0.8 x 45 + 0.6
Input: Selectively, the device operates with all commonly

used voltage and current signals, with impulse signals up to
500 kHz, with thermoelements of types L, J or K and with
resistance thermometers Pt100 (PROFIMESS PT-01, PT-02 or
TD-01).
Housing:
PC/ABS-Blend
Protection class:
IP40 on front side (IP65 optional)

IP00 connection
Display:
7 segment LED, 14 mm high, red

(optionally green)
Monitoring:
Display time:
overrun, wire break

0.2...10 s adjustable
0...+60C
-20...+80C
Relay output:
230 VAC / 2 A or
30 VDC / 2 A max.
(Ohmic load)
Output: As output signal, the AZ-02 offers either 4...20 mA

with a maximum load of 500 or 0...10 V DC. The initial and
final values of the output can be freely programmed.
Sensor power supply: Optionally, the universal device can
be fitted with an output for sensor power supply. Therefore
the system sensor-display requires only one supply voltage.
Power supply: All versions of the devices can be supplied
with 230 V AC or with 24 V DC power supply rating.
Inputs:
AZ-02.1:
Ri
for input of 10 V approx. 100 kOhm

for input of 20 mA approx. 100 Ohm
AZ-02.2:
Ri
for input of 60 mV approx. 15 kOhm

for input of 150 mV
approx. 39 kOhm
for input of 300 mV
approx. 75 kOhm
for input of 1000 mV
approx. 220 kOhm
AZ-02.3/4:
Ri
for input of 20 V approx. 200 kOhm

for input of 100 V approx. 1MOhm
for input of 300 V approx. 4 MOhm
for input of 1 A approx. 276 mOhm
for input of 5 A approx. 56 mOhm
Ordering codes
AZ-02. 2. 2. 1. 2. 1.
Ordering number
AZ-02 Universal Digital Display
Input:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
DC voltage, DC current
DC voltage mV
AC voltage, AC current standard
AC voltage, AC current effective value
resistance, potentiometer
thermocouple Type L, J, K
Pt100, 2-wire
Pt100, 3-wire
Pt100, 4-wire
frequency, 1 Hz...500 kHz
frequency, 0,001 Hz...9999 Hz
AZ-02.5:
AZ-02.7/8/9:
Operating range: -99.9...+600C

Resolution: 0.1 C
Sensor current: 1 mA
AZ-02.10/11:
Sensors: Namur or 3-wire

initiator
for input of 10 V impulses
approx. 2 kOhm
High/Low: 10 VDC/<6 VDC
Ri
Sensor power supply:

0 = none
1 = 24 VDC, 50 mA
2 = 10 VDC, 20 mA
Startpage
Operating range: up to 10 kOhm

or up to 100 kOhm can be selected through connecting terminals
Typ L: -100...+900C
Typ J: -200...+1200C
Typ K: -250...+1350C
AZ-02.6:
Output (galvanic separation):

1 = none
2 = 0...20 mA
3 = 4...20 mA
4 = 0...10 DC
Contents
Supply voltage:
1 = 230 VAC
2 = 24 VDC
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
Z 20
2008
Options:
0 = none
1 = 24 V DC, 50 mA
2 = 10 V DC, 20 mA
Accessories
TM-01
Digital Display Device
for Impulse Inputs
Contents
Startpage
Compact design, 36 x 72 mm
Description
The TM-01 series of digital display device is intended for displaying process signals from any sensor with impulse output.
The device is controlled by a microprocessor and, therefore,
freely programmable. Just with a key press the display of volume / time unit can be changed over to total volume. The TM-01
can be conveniently customized to all sensor parameters
through input of K factors and scaling factors. The devices
are powered by a Lithium battery and are thus independent of
mains supply. They can also operate through an external 24 V
DC adapter. In this case, the back-lighting is automatically
switched on.
For all sensors with impulse output

8-digit LCD display for volume / time
and total volume
Simple programming
Battery operation and / or 24 V DC
2008
The device is deployed for displaying flows, speeds, total
volume, RPM and so on.
www.profimess.de
Z 21
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Dimensions
Housing dimensions:
Display:
36 x 72 x 38.5 mm (HxWxD)
8-digit LCD, 10 mm height
Switching panel section: 33 x 68 mm (H x W)
Tachometer:
decimal point automatic
Mounting:
Counter:
decimal point programmable
Fixing frame, possible switching

panel thickness 0.8...6 mm
Accuracy:
programmable, 0.1%, 1%, 10%,

resolution accordingly min. 4-, 3or 2-digit
Voltage supply:
internal Lithium battery, 3.6V, 1.2

Ah, LCD background illumination
with external power supply only
Contents
Startpage
19...30V DC
Protection class:
IP 65 on front side
-10...+50 C (when operating)

-20...+70 C (on storage)
Inputs:
sealing for IP 65
on front side IEC 529
Counter input A
(tachometer):
Impulse form any

max. frequency 10 kHz, max.
impulse duration 50 s,
L <= 1 VDC, H >= 5 VDC
Counter input B
(tachometer):
impulse form any

for programming as HIGH-SPEED
input: max. frequency 30 kHz
min. impulse duration 16 s
L <= 1 VDC, H >= 5 V DC
clamping frame
for programming as LOW-SPEED

input: max. frequency 30 Hz min.
impulse duration 16 ms L <= 0 V
DC, H >= 5 V DC or open
battery
Programming input:
Input open:
operating mode
Input on ground:
programming mode
Electrical Connection
6 screw terminal connections
1 = reset
4 = counter input A (volume / time)
2 = 24 V DC input
5 = counter input B (Total)
3 = ground
6 = programming input
Ordering codes
Ordering number
TM-01. A.
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
Z 22
2008
Digital Display Device for Impulse Inputs
Accessories
MSRx
Multifunctional Relay
Contents
Startpage
Description
The MSRx series includes the range of multifunctional relays
MSR 10, MSR 11 and MSR 20 that cover all commonly
known applications. In this, the MSR 10 and the MSR 20 are
purely contact protecting relays for one or two control signals
which protect the contacts in measuring devices against
overload due to high switching operations especially in inductive or capacitive loads. In these units, a smartly selected
drop-out delay ensures that highly frequent switching of sensor contacts is disregarded and, therefore, the switching
points are unambiguously defined.
The MSR 11 has a highly qualified bistable interval relay with
self-switching that is capable of controlling the pump completely in combination with two fill level switches. Naturally, this
unit also protects the contacts of the switch connected to it
against overloads. The MSRx series of devices is all designed
as the standard for a supply voltage of 230 V AC but they
possess also a 24 V DC DC voltage output. Optionally, they
are available for connecting to 115 V AC, 24 V AC and 24 V
DC. On request, the MSR 10, MSR 11 and MSR 20 can be
provided with 24 V DC PNP electronic outputs.
The polyamide housing has a housing of type IP 20 protection; however, it can be equipped with an outer housing in
IP 65 available as accessory.
The device can be assembled on a standard mounting rail as
per DIN 50022 or by means of an adapter for individual
mounting through screw fitting.
Protects your sensor elements

Practical time response
2008
Additional DV voltage output
www.profimess.de
Z 23
PROFI
MESS
GMBH
Versions:
MSR.x Multifunctional relay
Standards:
EN 50 178
EN 61 000-6-2
EN 61 000-6-3
EN 60 947-5-1
Typ: MSR10
monostable contact protective relay for single contacts
Typ: MSR11
bistable interval relay with locking feature
electrical safety
stability
fault reporting
low voltage switch-gear
Auxiliary power:
Supply voltage:
Typ: MSR20
monostable contact protective relay for double contacts
230 VAC (standard),

50 to 60 Hz
Consumption:
Supply voltage:
standard 230 V AC;
optional 115 V AC, 24 V AC or 24 V DC
max. ambient temp.:

Protection class:
Assessed
insulation voltage:
Housing:
Fixture:
Connection
cross-sections:
0C to 70C
IP 20
Output:
Relay output:
Draw-up and
drop-out delay:
250 VAC
polyamide 6.6
standard rail 35 x 7.5 DIN 50022
0.5 to 2.5 mm2

(single or fine-wire)
(for individual fixture an adapter is provided)
impulse contact
protective relay
max. 4700 Ohm, 47 nF
10 ms / 450 ms
+/- 20% + 50 ms
AgCdO or AgNi+Au
max. 250 VAC/DC
min. 24 VDC; 100 mA
Contact material:
Switching load:
Short-circuit fuse
element:
F 10 A
(max. short-circuit current < 100 A)
Voltage output:
Voltage:
Load:
(conditionally short-circuit protected)

24 VDC (+/-10%)
max. 20 mA
impulse contact
protective relay
switching load
max. 1840 VA (8A)
switching load
max. 1840 VA (8A)
Ordering codes
50
Ordering number
35 to 40 VDC pulse
0.5 ms / 50 ms (+/-20%)
9.7 VDC (+/-10%)
3300 Ohm, 100 nF (+/-20%)
1 or 2 potential-free change-over
impulse contact
protective relay
switching load
max. 1840 VA (8A)
Startpage
MSR10 typ. 5 VA
MSR11 typ. 5 VA
MSR20 typ. 6 VA
Control signals:
Control voltage:
Pulse-Pause ratio:
Switching threshold:
Input impedance:
Line and contact
resistance:
Contents
100
MSR. 11. 1.
MSR Multifunctional Relay
75
45
Type:
10 = monostable contact protective relay for single contacts
11 = bistable interval relay with locking feature
20 = monostable contact protective relay for double contacts
PROFI
MESS
www.profimess.de
GMBH
Z 24
2008
Supply voltage:
1 = 230 VAC standard
2 = 115 VAC
3 = 24 VAC
4 = 24 VDC
Terms & Conditions

of Delivery & Payment
1.
Startpage
2.
2.1
2.2
2.3
3.
3.1
3.2
3.3
4.
4.1
4.2
4.3
General
The following terms & conditions apply to all transactions, superseding hereby
all other terms & conditions governing business, sales and purchase by the client. Deviations from these terms & conditions require prior approval in writing.
On conclusion of a contract, latest by receipt of goods or part thereof, the client acknowledges these terms & conditions as the solely valid terms & conditions. Agreements, assurances and additional agreements by our employees
and representatives shall have no collecting powers. These terms & conditions
may be supplemented by the "General Terms & Conditions of Supply for
Products and Services in the Electrical Industry".
Offers
Offers by the seller refer to customary qualities in the trade and are non-binding. The seller shall not undertake any guarantee for the ownership of his
deliveries for a special purpose of use unless expressly agreed upon in writing.
Drawings and descriptions of the offered goods are only approximately authoritative. The seller is at liberty to deliver the goods, as the case may be, as per
his own latest status of manufacturing of goods in question.
Purchase Orders, additional agreements and assurances are only deemed to
be accepted by the seller on confirmation in writing. The same shall also apply
to actions by employees or representative of the seller.
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
Prices
Pricelists are non-binding, while mutually agreed prices in writing are authoritative.
Hikes in public and private charges and in freight charges after submission of
the offer shall be borne by the client.
Dead freight is at the expense of the client unless the seller is at fault.
7.6
Delivery
Confirmation of the order by the seller shall be authoritative for the scope
of delivery. The scope of services concerns only the delivery of goods as specified in the confirmation of order. Additional services such as commissioning,
assembly or instructions of in respect of the goods to be delivered require
express agreements in writing.
On handing over the goods to the forwarding agent or freight agent, the risk is
commuted to the client even in the case of carriage-paid deliveries, latest,
however, as soon as the goods leave the premises of the seller. Should the
insurance risk be covered by the client, it shall not have effect on the above
clause defining risk. As the case may be, the client must incorporate such
condition at his expense that is imposed on the seller by the forwarding agency and insurance company.
Acceptance and certification by experts are not part of the delivery by the seller. At the most, the seller may engage the services of an expert on behalf of
the client.
7.7
Delivery schedules
The conditions of delivery as indicated in the confirmation of order by the seller shall apply under following clauses:
5.1.1 The confirmation of order shall not have any ambiguities in respect of the delivery and characteristics of the goods. The client shall be responsible for
acquiring all necessary documents, details, approvals, releases and similar.
5.1.2 The client shall not modify his order after dispatch of confirmation of his
purchase order.
5.1.3 Under normal circumstances, manufacturing and dispatches shall not be
deferred due to force majeure, for example, mobilization, war, uprisings and
so on. Such events may entitle the seller to fully or partially withdraw from the
contract. The client may request the seller to explain whether he intends to
deliver goods within a reasonable time or withdraw from the contract. Should
he fail to provide an explanation, then the client is entitled to withdraw from
the contract. If necessary, the client shall be obligated to extend the period of
specified letters of credit, instructions and similar.
5.2
If the seller is in default, the rights and obligations of the client shall be in
accordance with Articles 281 ff of the German Civil Code. The liability of the
seller is limited to such instances of intention or gross negligence, in all other
cases a liability is ruled out.
5.3
The date of delivery as indicated by the seller shall be assumed to have been
complied with, when the goods are handed over to a forwarding agent or
freight agent on that date for dispatch to the address as indicated by the
client. The seller shall not be liable for delays during transportation.
5.4
The seller is entitled to partial deliveries.
7.8
5.
5.1
6.
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
Payments
Payments to the seller shall be made as per scheduled date without any
deductions and surcharges even before the due date.
The seller shall accept checks and bills of exchange eligible for discounts only
for the sake of settlement without affecting the maturity of his claims.
Commitment of bills of exchange shall require an agreement in writing.
If the client defaults the targeted payment as indicated in the invoice, the seller
may claim interest on delayed payment in accordance with Article 288 of the
German Civil Code.
If the financial position of the client deteriorates or his payment are irregular,
the seller shall be entitled to demand immediate payment or securities for his
claims and/or advance payment for further deliveries or to withdraw from the
contract fully or partially; the same shall also apply if the seller has accepted
bills of exchange. In the event of a withdrawal, claim on the client shall be due
immediately regardless of the accepted bills of exchange. The seller shall
receive compensation for his costs arising from such withdrawal and for other
damages. Claims of compensation by the client on this account shall be ruled
out. Moreover, the rights of the seller shall be in accordance with the law in
the event of default by the client.
The client may exercise his right of retention or right to set-off in respect of
claims by the seller only in regard to an undisputed or legally tenable claim. All
other rights of retention or set-off of the client are ruled out.
8.
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
9.
9.1
9.2
9.3
2008
7.
7.1
Retention of title
The seller shall reserve the rights on his deliveries, which may only be offered
for sale in the normal course of business, until payments for all claims arising
from the relevant business transaction including those arising from bills of
exchange are duly settled.
9.4
9.5
The client shall not acquire any ownership of fully or partially manufactured
goods as a result of processing such goods; the processing shall be exclusively for the seller without payment. If, however, the right of retention should
lapse due to any factual or legal circumstances, the seller and the client agree
even at this point that the ownership of the items following their processing
shall be commuted to the seller who shall accept the conveyance.
In the case of processing involving goods that are under ownership of a third
party, the seller shall acquire co-ownership of the new items proportionate to
the value of goods supplied by him under retention of title.
The client is only entitled to sell goods to others under retention of title. The
receivables arising from the sale of goods, regardless of whether processed,
unprocessed or conveyed to him as security, shall be deemed ceded to him
fully along with all subsidiary rights. Sale to buyers who may rule out cession
or stipulate their approval shall be prohibited. The client shall exclude a provision where his buyers exercise rights (such as set-off) in respect of accounts
receivable arising from sale of goods under retention of title.
For determining the garnishees as per first and last names, address and sum
of accounts receivable, the books maintained by the client shall be authoritative. Cessions shall be hereby excluded by the seller in advance. Any other cession or pledging shall be excluded. If through such cession the total accounts
receivable of the seller are unequivocally ensured for more than 120%, the
excess of the accounts receivable shall be released on demand by the client
as per choice of the seller.
The client may, as long as he fulfils his obligation of payments to the seller,
indent the accounts receivable for himself until revocation of the same. The
right of resale, processing of unpaid goods and indent of accounts receivable
shall expire in the event of suspension of payments, proposal for opening of
solvency proceedings, judicial or non-judicial litigation of settlement of debts,
protest of a check or a bill. Accounts receivable conveyed and received the
reafter shall be collected immediately into a special account under the title of
"Accounts Receivable of Profimess GmbH". The conveyed accounts receivable shall be intimated to the seller with details of first and last names, address
and amount of receivables from the garnishees and the garnishees shall be
informed about the transacted conveyance. At the same time, a list of remaining goods shall be forwarded to the seller.
The seller shall be entitled, for good reasons, to demand immediate return of
goods under retention of title particularly in the event of default of payments or
difficulty to comply with payments by the client. Until settlement of payments,
the client shall store the goods under retention of title separately from other
goods, mark them as property of the seller, not dispose of them and, on
request hand over a list of goods under retention of tile to the seller.
Pledging of seller's goods for the purpose of conveyance as security to third
parties and cession or pledging of deferred benefits shall be excluded. In the
event of pledging and confiscation by third parties, for example, on the basis
of laws governing lessor or lien, the seller shall be informed of the same immediately. The cost of an intervention shall be borne by the client in any case.
Warranty and complaints
The seller shall be liable for the use of fault-free materials, faultless processing
and trouble free functioning and the special characteristics of his goods as
assured in his confirmation of order in writing.
The liability shall exclusively extend to improvement or redelivery of defective
components as per the option of the seller. In the event of failure of improvement or replacement of goods, the client shall reserve the right to demand
decrease of payment or annulment of the contract. In principle, any improvement activity shall take place at the premises of the seller, as chosen by the
seller even at his place of residence or at the commercial branch office of the
receiver at the time of signing of the contract. The modalities of bearing the
costs for such improvement shall adhere to statutory regulations.
The seller shall not be liable for damages occurring at the client's location or,
in the case of transfer of risk, at the location of third party due to incorrect
handling of the goods.
Claims by the client from the seller or his service personnel beyond the scope
of the above-mentioned liability shall be excluded unless they are based on
intention or gross negligence on the part of the seller.
The duration of liability shall adhere to statutory regulations. In the case of deli
very of used items, the seller shall only be liable for the presence of assured
characteristics. In such cases, all other claims of warranty shall be excluded.
Place of performance and jurisdiction
Place of performance in regard to payments and deliveries shall be the locati
on of our company. In the event of disputes arising from or in connection with
the business relationship including those relating to litigations on checks or
bills of exchange, the place of jurisdiction for both the parties shall be the
location of the seller, provided the businessman is a full-time businessman, a
legal person of the public law or a public fund asset or a general court of juris
diction is absent locally. In any case, the statutory provisions shall be applicable. If the seller so desires, also the court of jurisdiction at the location of the
client shall be responsible. If the seller so desires, even a court of arbitration
shall be appointed for mediation in case of disputes. If the seller exercises his
right to vote, he shall inform the client about the same in writing. In that case,
each party shall nominate an arbitrator within four weeks after notice by the
other party. Within four additional weeks both the parties shall agree on a
chairman. If agreement cannot be reached on the person of chairman or, if a
party delays nomination of its arbitrator, then the chairman or the arbitrator
shall be nominated by the president of the provincial high court of Bremen.
The court of arbitration shall decide on the basis of the mutually agreed conditions of delivery including in accordance with the applicable laws of the
Federal Republic of Germany. At the proceedings of the court of arbitration,
the rules 1025 to 1048 of the civil law shall be applied.
The relationship of the contract shall adhere to the laws of the Federal
Republic of Germany.
The legal inefficacy of individual clauses of the contract shall not affect the efficacy of the remaining clauses. An invalid clause shall be interpreted in such
manner to fulfill the intended business purpose.
Without permission by the seller in writing, the rights of the client arising from
this contract shall not be commutable.
This version of terms & conditions of the seller shall abrogate all previous ver
sions of the same.
www.profimess.de
PROFI
MESS
GMBH

Profimess Catalogue 2008

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Profimess Catalogue 2008

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PROFI

Instrumentation and Control

Via these buttons you

Level Measuring and Monitoring

Pulse Radar Level Meter

Electrode Relays for

Float Switch for

Conductive Electrode Relay

Angular Float Switch

Conductive Level Switch

Miniature Plastic Float Switch

The Level Sensor

Conductive Level Switch

Ultrasonic Level Limit Switch

Miniature Float Switch

Ultrasonic Level Switch

Conductive Level Switch

Bypass Float Switch

Magnetostrictive Level Sensor

Miniature Tuning Fork

Level Measuring Transmitter

Limit Level Switch for Bulk

Pressure Bell Switch

Magnetic Level Gauge

Cable Float Switch with

Rotating Vane Level Switch

Top Mounted Hydrostatic

Float Switch for Raw

Membrane Level Switch

Side Mounted Hydrostatic

Low-Cost Float Switch

Optoelectronic Level Switch

Float Switch for Horizontal

Float Switch for Mounting

Float Switch for Bulk Goods

Pressure Measurement and Monitoring

Pneumatic Manual Testing Pump

Low-Cost Pressure Switch

Electronic Dualpressure Switch

Bourdon Pressure Gauge 2.5

Chemical Pressure Gauge

Bourdon Pressure Gauge 4

Compact Pressure Switch

Compact Pressure Switch

Capsule Element Pressure Gauge

Pressure Switch for

Diaphragm Pressure Gauge

Differential Pressure Transmitter

Differential Pressure Switch

Attachable Display for Pressure

Digital Manometer with

Pressure Switch with Stainless

Flow Measurement and Monitoring

Plastic Flowmeters as per

Sight Flow Indicator with

Variable Area Flowmeter

Turbine Flowmeter for Fluid

Digital Flowmeter with

Vane-oparated Flow Switch

Variable Area Flowmeter

Measuring Transmitter for

Vane-oparated Flow Switches

Calorimetric Flow Sensor

Thermal Mass Flowmeter